THE
VOYAGE
of
SIAM
London
Printed
1688.
A
RELATION
OF
THE
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
Performed
by
SIX
JESUITS
,
Sent
by
the
FRENCH
KING
,
to
the
INDIES
and
CHINA
,
in
the
Year
,
1685.
WITH
THEIR
ASTROLOGICAL
OBSERVATIONS
,
and
their
REMARKS
of
Natural
Philosophy
,
Geography
,
Hydrography
,
and
History
.
Published
in
the
Original
,
by
the
express
Orders
of
His
most
Christian
Majesty
.
And
now
made
English
,
and
illustrated
with
SCULPTURES
.
LONDON
,
Printed
by
T.
B.
for
J.
Robinson
and
A.
Churchil
,
and
are
to
be
sold
by
S.
Crouch
,
at
the
Corner
of
Popes-Head
Alley
against
the
Royal-Exchange
,
1688.
Licensed
,
August
the
30th
.
1687.
Ro.
L'Estran●
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
First
BOOK
.
The
Voyage
from
Brest
,
to
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
.
SInce
the
time
the
King
setled
a
Royal
Academy
at
Paris
,
for
improving
Arts
and
Sciences
within
his
Kingdom
,
the
Members
that
compose
it
,
have
not
hit
upon
any
means
more
proper
for
accomplishing
that
Design
,
than
the
sending
out
of
Learned
Men
to
make
Observations
in
foreign
Countries
,
whereby
they
might
correct
the
Geographical
Maps
,
facilitate
Navigation
,
and
raise
Astronomy
to
its
Perfection
.
In
that
Prospect
,
not
a
few
of
the
Learnedst
Men
of
that
Illustrious
Society
,
were
,
by
his
Majesties
Orders
,
sent
into
several
Kingdoms
:
Some
went
into
Denmark
,
others
to
England
;
some
were
sent
to
the
Isle
of
Cayana
,
and
other
Isles
of
America
,
Cape
Verd
,
nay
,
and
to
the
chief
Ports
and
Coasts
of
the
Kingdom
,
whilst
others
in
the
Observatory
at
Home
,
kept
pace
,
and
entertained
all
necessary
Correspondencies
with
them
.
It
was
desired
that
an
Occasion
might
offer
of
sending
more
Observators
into
several
Parts
of
Europe
,
to
the
Isle
of
Foroy
,
where
they
have
fixed
the
first
Meridian
,
the
East-Indies
,
and
chiefly
into
China
,
where
it
was
known
that
Arts
had
flourished
for
these
four
thousand
years
,
where
there
are
Books
upon
all
Subjects
,
and
Libraries
that
may
compare
with
the
fairest
in
Europe
,
from
which
the
Kings
Bibliothic
might
be
enriched
.
The
Father
parted
from
Macao
,
December
5.
1681
,
in
a
Dutch
Ship
,
and
arrived
in
Holland
in
October
1682.
This
Desire
grew
stronger
in
the
chief
Members
of
the
Academy
,
after
they
had
conversed
with
Father
Philip
Couplet
,
a
Flemish
Jesuit
,
who
upon
his
Return
from
China
,
posted
by
Paris
on
his
way
to
Rome
,
whither
he
was
sent
about
the
Affairs
of
the
Mission
.
The
Marquis
de
Louvoy
,
Minister
and
Secretary
of
State
,
who
besides
the
Affairs
of
War
,
and
Oversight
of
the
Kings
Buildings
,
was
likewise
charged
with
the
Concerns
of
Arts
and
Sciences
,
ordered
,
in
his
Majesties
Name
,
the
Members
of
the
Royal
Academy
to
draw
up
a
Memoire
of
the
most
remarkable
things
they
desired
to
be
informed
of
from
China
,
to
be
given
and
recommended
to
Father
Couplet
,
who
was
to
return
thither
the
year
following
.
The
Duke
of
Mayne
favoured
also
the
Design
with
a
great
Zeal
for
Religion
,
and
a
Curiosity
suitable
to
his
Wit
,
calculated
for
Knowledg
,
and
far
above
his
years
.
But
the
King
surpassing
all
in
Zeal
for
the
Improvement
of
Arts
and
Sciences
,
especially
of
such
,
which
in
those
Countries
might
most
contribute
to
the
Growth
of
Religion
,
being
affected
with
the
Necessity
of
Missions
,
was
resolved
to
assist
them
with
his
Protection
and
Liberalities
.
He
was
informed
by
Father
Couplet
,
that
almost
all
the
French
Jesuits
,
who
above
thirty
years
since
went
to
China
with
Father
Alexander
of
Rhodes
,
were
dead
,
labouring
in
the
Missions
of
that
Kingdom
;
that
there
were
but
a
very
few
Missionaries
remaining
;
that
the
Emperour
,
in
the
mean
time
,
continued
to
them
his
Protection
,
and
that
in
imitation
of
him
,
the
Vice-Roys
and
Governours
of
Provinces
were
also
very
kind
to
them
;
and
that
in
short
,
there
was
a
great
want
of
Gospel-Labourers
,
not
only
for
cultivating
the
Christians
,
who
are
already
very
numerous
there
,
but
also
for
reaping
the
Fruit
of
the
certain
hopes
,
which
at
present
more
than
ever
,
good
men
have
of
spreading
the
Faith
in
that
vast
Empire
.
He
had
already
gone
so
far
,
as
to
assign
a
considerable
Sum
of
Money
for
the
French
Jesuits
who
were
to
accompany
Father
Couplet
;
and
all
the
care
was
,
how
they
might
be
sent
under
his
Majesties
Authority
,
when
Divine
Providence
presented
a
most
favourable
occasion
for
it
.
Hardly
was
Father
Couplet
departed
for
Rome
,
when
two
Siam
Mandarins
,
with
a
Priest
of
the
Foreign
Missions
setled
in
Siam
named
Monsieur
le
Vachet
,
arrived
in
France
.
They
were
sent
by
the
Ministers
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
to
learn
News
of
the
Embassie
which
the
King
their
Master
had
sent
to
his
Majesty
,
with
magnificent
Presents
,
on
board
a
Ship
belonging
to
the
East-India
Company
,
called
the
Sun
of
the
East
,
which
was
reported
to
have
been
cast
away
.
His
Majesty
perceiving
what
Advances
the
King
of
Siam
made
in
seeking
his
Friendship
,
and
that
there
was
hopes
besides
he
might
turn
Christian
,
if
there
were
an
Ambassador
sent
to
him
,
resolved
to
do
it
;
and
by
the
same
way
sends
Jesuits
into
China
,
which
hath
a
great
commerce
with
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
,
from
whence
it
is
not
above
five
or
six
hundred
Leagues
disstant
.
The
King
orders
six
Jesuits
,
Mathematicians
,
to
be
sent
to
China
.
The
King
having
thereupon
declared
his
Intentions
to
the
Marques
de
Louvoy
and
Father
de
la
Chaize
,
they
forthwith
demanded
of
our
Superiors
,
four
Fathers
at
least
,
that
might
be
capable
of
labouring
in
consort
with
the
Academy
Royal
,
in
the
Improvement
of
Arts
and
Sciences
,
and
at
the
same
time
employ
themselves
with
the
Missionaries
of
China
in
advancing
the
Christian
Religion
;
adding
,
that
they
must
needs
be
ready
to
depart
within
six
weeks
,
in
the
Ship
that
was
to
carry
the
French
Ambassador
to
Siam
.
It
was
no
hard
matter
for
our
Superiours
to
find
men
that
were
willing
to
contribute
to
the
furthering
of
that
design
.
Amongst
many
who
offered
themselves
,
six
were
chosen
,
who
,
tho
of
different
Provinces
,
were
happily
at
that
time
in
the
Jesuits
College
at
Paris
;
as
if
Divine
Providence
had
only
brought
them
together
for
obtaining
a
happiness
which
they
earnestly
longed
for
.
The
Superiour
named
to
be
over
them
was
Father
Fontenay
,
who
for
eight
years
past
taught
the
Mathematics
in
that
College
.
The
other
five
were
,
Father
Gerbillon
,
Father
l'Compte
,
Father
Visdelou
,
Father
Couvet
and
my self
.
So
soon
as
the
thing
was
resolved
upon
,
The
preparations
for
their
departure
.
we
had
private
notice
given
us
,
to
prepare
for
our
departure
within
two
Months
at
farthest
.
Next
day
we
went
together
to
Mount-Martre
to
thank
God
by
the
Mediation
of
the
Holy
Virgin
and
Holy
Martyrs
,
for
the
favour
that
was
done
us
,
and
to
Offer
our selves
up
to
Jesus
Christ
more
particularly
in
that
place
,
where
St.
Ignatius
and
his
Companions
made
their
first
Vows
,
and
which
is
looked
upon
as
the
Cradle
of
the
Society
,
that
from
its
birth
hath
devoted
it self
in
a
most
particular
manner
to
Foreign
Missions
.
That
's
the
reason
that
they
who
constitute
it
,
have
ever
since
consecrated
themselves
to
that
duty
by
a
solemn
Vow
;
so
that
every
one
thinking
himself
in
particular
destiny'd
to
it
,
ought
accordingly
to
prepare
himself
from
his
youth
upward
,
by
all
the
Exercises
of
Piety
and
Mortification
,
and
by
the
study
of
the
Sciences
and
long
Voyages
that
may
most
fit
him
for
it
.
And
this
is
practised
with
so
great
a
Blessing
,
that
the
same
vigour
of
Spirit
that
was
at
first
may
be
said
still
to
be
in
the
Order
.
They
are
admitted
into
the
Royal
Academy
of
Sciences
.
The
design
of
our
Voyage
being
made
public
at
Paris
,
the
Members
of
the
Academy
,
who
concerned
themselves
most
in
it
,
did
us
the
Honour
to
admit
us
into
that
Society
,
by
a
particular
Privilege
;
and
we
took
our
places
there
some
days
before
our
departure
.
The
most
proper
means
for
executing
the
Orders
of
the
King
were
thought
on
,
and
it
was
resolved
that
besides
the
Instructions
which
the
Marquess
of
Louvoy
had
prepared
,
to
be
given
to
Father
Couplet
,
when
he
should
return
to
China
,
and
which
was
forthwith
put
into
our
hands
,
the
chief
Members
of
the
Academy
,
should
furnish
us
with
particular
Memoirs
relating
to
the
Observations
that
might
be
proper
to
be
made
in
China
,
and
the
things
that
were
to
be
sent
home
to
France
,
as
well
for
enriching
the
King's
Library
,
as
for
the
emprovement
of
Arts.
Divers
instructions
are
given
unto
them
for
the
improvement
of
At
s
and
Sciences
.
Every
one
of
these
Members
took
upon
themselves
to
furnish
us
with
such
as
concerned
the
Arts
and
Sciences
they
were
most
versed
in
;
and
we
thereupon
had
several
Conferences
with
them
.
We
agreed
upon
the
Astronomical
Observations
that
we
should
make
in
China
and
on
our
Voyage
.
They
gave
us
the
Tables
of
the
Satellites
of
Jupiter
,
which
have
been
made
with
so
great
labour
,
and
which
at
present
serve
for
determining
the
Longitudes
of
Places
.
They
also
presented
us
with
several
large
Telescopes
of
12
,
15
,
18
,
25
,
50
,
and
eighty
Foot
,
whereof
we
were
to
leave
some
in
the
Observatory
of
Peguin
.
They
imparted
to
us
besides
several
Memoires
in
Natural
Philosophy
,
Anatomy
,
and
concerning
Plants
.
There
were
Sea-Charts
of
the
Course
we
were
to
follow
in
the
Kings
Library
,
which
had
served
in
other
Voyages
,
we
had
Copies
of
them
given
us
,
and
they
proved
very
useful
to
us
in
our
Sailing
.
They
gave
us
very
good
and
ample
instructions
concerning
Navigation
,
Architecture
,
and
other
Arts
,
concerning
the
Books
that
were
to
be
sent
to
France
,
and
the
Observations
that
it
would
be
proper
for
us
to
make
.
In
short
,
of
all
the
Members
of
that
Learned
Academy
,
there
was
none
who
appeared
not
in
that
affair
with
particular
zeal
and
application
,
seeing
the
success
of
it
would
not
a
little
contribute
to
the
glory
and
satisfaction
of
the
King.
All
these
Memoires
being
examined
in
several
meetings
of
the
Academy
Royal
,
were
given
in
to
us
before
our
departure
.
And
these
Gentlemen
having
promised
to
communicate
their
Discoveries
to
us
,
we
engaged
our selves
to
send
them
our
Observations
,
to
the
end
that
acting
in
consort
,
and
making
but
one
Body
of
Academicians
,
some
in
France
,
and
others
in
China
,
we
might
joyntly
labour
in
the
encreasing
and
improvement
of
Sciences
,
under
the
protection
of
so
great
a
Monarch
.
In
the
mean
time
we
were
much
taken
up
in
preparing
all
the
Instruments
that
were
necessary
for
us
;
and
seeing
we
were
to
leave
Paris
within
a
Month
,
we
had
made
for
us
in
that
time
,
The
various
Instruments
they
take
with
them
for
their
Observations
.
two
Quadrants
of
ninety
degrees
,
the
one
of
eighteen
inches
the
Radius
,
and
the
other
of
twenty
six
;
three
great
Pendulums
with
Seconds
,
an
Instrument
for
finding
out
at
the
same
time
the
right
Ascension
and
the
Declination
of
Stars
;
an
Equinoctial
Dial
that
marked
the
Hours
to
the
very
Minutes
,
having
underneath
a
large
Compass
for
finding
out
all
hours
of
the
day
the
declination
of
the
Load-stone
.
All
these
Instruments
were
to
be
made
use
of
in
Astronomical
Observations
.
We
had
also
two
bows
or
half
circles
,
divided
very
exactly
into
six
and
six
minutes
,
for
Geometrical
Operations
,
the
one
had
only
Sights
,
and
the
other
Glasses
.
When
we
went
to
take
our
leave
of
the
Duke
of
Mayne
,
he
had
the
goodness
to
give
us
a
third
and
bigger
,
divided
by
three
and
three
minutes
,
which
he
had
made
for
his
own
use
.
We
cannot
sufficiently
acknowledge
the
obligations
we
have
to
that
Prince
for
the
goodness
he
exprest
towards
us
on
that
occasion
.
Besides
the
Engines
I
have
been
mentioning
,
we
carried
with
us
two
repetition
-
pendulum-Clocks
,
Burning-glasses
of
twelve
,
and
twenty
inches
Diameter
,
Load-stones
,
Microscopes
,
several
Thermometers
and
Barometers
,
all
the
Tubes
and
Machines
that
serve
in
making
experiments
of
vacuity
,
a
Dial
upon
an
inclining
place
,
the
two
Machines
of
Romer
,
one
of
which
represents
the
motion
of
the
Planets
,
and
the
other
the
Eclipses
of
the
Sun
and
Moon
.
They
gave
us
also
for
our
use
several
Books
out
of
the
Kings
Library
.
In
the
mean
time
our
Pensions
were
setled
by
Orders
from
the
King
,
who
caused
also
his
Letters-Patents
to
be
expeded
for
us
,
whereby
his
Majesty
made
us
his
Mathematicians
in
the
Indies
and
China
.
The
arrival
of
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
at
Brest
.
We
arrived
at
Brest
,
February
10.
and
some
days
after
Orders
came
from
Court
to
hasten
our
Embarquing
,
because
the
Season
was
already
far
spent
.
They
were
obeyed
with
so
much
diligence
,
that
every
thing
almost
was
in
a
readiness
,
when
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
named
by
the
King
for
the
Embassie
of
Siam
arrived
at
Brest
.
This
Gentleman
well
known
in
the
Kingdom
for
his
particular
merit
,
and
the
Nobility
of
an
ancient
and
Illustrious
Family
,
was
in
his
youth
bred
up
a
Calvinist
,
but
God
did
him
the
Grace
to
Convert
him
and
his
Brothers
one
after
another
at
different
times
.
The
last
of
all
having
for
many
years
served
in
the
Armies
with
the
approbation
of
a
brave
Gentleman
,
and
good
Officer
,
being
at
length
cloyed
with
the
World
,
and
desirous
to
work
out
his
own
salvation
,
put
himself
into
our
Society
,
where
he
lived
and
died
like
a
Saint
,
having
edified
all
that
knew
him
by
rare
Examples
of
all
sorts
of
Virtues
,
and
especially
of
an
heroick
patience
under
the
pains
and
trouble
which
he
felt
by
the
wounds
that
he
had
formerly
received
in
the
Wars
.
The
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
of
whom
we
are
now
speaking
,
was
his
elder
Brother
,
at
first
he
served
at
Land
,
where
his
singular
Merit
made
him
known
,
and
particularly
beloved
of
the
King
whilst
he
was
but
young
.
He
was
afterwards
sent
to
Thoulon
,
there
to
command
the
Main-guards
or
Reformades
,
and
to
instruct
them
in
all
Exercises
necessary
for
Gentlemen
who
are
to
Command
his
Majesties
Ships
.
Since
that
he
was
made
Captain
of
a
Man
of
War
,
and
Major
General
of
the
Kings
Naval-Forces
in
the
Levant
.
His
zeal
for
his
Princes
Service
hath
nothing
lessened
his
continual
application
to
the
service
of
God
;
and
all
gave
him
his
due
when
they
looked
upon
him
as
a
Man
of
singular
Prudence
and
Piety
.
Therefore
it
was
that
his
Majesty
,
who
proposed
to
himself
chiefly
the
good
of
Religion
,
and
the
Conversion
of
the
King
of
Siam
by
the
Embassie
which
he
resolved
to
send
to
him
,
pitched
upon
the
Chevalier
de
Thaumont
for
so
glorious
an
employment
;
being
perswaded
that
the
good
examples
which
he
would
give
in
that
Country
,
would
be
so
many
proofs
of
the
sanctity
of
Christianity
,
that
might
fully
convince
that
King
of
the
truth
of
our
Religion
.
The
King
sends
the
Jesuits
Patents
of
Mathematicians
.
Next
day
after
he
came
we
had
the
honour
to
salute
him
in
his
Lodgings
,
and
received
from
his
hands
the
Patents
which
it
pleased
the
King
to
give
every
one
of
us
in
particular
,
sending
us
in
quality
of
his
Mathematicians
into
the
Indies
and
China
.
They
were
Signed
and
Sealed
with
the
Great
Seal
of
yellow
Wax
,
and
conceived
in
these
terms
.
LOUIS
by
the
Grace
of
God
King
of
France
and
Navarre
:
To
all
who
shall
see
these
present
Letters
;
Greeting
.
Being
very
willing
to
contribute
on
Our
part
to
any
thing
that
may
more
and
more
establish
the
security
of
Navigation
,
and
improve
Arts
and
Sciences
;
We
have
thought
that
for
the
surer
attaining
to
that
,
it
was
necessary
to
send
to
the
Indies
and
China
some
knowing
and
Learned
Persons
,
capable
of
making
there
the
Observations
of
Europe
:
and
Judging
that
for
that
effect
we
could
not
make
a
better
choice
than
of
F.
N.
a
Jesuit
,
by
the
particular
knowledg
we
have
of
his
extraordinary
capacity
.
For
these
and
other
causes
thereto
moving
Vs
,
of
Our
special
Grace
,
full
power
and
Royal
Authority
,
We
have
Ordained
and
Constituted
,
and
by
these
Presents
Signed
with
Our
Hand
,
do
Ordain
and
constitute
the
said
F.N.
our
Mathematician
.
Our
Will
is
,
that
in
that
quality
he
go
to
the
Indies
and
China
,
there
to
make
all
Observations
necessary
,
for
the
improvement
and
curiosity
of
Arts
and
Sciences
,
the
exactness
of
Geography
,
and
the
surer
establishment
of
Navigation
.
We
therefore
Charge
and
Command
Our
most
dearly
beloved
Son
the
Count
of
Thoulouse
Admiral
of
France
,
our
Vice-admirals
and
Lieutenant-Generals
in
our
Naval
Forces
,
Commanders
of
Squadrons
of
the
same
,
particular
Governors
of
our
Towns
and
strong
Places
,
Maiors
,
Consuls
,
and
all
our
other
Officers
to
whom
it
belongs
,
to
give
to
the
said
F.
N.
all
the
Aid
,
Favour
and
assistance
that
is
needful
to
him
for
the
execution
of
these
Presents
,
without
permitting
any
Lett
or
Hindrance
to
be
given
him
that
may
retard
his
Voyage
,
for
such
is
Our
Will
and
Pleasure
.
In
Witness
whereof
,
We
have
caused
Our
Seal
to
be
put
to
these
Presents
;
We
Pray
and
Require
all
Kings
,
Princes
,
Potentates
,
States
,
Republicks
,
our
Friends
,
Allies
and
Confederates
,
their
Officers
and
Subjects
to
give
the
said
F.
N.
all
sort
of
succour
and
assistance
for
the
accomplishment
of
a
design
which
equally
concerns
the
advantage
of
all
Nations
,
without
suffering
any
thing
to
be
exacted
from
him
contrary
to
the
liberty
of
his
Function
,
and
the
Customs
and
Rights
of
the
Kingdom
.
Given
at
Versailles
January
28.
1685.
and
the
two
and
fortieth
year
of
our
Reign
.
Signed
Louis
,
and
upon
the
fold
,
Colbert
.
Though
all
things
were
ready
for
Embarquing
,
A
Frigat
is
joyned
to
the
first
Ship.
and
the
Wind
very
fair
for
putting
out
to
Sea
,
yet
it
behoved
us
to
stay
,
till
the
Frigat
called
the
Maligne
,
mounted
with
thirty
Guns
,
which
was
lately
ordered
by
the
King
to
accompany
the
first
Ship
,
should
be
fitted
and
made
ready
to
follow
us
:
when
the
news
of
these
Orders
came
to
Brest
,
it
caused
so
much
Joy
amongst
all
that
were
to
go
the
Voyage
,
and
was
received
with
so
great
applause
;
that
it
was
in
every
bodies
mouth
,
that
now
we
could
not
but
expect
a
prosperous
Voyage
.
The
truth
is
,
without
that
assistance
it
would
have
been
impossible
to
have
carried
the
Kings
Presents
,
the
Equipage
of
the
Embassador
,
and
of
the
Officers
of
the
Ship
,
and
Passengers
,
and
above
all
,
necessary
Provisions
for
so
long
a
Voyage
,
not
to
speak
of
a
great
many
Bales
of
all
sorts
of
Curiosities
which
the
King
of
Siam
had
sent
for
,
both
from
France
and
England
.
About
that
time
we
had
advice
that
at
Lisbonne
,
they
had
granted
the
Pass-ports
which
had
been
demanded
for
us
,
The
King
ordered
his
Ambassadors
at
Lisbonne
to
demand
Passports
for
the
Jesuits
from
the
Kingdom
of
Portugall
.
and
which
we
earnestly
desired
;
because
the
differences
that
happened
betwixt
Portugal
and
the
French
Ecclesiastics
not
being
as
yet
made
up
,
we
were
in
fear
lest
the
Portuguese
Officers
might
from
thence
take
occasion
to
stop
us
on
our
way
.
Monsieur
de
Saint
Romain
extraordinary
Ambassador
from
the
King
in
Portugal
,
who
very
well
knew
the
Kings
mind
as
to
that
,
took
notice
of
it
in
a
discourse
he
made
to
the
King
of
Portugal
for
obtaining
the
Passports
.
These
were
his
very
words
.
SIR
,
I
Have
by
the
last
Courier
from
France
received
Orders
,
to
acquaint
your
Majesty
with
the
resolution
the
King
my
Master
has
of
sending
by
Sea
an
Ambassador
to
the
King
of
Siam
,
in
correspondence
with
the
Civilities
of
that
Prince
;
and
that
taking
advantage
of
that
occasion
,
he
'll
send
on
Board
the
same
Man
of
War
six
French
Jesuits
who
are
to
go
from
Siam
to
Macao
in
China
.
These
Religious
have
in
Commission
to
observe
in
their
Travels
by
Sea
and
Land
,
the
Longitudes
of
the
chief
Places
,
the
Declinations
and
Variations
of
the
Needle
,
and
all
that
can
serve
to
certifie
and
improve
our
Charts
and
Navigation
,
and
to
make
an
exact
search
of
all
sorts
of
curious
Books
for
the
Library
of
the
King
my
Master
.
I
am
commanded
to
tell
your
Majesty
that
they
have
express
Orders
to
entertain
a
good
correspondence
with
your
Subjects
in
what
place
soever
they
may
meet
them
,
and
to
have
all
due
deference
and
submissions
for
the
Portuguese
Prelates
.
The
King
my
Master
makes
no
doubt
but
that
your
Majesty
desires
also
on
your
part
,
that
your
Subjects
in
the
East
should
give
to
these
Religious
the
Succours
and
Assistances
that
they
may
stand
in
need
of
for
the
accomplishment
of
their
Voyage
and
Commission
:
and
to
the
end
they
may
be
informed
of
it
,
the
King
my
Master
has
ordered
me
to
demand
,
as
I
do
with
confidence
,
of
your
Majesty
,
a
Passport
for
these
Religious
,
in
the
most
ample
and
favourable
form
that
may
be
.
The
Ship
that
is
to
carry
the
Ambassador
of
France
and
the
Jesuits
to
Siam
,
will
infallibly
set
out
before
the
end
of
March
,
and
I
most
humbly
beg
your
Majesty
that
it
would
please
you
to
order
that
Passport
speedily
to
be
expeded
,
and
presently
after
delivered
.
In
the
same
Packet
they
sent
us
this
Letter
,
The
Letter
of
Father
La
Chaize
to
Father
Verbiest
at
Peguin
.
which
Father
la
Chaize
wrote
in
the
Kings
name
to
Father
Ferdinand
Verbiest
of
our
Company
,
Missionary
of
China
,
and
President
of
the
Mathematics
in
that
vast
Empire
.
Reverend
Father
,
WIth
great
joy
do
I
acquit
my self
of
the
Commands
of
the
greatest
King
in
Christendom
,
in
addressing
my self
to
your
Reverence
,
to
recommend
to
you
six
of
our
Fathers
his
Subjects
Men
of
extraordinary
Merit
and
Capacity
,
that
under
your
Protection
they
may
carry
to
China
and
Tartary
,
the
knowledg
of
the
true
Faith
,
and
get
from
thence
all
the
observations
of
Astronomy
,
and
all
the
knowledg
of
the
Arts
and
Sciences
of
a
Nation
,
for
which
the
Reverend
Father
Philip
Couplet
,
whom
his
Majesty
had
the
pleasure
to
see
here
,
hath
wrought
in
him
a
very
particular
esteem
.
All
the
six
besides
a
great
zeal
and
rare
virtue
,
have
considerable
advantage
as
to
Languages
and
Sciences
,
and
the
skill
they
have
in
the
Mathematics
,
hath
made
his
Majesty
make
choice
of
them
for
his
Mathematicians
,
for
which
he
hath
given
them
all
Letters
Patents
under
the
Great
Seal
of
the
Chancery
.
Your
Reverence
will
have
the
satisfaction
,
by
means
of
these
Fathers
to
contract
a
kind
of
Commerce
,
in
favour
of
the
Sciences
,
betwixt
two
of
the
most
powerful
Sovereigns
of
the
World
,
and
the
greatest
protectors
of
Sciences
.
There
is
so
great
a
resemblance
betwixt
the
Prudence
and
Happiness
of
their
Government
,
the
strength
and
number
of
their
Armies
,
the
oeconomy
and
good
order
of
their
States
,
the
Blessing
God
gives
their
undertakings
,
the
Magnificence
of
their
Courts
,
the
greatness
and
nobleness
of
their
thoughts
,
that
it
would
seem
those
two
admirable
Princes
finding
nothing
upon
Earth
so
Great
and
August
as
themselves
,
and
being
both
born
for
the
Glory
of
their
age
,
and
the
wellfare
of
their
people
,
ought
to
be
as
much
united
by
the
same
heroic
virtues
and
qualities
which
they
have
received
from
Heaven
,
as
they
are
seperated
by
the
vast
space
of
Seas
and
Land
that
disjoyn
their
Territories
on
Earth
,
May
the
Supreme
Lord
of
all
Kings
and
Emperors
,
who
hath
made
them
both
the
Defenders
of
the
true
Worship
of
God
,
and
Protectors
of
his
Altars
,
give
them
also
the
same
thoughts
as
to
Religion
,
the
same
zeal
for
the
propagation
of
the
true
Faith
,
and
the
same
earnestness
in
the
publication
and
practice
of
the
Gospel
,
that
the
great
Emperor
of
China
may
not
be
inferior
to
ours
in
that
only
essential
point
of
true
Grandeur
,
which
is
wanting
to
the
Dignity
of
his
Person
,
and
the
Happiness
of
his
Reign
,
all
holy
and
zealous
persons
of
this
flourishing
Kingdom
,
wherein
Louis
the
Great
does
sedulously
establish
the
unity
of
the
Catholic
Faith
,
Virtue
and
Piety
by
his
Examples
,
his
Cares
,
his
Edicts
and
continual
liberalities
,
incessantly
beg
of
Heaven
the
same
Grace
for
your
great
Emperor
:
We
continually
offer
up
our
Prayers
and
Sacrifices
to
the
true
God
for
that
.
We
cannot
believe
that
so
many
Virtues
as
he
already
possesses
,
will
be
for
ever
without
a
reward
,
for
want
of
the
Virtues
of
Christianity
,
with
which
we
hope
he
will
consummate
that
great
Merit
,
which
procures
him
so
fair
a
Reputation
all
over
the
Earth
.
I
beseech
you
R.
F.
that
for
the
satisfaction
of
our
Great
King
,
which
God
hath
given
to
Europe
for
a
defender
and
restorer
of
the
true
Faith
,
and
whom
according
to
all
Prophecies
he
designs
for
the
destruction
of
Mahometism
,
you
would
still
give
us
the
best
information
you
can
,
of
the
Virtues
,
Sentiments
and
Actions
of
your
great
Emperour
,
for
whom
he
hath
already
conceived
so
particular
an
esteem
.
I
likewise
adjure
you
to
Protect
,
Assist
and
Favour
,
as
much
as
lies
in
your
power
,
those
Zealous
and
Learned
Missionaries
whom
he
hath
sent
you
,
and
at
whose
Head
he
has
placed
Father
Fautenay
,
whose
merit
you
know
,
and
who
was
looked
upon
by
all
the
Learned
Mathematicians
of
the
Royal
Academy
of
Sciences
,
that
is
here
entertained
by
the
Liberalities
of
his
Majesty
,
as
an
extraordinary
Man
,
and
one
that
was
an
honour
to
their
Nation
.
They
bring
you
all
the
Observations
and
Curiosities
of
the
Sciences
of
Europe
in
their
greatest
Perfection
,
and
are
sent
to
you
as
pledges
of
other
greater
matters
that
his
Majesty
would
do
,
and
without
doubt
will
do
hereafter
for
the
satisfaction
of
your
Great
Monarch
,
and
of
your self
in
particular
,
so
soon
as
he
hath
heard
how
his
Mathematicians
have
been
received
and
treated
in
China
and
what
aids
and
assistances
have
been
given
them
for
puting
in
execution
the
orders
that
are
enjoyned
them
.
I
cannot
express
to
your
Reverence
what
advantageous
consequences
I
do
presage
from
the
sending
of
these
Fathers
to
you
,
if
it
please
God
to
give
a
Blessing
to
it
.
Since
they
all
set
out
from
Court
,
and
the
Capital
City
of
this
Realm
,
where
they
have
been
bred
for
some
time
,
and
highly
considered
for
their
Merit
;
they
will
acquaint
you
with
many
things
that
will
content
your
zeal
and
curiosity
,
better
than
I
can
relate
them
in
writing
,
above
all
things
I
beg
of
your
Reverence
to
believe
them
,
when
they
assure
you
that
no
Man
living
is
more
respectfully
and
more
cordially
than
I
am
in
the
union
of
your
Sacrifices
,
and
of
your
Apostolick
Labour
,
Reverend
Father
,
your
most
humble
and
obedient
Servant
,
DE
LA
CHAISE
.
Of
the
Society
of
Jesus
.
SOme
days
after
they
adjusted
the
number
of
those
that
were
to
go
in
the
Ship
with
the
Ambassador
;
Besides
the
Abbot
of
Choisy
who
is
well
known
in
France
by
his
Birth
and
Merit
,
and
who
was
to
continue
with
the
King
of
Siam
in
quality
of
Ambassador
until
his
Baptism
,
in
case
he
should
be
converted
.
The
two
Siam
Mandarins
,
Monsieur
le
Vachet
,
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
made
Captain
of
the
Ship.
who
came
with
them
into
France
,
four
other
Churchmen
,
and
the
six
Jesuits
,
were
also
taken
on
Board
.
Monsieur
le
Vaudricourt
commanded
the
Ship
;
he
is
one
of
the
oldest
and
ablest
Sea-Captains
the
King
has
;
and
has
distinguished
himself
on
several
occasions
,
both
in
the
Chanel
against
the
Dutch
,
and
in
the
Mediterranean
in
the
War
of
Messina
,
during
twenty
years
that
he
hath
served
at
Sea
,
having
never
missed
a
Campaign
wherein
he
was
not
actually
in
his
Majesties
Service
.
We
are
particularly
obliged
to
him
for
his
Civilities
,
and
the
good
Offices
he
did
us
during
our
whole
Voyage
in
such
a
manner
as
engages
us
to
the
highest
acknowledgment
;
M.
Coriton
was
our
second
Captain
;
we
had
two
Lieutenants
,
M.
de
Forbin
,
and
M.
de
Cibois
,
and
an
Ensign
called
M.
de
Chamorean
.
Of
the
twelve
Gentlemen
named
by
the
King
to
wait
on
the
Ambassador
,
three
were
put
on
Board
of
us
;
and
the
rest
of
the
Frigat
Commanded
by
Monsieur
Joyeux
,
Lieutenant
of
the
Port
of
Brest
,
who
had
already
made
several
Voyages
to
the
Indies
.
The
Ambassador
goes
on
Board
the
Oyseau
.
In
fine
,
the
day
of
Embarquing
being
come
,
on
the
first
of
March
my
Lord
Ambassador
accompanied
by
the
Count
of
Chasteau-Renaud
Commander
of
a
Squadron
,
and
most
of
the
Nobility
and
Gentry
that
were
then
at
Brest
,
went
into
the
Kings
Chaloupe
,
and
so
on
Board
,
with
sound
of
Trumpets
.
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
with
all
the
Officers
at
the
Head
of
the
Soldiers
and
Seamen
were
in
readiness
to
receive
him
on
Board
with
the
Colours
,
Streamers
and
Pendants
abroad
.
Upon
his
entry
the
Ship
saluted
him
with
thirteen
Guns
,
and
the
Frigat
with
nine
.
The
Companies
of
both
Vessels
by
their
many
reiterated
Huzza's
,
shewed
the
joy
they
had
to
perform
the
Voyage
under
a
Commander
of
so
great
worth
;
all
the
day
following
was
allowed
for
preparing
to
be
gone
.
Departure
from
the
Road
of
Brest
.
We
weighed
Anchor
in
the
night
time
,
and
Saturday
morning
,
the
third
of
March
by
break
of
day
made
sail
.
So
in
leaving
France
we
parted
with
the
sweetness
and
repose
of
a
Religious
life
,
which
till
then
we
had
enjoyed
,
that
we
might
go
to
the
end
of
the
World
,
to
find
an
occasion
of
glorifying
God
and
consecrating
our selves
to
the
Conversion
of
Infidels
,
in
prosecution
of
the
Orders
laid
upon
us
by
our
great
Monarch
.
As
we
put
out
of
the
Road
of
Brest
we
had
a
fair
wind
;
but
it
failing
us
by
that
time
we
were
got
seven
or
eight
Leagues
from
the
Port
,
about
noon
we
dropt
Anchor
,
untill
five
or
six
a
clock
in
the
Evening
that
the
wind
blowing
again
from
the
same
Corner
,
we
again
set
Sail.
The
entry
and
coming
out
of
the
Gullet
as
Ships
put
out
from
Brest
,
is
a
very
difficult
passage
,
The
Gullet
is
a
very
strait
passage
from
the
Road
of
Brest
to
the
Sea
.
by
reason
of
hidden
works
which
run
out
a
good
way
into
the
Sea
,
on
both
sides
of
the
Shoar
;
but
our
Pilots
being
well
acquainted
with
the
Coast
made
no
scruple
to
put
out
in
the
night
time
.
From
that
time
till
within
five
or
six
Degrees
of
the
Line
,
we
had
as
good
weather
,
and
as
favourable
winds
as
we
could
have
desired
;
Divine
Providence
taking
pleasure
,
it
seems
,
to
favour
a
Voyage
undertaken
for
the
sake
of
Religion
,
in
a
time
when
the
most
expert
Sea-Commanders
were
of
Opinion
that
we
had
let
slip
the
Season
proper
for
setting
out
by
three
whole
Weeks
.
We
had
at
first
so
strong
a
wind
on
Poop
,
that
with
a
single
Sail
abroad
we
made
above
threescore
Leagues
in
four
and
twenty
hours
.
So
that
without
any
danger
we
doubled
Cape
Vshan
and
Cape
Finistere
so
dreadful
to
our
Seamen
,
because
of
the
frequent
Storms
that
arise
about
those
places
.
The
truth
is
,
we
found
a
very
rough
and
rouling
Sea
there
.
Thursday
the
eighth
,
at
the
heigth
of
Cape
Finistere
,
we
saw
a
Dutch
Vessel
standing
in
to
the
Channel
of
England
which
had
been
forced
to
lie
by
and
drive
because
of
the
contrary
winds
.
Both
our
Pilots
and
Officers
assured
us
that
Ships
were
many
times
above
three
weeks
before
they
could
double
that
Cape
.
They
who
have
been
at
Sea
well
know
how
great
trouble
and
sickness
Men
endure
,
the
first
time
they
meet
with
a
rough
Sea
;
but
it
is
impossible
to
make
those
who
never
felt
it
sensible
of
the
same
:
one
finds
himself
quite
stunned
with
a
violent
Head-ach
,
the
Stomach
reaches
,
the
Heart
faints
,
and
it
would
seem
that
the
rouling
of
the
Ship
overturns
the
whole
frame
and
constitution
of
the
Body
,
such
pains
it
causes
in
the
Bowels
.
We
were
almost
all
of
us
grievously
tormented
with
this
Sea-sickness
for
the
first
five
or
six
days
.
How
the
Churchmen
and
Jesuits
spent
their
time
during
the
Voyage
.
From
that
time
forward
until
we
arrived
at
Siam
we
said
Mass
for
most
part
every
day
,
and
I
make
no
doubt
but
that
the
happy
success
of
our
Voyage
ought
to
be
attributed
to
that
august
Sacrifice
which
was
so
often
offered
up
on
Board
,
and
to
which
all
came
with
singular
Devotion
.
There
passed
no
Sunday
nor
Holy-day
whereon
several
did
not
participate
of
the
Holy
Mysteries
;
This
zeal
was
the
effect
of
the
good
examples
of
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
who
communicated
once
every
eight
days
with
extraordinary
Humility
and
Piety
.
Every
Holy-day
and
Sunday
before
publick
Vespers
which
were
sung
with
much
Devotion
,
the
secular
and
regular
Churchmen
by
turns
made
a
Sermon
to
the
Ships
Company
.
A
Jesuit
took
the
care
upon
him
of
Catechising
the
Officers
men
,
Soldiers
,
and
Seamen
,
three
times
a
week
.
That
exercise
was
begun
and
ended
by
a
Spiritual
Hymn
,
sung
by
two
Seamen
who
had
pretty
good
Voices
,
and
all
the
rest
made
answer
upon
their
knees
about
the
Main-mast
.
These
good
examples
,
these
regular
instructions
and
exercises
of
Piety
,
besides
the
visiting
of
the
Sick
,
and
the
small
assistances
that
were
given
them
several
times
aday
,
so
wrought
upon
the
hearts
of
those
poor
people
,
that
there
was
none
of
them
almost
but
that
made
a
general
Confession
,
and
came
to
the
Sacrament
on
the
principal
Holy-days
.
Before
we
came
to
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
,
〈◊〉
under
the
〈◊〉
Zone
.
we
had
a
little
calm
and
much
contrary
wind
,
which
made
the
Ambassador
resolve
to
have
nine
Masses
said
to
the
honour
of
the
Holy
Virgin
,
that
by
her
intercession
we
might
obtain
favourable
weather
,
because
the
heats
which
are
commonly
left
in
those
places
,
began
to
occasion
many
Diseases
in
the
Ship.
One
of
the
Jesuits
laid
hold
on
that
occasion
to
introduce
on
Board
a
laudable
custom
of
saying
the
Litanies
of
the
most
Holy
Virgin
,
The
Devotion
of
the
whole
Ships
Company
towards
the
Holy
Virgin.
which
is
practised
on
Board
the
ships
that
are
Commanded
by
the
Mareshall
D'Estree
:
five
or
six
Soldiers
,
and
as
many
Sea-men
divided
into
two
Companies
upon
the
Poop
and
Fore-castle
began
that
Devotion
a
little
before
the
first
watch
was
set
in
the
Evening
,
and
within
a
few
days
,
all
were
ready
to
joyn
in
it
,
so
that
upon
our
return
it
was
made
,
as
it
were
,
a
publick
exercise
of
Obligation
,
which
was
performed
so
zealously
,
that
neither
cold
nor
rain
could
hinder
it
.
To
all
these
Holy
Practises
we
added
the
Chaplet
.
Our
Fathers
took
the
pains
to
divide
themselves
into
several
parts
of
the
Ship
to
cause
it
to
be
said
,
and
God
so
blessed
their
zeal
,
that
there
was
hardly
any
Seaman
or
Souldier
but
who
every
day
said
his
Beads
.
Besides
the
time
that
we
allowed
to
publick
instruction
,
we
daily
said
〈◊〉
Breviary
together
,
and
we
had
an
hour
〈…〉
●rence
about
cases
of
Conscience
;
〈…〉
day
was
employed
in
study
wit●
〈…〉
●tion
and
assiduity
as
if
we
had
〈…〉
These
were
our
ordinary
exercises
during
the
whole
Voyage
.
In
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Madera
.
Sunday
the
eleventh
we
past
in
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Madera
,
where
we
plainly
observed
a
great
deal
of
Snow
upon
the
hill
that
was
nearest
to
us
.
After
noon
three
small
English
Vessels
returning
into
Europe
past
to
the
leward
of
us
;
it
was
thought
they
came
from
the
Canaries
,
because
they
had
not
as
yet
haled
in
their
Boats.
Much
thereabouts
we
met
with
the
Trade-winds
so
much
desired
by
the
Seamen
,
and
so
agreeable
to
all
people
;
being
winds
that
blow
always
one
way
betwixt
North
and
East
,
the
Ship
does
not
require
much
working
;
besides
being
temperate
they
qualifie
the
heats
of
the
Zone
,
which
otherwise
would
be
insupportable
.
They
are
commonly
met
with
about
the
Latitude
of
Madera
.
The
Sea
then
becoming
smooth
,
and
the
wind
steddy
and
fixed
,
Ships
carry
a
great
deal
of
Sail
,
and
make
commonly
betwixt
forty
and
fifty
Leagues
from
noon
to
noon
without
any
rouling
of
the
Ship
or
Sea
;
so
that
if
Sailing
were
never
more
troublesome
nor
dangerous
,
Voyages
to
the
Indies
would
be
but
long
and
pleasant
recreations
.
In
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Palmes
.
The
thirteenth
we
discovered
the
Isle
of
Palmes
of
and
sailed
within
four
or
five
leagues
of
it
,
according
to
the
reckoning
of
our
Pilots
:
there
we
called
to
mind
the
happy
lot
of
Father
Ignatius
Azebedo
and
his
nine
and
thirty
Companions
all
Jesuits
,
who
going
together
to
preach
the
Gospel
in
Brazile
,
had
all
the
happiness
to
die
in
sight
of
this
Isle
,
which
was
literally
to
them
a
fortunate
Island
,
since
there
they
found
the
Palm
of
Martyrdom
,
which
they
were
going
to
look
for
in
the
New
World.
They
were
all
put
to
death
in
hatred
of
the
Faith
by
Calvinist
Pirates
,
who
having
made
themselves
Masters
of
the
Ship
wherein
they
were
,
called
the
St.
James
,
put
them
all
to
death
either
by
Water
or
Sword
,
to
hinder
,
as
they
said
,
these
Papists
the
declared
Enemies
of
their
Reformation
,
from
going
to
infect
the
Barbarians
with
their
pernicious
Doctrine
.
One
and
all
of
us
envied
the
happy
lot
of
these
generous
Defenders
of
the
Catholic
Faith
,
and
would
have
been
ravished
to
have
finished
our
course
for
so
Holy
a
Cause
:
but
it
is
not
just
to
desire
the
Crown
before
one
hath
run
the
Race
.
We
saw
also
the
Isle
of
Fera
,
the
most
Western
Island
of
the
Canaries
,
where
our
Geographers
have
placed
their
first
Meridian
,
afterwards
we
doubled
Cape
Verd
,
and
the
Isles
of
that
name
,
which
are
ten
in
number
.
According
as
we
drew
nearer
and
nearer
to
the
Line
,
we
took
pleasure
to
Observe
that
as
the
Stars
of
the
Artic
Pole
lowr'd
these
of
the
Antartic
Pole
were
elevated
over
our
heads
,
The
Maps
of
the
South
part
of
the
Heavens
are
not
exact
.
of
all
the
new
Stars
which
we
discovered
to
the
South
,
we
were
at
first
most
taken
with
those
of
the
Croziers
,
so
called
,
because
the
chief
four
are
so
disposed
that
they
make
a
kind
of
cross
.
The
biggest
of
all
is
twenty
seven
degrees
from
the
Pole
;
by
these
Seamen
steer
their
Course
,
and
sometimes
take
their
Latitude
.
Seeing
our
Course
stood
still
on
that
way
,
and
that
we
daily
discovered
new
Stars
,
we
had
time
enough
to
consider
them
,
and
to
compare
that
new
Region
of
the
Firmament
with
the
Astronomical
Map
of
Father
Pardies
;
but
we
found
little
or
no
conformity
betwixt
them
.
That
Map
needs
much
to
be
reformed
,
and
one
might
begin
with
the
Crosiers
,
the
Arms
whereof
are
more
unequal
in
the
Firmament
than
in
the
Map.
The
Wolf
and
Centaur
are
so
carelesly
and
unfaithfully
set
down
in
it
,
that
with
much
ado
can
one
know
them
in
the
Heavens
,
tho
,
in
the
mean
time
,
they
render
the
place
they
possess
very
bright
and
sparkling
,
by
reason
of
the
great
number
of
Stars
that
compose
them
,
and
which
seem
to
make
but
one
Constellation
.
But
in
the
Map
it
is
nothing
less
,
where
the
two
Constellations
,
can
,
at
most
,
pass
but
for
ordinary
.
The
stars
of
the
Southern
Triangle
,
seem
indeed
to
stand
in
the
Firmament
in
that
very
scituation
which
the
Map
gives
them
as
to
one
another
;
but
they
seem
to
be
ill
placed
in
relation
to
other
Constellations
.
The
stars
of
the
Bull
are
nothing
near
so
fair
,
as
they
appear
to
be
in
the
Map
,
though
the
disposition
of
them
be
much
the
same
,
the
Crane
,
in
my
Opinion
,
is
the
Constellation
the
best
represented
of
any
on
that
side
,
and
to
see
it
once
upon
the
Map
,
is
enough
to
make
one
immediately
find
it
out
in
the
Heavens
:
The
Bee
,
the
Apodus
or
Bird
of
Paradise
,
and
the
Chamelion
,
tho
they
be
small
,
yet
are
pretty
well
set
down
.
Something
also
would
be
reformed
in
the
Figure
and
Scituation
of
the
Clouds
and
other
Meridional
Constellations
,
wherein
many
more
defects
might
be
found
out
by
means
of
instruments
.
If
we
had
the
pleasure
,
as
you
may
see
,
to
observe
the
grosser
faults
,
we
had
the
trouble
at
the
same
time
,
that
we
could
not
tell
how
to
remedy
them
;
the
tossing
of
the
Ship
not
suffering
us
to
make
use
of
our
Instruments
,
for
reforming
that
Map
,
so
as
to
make
it
a
new
one
;
which
otherwise
would
not
have
been
hard
to
be
done
.
However
we
made
a
new
one
only
by
the
eye
,
which
,
though
it
be
not
so
defective
as
the
former
,
yet
cannot
be
so
exact
as
such
works
require
to
be
,
wherein
one
cannot
well
succeed
without
the
assistance
of
Instruments
.
This
was
our
usual
Employment
for
the
first
hours
of
the
night
and
an
hour
or
two
before
day
,
when
the
Sky
was
clear
.
However
that
was
not
all
our
diversion
;
for
in
the
day
time
we
had
the
pleasure
of
Fishing
.
It
is
true
we
we
did
not
begin
to
find
plenty
of
Fish
till
we
came
within
five
or
six
Degrees
of
the
Line
.
Plenty
of
Fish
about
the
Equinoctial-Line
.
Before
that
we
had
taken
a
kind
of
Tortoise
which
the
Seamen
call
a
Turtle
,
weighing
about
three
or
four
score
pound
weight
,
which
was
brought
to
Table
three
or
four
times
,
several
ways
drest
.
Many
liked
the
taste
of
it
pretty
well
,
and
others
could
hardly
endure
the
smell
thereof
.
But
in
the
whole
space
of
twelve
Degrees
;
that
is
to
say
of
120
Leagues
on
each
side
of
the
Line
,
we
daily
saw
,
for
most
part
,
a
vast
quantity
of
all
sorts
of
Fish
,
and
especially
of
Porposses
which
swam
in
shoals
about
the
Ship.
To
see
the
fishing
of
these
,
which
was
the
most
common
,
served
to
recreate
us
after
our
Studies
.
In
several
parts
of
the
Ship
,
and
especially
in
the
Head
,
there
were
many
Seamen
with
each
a
harping-Iron
,
which
is
a
kind
of
a
big
Javelin
fastned
to
the
end
of
a
Line
about
the
thickness
of
ones
little
finger
.
As
the
Porposses
past
by
them
,
they
struck
them
so
home
,
that
sometimes
they
pierced
them
through
and
through
.
When
once
they
had
darted
the
Harping-Iron
,
The
way
of
catching
Porposses
.
they
left
it
sticking
in
the
wound
,
keeping
hold
of
it
by
the
Line
to
which
it
was
fastned
,
and
which
they
veared
out
to
play
the
wounded
Fish
,
until
the
Porposs
weakned
by
the
loss
of
blood
,
suffered
it self
to
be
haled
aboard
without
any
resistance
,
we
took
many
in
this
manner
.
They
were
about
four
or
five
foot
long
,
and
proportionably
big
.
It
is
an
Annimal
that
much
resembles
a
Pig
,
not
only
in
the
flesh
and
fat
,
but
also
in
the
internal
and
external
Figure
;
the
flesh
of
it
is
not
delicate
,
and
tastes
Oylie
.
The
blood
of
Porposses
is
hot
.
We
had
a
fair
occasion
then
to
undeceive
a
great
many
who
having
never
seen
Porposses
could
not
believe
that
their
blood
was
hot
,
or
that
they
breathed
,
tho'
they
had
sometimes
heard
those
who
had
made
tryal
of
it
say
so
;
some
of
those
had
the
curiosity
to
thrust
their
hand
into
the
belly
of
the
Fish
when
it
was
opened
,
and
they
averred
that
the
Entrails
of
it
were
very
near
as
hot
as
those
of
a
Pig.
Nor
did
they
make
any
more
doub●
but
that
they
breathed
,
when
they
saw
that
it
had
Lungs
as
fit
for
respiration
,
as
the
Lungs
of
Animals
that
live
out
of
the
Water
are
.
And
indeed
Nature
having
given
it
no
Gills
like
other
Fish
;
but
only
two
holes
on
the
two
sides
of
the
head
to
let
in
the
Air
;
that
undoubtedly
is
the
reason
,
why
these
Fish
ever
now
and
then
raise
the
head
,
and
sometimes
the
whole
body
above
the
Water
,
and
that
they
always
swim
against
the
wind
.
Hence
also
it
is
that
when
Seamen
see
the
Porposses
move
any
way
during
a
Calm
,
they
fail
not
to
say
that
they
will
have
the
wind
from
that
corner
which
they
swim
towards
.
Whatever
presentment
they
may
have
,
we
sometimes
luckily
found
the
Seamens
predictions
to
be
true
.
Porposses
devour
one
another
.
I
have
been
often
told
,
nay
and
have
observed
in
a
Voyage
that
I
made
to
America
,
that
when
one
of
these
Fish
is
mortally
wounded
,
and
has
strength
enough
to
struggle
it self
off
of
the
Harping-Iron
,
the
rest
follow
it
by
the
tract
its
blood
makes
which
it
sheds
in
abundance
,
and
never
leave
it
till
it
be
dead
,
that
so
they
may
devour
it
.
I
was
confirmed
in
that
opinion
;
for
one
day
a
Porposs
which
had
been
struck
kept
so
great
a
strugling
,
that
it
wrought
the
Harping-Iron
out
of
its
belly
,
and
escaped
out
of
our
hands
.
At
that
time
there
were
many
more
about
the
Ship
;
but
so
soon
as
this
which
had
been
wounded
,
fled
for
it
,
all
the
rest
disappeared
,
and
there
was
not
one
more
to
be
seen
all
that
day
.
Now
we
are
upon
Fishing
,
I
must
here
speak
of
what
sport
we
had
that
way
,
and
of
the
fish
we
saw
,
which
are
not
so
well
known
in
Europe
.
I
will
begin
with
the
Shark
,
A
description
of
the
Shark
.
because
it
is
a
fish
often
seen
,
and
most
easily
taken
.
We
have
sometimes
taken
six
of
them
in
one
day
.
This
fish
is
a
kind
of
Sea
Dog
which
hath
a
very
large
and
flat
head
,
the
mouth
very
low
because
of
the
lower
Jaw
which
lies
a
great
way
under
the
upper
;
so
that
when
it
would
bite
,
it
is
forced
to
lie
upon
one
side
,
and
sometimes
upon
the
back
.
Those
we
took
were
about
four
foot
long
,
and
very
thick
,
a
little
below
the
head
the
skin
of
it
is
a
kind
of
chagrine
,
that
hath
a
very
rough
grain
,
with
six
openings
on
each
side
,
which
are
shut
by
means
of
a
kind
of
very
thin
skin
,
that
stands
it
instead
of
Gills
.
It
is
certainly
the
most
voracious
Animal
living
:
tho'
it
hath
been
struck
with
the
Hook
three
or
four
times
,
and
the
mouth
of
it
be
all
bloody
,
yet
still
it
returns
again
with
the
same
greediness
,
untill
it
be
taken
,
or
hath
carried
away
the
bait
.
Now
if
it
chance
to
seize
a
Man
,
he
is
gone
,
it
never
quits
its
hold
,
and
therefore
it
is
,
say
some
,
that
the
Sea-men
call
it
Shark
.
The
cause
of
that
extraordinary
greediness
is
the
greatness
of
its
Liver
;
it
consists
of
two
lappets
drawing
round
at
the
end
,
being
a
foot
and
a
half
long
and
four
fingers
b●ood
,
but
not
at
all
thick
;
besides
it
hath
but
one
〈◊〉
,
and
that
a
very
short
one
too
and
almost
streight
.
We
found
one
with
a
piece
of
Board
in
its
belly
four
fingers
broad
and
a
foot
and
a
half
long
.
It
hath
no
Lungs
,
and
the
heart
of
it
is
placed
in
a
concavity
made
by
the
concourse
of
two
bones
near
the
head
.
It
hath
three
rows
of
teeth
,
of
which
some
do
bend
,
some
are
strait
,
and
others
of
different
Figures
,
nay
it
hath
also
a
row
of
triangular
teeth
which
are
very
thin
,
and
terminate
like
a
Saw.
There
are
three
concavities
in
the
head
of
it
,
one
on
each
side
,
which
contain
a
white
substance
that
hath
some
consistence
;
it
afterwards
grows
hard
,
and
is
called
the
Sharks
stone
:
our
Chirugeons
attribute
great
virtues
to
it
,
and
I
take
their
word
.
The
third
concavity
,
that
is
in
the
middle
of
the
head
holds
the
brain
,
which
is
much
about
the
bigness
of
a
pullets
egg
.
The
substance
thereof
appeared
to
us
to
be
very
watrish
,
and
it
was
with
much
ado
that
we
could
distinguish
the
callous
body
,
from
the
medullary
.
It
hath
a
very
little
Cerebel
,
and
betwixt
the
Brain
and
the
Cerebel
,
a
very
soft
Glandule
which
bears
upon
two
other
smaller
ones
.
Sucking-Fish
called
by
the
Seamen
Pilot-fish
.
The
Shark
is
always
attended
by
several
small
Fish
that
make
its
Retinue
,
and
which
adhere
so
inseparably
to
him
,
that
they
will
chuse
rather
to
be
taken
with
him
than
to
abandon
him
:
They
are
called
his
Pilot-fish
;
because
it
is
pretended
,
that
they
serve
him
for
Guides
to
lead
him
to
those
places
,
where
they
discover
any
prey
.
It
is
a
vulgar
error
to
imagine
that
these
fish
perform
that
good
office
to
him
without
any
interest
;
they
only
stick
so
close
to
him
,
because
of
the
food
they
find
there
.
For
besides
that
,
they
make
the
best
of
the
reversions
of
his
prey
,
they
stick
close
to
his
skin
by
means
of
a
cartalaginous
little
skin
of
an
oval
Figure
,
which
they
have
upon
the
head
and
which
is
straked
and
armed
with
a
great
many
fibres
,
wherewith
belike
they
attract
some
juice
;
and
that
's
the
reason
why
some
call
them
sucking
fish
:
When
they
have
a
mind
to
swim
off
,
they
must
keep
without
reach
of
his
teeth
,
otherwise
they
would
fare
no
better
than
other
fish
do
.
I
have
seen
some
Sharks
attempt
to
catch
them
,
and
it
was
well
for
the
sucking
fish
that
they
got
as
soon
as
possibly
they
could
to
their
usual
Sanctuary
.
When
they
are
pulled
up
with
the
Shark
it
is
no
easie
matter
to
separate
them
;
if
they
be
put
upon
a
Table
,
they
will
stick
to
it
as
they
do
to
the
Sea-Dog
;
and
in
that
scituation
which
is
natural
to
them
,
the
under-side
of
their
Gills
and
their
Belly
is
upwards
.
There
are
two
kinds
of
them
,
some
white
,
which
are
much
of
the
shape
of
a
Rochet-fish
,
and
others
blackish
that
are
very
small
:
of
these
last
chiefly
I
speak
.
We
found
also
a
great
many
Bonitoes
thereabouts
which
are
the
implacable
enemies
of
the
Flying-fish
,
whom
they
continually
pursue
.
The
Bonitos
pursues
the
Flying-fish
It
is
the
best
sort
of
Fish
that
we
took
in
all
our
Voyage
:
they
are
about
the
bigness
of
our
largest
Carps
,
but
much
thicker
,
have
no
scales
,
but
the
skin
a
little
silvered
,
and
the
back
marked
with
long
,
obscure
,
and
gold-like
streaks
.
We
also
took
Albacores
,
so
called
by
the
Portuguese
because
of
their
whitish
colour
.
They
are
a
kind
of
Bonitoe
,
but
three
times
bigger
than
the
others
:
the
fish
,
colour
,
and
taste
are
much
the
same
.
Seeing
both
of
them
are
great
lovers
of
the
flying-fish
,
the
Sea-men
make
a
thing
like
a
flying-fish
,
which
they
fasten
to
the
end
of
a
Line
to
catch
them
with
.
They
make
that
Figure
dance
upon
the
surface
of
the
water
before
the
Bonitoes
and
Albacores
,
which
leap
out
of
the
water
so
greedily
to
snap
it
,
that
many
times
they
will
take
thirty
or
forty
of
them
in
an
hours
time
with
two
or
three
lines
only
.
We
met
not
with
so
many
Bonitoes
as
Sailers
commonly
do
,
because
,
perhaps
,
the
number
of
Flying-fish
was
not
then
so
great
in
those
Seas
.
However
,
we
saw
many
shoals
of
them
rise
up
in
the
Air
eight
or
ten
foot
high
,
and
fly
fifty
or
sixty
paces
before
they
fell
again
into
the
water
to
moisten
their
wings
,
and
recruit
their
strength
to
avoid
the
Bonitoes
,
which
many
times
catch
them
at
their
fall
,
or
leap
out
of
the
water
and
take
them
upon
wing
.
They
meet
with
certain
Birds
of
prey
also
that
fall
upon
them
,
when
they
rise
out
of
the
Water
to
escape
from
the
Bonitoes
.
One
of
these
Fish
being
hotly
pursued
one
day
leaped
into
our
Ship
and
struck
against
one
of
our
Mates
heads
.
Tho'
I
had
seen
of
them
before
,
yet
I
took
pleasure
to
consider
it
:
it
was
of
the
shape
,
colour
and
bigness
of
a
Herring
,
the
back
somewhat
thicker
,
and
the
fore-part
of
the
head
round
like
the
Pocket-fish
with
wings
much
like
to
those
of
Bats
.
These
are
the
sorts
of
fish
that
we
saw
most
about
the
Line
.
We
had
had
the
Sun
apeek
,
that
is
to
say
,
just
over
head
the
nine
and
twentieth
day
of
March
towards
the
third
Degree
of
the
North-Latitude
.
The
weather
being
very
clear
that
day
;
we
had
the
pleasure
to
observe
,
that
at
noon
the
Masts
and
every
thing
else
in
the
Ship
made
no
shadow
,
After
that
we
were
becalmed
for
seven
or
eight
days
;
and
we
made
the
remaining
threescore
and
ten
Leagues
to
the
Line
,
only
by
short
gusts
of
wind
,
which
Clouds
and
Tempests
brought
with
them
.
After
all
,
we
heard
none
of
those
great
Thunder-claps
thereabouts
,
wherewith
they
threatned
us
so
much
in
France
:
but
we
saw
much
Lightning
in
the
night
time
,
and
so
frequently
,
that
the
Sky
and
Sea
seemed
to
be
all
on
a
fire
.
Seeing
we
were
not
very
much
incommoded
by
the
heats
and
calms
in
those
climates
,
we
had
but
very
few
sick
Men
on
board
,
and
in
all
our
passage
from
Brest
to
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
,
we
lost
but
one
Man
;
nay
,
and
he
too
came
on
Board
,
tho'
no
body
knew
of
it
,
with
a
Bloody-flux
upon
him
,
whereof
he
died
.
It
was
certainly
our
duty
to
give
God
great
thanks
for
the
good
weather
he
was
pleased
to
send
us
about
the
Line
:
Gods
particular
Protection
of
all
that
were
in
the
ship
.
for
had
we
been
stopped
by
the
calms
so
long
as
many
times
Ships
are
weather-bound
there
,
all
our
water
,
Bread
,
and
Victuals
would
soon
have
been
spoiled
,
and
have
occasioned
many
Distempers
,
that
must
needs
have
carried
off
many
of
our
Men
:
as
it
happened
this
year
to
a
Dutch
Ship.
This
Vessel
put
out
from
Europe
above
two
Months
before
us
,
and
nevertheless
they
found
us
at
an
Anchor
before
Batavia
;
where
we
were
informed
that
the
Ships
Company
had
been
so
incommoded
with
calms
about
the
Line
,
for
six
whole
weeks
time
,
that
most
part
of
them
falling
sick
,
thirty
seven
of
about
forty
eight
that
were
aboard
died
;
among
whom
were
the
Captain
and
two
chief
Mates
:
so
that
the
surviving
eleven
not
being
able
to
Sail
the
Ship
to
the
Port
whither
they
were
bound
,
were
obliged
to
put
in
to
the
Isle
of
Sumatra
,
and
to
look
for
Men
there
to
carry
them
to
the
Road
of
Batavia
,
where
we
saw
them
come
in
.
Apil
7.
passed
the
Equinoctial
Line
.
Our
Victuals
and
Water
were
not
spoiled
,
nor
did
we
hardly
suffer
any
thing
by
bad
weather
nor
calms
;
and
the
heats
of
the
torrid
Zone
appeared
not
to
us
to
be
much
greater
than
the
heats
that
are
felt
in
France
about
Midsomer
.
Thus
without
any
incommodity
we
passed
the
Line
the
seventh
of
April
,
being
Saturday
,
with
an
easie
North-west-wind
,
about
the
three
hundred
and
fifty
eighth
Degree
of
Longitude
.
It
being
already
late
,
the
solemn
Ceremonies
which
Seamen
never
fail
to
perform
upon
that
occasion
,
was
put
off
till
next
morning
after
Mass
.
It
is
an
invention
devised
by
the
Masters
,
Mates
,
and
other
Officers
of
Ships
,
to
get
a
little
Money
to
buy
fresh
Provisions
with
for
themselves
and
company
,
to
which
they
give
,
(
but
very
improperly
)
the
name
of
Baptism
.
The
Ambassador
would
have
no
Ceremonies
acted
that
did
any
ways
allude
to
sacred
things
.
Every
one
gave
what
he
thought
fit
;
and
the
rest
came
off
for
some
buckets
full
of
water
which
were
thrown
upon
their
Bodies
:
but
it
being
very
hot
there
,
they
were
not
much
the
worse
for
it
.
From
the
time
we
past
the
Line
,
till
we
came
to
the
Tropick
of
Capricorn
,
we
had
bad
winds
,
and
sometimes
none
at
all
;
for
we
were
becalmed
about
the
twentieth
degree
of
South-Latitude
,
where
we
suffered
the
scorching
heats
of
the
torrid
Zone
until
the
thirtieth
of
April
that
we
past
the
Tropick
.
After
that
we
had
for
most
part
changeable
winds
and
so
easie
that
a
small
Boat
might
have
followed
us
without
any
danger
.
It
is
true
that
under
the
Zone
we
met
two
or
three
times
with
those
boisterous
Gusts
which
the
Portuguese
call
Travadas
or
Troadas
;
because
they
are
always
accompanied
with
Thunder
and
Lightning
:
What
Trovadas
and
the
fire
of
S.
Helm
are
.
but
seeing
we
had
them
a
stern
of
us
,
they
did
us
but
little
harm
,
and
made
us
run
a
good
way
on
head
.
During
one
of
these
Travadas
,
there
appeared
at
two
several
times
upon
the
Masts
,
Yards
,
and
Guns
of
our
Ship
,
some
of
those
little
Fires
of
a
Piramidal
figure
,
which
the
Portuguese
call
the
fire
of
St.
Telme
and
not
St.
Helme
.
Some
Seamen
look
upon
them
as
the
Soul
of
the
Saint
of
that
name
,
whom
then
they
invoke
with
all
their
might
,
joyned
hands
,
and
many
other
marks
of
respect
.
Nay
,
there
are
some
of
them
,
who
take
them
for
a
certain
sign
that
the
Storm
will
soon
be
over
,
without
doing
them
any
damage
.
These
are
the
very
same
fires
which
heretofore
the
Pagans
Adored
under
the
name
of
Castor
and
Pollux
;
and
It
is
strange
that
that
Superstition
should
be
introduced
also
amongst
Christians
:
March
12.
about
Noon
we
discovered
one
of
those
Phenomena
called
a
weather-gall
or
Ox
Eye
because
of
its
Figure
.
They
are
lookt
upon
commonly
at
Sea
as
certain
forerunners
of
a
Storm
.
It
is
a
great
round
Cloud
opposite
to
the
Sun
and
distant
from
him
eighty
or
ninety
Degrees
;
and
upon
it
the
Sun
paints
the
colours
of
the
Rainbow
,
but
very
lively
.
They
appear
,
perhaps
to
have
so
great
a
lustre
and
brightness
,
because
that
weather-gall
is
environed
on
all
sides
with
thick
and
dark
Clouds
.
However
it
be
,
I
dare
say
that
I
never
found
any
thing
falser
than
the
Prognosticks
of
that
apparition
.
I
formerly
saw
one
of
them
when
I
was
near
the
Continent
of
America
,
but
which
was
followed
,
as
this
was
,
with
fair
and
serene
weather
,
that
lasted
several
days
.
Several
Phenomena's
observed
during
the
Voyage
.
Since
we
are
speaking
of
Phenomena's
or
Apparitions
,
I
must
not
here
forget
a
pretty
rare
one
which
we
observed
betwixt
the
Line
and
Tropick
of
Capricorn
;
and
which
seems
to
be
difficult
to
be
explained
.
It
was
one
of
those
great
whirl-winds
which
the
Seamen
call
Spouts
or
water
-
dragons
.
They
are
like
to
long
Tubes
or
Cylinders
made
of
thick
Vapours
which
with
one
end
touch
the
Clouds
,
and
with
the
other
the
Sea
that
seems
to
boil
all
round
it
.
Much
after
this
manner
are
these
Dragons
formed
.
The
manner
how
Spouts
are
formed
.
At
first
you
see
a
great
thick
Cloud
,
from
which
a
part
breaks
off
;
and
this
separated
part
being
driven
by
an
impetuous
wind
,
insensibly
changes
its
shape
,
and
takes
the
figure
of
a
long
pillar
,
which
descends
as
low
as
the
Surface
of
the
Sea
;
continuing
so
much
the
longer
in
the
Air
,
as
the
violence
of
the
Wind
retains
it
there
,
or
as
the
lower
parts
of
it
support
those
that
are
above
.
So
when
that
long
spout
of
water
comes
to
be
cut
by
the
Yards
or
Masts
of
the
Ship
entring
into
it
,
when
one
cannot
avoid
the
same
;
or
the
motion
of
the
wind
comes
to
be
interrupted
by
rarifying
the
neighbouring
air
with
Canon
or
Musquet-shot
:
the
water
being
then
no
longer
supported
,
falls
in
prodigious
quantity
,
and
immediately
all
the
Dragon
is
dispersed
.
Which
are
dangerous
to
be
met
with
:
They
do
all
they
can
at
Sea
to
avoid
them
,
it
being
dangerous
to
meet
them
in
their
way
,
not
only
because
of
the
water
which
falls
into
the
Ship
,
but
also
by
reason
of
the
sudden
violence
and
extraordinary
weight
of
the
whirlwind
that
blows
it
,
which
is
able
to
unmast
the
greatest
Ships
,
and
even
put
them
in
danger
of
being
lost
.
Though
at
a
distance
these
spouts
seem
to
be
pretty
small
,
and
like
to
pillars
of
six
or
seven
foot
diameter
,
they
are
nevertheless
of
far
greater
extent
.
I
saw
two
or
three
of
them
near
the
Berlingues
in
Portugal
,
within
a
Pistol-shot
of
me
;
and
they
seemed
to
me
to
be
above
an
hundred
foot
in
circumference
.
We
observed
besides
other
Phenomenas
not
much
different
from
these
last
:
Spouts
of
another
kind
.
they
are
called
Siphons
because
of
their
long
Figure
pretty
like
in
shape
to
some
Pumps
:
They
appear
about
Sun-rising
and
Sun-setting
,
towards
the
same
place
where
the
Sun
then
is
.
They
are
long
and
thick
Clouds
environed
with
other
clear
and
transparent
ones
,
and
fall
not
;
but
in
process
of
time
are
all
confounded
together
,
and
by
little
and
little
scattered
,
whereas
the
Dragons
are
impetuously
driven
,
last
a
long
while
,
and
are
always
accompanied
with
rain
and
whirlwinds
,
which
make
the
Sea
to
boil
and
cover
it
with
froth
.
The
Rainbows
of
the
Moon
in
those
places
have
far
more
lively
colours
then
those
that
are
seen
in
France
.
Extraordinary
Rain-bows
to
be
seen
at
Sea
!
But
the
Sun
forms
rare
ones
upon
the
drops
of
Sea-water
which
are
driven
by
the
wind
like
a
very
small
Rain
,
or
like
fine
dust
when
two
waves
beating
against
one
another
break
.
When
one
looks
down
upon
these
Iris's
from
a
high
place
they
seem
to
be
reversed
,
and
sometimes
it
happens
that
a
Cloud
passing
over
it
,
and
being
ready
to
dissolve
into
Rain
,
another
Rainbow
is
formed
,
the
extremities
whereof
seem
to
be
continued
with
the
extremities
of
the
reversed
Iris
,
and
so
makes
a
Circle
of
Rain-bow
almost
entire
.
Phenomena
that
are
to
be
seen
in
the
water
of
the
Sea
.
The
Sea
hath
its
Phenomena
as
well
as
the
Air
,
fires
many
times
appear
upon
it
,
especially
betwixt
the
Tropicks
:
We
have
seen
it
sometimes
in
the
night-time
covered
all
over
with
sparks
,
when
it
is
a
little
high
and
the
water
breaks
with
a
topping
Sea
:
we
observed
also
a
great
light
a-stern
of
the
Ship
,
especially
if
she
made
quick
way
;
for
then
the
wake
or
tract
of
the
Ship
appeared
like
a
River
of
Light
,
and
if
any
thing
were
thrown
into
the
Sea
,
it
glittered
and
shone
all
over
.
I
think
the
cause
of
that
light
need
no
where
else
to
be
searched
for
,
but
in
the
very
nature
of
the
Sea-water
it self
,
which
being
full
of
Salt
,
Nitre
,
and
more
particularly
of
that
water
whereof
the
Chimists
make
the
chief
part
of
their
Phosphorus
,
which
being
agitated
is
immediately
inflamed
and
appears
Luminous
,
ought
also
by
the
same
reason
to
sparkle
when
it
is
put
into
motion
.
So
small
a
matter
is
enough
to
make
fire
come
out
of
Sea-water
,
that
handling
a
Line
or
small
Rope
that
hath
been
steeped
in
it
,
one
will
force
out
an
infinite
number
of
sparks
like
to
the
light
of
Glow-worms
that
is
to
say
,
lively
and
blewish
.
Lights
that
come
out
of
the
Sea
in
the
night
time
.
It
is
not
only
when
the
Sea
is
in
agitation
that
these
glancings
are
to
be
seen
,
we
saw
of
them
near
the
Line
,
in
a
dead
Calm
after
Sun-set
:
they
seemed
to
us
to
be
like
a
vast
number
of
small
flashes
of
faint
Lightning
coming
out
of
the
Sea
,
and
immediately
after
disappearing
.
The
cause
of
that
we
attributed
to
the
heat
of
the
Sun
,
who
having
in
a
manner
impregnated
and
filled
the
Sea
in
the
day
time
with
an
infinite
number
of
igneous
and
luminous
spirits
,
these
spirits
uniting
together
in
the
evening
,
that
they
might
get
out
of
the
violent
state
whereunto
they
were
forced
by
the
Sun
,
endeavoured
in
his
absence
to
regain
their
liberty
,
and
formed
those
little
flashes
as
they
made
their
escape
by
the
favour
of
the
night
.
Besides
these
transient
glances
of
a
minutes
continuance
,
we
saw
others
also
during
C●●●s
,
which
might
be
called
permanent
,
because
they
are
not
dispersed
as
the
former
were
.
There
are
of
them
of
different
sizes
and
shapes
,
round
and
oval
above
a
foot
and
a
half
diameter
,
which
passed
along
the
Ships
side
,
and
were
kept
in
view
above
two
hundred
paces
,
by
what
one
could
guess
in
seeing
them
pass
nine
or
ten
paces
from
the
Ships
side
.
They
were
thought
to
be
●nly
slime
or
some
unctuous
substance
,
which
by
some
natural
cause
or
other
unknown
to
us
might
be
formed
in
the
Sea
.
Some
would
needs
have
had
them
to
be
Fish
asleep
,
and
these
glitter
naturally
.
It
is
true
that
twice
in
the
Morning
we
had
seen
above
twenty
such
glittering
things
following
one
another
in
a
strait
line
,
and
shaped
like
our
Pikes
;
nay
many
who
had
been
much
at
Sea
took
them
to
be
real
fish
,
but
one
cannot
be
positive
as
to
that
.
Let
us
now
pursue
our
Course
again
,
An
Engish
Ship
made
off
at
Sea
.
the
tenth
of
May
in
the
morning
we
made
a
small
English
Ship
,
which
hailed
and
spoke
to
the
Mal●gne
that
was
nearer
it
than
we
,
she
was
returning
from
the
Isles
of
America
,
and
going
to
take
in
Slaves
at
Madagascar
.
They
did
what
they
could
to
keep
up
with
us
,
but
the
wind
being
good
,
and
we
carrying
much
Sail
,
the
same
day
we
lost
sight
of
her
.
May
17.
We
were
got
into
the
33
d.
Degree
of
South
Latitude
,
and
the
19th
.
of
Longitude
according
to
our
Mates
reckoning
.
There
we
began
to
see
Fowl
of
various
shapes
and
weeds
with
great
greenish
Rushes
ten
or
twelve
foot
long
which
they
call
Trunks
,
because
their
stalk
which
grows
and
tapers
insensibly
to
the
top
where
it
ends
in
leaves
of
the
same
colour
,
represents
pretty
well
the
shape
of
an
Elephants
Trunk
.
The
Sea-weeds
are
a
kind
of
herb
inclining
to
green
,
not
unlike
to
Hay
,
whereof
the
sprigs
are
very
long
and
interwoven
one
within
another
.
Some
think
that
these
weeds
come
from
the
bottom
of
the
Sea
,
being
by
the
Waves
forced
from
thence
,
and
raised
to
the
surface
of
the
water
.
Others
will
have
them
to
grow
in
the
water
,
because
they
see
them
far
out
at
Sea
,
and
they
cannot
believe
that
the
Sea
can
be
so
agitated
as
to
carry
its
waves
to
the
bottom
and
so
beat
off
the
weeds
from
thence
.
Besides
that
they
are
found
in
so
great
plenty
upon
the
surface
of
the
Sea
,
that
it
looks
like
a
great
Meadow
.
Lastly
,
others
maintain
,
and
that
is
the
Opinion
which
seems
to
me
most
plausible
and
consonant
to
truth
,
that
these
weeds
come
from
the
neighbouring
Coasts
,
from
whence
the
waves
force
them
so
that
they
are
carried
put
into
the
open
Sea
,
but
not
very
far
from
Land
,
either
by
the
Tydes
,
Currents
,
or
the
prevailing
winds
.
Upon
that
perswasion
it
was
that
Christopher
Columbus
so
famous
for
his
Discoveries
in
America
,
seeing
one
night
the
Sea
about
his
Ship
all
covered
over
with
these
weeds
,
encouraged
his
Men
who
thought
themselves
lost
,
taking
those
weeds
for
Flats
,
and
promised
to
make
them
suddenly
see
Land
;
which
accordingly
he
did
two
days
after
.
These
extraordinary
Birds
,
Marks
to
know
the
nearness
of
the
Cape
of
good
hope
.
Trunks
and
Weeds
,
are
the
surest
signs
of
ones
approaching
the
Cape
.
This
shows
that
Men
have
intimations
of
it
at
a
pretty
good
distance
,
seeing
the
first
time
that
we
saw
of
them
,
we
were
in
the
ninteenth
degree
of
Longitude
,
and
the
thirty
third
of
South
Latitude
,
that
is
to
say
,
that
we
were
near
three
hundred
Leagues
from
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
.
They
said
that
if
instead
of
keeping
along
the
Coast
of
Africa
,
as
we
did
,
we
had
stood
out
to
Sea
,
to
the
West-ward
,
we
had
met
with
those
Signs
farther
off
at
Sea
.
This
made
me
judge
that
the
Currents
that
carry
them
along
with
them
run
stronger
towards
the
West
than
North.
We
found
the
same
things
two
days
after
we
set
out
from
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
,
steering
away
East
South-East
,
but
in
far
greater
quantity
.
That
continued
all
the
third
day
,
though
we
had
a
good
wind
,
and
made
a
great
deal
of
way
.
The
days
following
we
saw
the
same
Birds
in
a
greater
number
,
Divers
Birds
to
be
seen
at
Sea
in
approaching
to
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
.
which
forsook
us
not
till
we
were
got
a
great
way
beyond
the
Cape
.
Some
of
them
were
black
on
the
back
,
and
white
on
the
belly
,
the
back
of
their
wings
being
speckled
with
those
two
colours
,
much
like
to
a
chequer
;
and
therefore
the
French
call
them
Damiers
;
they
are
somewhat
bigger
than
a
Pigeon
.
There
are
others
bigger
than
these
,
blackish
above
,
and
all
white
below
,
except
the
tip
of
their
wings
which
appears
to
be
of
a
Velveted-black
,
and
therefore
the
Portuguese
call
them
Mangas
de
veludo
,
Velvet
sleeves
.
After
these
we
saw
Flocks
of
others
somewhat
less
than
the
former
.
The
Portuguese
call
them
Boralhos
,
because
they
are
of
an
Ash-coloured-grey
.
I
shall
not
speak
of
certain
big
Fowls
which
because
of
their
whiteness
may
be
called
Sea-Swans
,
nor
of
the
Ravens
and
Rooks
,
which
are
to
be
found
in
these
places
,
nor
yet
of
a
kind
of
Birds
which
they
call
Boobies
,
because
they
are
so
little
upon
their
guards
,
that
they
suffer
themselves
to
be
taken
with
the
hand
.
The
North-wind
blowing
much
stronger
,
on
the
twenty
eighth
we
were
obliged
to
lye
under
a
Main
Course
for
fear
of
running
ashore
,
which
we
did
not
think
to
be
far
off
.
Indeed
next
day
about
noon
a
Sea-man
that
was
aloft
to
look
out
,
with
all
his
force
cried
Land
,
Land
,
and
presently
came
down
to
ask
of
my
Lord
Ambassador
the
reward
which
he
had
promised
to
him
who
should
first
make
Land
.
He
confidently
affirmed
that
he
had
made
it
before
in
the
Morning
,
not
daring
to
say
so
,
because
he
was
not
very
sure
of
it
,
but
that
at
present
it
was
past
all
doubt
:
Nevertheless
hardly
any
body
could
discern
the
Mountain
which
he
show'd
,
and
it
was
a
long
while
before
they
would
believe
him
.
But
,
at
length
,
three
or
four
hours
after
we
easily
saw
the
Mountains
of
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
,
which
might
be
fifteen
or
twenty
Leagues
a
head
of
us
.
Next
day
,
the
one
and
twentieth
,
the
day
of
our
Lords
Ascension
,
after
we
had
said
our
usual
Prayers
and
sung
Mass
to
thank
God
for
the
good
success
of
our
Voyage
;
we
viewed
the
Land
with
our
Glasses
,
and
saw
it
distinctly
,
not
being
above
three
Leagues
off
.
How
Barbarous
and
Barren
soever
it
seemed
to
be
to
us
,
it
was
nevertheless
a
delightful
sight
for
Men
who
had
seen
no
Land
from
the
Canary
Islands
,
which
we
sailed
by
the
thirteenth
of
March.
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
Second
BOOK
.
The
Voyage
from
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
,
to
the
Isle
of
Java
.
THE
Cape
of
Good-Hope
,
as
those
that
come
from
Europe
make
it
,
is
a
long
Ridge
of
Mountains
reaching
from
North
to
South
,
and
ending
in
a
Point
in
the
Sea
.
The
first
two
which
we
made
at
,
ten
Leagues
distance
from
that
Point
,
are
the
Mountains
of
the
Table
,
and
of
the
Lyon.
We
made
the
Table
Land
first
,
and
it
is
called
by
that
Name
because
the
Top
of
it
is
very
flat
,
and
much
resembles
a
Table
.
The
Lyon-Land
or
Mountain
is
so
called
,
because
it
hath
a
great
deal
of
the
Shape
of
a
Lyon
,
couchant
upon
the
Belly
:
Though
it
run
farther
out
into
the
Sea
than
the
other
,
yet
we
did
not
see
it
till
after
;
at
a
distance
it
would
seem
that
they
were
but
one
single
Mountain
,
and
,
indeed
,
they
are
not
very
remote
.
At
the
Foot
of
these
Mountains
a
great
Bay
of
an
Oval
Figure
runs
up
towards
the
East
,
two
or
three
Leagues
within
Land
;
it
is
almost
two
Leagues
over
at
the
Mouth
,
and
about
nine
in
compass
.
On
the
South
side
towards
the
Mountains
it
is
all
a
safe
Coast
,
every
where
else
it
is
dangerous
near
Shoar
.
The
Commissary
General
of
the
East
India
Company
,
of
whom
we
have
much
to
say
in
the
Sequel
,
told
us
one
day
,
that
he
was
many
times
afraid
,
seeing
us
stand
in
so
near
to
Shoar
,
upon
the
Tacks
we
made
,
insomuch
that
he
was
thinking
to
fire
a
Gun
with
a
Bullet
,
to
give
us
warning
by
that
Signal
,
that
we
should
keep
off
,
and
wait
for
a
fairer
Wind.
Towards
the
Middle
of
this
Bay
,
the
Dutch
have
built
a
Pentagone
Fort
below
the
Table-land
,
which
covers
it
to
the
South
,
and
behind
the
Lyon-Mountain
,
that
secures
it
to
the
West
,
a
League
from
Land
or
thereabouts
.
In
entering
the
Bay
,
you
leave
a
pretty
low
Island
on
the
Left-hand
,
called
Isle
Robin
,
in
the
middle
whereof
the
Hollanders
have
put
up
their
Flag
.
Thither
they
send
those
of
the
Country
,
and
the
Indians
also
whom
they
would
punish
with
Banishment
,
and
force
them
to
make
Lime
there
of
the
Shells
that
are
cast
up
by
the
Sea
.
Danger
of
being
forced
upon
a
Rock
as
the
Ship
was
coming
to
Anchor
.
The
Weather
being
fair
for
putting
into
the
Bay
,
we
were
in
hopes
of
being
at
Anchor
by
ten
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
but
the
Wind
failing
us
all
of
a
sudden
at
the
entry
,
we
were
becalmed
,
and
met
with
a
Current
that
carried
us
a
great
pace
upon
a
Rock
towards
Isle
Robin
,
where
we
saw
the
Water
break
with
much
violence
.
Immediately
two
Boats
were
lanched
to
tow
us
off
,
and
get
us
clear
of
that
Rock
:
But
notwithstanding
the
Fore-sight
of
the
Officers
,
and
Diligence
of
the
Crew
in
obeying
their
Orders
,
we
were
in
great
danger
of
running
foul
of
it
,
the
Current
or
Tide
carrying
us
violently
upon
the
same
,
and
we
were
not
half
a
League
from
that
Break
,
when
suddenly
we
had
a
Land-Breeze
which
obliged
us
to
tow
in
our
Boats
again
,
and
soon
put
us
out
of
danger
;
we
lost
,
however
,
two
Top-sails
there
,
which
were
split
by
the
Violence
of
the
Wind.
Being
obliged
all
day
long
to
beat
too
and
again
in
the
Mouth
of
the
Bay
,
with
a
great
deal
of
trouble
,
we
could
not
get
to
the
Place
of
Anchoring
before
the
beginning
of
Night
.
Nay
,
we
were
obliged
next
Morning
to
weigh
again
,
that
we
might
lye
under
the
Mountains
secure
from
the
West
Winds
,
which
are
extreamly
violent
,
and
reign
there
in
the
Winter
Time
,
as
then
it
was
.
We
came
to
an
Anchor
,
then
,
next
day
about
an
hundred
and
fifty
Yards
from
the
Fort.
Our
Ship
came
to
an
Anchor
amidst
four
Hollands
Vessels
.
There
were
in
the
Road
of
the
Cape
four
great
Ships
,
arrived
there
about
a
Month
before
from
Holland
,
though
they
had
been
at
Sea
at
least
two
Months
before
us
.
The
first
carried
an
Admirals
Flag
,
as
a
Mark
of
the
Supream
Power
and
Command
that
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
take
to
themselves
in
the
Indies
.
She
was
commanded
by
the
Heer
Van
Rheeden
,
who
was
sent
by
the
East-India
Company
with
the
Title
of
Commissary
General
,
to
visit
all
the
Places
which
they
hold
in
that
Country
.
He
had
fullPower
to
order
all
things
,
to
change
the
Officers
of
Factories
,
nay
,
and
the
Governours
of
Places
also
,
if
he
thought
fit
.
The
second
was
commanded
by
the
Heer
St.
Martin
,
a
French
Man
by
Country
,
and
Major
General
of
Battavia
,
in
that
Quality
commanding
all
the
Forces
the
States
have
in
the
Indies
.
One
Bocheros
an
old
Sea
Captain
,
and
Counsellor
to
the
Heer
Van
Rheeden
,
during
the
Time
of
his
Commission
,
commanded
the
third
,
the
fourth
attended
the
Heer
St.
Martin
,
who
was
to
make
all
haste
to
Battavia
.
All
these
Gentlemen
and
M.
Vanderstellen
Governour
,
or
to
use
the
Dutch
Word
,
Commander
of
the
Cape
,
are
Men
of
Worth
,
and
it
was
a
happy
Rencounter
for
us
,
that
we
had
such
Men
to
treat
with
,
during
the
stay
that
we
made
there
.
The
Dutch
send
to
know
from
whence
our
Ships
.
No
sooner
were
we
come
to
an
Anchor
,
but
two
Boats
came
on
Board
of
us
,
to
know
who
we
were
,
and
next
Morning
about
seven
a
Clock
the
Commissary
General
sent
and
complimented
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
who
on
his
Part
ordered
the
Chevaler
de
Forbin
,
The
Ambassador
sent
to
complement
the
Governor
of
the
Cape
.
Lieutenant
of
the
Ship
,
and
three
other
Officers
to
go
ashoar
and
salute
him
,
and
withal
,
to
desire
leave
of
him
that
we
might
take
in
fresh
Water
and
necessary
Provisions
.
He
very
civilly
gave
his
Consent
,
and
being
informed
that
there
were
several
Gentlemen
in
the
Ambassadors
Retinue
,
he
invited
them
to
come
and
hunt
ashoar
.
He
inquired
if
there
were
any
Jesuits
on
board
our
Ship
,
and
it
is
probable
that
they
who
came
the
day
before
had
taken
notice
of
us
,
and
talked
of
it
upon
their
Return
.
Monsieur
de
Forbin
made
answer
,
that
there
were
six
of
us
going
to
China
,
and
that
there
were
other
Church-men
on
board
also
bound
for
Siam
.
Then
they
came
to
speak
of
the
Salutes
,
and
it
was
agreed
upon
that
the
Fort
should
render
Gun
for
Gun
when
our
Ship
saluted
it
.
This
Article
was
ill
explained
,
or
ill
understood
by
these
Gentlemen
,
for
about
ten
of
the
Clock
my
Lord
Ambassador
having
ordered
seven
Guns
to
be
fired
,
the
Admiral
answered
only
with
five
Guns
,
and
the
Fort
fired
none
at
all
.
Immediately
the
Ambassador
sent
ashoar
again
,
and
it
was
determined
that
the
Admirals
Salute
should
pass
for
nothing
,
and
so
the
Fort
fired
seven
Guns
,
the
Admiral
seven
Guns
,
and
the
other
Ships
five
,
to
salute
the
Kings
Ship
,
which
returned
them
their
Salutation
,
for
which
the
Fort
and
Ships
gave
their
Thanks
.
After
that
we
made
ready
our
Boats
,
and
thought
of
nothing
now
but
of
going
ashoar
to
refresh
our selves
.
So
soon
as
we
arrived
in
the
Bay
,
The
Jesuits
visit
the
Governor
of
the
Cape
.
we
found
it
to
be
so
proper
a
Place
for
making
Observations
,
that
we
instantly
resolved
to
use
all
means
that
we
might
observe
:
For
that
end
there
was
a
necessity
of
taking
a
commodious
House
,
carrying
thither
our
Instruments
,
and
haveing
leisure
to
ply
it
both
Day
and
Night
during
the
short
time
we
had
to
stay
there
.
There
was
difficulty
in
this
;
Jesuits
,
Mathematicians
,
and
several
Instruments
carried
ashoar
might
offend
the
Nicety
of
a
Dutch
Commander
,
in
a
pretty
new
Colony
,
and
make
him
suspect
something
else
than
what
we
pretended
.
Nay
,
we
were
advised
to
disguise
our selves
,
and
not
to
appear
to
be
Jesuits
;
but
we
did
not
think
it
fit
,
and
we
found
by
what
followed
,
that
our
Habit
did
us
no
Injury
at
all
.
After
we
had
a
little
considered
on
't
,
it
was
resolved
,
that
Father
Fontenay
and
I
,
should
go
visit
the
Commissary
General
and
the
Governor
of
the
Place
before
the
rest
went
ashoar
,
and
that
if
in
Discourse
we
found
occasion
to
open
our
Design
,
we
should
lay
hold
on
it
.
We
went
strait
to
the
Fort
then
without
any
other
Recommendation
:
The
Sentinel
stopt
us
at
the
first
Gate
,
according
to
the
Custom
of
Garison-places
,
until
an
Officer
of
the
Guard
being
come
,
and
having
informed
himself
that
we
were
come
to
pay
a
Visit
to
the
Commissary
General
and
Governor
,
he
commanded
us
to
be
let
in
,
and
gave
us
a
Soldier
to
conduct
us
to
their
Apartment
.
This
House
consists
of
a
large
Pile
of
Building
two
Storys
high
,
and
very
solidly
built
.
It
is
covered
with
a
very
fair
Tarrass
,
paved
with
broad
free
Stone
,
with
Balconies
and
Iron
Rails
all
round
;
thither
they
commonly
go
to
take
the
fresh
Air.
The
Climate
of
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
is
very
temperate
.
This
Country
has
so
temperate
an
Air
,
that
it
is
never
very
cold
there
,
but
when
a
South
Wind
blows
;
and
though
it
was
the
depth
of
Winter
then
in
relation
to
that
Climate
,
yet
it
was
so
hot
in
the
day
time
,
that
they
were
glad
to
go
take
the
fresh
Air
in
the
Evening
.
We
went
first
into
a
great
Hall
where
they
preach
every
Sunday
until
the
Church
be
finished
that
was
begun
to
be
built
without
the
Fort.
On
both
sides
of
that
Hall
there
are
pretty
handsome
Apartments
;
they
had
us
in
to
that
which
was
on
the
Left-hand
,
where
we
were
received
by
Monsieur
Vanderstel
,
and
whither
presently
after
the
Heer
Van
Rheeden
came
to
see
us
.
He
is
a
Man
of
Quality
about
fifty
years
of
age
,
Handsome
,
Civil
,
Wise
,
and
Learned
,
and
who
thinks
and
speaks
well
on
all
Subjects
;
we
were
extreamly
surprised
to
meet
with
so
much
Politeness
at
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
,
and
much
more
at
the
Civilities
and
many
Testimonies
of
Friendship
which
we
received
at
that
first
Interview
.
Father
Fontenay
,
whose
Interpreter
I
was
at
that
time
in
Portuguese
,
finding
so
lucky
Dispositions
for
our
Design
,
told
the
Commissary
General
that
there
were
six
Jesuits
of
us
who
were
bound
for
the
Indies
and
China
,
that
not
being
at
all
accustomed
to
the
Fatigues
of
Sea
,
we
stood
in
need
of
taking
a
little
Air
on
Land
,
that
we
might
be
recruited
after
so
long
a
Voyage
;
that
we
durst
not
do
so
,
before
we
knew
their
Minds
,
whether
they
would
be
contented
with
it
or
not
.
The
Commissary
General
did
not
suffer
me
to
interpret
all
that
Father
Fontenay
had
said
to
him
,
but
presently
interrupting
me
:
You
'l
do
us
the
greatest
pleasure
imaginable
,
Fathers
,
said
he
,
in
Portuguese
,
to
come
and
refresh
your selves
at
Land
,
we
will
contribute
all
that
lies
in
our
Power
to
your
Refreshment
and
Recovery
.
This
Answer
was
so
favourable
that
we
went
a
little
farther
;
we
told
him
,
that
being
ashoar
,
The
Jesuits
are
extreamly
well
received
by
the
Dutch
.
we
should
be
glad
to
employ
our selves
for
the
publick
Good
,
and
then
to
communicate
to
him
our
Observations
;
thereby
to
acknowledge
in
some
manner
the
Civilities
that
he
had
shown
us
:
that
we
had
brought
with
us
from
France
several
Mathematical
Instruments
,
amongst
which
there
were
some
very
proper
for
finding
out
the
true
Longitude
of
Countries
through
which
one
passed
,
without
any
need
of
the
Eclipses
of
the
Sun
and
Moon
;
we
explained
to
him
the
new
way
of
observing
by
the
Satellites
of
Jupiter
,
of
which
the
Learned
Monsieur
Cassini
hath
made
so
good
Tables
.
I
added
that
thereby
we
would
render
a
very
considerable
Service
to
their
Pilots
,
by
giving
them
the
certain
Longitude
of
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
,
which
they
only
guessed
at
by
their
reckoning
,
a
very
doubtful
way
that
many
times
deceive
them
,
and
that
very
considerably
too
.
He
told
us
that
we
would
thereby
oblige
him
,
and
that
seeing
we
had
a
mind
to
labour
in
that
Discovery
,
he
offered
us
a
Place
every
way
proper
for
observing
.
At
the
same
time
he
ordered
a
Summer-house
that
is
in
the
Companies
Garden
to
be
made
ready
for
us
to
lodge
in
,
so
long
as
the
Ambassador
should
continue
in
the
Road.
The
Civilities
of
Monsieur
Van
Rheeden
.
We
made
answer
that
the
Civility
which
he
shew'd
us
should
not
rest
there
,
and
that
we
hoped
my
Lord
Ambassador
would
have
the
Goodness
to
thank
him
,
and
take
it
as
a
Kindness
done
partly
to
himself
.
Then
we
shew'd
him
our
Patents
for
being
the
Kings
Mathematicians
.
You
encrease
my
Joy
,
Fathers
replied
the
Commissary
,
in
letting
me
see
that
I
comply
with
the
Will
and
Orders
of
so
great
a
King
,
for
whom
I
shall
entertain
a
profound
Respect
so
long
as
I
live
.
However
I
am
not
vexed
that
you
did
not
speak
to
me
of
that
before
I
obliged
you
to
accept
of
a
Lodging
,
which
I
offer
you
freely
,
and
with
all
my
heart
.
They
brought
us
Tea
,
as
it
is
the
Custom
amongst
the
People
of
the
East-Indies
,
and
after
a
pretty
long
Conference
about
indifferent
Matters
,
we
took
leave
of
these
Gentlemen
,
and
withdrew
.
The
Commander
followed
us
to
conduct
us
to
the
Apartment
that
was
offered
us
in
the
Companies
great
Garden
.
We
were
mightily
surprised
to
find
one
of
the
loveliest
and
most
curious
Gardens
that
ever
I
saw
,
The
Description
of
a
lovely
Garden
which
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
have
on
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
in
a
Country
that
looks
to
be
one
of
the
most
dismal
and
barren
Places
in
the
World.
It
lies
above
the
Habitations
betwixt
the
Town
and
the
Table-Land
,
and
on
the
side
of
the
Fort
,
from
which
it
is
but
about
two
hundred
Paces
distant
.
It
is
fourteen
hundred
and
eleven
common
Paces
in
length
,
and
two
hundred
thirty
five
in
breadth
.
The
Beauty
of
it
consists
not
as
in
France
,
in
Compartments
,
Beds
of
Flowers
,
nor
Water-works
.
They
might
have
them
if
the
East-India
Company
would
be
at
the
Charges
of
it
;
for
a
Brook
of
running
Water
falling
from
the
Hill
,
runs
through
the
Garden
.
But
there
you
have
Walks
reaching
out
of
sight
,
planted
with
Limon-Trees
,
Pomegranate-Trees
,
and
Orange-Trees
,
which
are
covered
from
the
Wind
by
high
and
thick
Hedges
,
of
a
kind
of
Laurel
,
which
they
call
Speck
,
always
green
,
and
pretty
like
to
the
Filaria
.
By
the
Disposition
of
the
Walks
,
this
Garden
is
divided
into
several
indifferent
big
Squares
,
some
of
which
are
full
of
Fruit-Trees
,
and
amongst
them
,
besides
Apple-trees
,
Pear-Trees
,
Quince-Trees
,
Apricot-Trees
,
and
other
excellent
Fruits
of
Europe
,
you
have
also
Ananas
,
Banana-Trees
,
and
several
others
that
bear
the
rarest
Fruits
to
be
found
in
the
several
parts
of
the
World
,
which
have
been
transported
thither
,
where
they
are
most
carefully
cultivated
and
lookt
after
.
The
other
Squares
are
sow'd
with
Roots
,
Pulse
and
Herbs
,
and
some
with
the
most
esteemed
Flowers
of
Europe
,
and
others
that
we
know
not
,
which
are
of
a
singular
good
Smell
and
Beauty
.
The
East-India
Company
,
to
whom
it
belongs
,
as
we
have
already
said
,
have
caused
it
to
be
made
,
that
they
may
always
have
in
that
Place
a
kind
of
Magazine
of
all
sorts
of
Refreshments
for
their
Ships
that
go
too
,
or
come
from
,
the
Indies
,
which
never
fail
to
touch
at
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
All
Dutch
Ships
are
ordered
to
touch
at
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
The
Ships
that
come
from
the
Indies
arrive
there
in
the
beginning
of
March
,
either
alone
or
several
together
in
company
,
and
there
they
stay
for
the
Fleet
of
Europe
,
which
comes
in
the
Month
of
April
.
By
that
means
they
have
the
News
,
whether
or
not
they
be
in
Wars
,
and
set
out
all
together
,
that
by
the
great
number
and
strength
of
their
Ships
,
they
may
be
in
a
Condition
not
to
fear
what
hurt
Pirats
or
their
Enemies
can
do
them
.
There
is
a
great
Pile
of
Building
built
at
the
Entry
into
the
Garden
,
where
the
Companies
Slaves
live
,
to
the
Number
,
as
it
is
said
,
of
five
hundred
,
of
whom
,
part
are
employed
in
cultivating
the
Garden
,
and
the
rest
in
other
necessary
Work.
About
the
middle
of
the
Wall
,
on
that
side
which
looks
to
the
Fort
,
there
is
a
little
Banqueting-House
where
no
body
lives
;
the
lower
Story
of
it
consists
of
a
Porch
open
to
the
Garden
and
the
Fort
,
with
two
little
Halls
on
each
side
;
over
that
there
is
a
Pavilion
open
every
way
,
betwixt
two
Tarasses
paved
with
Brick
,
and
railed
about
;
the
one
looking
towards
the
North
,
and
the
other
to
the
South
.
This
Pavilion
seemed
to
be
purposely
made
for
our
Design
:
For
on
the
one
side
we
discovered
the
North
,
the
View
whereof
was
absolutely
necessary
to
us
,
because
it
is
the
South
in
relation
to
that
Country
.
Whil'st
they
were
a
preparing
that
Pavilion
,
which
with
the
Dutch
I
shall
call
our
Observatory
;
we
went
on
Board
to
give
the
Ambassador
and
our
Fathers
an
Account
of
all
that
had
past
.
Next
day
the
Commissary
and
Commander
sent
us
on
Board
all
sorts
of
Refreshments
.
The
Ambassador
and
Commissary
General
inter-change
many
Civilities
.
The
Officer
who
was
ordered
to
make
that
Present
to
the
Ambassador
in
their
Behalf
,
told
us
that
these
Gentlemen
had
also
sent
us
a
Boat
to
carry
us
and
our
Instruments
ashoar
.
Having
in
the
Night
time
prepared
these
which
we
thought
we
might
stand
in
need
or
,
we
put
them
into
the
Boat
,
and
so
went
to
the
Observatory
the
second
of
June
,
in
the
Year
one
thousand
six
hundred
and
eighty
five
.
A
Pendulum
Clock
with
Seconds
,
We
began
to
make
our
Observations
.
made
by
Monsieur
Thuret
at
Paris
,
being
set
at
to
Hour
,
as
near
the
true
Hour
as
we
could
guess
,
not
having
as
yet
corrected
the
Clock
,
we
began
the
following
Observations
.
The
first
Satelles
appeared
in
the
Evening
at
eleven
and
three
Minutes
of
the
Clock
not
as
yet
corrected
,
distant
from
Jupiter
,
somewhat
less
than
the
Diameter
of
the
same
Jupiter
.
By
the
Telescope
we
saw
two
parallel
Bands
or
Streaks
upon
the
Body
of
Jupiter
,
the
one
larger
towards
the
Southern
Border
,
and
the
other
narrower
towards
the
Northern
.
The
first
Satelles
began
to
touch
the
Border
of
Jupiter
at
11
a
Clock
37
M.
30
S.
at
eleven
a
Clock
58
M.
5
S.
the
Satelles
was
no
more
to
be
seen
.
These
Observations
were
made
with
an
Excellent
Telescope
twelve
foot
long
,
of
the
late
Monsieur
le
Bas
:
the
Hours
are
still
of
the
Pendulum
not
rectified
.
We
constantly
observed
Jupiter
untill
two
of
the
Clock
five
Minutes
after
Midnight
,
at
what
time
he
was
hid
behind
the
Lyon
Mountain
,
which
limited
our
Sight
towards
the
West
,
so
that
we
could
not
that
day
see
the
Emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
.
The
third
of
June
.
1685.
For
rectifying
the
Hour
of
the
Clock
.
Heights
before
Noon
.
|
Hours
of
the
Clock
.
|
Deg.
|
Min.
|
Ser.
|
Hour
.
|
Min.
|
Ser.
|
20
|
16
|
0
|
9
|
35
|
38
|
22
|
56
|
20
|
9
|
34
|
47
|
24
|
11
|
0
|
10
|
4
|
50
|
24
|
39
|
55
|
10
|
8
|
48
|
Heights
after
Noon
.
|
Hours
of
the
Clock
.
|
Deg.
|
Min.
|
Ser.
|
Hour
.
|
Min.
|
Ser.
|
A
dubious
Observation
.
24
|
39
|
55
|
0
|
The
Observation
fail'd
.
|
24
|
11
|
0
|
2
|
50
|
19
|
22
|
56
|
20
|
2
|
57
|
40
|
0
|
26
|
0
|
3
|
16
|
38
|
These
Elevations
were
taken
with
a
Quadrant
of
ninety
Degrees
,
of
eighteen
Inches
the
Radius
,
made
by
Mr.
Butterfield
at
Paris
.
It
is
to
be
observed
that
these
Heights
of
the
Sun
were
not
of
the
same
Border
;
in
the
Morning
we
took
the
Height
of
the
Superior
Border
,
and
in
the
Evening
of
the
Inferior
only
,
which
is
to
be
taken
notice
of
.
For
the
Variation
of
the
Needle
.
By
Mr.
Butterfield's
equinoxial
Dial
,
which
carries
a
great
compass
under
the
Meridian
:
the
Variation
of
the
Needle
was
found
to
be
eleven
Degrees
and
a
half
North-west
.
Having
no
particular
Observations
to
make
in
the
Evening
,
we
considered
several
fixed
Stars
with
the
Telescope
twelve
foot
long
.
The
foot
of
the
Crozier
marked
in
Bayer
is
a
double
Star
,
that
is
to
say
,
Several
Observations
concerning
the
Southern
Stars
.
consisting
of
two
bright
Stars
distant
one
from
another
about
their
own
Diameter
only
,
much
like
to
the
most
Northern
of
the
Twins
;
not
to
speak
of
a
third
much
less
,
which
is
also
to
be
seen
,
but
farther
from
these
two
.
Under
the
Croziers
there
are
several
Places
of
the
Milky
Way
,
which
seem
to
be
filled
,
if
you
look
through
the
Telescope
,
with
an
infinite
number
of
Stars
.
The
two
Clouds
which
are
near
the
South
Pole
appear
not
to
be
a
croud
of
Stars
,
like
the
Praesepe
Cancri
,
nor
yet
a
duskish
Light
,
as
the
cloudy
part
of
Andromeda
;
nothing
hardly
is
to
be
seen
there
with
great
Glasses
,
though
without
a
Glass
one
may
see
them
very
white
,
especially
the
great
Cloud
.
No
Constellation
in
the
Heavens
looks
so
lovely
as
those
of
the
Centaur
and
Ship.
There
are
no
fair
Stars
near
the
Pole
,
but
a
great
many
little
ones
.
Bayer
and
other
Books
that
speak
of
them
,
omit
a
great
many
,
and
most
of
these
they
set
down
appear
not
in
the
Heavens
in
the
same
Scituation
.
The
Fourth
of
June
.
1685.
For
rectifying
the
Hour
of
the
Clock
.
Heights
before
Noon
.
|
Hours
of
the
Clock
.
|
D.
|
M.
|
S.
|
H.
|
M.
|
S.
|
22
|
23
|
0
|
9
|
50
|
47
|
23
|
31
|
50
|
10
|
0
|
32
|
24
|
37
|
30
|
10
|
9
|
18½
|
25
|
53
|
20
|
10
|
20
|
29
|
Heights
after
Noon
.
|
Hours
of
the
Clock
.
|
D.
|
M.
|
S.
|
H.
|
M.
|
S.
|
25
|
53
|
20
|
2
|
32
|
33
|
24
|
37
|
30
|
2
|
43
|
38
|
23
|
31
|
50
|
2
|
52
|
47
|
22
|
23
|
0
|
3
|
1
|
38½
|
The
Horizontal
Thread
of
the
Telescope
was
not
exactly
parallel
to
the
Horizon
we
always
endeavoured
to
supply
that
in
the
Certifications
of
the
Clock
,
by
making
the
Border
of
the
Sun
pass
by
the
same
Place
of
the
Thread
,
or
as
near
as
could
be
to
it
.
You
are
always
to
mind
that
they
are
the
Heights
of
different
Borders
of
the
Sun
,
in
the
Morning
of
the
Superior
Border
,
and
in
the
Evening
of
the
Inferior
.
Monday
after
Dinner
we
went
to
the
Fort
,
to
see
the
Gentlemen
,
and
communicate
to
them
the
Observations
which
we
had
already
made
,
and
acquaint
them
with
that
we
were
to
make
that
Evening
,
according
to
which
alone
one
might
regulate
the
true
Longitude
of
the
Cape
.
Upon
our
return
all
these
Gentlemen
would
needs
go
along
with
us
,
to
be
Spectators
of
that
Observation
.
An
Interview
betwixt
the
Ambassador
and
Commissary
General
.
We
were
together
upon
the
Terrass
taken
up
in
showing
them
our
Instruments
,
which
seemed
very
pretty
and
curious
to
them
;
when
we
perceived
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
who
having
come
incognito
the
Day
before
to
walk
in
the
Garden
,
found
it
so
pleasant
,
that
he
returned
again
next
day
to
divert
himself
there
,
with
most
part
of
the
Officers
of
both
Ships
,
and
the
Gentlemen
of
his
Retinue
.
The
Ambassador
and
Commissary
had
mutually
enterchanged
many
Civilities
from
the
very
day
of
our
Arrival
,
and
no
day
past
without
sending
one
another
Presents
.
The
Heer
Van
Rheeden
perceiving
him
,
went
immediately
down
from
the
Terrass
,
where
he
was
observing
with
us
,
and
after
two
or
three
turns
,
meeting
the
Ambassador
as
by
chance
,
they
entertained
one
another
to
their
mutual
satisfaction
.
When
the
Ambassador
was
gone
,
The
Emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
of
Jupiter
observed
.
the
Commissary
with
the
Heers
,
St.
Martin
,
Vanderste
.
and
Bocheros
stayed
with
us
in
the
Observatory
till
ten
a
Clock
at
Night
.
The
emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
happened
at
ten
Hours
,
five
Min.
forty
Sec.
of
the
Clock
not
rectified
.
We
took
the
Meridian
Line
of
the
Northern
Terrass
,
and
the
Meridian
,
Elevation
of
the
Sun
;
but
we
could
not
make
use
of
that
;
because
the
Operation
was
not
sure
.
After
the
emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
from
under
the
Shadow
of
Jupiter
,
having
compared
together
the
heights
of
the
Sun
,
taken
Morning
and
Evening
,
the
third
and
fourth
of
June
,
and
considered
the
difference
of
time
amongst
the
same
heights
of
the
superior
and
inferior
Limb
or
Border
of
the
Sun
,
because
in
the
Morning
we
had
observed
the
superior
Border
,
and
in
the
Evening
the
inferior
,
we
found
that
the
Pendulum
went
faster
than
the
Sun
both
days
,
by
eight
and
twenty
Minutes
.
At
the
instant
of
the
Emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
it
was
by
the
Pendulum
ten
Hours
,
five
Min
,
forty
Sec.
from
whence
having
subtracted
twenty
eight
Minutes
.
Remains
the
true
time
of
the
Emersion
,
nine
Hours
,
thirty
seven
Min.
forty
Seconds
.
The
Ephemerides
of
Monsieur
Cassini
Calculated
to
Minutes
gave
the
time
of
that
Emersion
in
the
Meridian
of
Paris
to
be
at
eight
Hours
,
twenty
six
Minutes
.
But
his
Tables
of
Ecclipses
Calculated
to
Seconds
,
gave
the
same
emersion
at
eight
a
Clock
,
twenty
five
Min.
forty
Seconds
.
Having
deducted
them
from
the
hours
observed
at
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
,
nine
Hours
,
thirty
seven
Min.
forty
Seconds
.
The
difference
of
Meridians
betwixt
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
and
Paris
.
There
remains
the
difference
of
Meridians
betwixt
the
Cape
of
God
Hope
and
Paris
of
an
Hour
twelve
Minutes
,
which
make
eighteen
degrees
difference
of
Longitude
;
and
supposing
the
Longitude
of
Paris
taken
from
the
first
Meridian
,
that
passes
by
the
Isle
of
Fera
the
most
Westerly
of
the
Canaries
to
be
twenty
two
degrees
and
an
half
according
to
the
same
Author
,
the
Longitude
of
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
taken
from
the
same
Meridian
,
will
be
forty
degrees
and
an
half
,
not
much
different
from
what
the
modern
Charts
assign
to
it
.
Next
day
being
Tuesday
the
fifth
of
June
about
ten
of
the
Clock
,
these
Gentlemen
came
back
to
the
Observatory
,
and
stayed
there
till
towards
two
in
the
Afternoon
,
to
see
us
take
the
height
and
distance
of
the
Table
Mountain
,
and
to
view
our
instruments
.
We
show'd
them
particularly
the
use
of
the
Equinoctial
Dial
,
by
means
whereof
we
found
again
that
day
the
variation
of
the
needle
to
be
eleven
degrees
and
a
half
North
west
.
So
that
two
advantages
may
be
drawn
from
these
observations
.
Advantages
that
may
be
drawn
from
the
observations
made
at
the
Cape
.
First
the
variation
of
the
Needle
which
we
found
with
the
Astronomical
Ring
to
be
eleven
degrees
and
a
half
Northwest
,
and
then
,
the
true
Longitude
of
the
Cape
,
which
we
regulated
according
to
that
emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
of
Jupiter
,
which
being
to
appear
at
eight
of
the
Clock
twenty
six
Minutes
upon
the
horizon
of
Paris
,
and
having
been
observed
at
the
Cape
at
nine
a
Clock
,
thirty
seven
Minutes
,
forty
Seconds
gives
an
hour
twelve
Minutes
,
forty
Seconds
difference
betwixt
the
two
Meridians
of
the
two
places
,
which
being
converted
into
degrees
,
make
eighteen
,
and
by
consequence
the
Charts
are
defective
,
and
make
the
Cape
more
Easterly
by
near
three
degrees
than
in
reality
it
is
.
The
Abbot
of
Choisi
would
needs
be
a
witness
of
our
Observations
,
and
for
some
time
led
the
Life
of
an
Observator
with
us
.
Towards
the
Evening
we
had
notice
sent
us
a
Shoar
,
that
we
must
come
aboard
next
Morning
betimes
;
we
went
immediately
all
six
of
us
to
the
Fort
to
take
leave
of
the
Dutch
Gentlemen
,
The
Governour
sends
several
Presents
to
the
Jesuits
.
and
give
them
our
Thanks
:
For
,
indeed
,
we
could
not
be
more
civilly
,
nor
more
kindly
used
than
we
were
.
Besides
when
we
went
on
Board
we
found
Presents
of
Tea
and
Canary
Wine
,
which
the
Governour
sent
us
,
taking
it
kindly
that
we
had
left
with
him
a
Microscope
and
a
small
burning
Glass
.
These
Gentlemen
seemed
all
much
affected
at
our
Departure
.
We
pray
God
,
said
they
,
embracing
us
tenderly
.
That
the
designs
for
which
you
are
going
to
China
may
succeed
,
and
that
you
may
bring
a
great
number
of
Infidels
to
the
knowledg
of
the
true
God.
At
length
we
parted
,
very
much
touched
also
with
their
good
desires
and
civilities
.
As
we
past
by
the
Governours
apartment
.
He
shewed
us
in
a
Tub
full
of
Water
,
two
little
Fish
,
Curious
Fish
brought
from
Japan
.
no
longer
than
ones
Finger
.
The
Portuguese
call
one
of
them
the
Gold-Fish
,
and
the
other
the
Silver-Fish
;
because
,
in
reality
,
the
tail
of
the
Male
seems
to
be
of
Gold
,
and
the
Females
of
Silver
.
He
told
us
that
these
Fish
came
from
China
,
and
that
the
persons
of
Quality
of
these
Countries
as
well
as
the
Japanese
had
an
extraordinary
esteem
for
them
,
and
kept
them
in
their
Houses
out
of
Curiosity
.
We
saw
some
of
them
afterward
in
the
Palace
of
the
General
of
Batavia
,
and
at
Siam
in
the
House
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
chief
Minister
of
that
Kingdom
,
and
of
some
Chinese
Mandarins
.
The
Ambassador
had
prayed
the
Heer
van
Rheeden
Commissary
General
to
write
to
the
General
of
Batavia
,
that
he
would
give
us
a
Pilot
to
conductus
to
Siam
,
and
he
having
undertaken
the
Commission
,
sent
the
Ambassador
,
next
day
,
a
very
obliging
Letter
for
that
General
,
wherein
towards
the
end
he
added
of
himself
,
without
any
Sollicitation
from
us
,
an
Article
in
our
Favours
.
We
spent
the
Night
in
packing
up
our
Instruments
again
,
We
reimbarked
in
order
to
Sail.
and
next
Morning
before
day
we
put
them
into
a
Chaloop
,
which
the
Commander
ordered
to
be
in
readiness
for
us
,
and
so
we
went
on
broad
again
.
This
is
all
that
past
at
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
in
relation
to
our
observations
.
What
care
was
taken
of
the
Catholicks
at
the
Cape
.
Though
we
plied
them
day
and
night
,
yet
they
were
not
our
only
Employment
.
No
sooner
had
we
got
possession
of
our
little
Observatory
,
but
the
Catholicks
of
that
Colony
,
who
are
pretty
numerous
,
had
notice
of
it
,
and
were
thereat
exceedingly
rejoyced
.
In
the
Mornings
and
Evenings
they
came
privately
to
us
.
There
were
some
of
all
Countries
,
and
of
all
Conditions
,
Free
,
Slaves
,
French
,
Germans
,
Portuguese
,
Spaniards
,
Flemings
,
and
Indians
.
The
Sentiments
of
the
Catholicks
on
the
Cape
upon
our
arrival
.
They
who
could
no
otherwise
express
themselves
;
because
we
understood
not
their
Language
,
fell
upon
their
Knees
and
kissed
our
hands
.
They
pulled
Chaplets
and
Medals
out
of
their
Bosoms
to
show
that
they
were
Catholicks
,
they
wept
and
smote
their
Breasts
.
That
Language
of
the
Heart
much
more
touching
than
words
,
wrought
great
Compassion
in
us
,
and
obliged
us
to
embrace
those
poor
People
,
whom
Christian
Charity
made
us
look
upon
as
our
Brethren
.
We
comforted
them
the
best
we
could
,
exhorting
them
to
persevere
in
the
Faith
of
Jesus
Christ
,
humbly
and
faithfully
to
serve
their
Masters
,
and
to
bear
their
troubles
with
Patience
.
We
commended
it
to
them
particularly
that
they
would
examine
their
Consciences
at
night
,
and
honour
the
holy
Virgin
,
who
was
ablest
to
procure
them
more
Grace
to
live
Christianly
,
and
to
keep
them
from
Heresie
.
They
who
spoke
French
,
Latin
,
Spanish
,
or
Portuguese
;
were
confessed
.
We
visited
the
Sick
in
their
Houses
and
in
the
Hospital
.
This
was
all
that
could
be
done
for
their
Consolation
in
so
short
a
time
,
they
not
having
the
Liberty
to
come
on
board
of
us
and
hear
Mass
,
nor
we
to
say
it
to
them
a
Shoar
.
The
Jesuits
are
suspected
of
administing
the
Sacraments
.
Nevertheless
it
must
have
been
suspected
at
the
Cape
that
we
carried
them
the
Sacrament
.
For
two
of
our
Fathers
returning
one
day
from
on
Board
with
a
Microscope
in
one
of
their
Hands
covered
with
Spanish
Leather
gilt
,
two
or
three
of
the
Inhabitants
walking
upon
the
Shoar
,
imagined
it
to
be
the
holy
Sacrament
which
they
were
carrying
to
Catholicks
in
a
Box.
They
drew
near
to
the
Father
to
know
the
truth
of
the
matter
;
the
Father
told
them
what
it
was
,
and
to
convince
them
,
made
them
look
into
the
Microscope
.
Then
one
of
them
told
him
,
Sir
,
I
thought
it
had
been
so
,
because
I
know
that
you
are
the
greatest
Enemies
of
our
Religion
.
We
could
not
but
smile
at
that
saying
,
but
without
making
answer
we
kept
on
in
our
way
strait
to
the
Fort.
To
conclude
all
that
concerns
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
,
it
only
remains
that
I
relate
what
we
learned
of
the
state
of
the
Countrey
.
For
some
of
our
Fathers
were
charged
to
inform
themselves
of
that
,
whilst
the
rest
were
taken
up
about
their
Observations
.
In
that
Prospect
we
made
it
our
Business
to
get
out
of
M.
Vanderstellen
in
the
several
Conversations
we
had
with
him
all
that
could
contribute
to
our
Information
;
and
we
made
acquaintance
with
a
young
Physician
of
Braslon
in
Silesia
,
called
Mr.
Claudius
,
whom
the
Dutch
for
his
great
Capacity
entertain
at
the
Cape
.
Seeing
he
hath
already
travelled
into
China
and
Japan
,
where
it
was
his
Custom
to
observe
every
thing
,
and
that
he
designs
and
paints
Animals
and
plants
perfectly
well
,
the
Hollanders
have
stop'd
him
there
to
assist
them
in
making
their
new
discoveries
of
Countries
,
and
labour
about
the
natural
History
of
Africa
.
He
hath
compleated
two
great
Volumes
in
Folio
of
several
Plants
,
which
are
drawn
to
the
life
,
and
he
hath
made
a
Collection
of
all
the
kinds
which
he
hath
pasted
to
the
Leaves
of
another
Volume
.
Without
doubt
the
Heer
van
Rheeden
who
had
always
these
Books
by
him
at
home
,
and
who
shewed
them
to
us
,
has
a
design
to
give
the
publick
shortly
an
Hortus
Africus
after
his
Hortus
Malabaricus
.
Had
these
Books
been
to
be
sold
,
we
would
have
spared
no
Cost
to
have
bought
them
and
sent
them
to
the
Kings
Library
.
Since
this
learned
Physician
hath
already
made
some
Progresses
Sixscore
Leagues
up
into
the
Country
towards
the
North
and
East
,
there
to
make
new
discoveries
,
it
is
from
him
that
we
got
all
the
knowledg
we
have
of
that
Country
,
of
which
he
gave
us
a
little
Map
made
with
his
own
hand
,
with
some
Figures
of
the
Inhabitants
of
the
Country
,
and
of
the
rarest
Animals
,
which
here
are
inserted
.
The
most
remarkable
things
we
learnt
are
what
follow
.
The
Dutch
finding
that
an
establishment
in
that
place
would
be
convenient
for
their
Ships
,
The
Dutch
setling
on
the
Cape
.
which
they
yearly
send
to
the
Indies
,
treated
with
the
Chief
Heads
of
that
Nation
,
who
consented
for
a
certain
quantity
of
Tobacco
and
Brandy
,
to
surrender
that
Country
to
them
,
and
to
withdraw
farther
up
into
the
Continent
.
This
agreement
was
made
about
the
year
1653
,
and
since
that
time
they
have
taken
a
great
deal
of
pains
to
make
a
firm
setlement
on
the
Cape
.
They
have
at
present
there
a
great
Town
and
a
Fort
with
five
Bastions
which
commands
all
the
Road.
The
air
is
very
good
,
the
Soil
excellent
,
and
Cort
grows
there
as
well
as
in
Europe
;
they
have
planted
Vines
which
yield
a
most
delicate
Wine
.
Wild
Game
they
have
every
where
in
abundance
.
Our
Officers
returned
from
Hunting
and
Fowling
with
wild
Goats
,
Antelopes
,
Pheasant
and
abundance
of
Partridges
as
big
as
the
Wood-hens
of
France
,
The
different
Animals
that
are
to
be
found
on
the
Cape
.
and
there
are
four
sorts
of
them
The
Oxen
and
the
Sheep
are
got
farther
up
amongst
the
wild
Natives
of
the
Country
;
bu●
that
is
a
Traffic
which
the
Company
reserves
to
themselves
,
who
buy
them
up
for
a
little
Tobacco
,
and
sell
them
again
to
the
Inhabitants
of
the
Cape
,
and
to
Strangers
that
put
in
there
for
fresh
Provisions
.
We
saw
Sheep
there
that
weighed
fourscore
pound
weight
,
and
were
very
good
meat
.
They
have
there
also
Civit-cats
,
many
Wildcats
Lyons
and
Tygers
which
have
very
pretty
skins
and
especially
huge
great
Apes
that
comes
sometimes
in
Troops
down
from
the
Table-land
into
the
Gardens
of
private
Persons
,
and
carry
away
their
Melons
and
other
fruit
.
Nine
or
ten
Leagues
from
the
Cape
Eastward
there
is
a
Chain
of
Hills
full
o●
Lyons
,
Elephants
,
and
Rhinocerosses
of
a
prodigious
bigness
.
Men
of
credit
who
have
travelled
there
assured
me
that
they
had
found
the
foot-tra●e
of
an
Elephant
two
foot
and
a
half
in
diameter
,
and
that
they
had
seen
several
Rhinocerosses
as
high
and
big
as
an
ordinary
Elephant
.
A
prodigiou●
Elephant
.
All
that
I
can
say
as
to
that
,
is
that
I
have
seen
the
two
horns
which
that
Beast
carries
on
its
Nose
,
fastned
together
as
they
are
naturally
,
of
a
bigness
and
weight
that
inclined
me
to
believe
that
what
they
told
me
of
it
was
true
.
A
property
of
the
Rhinoceros
.
The
Lieutenant
of
the
Castle
who
went
on
that
Progress
,
told
me
that
the
Rhinoceros
being
in
rage
runs
his
greatest
Horn
into
the
Ground
and
continues
to
run
a
kind
of
Furrow
with
it
,
till
he
come
up
with
him
that
has
smitten
him
.
The
skin
of
that
Beast
is
so
hard
,
that
it
is
Musquet-proof
,
unless
one
take
his
time
to
hit
it
,
when
it
shews
its
Flank
,
the
only
place
of
its
body
where
fire-arms
or
halbards
,
that
the
Travellers
carry
,
can
wound
it
.
There
are
Horses
and
Asses
there
of
extraordinary
beauty
.
The
first
have
a
very
little
head
,
and
pretty
long
Ears
.
They
are
covered
all
over
with
black
and
white
streaks
that
reach
from
their
back
to
their
belly
about
four
or
five
fingers
broad
and
are
very
pretty
to
look
on
,
I
saw
the
skin
of
one
that
had
been
killed
,
which
my
Lord
Ambassador
bought
to
carry
with
him
into
France
as
a
very
curious
thing
.
As
for
the
Asses
,
they
are
of
all
colours
,
they
have
a
long
blew
list
on
the
back
that
reaches
from
head
to
tail
,
and
the
rest
of
the
body
like
the
horse
,
full
of
pretty
broad
streaks
,
blew
,
yellow
,
green
,
black
and
white
,
all
very
lively
.
Stags
are
so
plentiful
there
that
they
are
seen
feeding
in
Flocks
like
Sheep
,
and
I
heard
the
Commanders
Secretary
say
,
and
the
Commander
himself
too
,
that
they
had
seen
ten
thousand
of
them
together
in
a
Plain
which
they
found
in
a
Wood.
There
are
not
so
many
Lyons
nor
Tygers
as
Stags
,
but
yet
there
is
a
great
many
of
them
,
and
I
can
easily
believe
it
because
of
the
vast
number
of
those
Beasts
skins
wherein
they
Trade
at
the
Cape
.
They
keep
not
so
close
to
the
Woods
,
but
that
they
come
sometimes
to
places
inhabited
,
where
they
set
upon
any
thing
they
meet
,
and
even
upon
Men
themselves
.
There
happened
an
instance
of
this
while
we
were
there
,
and
the
Commissary-General
told
us
it
.
Two
Men
walking
at
a
distance
from
their
habitations
perceived
a
Tyger
,
one
fired
at
it
and
missed
if
,
upon
which
it
made
a
spring
at
him
and
brought
him
to
the
ground
:
the
other
seeing
in
what
extreme
danger
his
Comrade
was
,
fired
at
the
Tyger
and
wounded
his
Friend
in
the
thigh
;
The
Tyger
in
the
mean
time
having
received
no
hurt
,
left
his
prey
,
and
made
after
this
Man
;
the
first
getting
up
again
came
in
,
in
the
nick
of
time
and
killed
the
Tyger
.
They
say
that
this
Beast
hath
such
an
instinct
that
amongst
an
hundred
Men
it
will
single
out
him
that
fired
at
it
,
and
leave
all
the
rest
.
A
month
before
,
the
like
accident
almost
happened
of
a
Lyon
who
tore
to
pieces
a
Man
and
his
Servant
,
pretty
near
the
habitations
,
and
was
afterwards
killed
himself
.
At
the
Cape
we
took
a
great
may
excellent
Fish
.
Several
sorts
of
Fish
at
the
Cape
.
Amongst
others
Mullets
,
and
of
those
fish
which
in
France
they
call
Dorades
,
or
Gilt-heads
and
are
far
different
from
the
Dolphin
which
is
much
bigger
and
better
deserves
that
name
,
because
of
its
yellowish
colour
and
golden
specks
,
that
make
it
pass
for
one
of
the
loveliest
Fish
that
swims
in
the
Sea
.
We
took
also
great
numbers
of
Soals
,
and
some
Cramp-fish
.
The
Cramp-fish
is
an
ugly
Fish
and
very
soft
,
which
hath
the
virtue
,
when
they
fish
for
it
,
to
cause
a
numness
in
the
hand
and
arm
.
We
saw
many
Sea-Wolves
there
,
which
seem
to
be
well
enough
named
.
There
are
Pinguins
there
also
.
These
are
water-foul
,
without
wings
,
and
are
constantly
almost
in
the
water
,
being
truly
amphibious
.
In
the
year
1681.
the
Heer
Vanderstel
setled
a
new
Colony
,
consisting
of
fourscore
and
two
Families
,
nine
or
ten
Leagues
farther
up
in
the
Country
,
and
called
it
by
the
name
of
Hollenbok
.
Some
affirm
that
there
are
Gold
Mines
on
the
Cape
.
Golden
Mines
on
the
Cape
.
They
shewed
us
Stones
found
there
which
seemed
to
confirm
that
opinion
;
for
they
are
ponderous
,
and
with
a
Microscope
one
may
discover
on
all
sides
small
particles
that
look
like
gold
.
But
the
most
curious
thing
we
found
on
the
Cape
was
an
exact
Map
of
the
places
about
newly
discovered
by
a
Hollander
,
with
a
Latin
relation
of
the
Nations
that
inhabit
them
.
Both
were
given
us
by
a
Man
of
Credit
who
hath
set
down
nothing
but
what
himself
was
an
eye-witness
of
,
the
translation
of
it
follows
.
The
South
point
of
Africa
is
no
less
remote
from
Europe
,
A
Translation
of
a
Latin
relation
of
the
Places
about
the
Cape
.
than
the
manner
of
its
Inhabitants
are
different
from
ours
.
For
these
People
are
ignorant
of
the
Creation
of
the
World
,
the
Redemption
of
Mankind
,
and
the
Mystery
of
the
most
Holy
Trinity
.
However
they
adore
a
God
,
but
the
knowledge
they
have
of
him
is
very
confused
.
In
honour
of
him
they
kill
Cows
and
Sheep
,
and
Offer
Him
the
Flesh
and
Milk
in
Sacrifice
,
as
a
token
of
their
gratitude
towards
that
Deity
,
who
grants
them
as
they
believe
,
sometimes
Rain
and
sometimes
fair
weather
according
as
they
stand
in
need
of
it
,
they
expect
no
other
life
after
this
.
Notwithstanding
that
they
have
still
some
good
qualities
which
should
hinder
us
from
despising
them
:
for
they
have
more
Charity
and
Fidelity
one
toward
another
then
is
to
be
found
commonly
amongst
Christians
.
Adultery
and
Theft
are
with
them
capital
Crimes
always
punished
by
Death
.
Tho
every
Man
has
the
liberty
to
take
as
many
Wives
as
he
is
able
to
maintain
,
yet
none
of
them
,
not
of
the
richer
sort
is
to
be
found
with
more
than
three
.
These
People
are
divided
into
several
Nations
,
The
Manners
of
the
Inhabitants
of
the
Cape
.
who
have
all
the
same
way
of
living
.
Their
ordinary
Food
is
Milk
and
the
flesh
of
the
Cattle
which
they
keep
in
great
quantity
.
Every
one
of
these
Nations
have
their
Head
or
Captain
whom
they
obey
,
that
Office
is
Hereditary
,
and
goes
from
Father
to
Son.
The
Right
Succession
belongs
to
the
Eldest
,
and
that
they
may
retain
the
Authority
and
Respect
,
they
are
the
only
Heirs
of
their
Fathers
,
the
younger
having
no
other
inheritance
,
but
the
obligation
of
serving
their
Elders
.
Their
Cloaths
are
no
more
but
plain
Sheep-skins
with
the
wool
,
prepared
with
Cows
dung
and
a
certain
Grease
that
renders
them
insupportable
both
to
the
eye
and
smell
.
The
first
Nation
in
the
Language
of
the
Country
,
is
called
Songuas
.
The
Europeans
call
those
People
Hotentots
,
perhaps
because
they
have
always
that
word
in
their
mouth
when
they
meet
Strangers
.
Seeing
they
are
nimble
,
strong
,
bold
,
and
more
expert
than
others
in
handling
their
Arms
,
which
are
the
Javelin
and
Arrows
,
they
go
and
serve
other
Nations
as
Soldiers
,
Their
Arms
and
so
there
is
not
one
Nation
who
besides
their
own
Natives
have
not
also
Songuas
in
their
Militia
.
Their
Food
.
In
their
own
Country
they
live
in
deep
Caves
,
and
sometimes
in
Houses
as
others
do
.
They
live
much
by
Hunting
,
at
which
they
are
very
dextrous
:
they
kill
Elephants
,
Rhinocerosses
,
Elks
,
Stags
,
Antelopes
,
wild
Goats
and
several
other
Beasts
,
of
which
there
is
a
prodigious
quantity
on
the
Cape
,
they
gather
also
at
certain
times
the
Honey
which
the
Bees
make
in
hollow
Trees
and
Rocks
.
I
will
make
a
little
digression
from
this
relation
,
Their
blindness
as
to
matters
of
Religion
.
that
I
may
give
an
account
of
what
we
our selves
have
seen
of
those
people
,
or
what
we
learned
of
them
from
very
sure
hands
.
The
Hotentots
being
perswaded
that
there
is
no
other
life
after
this
,
labour
as
little
and
take
as
much
case
as
they
can
in
this
World.
To
hear
them
talk
even
when
they
are
serving
the
Dutch
,
for
a
little
Bread
,
Their
Opinion
as
to
their
own
way
of
living
,
and
that
of
Strangers
.
Tobacco
,
or
Brandy
,
they
look
upon
them
as
slaves
who
labour
the
Land
of
their
Country
,
and
as
People
of
no
Courage
who
shut
themselves
up
within
Houses
and
Forts
to
secure
them
from
their
Enemies
,
whilst
their
people
Encamp
securely
in
the
open
Fields
without
stooping
so
low
as
to
labour
Land
.
By
that
way
of
living
they
pretend
to
demonstrate
that
they
are
Masters
of
the
Earth
,
and
the
happiest
People
of
the
World
,
because
they
alone
live
in
liberty
and
repose
,
wherein
they
place
their
felicity
.
Whilst
we
were
in
the
Companies
Garden
,
a
leading
Man
amongst
them
seeing
how
civilly
we
were
used
by
the
chief
of
the
Dutch
there
;
came
to
the
Observatory
,
and
there
meeting
Father
Fontenay
,
he
presented
him
with
two
Oranges
,
saying
to
him
in
Portuguese
,
Reverendo
Padre
,
Géral
dos
Ottentots
à
vossa
Senhoria
;
thereby
intimating
that
his
Captain
and
Nation
congratulated
our
arrival
.
Whatever
good
Opinion
they
may
have
of
themselves
,
they
lead
a
wretched
life
.
They
are
nasty
even
to
excess
,
and
it
would
seem
that
they
study
to
make
themselves
hideous
.
When
they
would
deck
themselves
,
they
rub
over
their
heads
,
face
,
and
hands
,
with
the
sutt
of
their
kettles
,
and
when
that
is
wanting
,
they
have
recourse
to
a
certain
kind
of
black
grease
,
that
makes
them
stink
and
look
so
horridly
that
there
is
no
enduring
of
them
.
Hence
is
it
that
their
hair
which
is
naturally
almost
as
woolly
as
the
hair
of
Negroes
,
runs
into
little
round
knots
,
to
which
they
fasten
pieces
of
Copper
or
Glass
.
The
Apparel
of
the
Men
and
Women
.
Those
amongst
them
of
greatest
note
to
these
Ornaments
add
great
Ivory
Rings
which
they
wear
about
their
Arms
above
and
below
the
Elbows
.
Their
food
is
far
more
surprising
than
all
the
rest
for
they
make
a
delicious
dish
of
the
Vermin
that
breeds
in
the
skins
wherewith
they
are
clad
.
We
have
seen
this
oftner
than
once
,
otherwise
we
could
never
have
believed
it
.
The
Women
besides
this
Apparel
,
encompass
their
legs
with
the
guts
of
Beasts
,
or
small
skins
which
they
cut
for
this
use
:
they
do
it
to
preserve
them
from
the
prickings
of
Thorns
,
when
they
go
through
the
woods
,
and
to
have
always
a
present
remedy
against
hunger
if
they
should
be
put
to
a
pinch
.
Their
Attire
consists
of
several
strings
of
Beads
made
of
Shells
or
Bones
of
different
colours
,
whereof
they
make
themselves
Neck-laces
and
Girdles
,
and
some
thicker
Rings
which
they
wear
about
their
Arms.
However
Barbarity
has
not
so
totally
effaced
all
the
Tracts
of
Humanity
in
those
People
,
Their
Moral
Virtues
.
but
that
there
rem●●ns
still
some
footsteps
of
Virtue
:
they
are
trusty
,
and
the
Dutch
allow
them
free
access
into
their
houses
without
any
fear
of
being
Robbed
by
them
.
Nevertheless
it
is
said
,
that
they
are
not
so
reserved
as
to
Strangers
,
or
to
the
Dutch
who
are
new
comers
,
who
know
them
not
so
well
as
to
get
them
punished
for
it
.
They
are
beneficent
and
helpful
,
and
keep
nothing
wholly
for
themselves
.
When
they
have
any
thing
given
them
,
if
it
can
be
divided
,
they
give
a
share
of
it
to
the
first
of
their
acquaintance
they
meet
,
nay
they
'll
hunt
about
for
them
for
that
purpose
,
and
commonly
keep
the
least
share
of
what
they
have
to
themselves
.
When
any
one
amongst
them
is
Convicted
of
a
Capital
Crime
,
as
of
Theft
or
Adultery
,
The
manner
how
they
punish
Crimes
.
the
Captain
and
chief
Men
Assemble
,
and
having
fairly
Tried
the
Prisoner
,
they
themselves
are
the
Executioners
of
their
own
Sentence
,
they
knock
him
on
the
head
with
Cudgels
,
every
one
coming
in
order
and
according
to
his
quality
to
give
him
a
blow
,
The
knowledges
they
have
of
the
Heavens
and
Natural
things
.
after
the
Captain
in
honour
hath
given
him
the
first
;
or
otherwise
they
run
him
through
with
their
Javelins
.
They
say
,
they
are
Astrologers
and
Herbalists
,
and
Men
of
Credit
assured
us
that
they
pretty
well
understood
the
disposition
of
the
Heavens
,
They
are
so
accustomed
to
Liberty
,
that
they
cannot
live
under
the
least
constraint
.
and
that
they
would
distinguish
Simples
,
even
in
the
night-time
by
the
touch
and
smell
.
They
are
excessively
jealous
of
their
Liberty
,
and
the
Dutch
Commander
told
us
that
he
had
a
mind
to
tame
one
of
them
by
making
him
his
Domestick
Servant
in
his
tender
Age
:
However
when
he
was
grown
up
,
there
was
a
necessity
of
giving
him
leave
to
be
gone
,
which
he
instantly
desired
,
saying
,
that
he
could
not
submit
to
the
rack
of
a
regular
life
,
t●at
the
Dutch
and
such
other
Nations
were
Slaves
to
the
Earth
,
and
that
the
Hotentots
were
the
Masters
of
it
,
that
they
were
not
forced
to
stand
with
the
Hat
continually
under
their
Arm
,
and
to
observe
a
hundred
uneasie
Customs
;
that
they
ate
when
they
were
hungry
,
and
followed
no
other
Rules
but
what
Nature
taught
them
,
after
all
they
are
merry
,
sprightly
,
brisk
in
their
words
,
and
seem
to
have
wit
.
They
have
some
very
odd
and
whimsical
Customs
.
When
a
Woman
has
lost
her
first
husband
,
she
ought
afterwards
to
cut
off
as
many
joynts
of
her
fingers
beginning
at
the
little
finger
,
as
she
Marrys
new
Husbands
.
The
Men
in
their
youth
make
themselves
half
Eunuchs
,
pretending
that
that
contributes
much
to
the
preservation
and
encrease
of
bodily
agillity
.
They
are
all
either
Hunters
or
Shepherds
,
The
Hunters
live
in
the
Woods
,
and
the
Shepherds
in
Cottages
:
A
description
of
these
Cottages
.
these
dwell
in
Caves
,
and
live
on
their
Prey
:
these
feed
on
their
Flocks
and
their
Milk
:
They
lodg
in
Huts
made
of
the
branches
of
Trees
,
covered
with
skins
and
mars
like
to
tents
;
the
door
of
them
is
so
low
,
that
there
is
no
entring
but
upon
all
four
,
and
the
roof
so
little
raised
,
that
one
cannot
stand
upright
in
them
.
Four
or
five
Families
lodg
in
one
of
these
hovels
which
is
not
above
five
or
six
Geometrical
paces
in
circumference
:
they
make
the
fire
in
the
middle
,
and
the
apartments
are
only
distinguished
by
holes
dug
in
the
ground
two
foot
deep
.
But
let
us
now
go
on
with
the
Relation
which
we
have
interrupted
.
The
second
Nation
is
that
of
the
Namaquas
,
The
Namaquas
lives
in
Villages
,
and
are
politer
than
the
rest
.
the
Figure
of
whom
is
here
represented
.
The
first
time
we
discovered
them
was
in
the
year
1682.
We
enned
their
Village
,
and
by
some
Caffres
that
served
us
for
Guides
,
we
sent
their
Captain
Tabacco
,
a
Pipe
,
Brandy
,
a
Knife
and
some
bits
of
Coral
.
The
Captain
accepted
our
Presents
,
and
in
gratitude
sent
us
two
fat
Sheep
each
of
whose
Tails
weighed
above
twenty
pound
weight
,
with
a
great
vessel
full
of
Milk
,
and
a
certain
herb
which
they
call
Konna
;
it
is
probable
that
that
famous
Plant
which
the
Chineses
name
Ginsseng
:
for
Monsieur
Claudius
who
hath
seen
it
at
China
,
affirms
that
he
found
two
Plants
of
it
upon
the
Cape
,
and
shew'd
us
the
intire
Figure
of
it
which
he
had
drawn
to
the
life
,
and
which
Monsieur
Thevenet
lately
gave
me
a
sight
of
.
They
●se
Kanna
as
frequently
as
the
Indians
do
Betle
and
Areka
.
Next
day
one
of
their
Captains
came
to
us
:
He
was
a
Man
who
for
the
tallness
of
his
Stature
and
certain
fierceness
in
his
looks
,
was
respected
by
his
Country-People
,
he
brought
along
with
him
fifty
young
Men
,
and
as
many
Women
and
Girls
.
The
Men
car●ied
each
of
them
a
Flute
in
their
hand
made
of
a
●●rtain
Reed
very
well
wrought
,
Their
Musick
and
Instruments
.
which
rendred
a
●etty
pleasant
sound
.
The
Captain
having
given
them
●e
sign
,
they
fell
a
playing
all
together
upon
these
In●●uments
,
with
which
the
women
and
girls
mingled
●●eir
voices
,
and
a
noise
which
they
made
by
clapping
their
hands
.
These
two
Companies
were
drawn
into
●o
rings
one
within
another
.
The
first
,
which
was
the
●tmost
,
and
made
up
of
the
Men
,
encompassed
the
●econd
or
the
ring
of
the
women
,
that
was
within
●hem
,
both
men
and
women
danced
thus
in
a
round
,
●e
Men
turning
to
the
right
hand
and
the
Women
to
he
left
,
Their
way
of
Dancing
.
whilst
an
Old
Man
standing
in
the
middle
with
a
stick
in
his
hand
beat
the
time
and
regulated
their
cadance
.
Their
Musick
at
a
distance
seemed
to
be
pleasant
nay
and
harmonious
too
,
but
there
was
no
kind
of
regularity
in
their
dance
,
or
rather
it
was
a
meer
confusion
.
The
Namaquas
are
held
in
great
reputation
amongst
those
People
,
and
are
accounted
brave
,
Warlick
,
The
Strength
.
Courage
,
and
Manners
.
and
Potent
,
though
their
greatest
Forces
exceed
not
two
thousand
Men
bearing
Arms.
They
are
all
tall
of
Stature
and
strong
,
have
good
natural
sense
;
and
when
any
question
is
put
to
them
,
they
weigh
their
words
well
before
they
answer
,
and
all
their
answers
are
short
and
grave
.
They
seldom
laugh
,
and
speak
very
little
,
the
Women
seem
to
be
nasty
,
and
are
not
near
so
grave
as
the
Men.
The
Vbiquas
are
given
to
Thieving
.
The
third
Nation
are
the
Ubiquas
.
They
are
by
Profession
Robbers
,
and
rob
the
Africans
as
well
as
Strangers
.
Though
they
are
not
able
to
send
five
hundred
Men
into
the
Field
,
yet
it
is
not
easie
to
root
them
out
,
because
they
retreat
into
inaccessible
Mountains
.
The
Gouriquas
make
the
fourth
Nation
which
is
bu●
of
small
extent
.
The
different
Nations
discovered
by
the
Dutch
.
The
Ilassiquas
makes
the
fifth
,
and
are
more
numerous
:
they
are
Rich
and
Powerful
,
little
versed
in
the
art
of
War
;
contrary
to
the
sixth
Nation
,
I
mean
,
the
Gouriquas
who
are
great
Warriours
.
The
seventh
Nation
are
the
Sousiquas
,
and
the
Odquas
are
their
Allies
.
In
the
great
Rivers
there
is
a
Monstrous
Creature
which
they
call
a
Sea-cow
,
The
Sea-cow
.
and
equals
the
Rhinoceros
in
bigness
,
the
Flesh
,
or
to
say
better
,
the
Lard
of
it
is
good
to
eat
,
and
hath
a
very
pleasant
taste
,
I
have
here
given
you
a
cut
of
it
as
to
Trees
,
Plants
and
Flowers
,
there
are
infinit●
numbers
of
them
,
and
those
very
curious
,
not
only
for
their
beauty
,
but
for
their
particular
virtue
also
.
In
the
Progress
they
made
which
lasted
five
Months
,
The
Governor
of
the
Cape
made
a
Progress
up
into
the
Countrey
.
they
advanced
as
far
North-ward
as
the
Tropick
;
that
is
to
say
,
they
discovered
two
hundred
Leagues
of
the
Country
,
keeping
always
within
ten
or
twelve
Leagues
of
the
Western
Ocean
.
The
Commander
Vanderstel
was
there
in
Person
,
accompanied
with
fifty
eight
Men
well
Armed
.
His
Calesh
came
after
him
and
forty
Waggons
with
twenty
eight
Horses
,
three
hundred
Sheep
,
and
a
hundred
and
fifty
Oxen.
These
last
carried
the
Baggage
and
drew
the
Waggons
,
and
the
Sheep
served
for
food
to
the
Travellors
.
He
set
out
with
his
Company
from
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
about
the
latter
end
of
May
,
which
is
the
Winter
time
in
that
Country
,
and
he
chose
that
season
,
that
he
might
not
want
Water
and
Forrage
in
the
Desarts
which
it
behoved
him
to
cross
over
.
They
discovered
some
different
Nations
the
eight
and
twentieth
Degree
of
Latitude
,
who
live
in
a
pleasant
Countrey
abounding
in
all
sorts
of
Fruits
and
Animals
.
Before
they
got
thither
,
they
found
many
Desarts
and
Mountains
one
of
which
was
so
high
,
that
the
Commander
assured
us
they
were
forty
days
in
mounting
up
to
the
top
of
it
.
They
were
all
both
Man
and
Beast
like
to
have
been
killed
with
thirst
,
and
were
many
times
in
danger
of
being
devoured
by
the
wild
beasts
which
they
met
in
Troops
.
The
danger
he
was
in
of
losing
his
life
.
He
had
much
ado
to
save
himself
from
a
Rhinoceros
of
a
huge
bigness
that
was
within
three
steps
of
him
ready
to
tear
him
in
pieces
,
had
he
not
escaped
it
by
flinging
himself
to
one
side
,
and
getting
out
of
sight
of
the
Beast
,
which
sought
about
for
him
a
long
while
to
have
rent
him
.
But
when
they
came
to
the
27th
.
Degree
of
Latitude
about
ten
or
twelve
Leagues
from
the
Coast
of
the
Ocean
;
they
met
with
a
very
numerous
Nation
,
and
far
more
tractable
than
any
they
had
met
with
till
then
.
M.
Vanderstel
had
with
him
two
Trumpets
,
some
Hobois
,
and
five
or
six
Violins
,
and
so
soon
as
the
People
heard
the
sound
of
these
Instruments
,
they
came
flocking
about
them
,
and
sent
for
their
Musique
,
consisting
of
near
thirty
persons
,
who
had
almost
all
different
Instruments
.
He
that
was
in
the
middle
had
a
very
long
Cornet
made
of
the
gut
of
a
Bullock
dried
and
prepared
,
the
rest
had
Flagellets
and
Flutes
made
of
Canes
of
different
lengths
and
thickness
.
They
bore
their
Instruments
much
after
the
same
manner
as
ours
are
,
but
with
this
difference
that
there
is
but
one
hole
,
which
reaches
from
one
end
to
the
other
,
and
is
much
wider
than
that
of
the
Flutes
and
Flagelets
commonly
used
in
France
.
To
tune
them
together
,
they
make
use
of
a
Ring
that
hath
a
little
opening
in
the
middle
,
which
they
move
up
or
down
in
the
pipe
by
means
of
a
little
wand
,
according
to
the
note
they
would
have
it
tuned
to
.
Their
Musick
,
Instruments
and
Dancing
.
They
hold
their
Instrument
with
one
hand
,
and
with
the
other
press
their
Lips
against
the
Instrument
that
so
they
may
blow
full
into
the
Pipe
,
that
Musick
is
simple
,
but
it
is
harmonious
.
He
that
is
Master
of
the
Consort
having
made
all
the
other
Musicians
tune
their
Instruments
according
to
the
Key
and
Note
of
the
Cornet
,
which
he
has
by
him
,
bids
the
Tune
that
is
to
be
played
,
and
with
a
great
stick
beats
the
time
so
as
he
may
be
seen
of
all
.
The
Musick
is
always
accompanied
with
Dances
,
which
consist
in
leaping
,
and
certain
motions
of
the
feet
,
without
budging
out
of
the
place
they
are
in
.
The
Women
and
Maids
,
making
a
great
ring
about
the
Dancers
,
only
clap
their
hands
,
and
sometimes
knock
with
their
feet
in
cadence
.
None
but
the
players
on
the
Instruments
change
their
place
in
Dancing
,
except
the
Master
of
the
Musick
,
who
stands
motionless
that
he
may
keep
them
in
tune
and
time
.
The
Men
are
well
shapen
and
robust
;
they
have
long
hair
,
which
they
suffer
to
hang
down
and
dangle
about
their
shoulders
.
Their
Arms
are
the
Arrow
and
Javelin
,
which
hath
some
resemblance
with
the
Lance
,
their
Apparel
consists
in
a
long
Cloak
of
a
Tygers
skin
,
that
reaches
down
to
their
heels
,
some
of
them
are
as
white
as
the
Europeans
,
but
they
smut
themselves
with
grease
and
the
powder
of
a
certain
black
stone
,
wherewith
they
rub
over
their
face
and
whole
body
.
Seeing
their
Fields
and
Woods
abound
with
very
rare
simples
of
all
sorts
,
they
are
all
Herbalists
.
Many
of
them
are
very
skilful
in
Minerals
too
,
which
they
know
how
to
melt
and
prepare
,
but
they
have
no
great
esteem
for
them
,
perhaps
,
because
there
are
a
great
many
Gold
,
Silver
and
Copper
Mines
in
their
Country
.
Their
Women
naturally
are
very
fair
,
but
to
please
their
Husbands
they
make
themselves
black
as
they
do
.
Married
Women
have
the
upper
part
of
their
head
shaved
,
Their
Apparel
.
and
upon
their
ears
long
sharp
pointed
shells
.
They
cover
themselves
with
the
skins
of
Tygers
,
coloured
Rats
,
which
they
tye
about
their
bodies
with
thongs
.
That
Nation
highly
value
a
certain
kind
of
pith
of
stone
,
which
is
not
to
be
found
but
in
the
heart
of
some
Rock
,
and
is
pretty
hard
and
of
a
very
dark
colour
.
Experience
hath
taught
them
that
that
Mineral
is
of
a
wonderful
Virtue
to
bring
Women
to
Bed
when
they
are
in
Labour
,
and
to
make
their
Cows
,
Sheep
,
and
Goats
easily
bring
forth
.
When
the
Dutch
blew
up
a
great
Rock
with
a
Mine
they
sprung
,
they
were
vexed
and
complained
of
it
as
if
they
had
been
Robbed
of
a
great
Treasure
.
Upon
my
return
I
had
a
piece
of
that
Mineral
given
me
,
with
some
of
the
other
sorts
that
have
been
found
in
that
Country
.
There
are
many
other
sorts
of
Animals
and
Insects
to
be
found
there
,
whereof
these
are
the
Figures
.
The
first
is
a
Serpent
with
horns
,
called
the
Cerastes
which
has
not
been
hitherto
seen
,
and
whose
poison
is
extremely
dangerous
.
Secondly
,
a
Camelion
that
changes
it self
into
all
colours
.
And
has
a
cry
like
to
a
Rat.
Thirdly
,
a
Lizard
,
when
one
strikes
him
he
makes
a
Moan
like
a
Child
that
cries
,
and
growing
angry
bristles
up
his
scales
wherewith
he
is
rough
all
over
.
His
Tongue
is
blewish
and
very
long
,
and
when
any
body
comes
near
him
,
he
is
heard
to
blow
with
great
violence
.
There
is
another
Lizzard
also
to
be
found
there
,
that
is
marked
with
three
white
crosses
,
but
the
bite
of
it
is
not
so
dangerous
as
that
of
the
first
.
From
all
that
hath
been
said
,
it
plainly
appears
,
that
that
Part
of
Africa
is
no
less
Peopled
,
less
Rich
,
nor
less
Fertile
in
all
sorts
of
Fruits
and
Animals
,
than
the
other
Parts
already
discovered
,
though
it
hath
been
so
long
neglected
.
The
People
who
inhabit
it
are
neither
Cruel
nor
Wild
,
and
want
neither
Docility
nor
Wit
,
as
appears
more
and
dayly
,
by
the
Commerce
that
the
Dutch
entertain
with
them
.
But
it
is
their
great
Misfortune
,
and
not
enough
to
be
lamented
,
The
Misfortunes
of
those
Idolatrous
People
,
and
the
small
hopes
there
is
of
converting
them
.
that
●eing
so
numerous
a
People
,
they
have
no
Knowledg
of
the
true
God
,
and
that
no
body
endeavours
to
instruct
them
.
Men
,
indeed
,
travel
over
all
their
Country
,
and
even
visit
them
at
their
Habitations
in
the
thickest
Forests
,
they
cross
over
their
scorching
Desarts
,
and
with
much
Hardship
,
Charges
and
Danger
,
climb
over
their
sleepest
Mountains
.
But
this
is
only
done
to
discover
their
Mines
,
to
examine
the
Plentifulness
of
their
Provinces
,
to
learn
their
Secrets
,
and
the
Virtues
of
their
Simples
,
and
to
grow
rich
by
their
Commerce
.
The
truth
is
,
such
an
Enterprise
,
and
the
Execution
of
so
great
and
difficult
a
Design
would
be
very
laudable
,
if
Zeal
for
the
Salvation
of
their
Souls
came
in
for
a
share
,
and
if
in
trading
with
them
,
one
did
teach
them
the
way
to
Heaven
,
and
the
Eternal
Truths
.
Zealous
Missionaries
,
who
would
look
upon
those
People
as
ransomed
by
the
Blood
of
Jesus
Christ
,
and
for
all
they
are
such
Savages
,
as
ca●able
of
glorifying
God
to
all
Eternity
,
as
the
Nations
who
are
most
Polite
,
would
be
very
necessary
in
that
remote
Part
of
Africa
.
In
the
first
place
,
they
would
be
assistant
to
the
Catholics
of
the
Cape
,
who
are
many
years
without
Mas●es
and
the
Sacraments
,
for
want
of
Priests
.
They
would
at
the
same
time
instruct
the
Hottentates
,
already
known
,
and
the
more
easie
to
be
won
over
●o
Jesus
Christ
,
that
they
have
no
considerable
Vice
that
may
divert
them
from
Christianity
.
In
●rocess
of
time
they
might
advance
up
to
the
●ore
distant
People
,
of
whom
,
by
Gods
Grace
,
●any
might
be
brought
in
to
the
Sheep-Fold
of
●ur
Saviour
.
Our
Departure
from
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
.
These
are
the
Particulars
concerning
the
Cap
which
we
learned
during
our
abode
there
.
W●
had
resolved
to
weigh
Anchor
the
Sixth
of
Jun●
and
for
that
end
all
were
got
on
Board
in
th●
Morning
,
but
we
wanted
a
Wind
to
carry
us
ou●
Next
day
,
the
Seventh
,
a
Breeze
blowing
fro●
North
,
we
weighed
and
put
under
Sail
about
seven
of
the
Clock
,
and
having
beat
a
little
,
th●
we
might
stand
clear
of
the
Tail
of
the
Lyon
we
doubled
the
Cape
without
any
difficulty
.
They
affirm
this
to
be
one
of
the
most
dangerous
place
in
all
the
Ocean
.
The
truth
is
,
there
is
a
ver●
rough
Sea
there
,
and
there
is
always
danger
wit●
a
contrary
Wind
;
but
,
thanks
be
to
God
,
w●
found
none
,
because
we
had
a
fair
Wind.
W●
had
,
indeed
,
always
very
high
Seas
,
and
our
Shi●
rouled
and
made
so
much
Travel
,
that
we
coul●
neither
stand
nor
sit
without
something
to
hold
by
and
far
less
Rest
in
the
Night-time
.
Howeve●
we
easily
took
heart
,
because
we
made
a
gre●
deal
of
way
with
these
high
West
and
South-we●
winds
.
This
continued
about
eighteen
days
,
i●
which
time
we
ran
near
seven
hundred
League
Nay
,
we
had
made
more
,
but
for
the
Curren●
which
we
met
near
to
the
Isle
of
Madagascar
,
th●
were
contrary
to
us
:
we
ran
at
first
to
the
thirt●
seventh
Degree
of
South
Latitude
,
that
we
might
find
the
westerly
Winds
,
because
in
th●
Season
we
were
in
then
,
they
commonly
reig●
there
.
Nevertheless
,
about
the
time
,
that
's
t●
say
,
on
the
sixteenth
about
eleven
a
Clock
in
to
Morning
,
at
the
height
of
thirty
six
Degre●
South
Latitude
,
whilst
we
were
making
pre●●
good
way
with
a
fair
Gale
,
on
a
sudden
●●
Wind
changed
right
on
head
,
and
back-filled
o●
●alls
with
so
much
violence
,
Navigators
ought
to
be
always
on
their
Guard
about
the
thirty
sixth
Degree
South
Latitude
.
that
we
were
like
to
have
sailed
all
our
Masts
,
and
had
much
ado
to
bring
the
Ship
about
and
get
our
Sails
in
the
Wind
again
.
The
Heer
St.
Martin
warned
us
that
we
should
tell
our
Pilots
not
to
stand
to
the
South
,
but
as
little
as
they
could
,
and
that
so
soon
as
we
should
find
the
West-winds
,
make
the
best
of
our
way
,
and
bear
away
streight
East
.
He
assured
us
that
the
Dutch
had
observed
;
that
the
more
they
stood
to
the
Southward
,
the
more
violent
Winds
they
found
,
and
that
sometimes
they
changed
so
suddenly
from
Stern
to
Stemm
,
that
many
times
they
had
their
Sails
blown
away
,
and
their
Masts
brought
by
the
Board
.
But
there
was
no
necessity
of
giving
this
last
Advice
to
Monsieur
de
Vaúdricourt
,
for
there
never
was
a
more
vigilant
and
industious
Commander
,
and
we
fared
the
better
for
it
,
especially
that
day
;
for
if
the
Ships
Company
had
not
been
looking
out
,
and
the
Officers
upon
the
Deck
,
we
had
run
great
risk
of
losing
,
at
least
our
Masts
and
our
Sails
.
Hereby
it
is
apparent
enough
,
that
the
less
Ships
stand
away
to
the
Southward
,
the
better
it
is
,
and
that
if
they
met
with
westerly
Winds
at
the
height
of
the
Cape
,
they
should
steer
their
Course
,
without
giving
themselves
the
trouble
of
running
into
more
Latitude
,
because
of
the
Winter
Season
,
and
the
Accidents
I
have
been
speaking
of
,
which
without
Caution
and
Circumspection
,
are
not
to
be
avoided
.
It
is
not
the
same
in
coming
back
,
as
we
found
it
in
our
Passage
off
of
the
Isle
Maurice
;
and
I
heard
also
a
Dutch
Pilot
,
whom
we
took
in
at
Batavia
to
carry
us
to
Siam
,
tell
my
Lord
Ambassador
so
.
He
said
,
that
in
the
Summer-time
,
which
we
took
to
return
again
to
the
Cape
,
Necessary
Remarks
for
those
who
are
bound
to
the
Indies
from
the
Cape
.
the
best
way
was
to
stand
away
Southward
to
the
thirty
fifth
or
thirty
sixth
Degree
of
Latitude
,
for
avoiding
some
furious
Gusts
of
wind
,
which
happen
commonly
near
the
Isles
Maurice
and
Medagascar
;
that
these
Gusts
are
like
Hurricanes
,
which
endanger
the
best
Ships
.
That
was
a
very
discreet
Warning
,
and
two
violent
Storms
that
we
met
with
in
those
very
same
Parts
,
as
I
shall
relate
in
its
proper
place
,
convinced
us
of
the
Truth
of
it
.
I
have
already
observed
that
we
were
put
in
vain
Hopes
,
that
being
past
the
Line
,
we
should
find
at
the
height
of
six
or
seven
Degrees
South
Latitude
,
fair
Winds
to
carry
us
to
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
We
were
no
less
deceived
after
we
had
doubled
the
Cape
,
in
our
Expectation
of
the
Westerly
Winds
,
that
were
so
confidently
promised
us
,
if
we
stood
off
to
the
thirty
sixth
or
thirty
seventh
Degree
South
.
We
followed
these
Instructions
;
but
we
found
that
what
the
Heer
Van
Rheeden
said
was
true
,
when
he
assured
us
that
their
Pilots
had
observed
within
these
four
or
five
years
,
that
the
Seasons
and
Winds
were
extreamly
altered
,
and
that
there
was
no
trusting
to
past
Experience
,
but
to
sail
with
all
circumspection
.
Seeing
our
Pilots
steered
their
Course
according
to
the
Instructions
that
were
given
them
in
France
,
they
bore
away
South
to
the
thirty
seventh
Degree
of
Latitude
and
farther
,
that
they
might
preserve
the
West
Winds
,
but
there
we
lost
them
;
for
having
met
with
them
upon
our
setting
out
from
the
Cape
,
they
failed
us
at
the
thirty
fourth
Degree
.
Nay
,
they
began
to
be
both
so
contrary
and
so
high
,
that
we
never
met
with
so
rough
a
Sea
as
we
had
then
;
nothing
but
Mountains
and
Abysses
,
and
the
Waves
broke
against
the
Ship
with
so
much
violence
,
that
they
made
almost
as
great
a
Noise
as
a
Canon
Shot
,
so
that
had
not
she
been
a
strong
Ship
,
and
had
the
Weather
lasted
many
days
longer
,
she
would
have
been
in
great
danger
of
springing
Leaks
,
and
of
being
foundered
.
The
Waves
ran
so
high
,
and
broke
so
violently
,
that
they
went
clear
over
our
Stern
,
and
poured
in
several
Tuns
of
Water
at
a
time
betwixt
Decks
,
which
was
very
uneasy
and
tiresome
to
the
Ships
Company
.
After
six
or
seven
days
,
Prayers
made
for
obtaining
of
fair
Weather
.
these
Winds
did
indeed
abate
a
little
,
but
then
they
became
contrary
.
This
obliged
us
to
have
our
recourse
to
the
Holy
Virgin
,
to
whom
the
whole
Ships
Company
vowed
a
Novenary
,
or
a
nine
days
Devotion
,
to
pray
her
that
she
would
obtain
a
fair
Wind
for
us
,
because
having
made
little
or
no
way
for
near
a
Fortnight
,
we
were
afraid
of
being
forced
to
put
into
the
Coast
of
Malabar
or
the
Isle
of
Ceilon
,
or
at
least
to
come
too
late
to
Batavia
,
for
making
the
Voyage
of
Siam
that
year
.
We
had
the
more
cause
to
dread
that
Delay
,
Sickness
amongst
the
Ships
Company
.
for
that
we
began
to
have
a
great
many
sick
on
board
,
not
only
because
of
the
bad
Weather
,
but
also
of
bad
Victuals
,
which
now
began
to
be
spoilt
.
We
had
at
least
sixty
sick
at
a
time
from
the
Cape
to
Batavia
,
most
of
them
of
Scurvies
,
a
Distemper
which
rotted
their
Legs
,
their
Mouth
,
and
made
their
Teeth
drop
out
.
We
had
then
a
fair
Occasion
to
assist
those
poor
Wretches
in
the
Work
of
their
Salvation
.
We
did
all
we
could
to
administer
to
them
Spiritual
Comfort
in
their
Troubles
,
by
teaching
them
to
make
a
good
use
of
them
.
It
was
easie
to
make
them
resolve
to
resign
themselves
to
the
Will
of
God
,
The
Patience
and
Piety
of
the
Sea-men
.
in
the
violent
Pains
they
endured
,
especially
when
they
were
dressed
;
the
Chirurgeons
being
obliged
to
scarifie
their
Gums
,
even
to
the
Palate
of
their
Mouth
,
and
then
make
them
wash
their
Mouth
with
Vinegar
or
Brandy
to
stop
the
Putrefaction
,
and
hinder
a
Gangreen
.
We
were
sometimes
surprised
to
see
in
what
tranquility
they
were
amidst
their
Pains
;
how
indifferent
as
to
Health
or
Sickness
,
Life
or
Death
,
desiring
nothing
in
this
World
,
but
that
God's
Will
might
be
fulfilled
.
They
shew'd
so
much
Earnestness
to
hear
Mass
and
to
Communicate
,
that
getting
their
Mess-mates
to
carry
them
up
upon
the
Deck
,
you
might
see
them
faint
away
,
and
yet
return
satisfied
,
though
far
sicker
than
before
they
had
performed
their
Devotion
.
Doubtless
this
was
a
great
Comfort
to
us
,
which
was
much
encreased
by
the
Conversion
of
two
poor
Sea-men
Calvinists
,
who
were
shipped
without
the
Ambassadors
knowledge
.
Had
it
been
known
that
they
were
Hereticks
,
they
would
never
have
been
suffered
to
make
their
Voyage
;
but
Divine
Providence
made
use
of
the
Curiosity
they
had
of
going
to
Siam
,
to
bring
them
into
the
way
of
Salvation
.
They
had
much
ado
to
resolve
upon
it
,
but
at
length
,
being
gained
and
instructed
by
one
of
our
Fathers
,
they
publickly
renounced
the
Errors
of
Calvin
.
Father
Fontenay
having
made
a
short
Exhortation
to
them
to
confirm
them
in
the
Resolution
of
living
and
dying
good
Catholicks
,
received
their
Abjuration
the
third
Sunday
after
Whit-Sunday
.
They
were
afterwards
farther
instructed
to
prepare
them
for
their
first
Communion
,
which
sometime
after
they
performed
with
much
Piety
,
and
since
that
time
both
of
them
have
lived
very
exemplarily
in
the
Ship.
We
began
then
our
Novenary
the
seventh
of
July
,
and
next
day
our
Prayers
were
heard
.
God
grants
fair
Weather
at
the
Intercession
of
the
Blessed
Virgin
.
There
arose
so
favourable
a
Wind
,
that
we
made
fifty
Leagues
in
less
than
four
and
twenty
Hours
;
after
that
we
saw
Weeds
and
Foul
in
greater
number
than
usually
,
for
we
had
not
failed
of
having
their
Company
all
the
way
from
the
Cape
to
Batavia
.
It
was
thought
they
came
from
the
Isle
of
St.
Paul
of
Amsterdam
,
which
is
towards
the
thirty
sixth
Degree
of
South
Latitude
,
and
the
eighty
ninth
of
Longitude
.
Having
run
near
a
thousand
Leagues
Eastward
,
we
steered
away
our
Course
Northward
,
that
we
might
make
the
Isle
of
Java
,
which
lies
within
six
Degrees
of
the
Line
Southward
.
Nay
,
for
some
time
we
had
a
fresh
fair
Gale
,
but
July
the
Fifteenth
it
began
to
slacken
so
much
,
that
we
hardly
made
any
Way
at
all
.
The
Seventeenth
of
the
same
Month
,
in
the
Night-time
,
we
re-passed
the
Tropick
of
Capricorn
,
and
from
that
day
forward
we
sailed
as
near
as
we
could
upon
a
Wind
,
until
we
came
in
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Java
.
For
we
were
afraid
of
falling
too
much
to
the
Northward
,
A
Caution
not
to
be
neglected
in
that
course
.
and
by
consequence
to
the
Leeward
of
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
which
would
have
mightily
perplexed
us
,
because
the
Trade-winds
and
Currents
that
are
in
those
Parts
,
not
suffering
us
to
enter
it
,
we
would
have
been
obliged
to
put
into
the
Isle
of
Ceilon
or
Sumatra
.
Therefore
we
desired
Winds
that
might
suffer
us
to
bear
away
more
to
the
East
,
to
the
end
we
might
come
up
with
the
Land
of
Java
.
However
,
perceiving
that
the
contrary
Winds
still
continued
,
on
Wednesday
the
five
and
twentieth
of
July
,
we
held
Counsel
to
determine
,
whether
or
not
we
should
bear
away
still
North-east
,
that
we
might
pass
betwixt
the
Isles
of
Cocos
and
the
Trial
,
or
if
we
should
go
and
make
New-Holland
.
Two
of
our
Pilots
were
of
this
last
Opinion
,
trusting
to
particular
Instructions
that
set
off
the
Course
so
,
and
they
alledged
that
the
Winds
changed
not
,
and
that
if
we
went
and
made
these
Lands
,
they
would
be
fair
for
us
for
entering
into
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
.
The
other
three
were
against
it
,
because
of
the
Dangers
that
are
to
be
met
with
along
that
Coast
,
and
the
many
Shipwracks
that
happen
there
;
besides
,
they
made
it
appear
that
it
was
very
difficult
to
pass
betwixt
the
Trial
and
the
Land
,
The
Trial
are
three
pretty
low
Islands
.
and
that
so
it
was
better
to
make
up
to
the
Isle
of
Java
.
They
said
that
in
a
short
time
the
Winds
would
change
,
or
that
at
worst
we
might
put
in
to
Sumatra
,
that
this
Course
,
though
irksome
enough
,
was
nevertheless
safe
,
and
that
it
was
better
to
resolve
upon
it
,
than
to
run
the
risk
of
being
cast
away
.
This
last
advice
was
followed
,
and
it
proved
to
be
the
best
,
as
may
be
seen
in
the
Sequel
.
The
truth
is
,
the
Winds
,
became
no
fairer
afterwards
than
they
had
been
before
;
but
seeing
the
Isles
of
Java
was
not
so
far
from
us
as
our
Pilots
,
relying
upon
their
Carts
,
imagined
,
in
a
short
time
we
found
our selves
a
good
deal
higher
than
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
and
we
entered
it
as
you
shall
hear
.
We
would
not
trust
to
the
Experience
and
good
advice
of
Monsieur
de
St.
Martin
,
who
assured
us
that
the
Isle
of
Java
was
ill
placed
in
the
common
Maps
,
and
that
it
was
about
an
hundred
Leagues
nearer
the
Cape
,
and
much
more
to
the
Leeward
than
was
believed
.
We
hold
on
that
course
then
,
steering
North
East
,
in
hopes
of
a
fairer
Wind
;
The
W●●●ing
contr●●
we
be
took
our selves
to
Prayers
again
.
but
seeing
after
long
Sailing
the
wind
changed
not
,
we
vowed
another
Novenary
,
which
we
began
with
fresh
Zeal
and
Devotion
.
About
me
half
of
the
Shi●
;
Company
were
dangerously
dark
,
and
〈◊〉
were
so
feeble
and
spent
,
that
they
cold
●●t
work
the
Ship.
The
Sea-men
of
St.
Malo
show
a
particular
Devotion
.
The
Seamen
who
be●●ed
●o
St.
Malo
,
resolved
to
give
s●ne
Token
of
their
Devotion
towards
St.
Saviour
●heir
Pat●●n
.
They
sent
two
or
three
of
their
Number
to
one
of
our
Fathers
,
to
pray
him
that
he
would
assist
them
in
their
good
Desires
,
and
prescribe
to
them
what
was
to
be
done
for
rendring
their
Vow
acceptable
to
their
Holy
Patron
.
This
Custom
they
have
amongst
them
,
which
they
inviolably
observe
,
that
when
they
are
in
any
Danger
at
Sea
,
they
promise
to
St.
Saviour
to
go
and
visit
his
Church
in
Linnen
,
that
's
to
say
,
in
their
Shirt
,
to
communicate
there
,
and
to
have
a
solemn
Mass
sung
.
They
had
already
agreed
among
themselves
to
make
this
Vow
,
many
of
their
Townsmen
,
who
were
sick
of
the
Scurvey
,
put
that
Thought
into
their
Minds
,
and
egg'd
on
to
the
Performance
of
it
.
When
they
had
proposed
their
Design
,
they
were
told
that
they
must
begin
by
Confession
and
Communicating
,
that
so
they
might
be
in
a
Condition
to
have
their
Prayers
heard
.
They
prepared
themselves
accordingly
during
the
rest
of
the
Week
,
and
on
Sunday
all
of
them
confessed
and
communicated
.
When
they
had
done
so
,
the
Father
to
whom
they
had
applied
themselves
,
went
up
upon-the
Fore-castle
,
and
having
made
them
to
kneel
,
published
aloud
the
Promise
which
they
made
to
God
,
if
by
the
Intercession
of
St.
Saviour
,
they
obtained
a
fair
Wind
,
and
a
happy
Return
into
their
own
Country
.
Providence
,
without
doubt
,
is
in
all
places
wonderful
,
but
I
dare
be
bold
to
say
,
and
I
have
often
found
it
by
Experience
,
that
it
shows
it self
in
a
particular
manner
at
Sea
.
We
had
never
begged
fair
Weather
with
greater
Confidence
,
and
we
never
thought
we
stood
more
in
need
of
it
,
during
all
our
Voyage
.
Nevertheless
God
would
not
hear
our
Prayers
,
and
we
were
asto●●●d
to
find
our selves
already
at
the
end
of
our
M●●enary
,
without
any
the
least
sign
of
the
change
of
Weather
Gods
special
Protection
of
our
Ship.
But
we
were
soon
happily
undeceived
,
and
we
found
that
after
all
our
Vow●
and
Prayers
,
we
must
resign
our selves
to
the
Providence
of
God.
For
had
our
Prayers
been
heard
,
and
had
God
granted
us
the
Wind
which
we
so
earnestly
begged
;
on
the
Twelfth
of
August
,
in
the
Night-time
,
we
had
infallibly
run
foul
of
a
little
low
Island
,
and
been
in
great
danger
of
being
cast
away
.
We
did
not
make
that
Isle
before
next
Morning
at
break
of
Day
,
when
we
had
already
past
almost
one
half
of
it
,
being
no
more
but
about
two
Leagues
off
on
't
:
So
that
if
that
Night
we
had
had
a
fair
Wind
to
carry
us
streight
North-East
,
as
our
Pilots
thought
best
for
us
,
we
could
not
have
avoided
being
lost
;
because
that
Isle
lies
almost
in
the
tenth
Degree
of
Latitude
,
for
some
time
we
took
it
to
be
the
Isle
of
Cocos
,
which
we
thought
we
had
already
past
,
and
the
rather
,
because
it
is
marked
in
the
Sea-charts
to
lye
in
the
twelfth
Degree
of
South
Latitude
.
We
could
not
imagine
that
it
should
be
the
Isle
of
Mony
,
the
most
Southern
,
The
Perplexity
we
were
in
before
we
came
to
the
Isle
of
Java
.
and
most
Eastern
of
the
two
Isles
,
which
lye
near
the
Coast
of
Java
,
either
because
Mony
is
set
down
in
the
common
Charts
to
be
in
eight
Degrees
of
Latitude
,
or
else
because
we
did
not
all
that
Day
,
nor
next
,
see
the
other
little
Isle
which
is
very
near
to
it
.
And
so
our
sick
Men
,
who
were
in
very
great
number
,
having
turned
out
to
see
Land
,
were
much
dejected
when
they
found
it
was
not
that
which
they
expected
;
but
they
had
far
sadder
Hearts
,
when
they
came
to
understand
that
we
did
not
know
where
we
were
.
In
this
Doubt
we
took
the
surest
Course
,
and
steered
away
East
,
for
fear
of
falling
to
the
Leeward
of
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
into
which
it
would
have
been
difficult
to
enter
,
by
reason
of
the
South
and
South-East
Wind
that
reigns
there
constantly
in
that
Season
.
But
we
came
to
know
afterward
that
it
was
Mony
,
when
we
saw
exacter
Charts
at
Batavia
,
which
placed
that
Isle
just
in
ten
Degrees
eleven
Minutes
South
Latitude
.
The
Treasurer
General
show'd
us
,
that
the
first
Day
we
went
ashoar
,
when
we
acquainted
him
with
the
Danger
we
had
been
in
,
he
called
an
old
Pilot
who
shew'd
us
in
a
great
Chart
that
Isle
placed
exactly
as
we
found
it
.
The
Signs
of
being
near
the
Land
of
Mony
,
are
three
sorts
of
Birds
,
which
the
Sea-men
call
Boobies
,
Frigats
and
Tropick
Birds
,
or
Straw
in
Tails
,
according
to
the
French.
The
first
suffer
themselves
to
be
catcht
with
the
Hand
,
when
in
the
Fore-part
of
the
Night
they
come
and
perch
upon
the
Yards
of
the
Ship
,
and
the
Last
have
Feathers
in
the
Tail
about
twenty
inches
long
,
which
one
would
take
for
Straws
,
seeing
them
at
a
distance
,
and
that
's
the
reason
the
French
call
them
by
that
Name
.
In
all
that
long
Passage
we
saw
nothing
remarkable
,
unless
it
were
some
Porposes
pretty
different
from
those
we
formerly
spoke
of
,
as
to
Bigness
,
Shape
and
Colour
;
for
they
are
bigger
and
whiter
by
one
half
,
and
have
the
Snout
shorter
,
and
almost
round
,
as
you
may
see
by
the
Figure
of
them
in
the
following
Map
of
the
Road
of
Bantam
.
Seeing
they
are
fairer
than
the
others
,
and
that
many
took
them
at
first
for
the
Dorado's
,
we
thought
they
were
the
Fish
known
to
the
Antients
by
the
Name
of
Dolphins
.
We
caught
no
Fish
from
the
Time
we
put
out
from
the
Cape
,
the
Seas
being
too
rough
for
Fishing
.
We
saw
Grampusses
which
are
like
little
Whales
,
and
some
others
bigger
,
that
spouted
the
Water
up
in
the
Air
above
fifteen
or
sixteen
foot
high
,
by
what
we
could
judge
at
the
distance
we
saw
them
at
.
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
Third
BOOK
.
The
Voyage
from
the
Isle
of
Java
to
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
AVgust
5.
We
Discovered
a
great
Coast
of
Land
,
and
standing
in
with
it
,
Arrival
at
the
Isle
of
Java
.
found
it
to
be
the
Isle
of
Java
,
when
we
thought
our selves
to
be
far
from
it
.
This
made
us
observe
that
that
Island
lies
much
more
to
the
West
,
A
considerable
mistake
in
the
Hydrographical
and
Geographical
Charts
.
and
by
consequent
is
nearer
by
threescore
Leagues
to
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
than
it
is
marked
in
the
Geographical
Maps
.
Therefore
it
was
that
we
came
in
with
the
Land
above
threescore
Leagues
farther
up
than
the
most
Western
point
of
that
Isle
which
we
lookt
for
.
An
error
to
be
imputed
to
the
Charts
,
and
not
to
the
inability
of
the
Pilots
,
who
all
along
Sailed
very
exactly
,
and
always
kept
reckoning
that
we
should
make
the
Land
the
same
day
that
we
saw
it
,
both
at
the
Isle
of
Java
and
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
,
as
we
have
already
observed
.
The
sight
of
these
Lands
seemed
somewhat
rare
to
us
;
they
are
covered
with
Trees
of
a
most
lovely
verdure
,
which
yield
a
pleasant
smell
to
the
Ships
that
Sail
along
the
Coast
,
at
two
or
three
Leagues
distance
.
We
Coasted
along
that
Isle
with
so
good
a
wind
,
that
in
a
day
and
a
halfs
time
we
made
the
sixty
Leagues
which
we
had
run
too
far
to
the
East
,
and
Monday
evening
the
sixth
of
August
,
were
got
to
the
entry
into
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
which
is
made
by
the
Isles
of
Java
and
Sumatra
.
But
what
surprised
us
more
,
and
was
a
sign
of
Gods
particular
Providence
upon
our
Voyage
,
the
same
evening
that
we
saw
the
entry
into
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
we
made
the
Maligne
,
which
was
separated
from
us
by
the
bad
weather
I
mentioned
,
June
24.
in
the
night
time
,
and
which
we
had
never
seen
since
.
Though
my
Lord
Ambassador
and
several
others
took
it
to
be
the
Frigat
,
yet
we
could
not
be
sure
of
that
,
because
it
was
already
late
,
and
the
weather
dark
.
We
were
not
certain
it
was
she
till
eight
days
after
in
the
Road
of
Bantam
where
we
joyned
her
again
.
The
Pilots
who
were
aboard
of
her
having
made
the
Streight
in
good
time
,
put
into
it
,
and
having
a
fair
wind
came
to
the
place
of
Anchoring
.
But
it
being
usual
to
shoot
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
betwixt
the
Princes
Isle
and
Sumatra
,
keeping
as
near
as
may
be
to
the
Princes
Isle
,
which
we
could
not
make
plainly
because
of
the
night
,
we
were
forced
to
tack
and
stand
off
to
Sea
all
the
night
long
.
So
that
since
we
could
not
make
the
best
of
the
fair
weather
which
then
we
had
,
which
would
have
easily
carried
us
beyond
the
Princes
Isle
,
we
fell
too
low
,
and
spent
the
rest
of
the
week
in
the
Streight
,
which
is
not
above
thirty
Leagues
in
length
,
strugling
and
beating
against
the
Currents
and
contrary
winds
.
One
of
our
Pilots
assured
us
that
the
Sun
of
the
East
of
which
he
was
aboard
in
an
East-India
Voyage
,
was
three
full
weeks
stopped
there
,
and
could
not
get
to
Bantam
but
as
she
was
towed
with
Boats.
We
entred
then
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
three
days
after
we
made
the
Land
of
Java
,
but
the
Princes
Island
lying
at
the
mouth
of
the
streight
betwixt
Java
and
Sumatra
,
and
dividing
it
into
two
,
we
entred
by
the
more
Northern
Passage
,
which
is
the
larger
and
safer
betwixt
the
Princes
Isle
and
Sumatra
.
We
made
many
Tacks
to
double
the
Isle
of
Cacatoua
(
so
called
because
of
the
white
Parrots
that
are
upon
that
Isle
,
which
incessantly
repeat
that
name
)
we
did
,
I
say
,
all
that
lay
in
our
power
to
double
the
Isle
or
Cacatoüa
,
which
lyes
pretty
near
to
Sumatra
,
that
so
we
might
stand
in
with
the
Land
of
Java
:
but
all
our
attempts
were
unsuccessful
because
the
wind
was
too
weak
,
and
Currents
too
strong
in
the
middle
of
the
Channel
.
That
which
causes
the
Currents
,
is
because
the
water
that
for
several
Months
has
been
forced
into
the
Streights
by
the
South
and
South-west-winds
,
which
reign
commonly
from
the
Month
of
March
to
September
,
set
our
again
impetuously
during
the
other
six
Months
of
the
year
,
being
bent
back
by
the
East
and
North
East
winds
.
We
had
the
wind
so
cross
,
and
the
Currents
so
contrary
,
that
it
was
thought
best
to
keep
as
close
in
as
we
could
by
the
Shore
of
the
Princes
Isle
,
Breezes
rise
on
Sumatra
at
certain
hours
of
the
day
.
by
the
help
of
some
Breezes
that
came
from
Sumatra
,
and
which
for
some
hours
interrupted
the
great
heats
and
dead
calms
that
are
common
in
that
season
in
the
Streights
of
the
Sound
.
By
the
help
of
those
little
Breezes
we
were
in
hopes
by
little
and
little
to
come
up
with
the
Land
of
Java
,
but
it
behoved
us
first
to
double
the
Princes
Isle
which
is
pretty
big
,
and
lies
in
the
mouth
of
the
Streight
.
After
all
,
the
view
which
we
had
of
the
Land
and
of
several
small
Islands
all
decked
in
verdure
comforted
us
a
little
,
for
the
time
which
we
lost
in
that
Streight
.
The
danger
the
Ship
was
in
,
in
the
Streight
.
Nay
we
were
like
to
have
been
stranded
one
night
upon
the
Princes
Isle
,
as
we
endeavoured
to
bear
close
in
with
it
.
We
had
not
observed
that
the
Tide
which
was
not
perceived
in
the
middle
of
the
Streight
,
was
pretty
strong
near
Land
,
and
seeing
we
resolved
to
rake
along
very
near
the
Shore
,
because
the
Coast
is
safe
,
and
that
within
a
Pistol-shot
of
Land
there
is
no
ground
to
be
found
,
that
night
we
fetcht
aboard
into
the
Island
,
that
we
might
recover
what
the
Currents
and
Tide
had
made
us
lose
the
day
before
.
Hardly
were
we
got
out
of
the
strength
of
the
Currents
,
when
the
Officer
that
was
upon
the
Watch
,
and
the
Seamen
who
were
upon
the
Deck
,
took
notice
that
the
Ship
ran
apace
towards
Land
.
They
had
only
time
to
tack
about
and
stand
off
,
which
was
done
so
much
in
the
nick
,
that
when
the
Ship
was
about
,
and
the
Sails
trimmed
,
one
might
easily
have
thrown
a
stone
on
Shore
,
from
the
Poup
of
our
Ship.
If
Ships
could
come
to
an
Anchor
in
the
Streight
,
they
would
not
be
exposed
to
that
danger
;
but
no
ground
being
to
be
found
in
it
,
at
least
off
of
the
Princes
Isle
,
we
were
forced
to
keep
continually
under
Sail
,
and
when
it
was
a
Calm
to
keep
at
large
amongst
the
Currents
,
which
made
us
lose
sometimes
in
less
than
three
hours
what
with
small
Breezes
we
had
got
in
four
before
.
Thus
we
spent
several
days
in
passing
that
Island
,
where
we
had
leizure
enough
to
make
tryal
of
the
extraordinary
heats
of
that
Climate
,
and
to
consider
Sumatra
which
appeared
to
us
always
covered
with
a
black
thick
mist
,
and
in
the
evening
with
continual
flashes
of
Lightning
.
Extraordinary
Thunder
and
Lightning
at
Java
and
Sumatra
.
Thunder
is
very
common
there
;
and
amongst
others
we
had
one
Clap
so
hard
and
smart
,
that
many
took
it
for
a
Canon-shot
,
and
some
dabb'd
down
their
heads
,
as
if
it
had
been
to
avoid
the
Bullet
.
At
length
a
good
Breeze
did
our
work
for
us
,
made
us
double
the
Isle
and
carried
us
upon
the
Coast
of
Java
.
When
we
were
got
in
with
that
Land
,
we
advanced
by
little
and
little
,
dropping
an
Anchor
so
soon
as
the
wind
left
us
.
In
the
mean
time
vast
numbers
of
the
Javaners
Canoes
which
they
call
Praux
came
on
Board
of
us
every
minute
.
The
Javaners
came
on
Board
in
their
little
Boats.
These
Boats
are
made
of
one
entire
piece
of
Timber
hollowed
;
and
some
of
them
are
so
little
,
that
with
much
ado
can
they
hold
their
Man
sitting
.
We
were
altogether
astonished
to
see
these
poor
People
venture
out
so
many
Leagues
at
Sea
,
in
such
brittle
Boats
,
wherewith
they
danced
upon
the
Waves
and
advanced
with
incredible
swiftness
,
to
bring
us
fresh
Provisions
.
And
because
these
Praux
Sail
in
a
quite
different
manner
from
other
Canoes
,
I
thought
fit
to
give
you
the
figure
of
one
under
Sail
in
the
Road
of
Bantam
.
The
Javaners
are
well
shaped
and
strong
,
they
seem
to
be
sprightly
and
resolute
,
but
the
extraordinary
heat
of
the
Climate
obliges
them
to
go
almost
naked
.
They
who
live
in
the
middle
of
the
Isle
are
Idolaters
,
and
the
rest
who
inhabit
the
Coasts
are
Mahometans
,
all
Superstitious
to
excess
.
When
they
came
on
Board
,
we
offered
them
Bread
,
Wine
and
Brandy
,
but
there
was
not
one
of
them
that
would
take
any
thing
,
saying
,
that
it
was
their
fasting
time
,
and
that
their
Law
prohibited
the
drinking
of
Wine
.
Notwithstanding
all
this
they
are
bold
Robbers
and
Thieves
.
I
saw
one
of
them
openly
in
the
day
time
carry
off
a
Seamans
shirt
which
he
had
fastned
to
a
line
and
held
it
by
one
end
.
It
was
to
no
purpose
for
him
to
cry
out
and
make
a
noise
;
For
the
Javaner
who
held
it
only
in
one
hand
and
row'd
with
the
other
,
was
too
strong
for
him
,
and
carried
it
clearly
away
.
The
whole
Nation
are
not
subject
to
this
Vice
,
and
there
are
some
of
them
very
faithful
.
One
of
them
coming
on
Board
of
us
to
sell
some
small
refreshments
,
he
seemed
to
be
so
honest
,
that
some
Gentlemen
of
the
Ambassadors
retinue
,
who
could
not
go
ashore
to
buy
some
things
they
stood
in
need
of
,
trusted
him
with
their
Money
.
He
promised
to
bring
them
what
they
desired
against
the
time
they
had
prefixt
.
This
Javaner
was
so
true
to
his
word
,
that
the
Ambassador
having
ordered
to
set
Sail
before
the
appointed
hour
,
he
nevertheless
got
into
his
Praux
with
his
Provisions
,
and
made
so
much
hast
that
he
came
up
with
the
Ship
,
and
gave
an
account
of
his
Commission
and
brokeage
even
to
the
last
farthing
.
We
did
not
come
to
sight
of
the
Road
of
Bantam
before
the
fifteenth
of
August
,
The
Road
of
Bantam
.
the
Assumption
day
of
our
Lady
,
as
we
had
arrived
at
the
Cape
on
the
Ascention
day
of
our
Lord
.
This
is
one
of
the
fairest
and
most
commodious
Roads
in
the
World.
It
is
about
eight
or
nine
Leagues
in
circumference
.
The
Land
on
all
sides
is
but
low
,
and
yet
there
is
always
very
smooth
water
in
it
.
The
Town
of
Bantam
which
is
pretty
big
lyes
at
the
middle
of
the
B●y
,
and
the
houses
of
it
are
all
of
Wood.
Towards
the
middle
of
the
Road
,
there
is
a
small
Fort
,
●here
the
King
lives
,
and
where
the
Dutch
,
since
they
became
Masters
of
it
keep
a
good
Garrison
,
till
they
have
time
to
build
a
strong
Fort
,
which
is
already
pretty
well
advanced
.
Bantam
was
heretofore
a
Town
of
Trade
especially
for
Pepper
,
where
all
the
Europeans
entertained
great
Commerce
.
But
for
these
two
or
three
years
that
it
is
fallen
into
the
hands
of
the
Dutch
,
in
the
manner
we
shall
hereafter
relate
,
none
are
suffered
to
come
to
it
,
and
all
the
Trade
is
removed
to
Batavia
.
Hear
you
have
the
view
of
it
as
it
appeared
to
us
after
we
came
to
an
Anchor
.
At
first
we
designed
to
go
to
Batavia
to
take
in
fresh
Provisions
,
but
the
season
being
already
far
spent
,
we
were
afraid
we
might
lose
the
Mousson
;
that
is
to
say
,
the
proper
time
tor
Sayling
to
Siam
.
Besides
the
passage
from
Bantam
to
Batavia
,
tho
not
above
fourteen
or
fifteen
Leagues
in
length
,
being
very
difficult
,
because
of
Islands
,
Banks
●nd
Rocks
on
all
hands
,
it
was
thought
convenient
to
stop
in
the
Road
of
Bantam
,
that
we
might
lose
no
time
,
and
get
more
speedy
relief
for
our
sick
Men
,
who
for
most
part
were
in
a
sad
condition
.
And
therefore
my
Lord
Ambassador
resolved
next
Morning
to
send
to
Bantam
to
him
who
commanded
in
the
Fort
for
the
Dutch
,
and
to
demand
permission
of
him
to
take
in
fresh
Provisions
,
and
put
our
sick
Men
on
Shore
.
That
is
the
Sovereign
remedy
for
that
distemper
,
which
the
French
call
the
Land-Evil
,
and
which
to
speak
properly
,
is
nothing
else
but
a
corruption
of
the
Blood
caused
by
bad
Food
and
salt
Victuals
.
This
evil
begins
commonly
in
the
Gums
,
which
at
first
grow
very
red
,
then
black
,
and
at
last
entirely
rot
;
so
that
to
prevent
the
Corruption
from
spreading
farther
,
the
rotten
Flesh
must
every
day
be
cut
off
from
about
the
Teeth
,
which
easily
drop
out
,
if
Remedies
be
not
used
.
This
corruption
gets
also
into
the
Legs
and
Thighs
,
which
swell
and
become
livid
.
A
Remedy
for
the
Land-Evil
.
There
is
no
curing
of
those
that
are
ill
of
it
,
but
by
putting
them
on
Shore
,
and
giving
them
wholesome
Food
.
Some
Chyrurgeons
bury
them
up
to
the
neck
in
Sand
for
several
days
(
others
bath
them
in
fresh
water
,
and
many
times
these
Remedies
have
succeeded
.
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
is
sent
to
the
Governor
of
Bantam
.
Before
we
came
to
an
Anchor
in
the
Road
of
Bantam
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
was
by
Orders
from
the
Ambassador
gone
to
the
Town
to
pay
a
visit
to
the
Governor
,
but
he
had
no
sooner
passed
a
little
Island
,
behind
which
we
lay
at
Anchor
,
than
he
saw
the
Frigat
also
at
Anchor
,
on
the
other
side
of
that
Island
within
three
Leagues
of
Bantam
,
He
found
the
Maligne
and
re●urned
on
Board
with
the
Lieutenant
of
the
Frigat
.
and
steered
streight
towards
her
.
Those
who
were
on
Board
the
Maligne
were
overjoyed
at
his
coming
,
they
being
more
concerned
for
us
than
we
were
for
them
:
because
the
Oseau
being
a
far
better
Sailer
than
their
Frigat
,
they
thought
we
had
been
already
a
great
way
beyond
Bantam
.
But
they
having
met
with
fairer
winds
than
we
did
,
in
the
course
they
had
steered
;
they
had
been
already
four
or
five
days
in
the
Road
,
and
heard
no
news
of
us
.
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
was
informed
of
Monsieur
de
Joyeux
Captain
of
the
Maligne
and
of
Monsieur
de
Tertre
his
Lieutenant
,
The
bad
reception
those
of
the
Maligne
met
before
our
Arrival
at
Bantam
.
in
what
manner
the
Governor
of
Bantam
received
their
Complement
.
They
told
him
that
they
could
not
have
Audience
of
the
King
,
tho
they
had
long
waited
for
it
,
and
were
put
in
hopes
by
the
Dutch
of
obtaining
it
;
that
they
could
not
so
much
as
speak
to
the
Governor
of
their
Nation
,
whom
they
have
setled
there
,
nor
have
leave
to
buy
fresh
Provisions
.
The
Lieutenant
of
the
Fort
made
known
to
Mr.
de
Tertre
in
the
name
of
the
King
of
Bantam
,
and
of
the
Governor
who
was
sick
,
that
the
Kings
Affairs
did
not
permit
his
Majesty
,
to
suffer
Strangers
to
come
ashore
;
that
his
Throne
was
not
yet
well
fixed
;
that
his
People
repining
at
the
present
Government
,
longed
for
some
Change
,
that
they
were
ready
every
minute
to
rise
upon
the
first
appearance
of
any
Succours
which
they
were
made
to
expect
from
England
;
and
that
so
the
French
ought
not
to
take
it
ill
,
that
that
Prince
was
upon
his
Guard
;
and
that
the
Dutch
who
were
only
concerned
as
his
Allies
and
Friends
,
and
who
served
only
as
Auxiliary
Forces
,
should
receive
and
obey
his
Orders
.
The
French
Officer
being
netled
at
that
answer
,
and
thinking
that
he
saw
to
the
bottom
of
such
an
uncivil
procedure
,
replyed
that
it
would
be
thought
very
strange
that
the
Dutch
who
in
Europe
make
profession
of
keeping
and
entertaining
Peace
and
good
Intelligence
so
carefully
with
the
French
,
would
not
grant
them
in
the
Indies
,
that
which
is
not
refused
but
to
declared
Enemies
;
that
certainly
the
King
his
Master
would
t●ke
it
extremely
ill
,
that
they
should
use
his
Ships
so
;
and
that
in
short
,
it
was
well
enough
known
that
they
could
do
any
thing
at
Bantam
;
that
the
King
,
of
whose
Authority
they
made
a
pretext
to
cloak
their
refusal
,
was
wholly
at
their
disposal
,
nay
,
and
guarded
by
their
Soldiers
too
.
To
these
words
the
Dutch
Lieutenant
made
answer
,
that
it
would
be
in
vain
for
him
to
endeavour
to
remove
out
of
Mr.
de
Tertre's
mind
the
disadvantagious
suspicions
,
wherewith
he
saw
him
prejudiced
against
those
of
his
Nation
,
that
the
French
would
be
undeceived
if
they
would
go
to
Batavia
where
the
Dutch
were
the
Masters
,
and
where
they
would
be
made
sensible
of
the
respect
those
people
had
for
the
King
,
and
of
their
esteem
for
the
French
Nation
.
It
was
to
no
purpose
for
Monsieur
de
Tertre
to
complain
;
for
that
was
all
the
answer
he
had
,
so
was
obliged
to
return
on
Board
again
.
Mutual
Presents
of
the
Governor
of
Bantam
and
the
Captain
of
the
Frigat
.
Next
day
the
Governor
of
Bantam
sent
to
Monsieur
de
Joyeux
a
great
deal
of
fresh
Provisions
of
the
Fowl
,
Herbs
and
fruits
of
the
Country
;
and
Monsieur
de
Joyeux
returned
the
Civility
by
a
Present
which
he
made
him
of
many
Curiosities
of
France
.
Some
days
after
a
Pangran
came
on
Board
of
the
Frigat
,
(
that
is
the
name
they
give
to
the
Lords
of
Court
)
attended
by
four
Halbadiers
of
the
Natives
.
He
bid
his
Interpreter
tell
the
Captain
that
he
came
from
the
King
his
Master
,
to
tell
the
French
that
that
Prince
was
surprised
to
see
them
still
at
Anchor
in
his
Road
;
that
they
should
weigh
with
all
expedition
,
and
be
gone
from
his
Ports
and
Lands
.
Monsieur
de
,
Joyeux
answered
very
fiercely
,
and
bid
them
tell
the
Pangran
,
that
he
knew
not
what
it
was
to
obey
any
but
the
King
of
France
his
Master
,
and
that
his
answer
to
the
King
of
Bantam
was
,
that
he
would
not
be
gone
till
he
thought
fit
,
and
that
they
durst
not
send
a
Ship
to
fight
him
as
they
had
threatned
.
With
that
the
King
of
Bantams
Envoy
withdrew
without
any
other
complement
.
It
was
easily
believed
that
the
Dutch
Officers
who
were
in
the
Fort
,
The
Governors
Suspition
of
the
French.
made
all
those
Engines
play
,
and
that
they
used
the
Kings
Authority
to
drive
the
French
away
from
the
Town
.
For
the
Governor
not
knowing
the
reasons
which
had
obliged
the
King
to
send
two
Men
of
War
into
the
Indies
,
could
not
think
that
it
was
only
to
carry
an
Ambassador
to
the
King
of
Siam
,
as
he
was
told
:
On
the
contrary
,
the
more
pains
was
taken
to
convince
him
of
it
,
the
more
ground
he
imagined
he
had
to
suspect
that
they
were
part
of
the
Squadron
which
the
Kings
of
England
and
France
sent
to
be
revenged
of
the
Insolencies
that
both
Nations
had
lately
suffered
,
when
the
Dutch
raised
the
Siege
of
Bantam
.
The
Rumor
that
was
spread
abroad
amongst
the
Islanders
,
that
for
a
long
time
they
had
been
Arming
in
England
upon
that
design
,
encreased
his
suspicions
,
and
he
was
easily
perswaded
that
that
Ship
at
Anchor
,
and
another
bigger
which
was
seen
off
in
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
would
soon
be
followed
by
the
whole
Fleet.
To
all
this
it
is
to
be
added
that
the
Javaners
were
furiously
incensed
to
see
the
young
Prince
upon
the
Throne
,
the
Dutch
Masters
of
Bantam
,
The
Javaners
are
mad
to
see
Sultan
Agoum
their
old
King
in
Prison
.
and
their
old
King
kept
close
Prisoner
.
It
did
,
indeed
,
surprise
us
to
hear
these
people
speak
with
so
much
liberty
,
threatning
to
put
the
Dutch
to
the
Sword
,
and
Dethrone
the
King
Regnant
,
if
they
had
Forces
to
assist
them
.
This
news
made
the
Chevalieur
de
Fourbin
resolve
to
put
back
again
to
the
O●seau
and
inform
the
Ambassador
before
he
went
farther
.
He
took
Monsieur
du
Tertre
the
Lieutenant
of
the
Frigat
with
him
in
his
Boat
,
who
himself
gave
the
Ambassador
a
relation
of
all
these
things
in
our
Presence
.
He
added
that
he
had
been
assured
that
the
Mousson
was
not
yet
far
spent
,
and
that
three
weeks
or
a
Month
after
would
be
time
enough
to
set
out
for
Siam
.
The
Ambassador
wondred
much
at
that
Conduct
,
however
,
he
sent
to
Bantam
to
ask
leave
to
take
in
Wood
and
Water
,
thinking
that
the
Governor
of
the
Fort
would
have
more
regard
to
his
Character
,
and
grant
him
a
Prau
(
a
kind
of
very
light
Boat
which
are
commonly
made
use
of
in
those
Isles
)
to
carry
Monsieur
Van
Rheeden's
Letter
to
the
General
of
Batavia
.
The
Ambassador
would
have
no
mention
made
of
the
sick
,
because
he
had
already
caused
them
to
be
put
on
Shoar
for
some
days
in
a
little
neighbouring
Island
,
where
they
were
to
have
Tents
pitched
,
and
so
be
looked
after
till
they
should
recover
.
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
is
sent
to
Bantam
.
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
being
charged
with
these
Orders
put
off
again
anew
for
Bantam
.
At
the
same
time
we
weighed
and
gave
warning
to
the
Frigat
by
a
Gun
to
come
and
Anchor
by
us
in
the
Road
,
at
a
pretty
distance
from
Bantam
,
in
expectation
of
the
Governors
Answer
.
The
Maligne
,
saluted
our
Ship
with
seven
Guns
,
as
she
past
by
her
,
and
we
answered
with
sive
.
About
an
hour
after
noon
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
came
on
Board
again
,
and
brought
the
same
Answer
that
had
been
given
to
the
Lieutenant
of
the
Frigat
,
without
being
able
to
speak
to
the
King
,
or
to
the
Governour
,
who
they
still
sai●
was
sick
.
He
added
that
they
told
him
,
that
they
had
sent
on
Board
the
first
Ship
that
came
to
an
Anchor
,
all
the
fresh
Provisions
they
could
find
in
the
Town
.
When
the
Ambassador
had
heard
that
surly
Answer
,
he
ordered
presently
to
put
under
Sail
,
and
stand
away
for
Batavia
.
We
were
two
days
and
a
half
in
our
Passage
thither
,
We
weigh
from
the
Road
of
Bantam
and
stand
away
for
Batavia
.
being
forced
every
Night
to
come
to
an
Anchor
,
by
reason
of
a
Multitude
of
Islands
,
Rocks
and
Banks
that
lye
in
the
way
,
and
besides
,
none
of
our
Pilots
had
ever
been
there
before
.
However
we
steered
our
Course
fortunately
enough
,
by
means
of
a
very
exact
and
large
Chart
which
by
very
good
luck
one
of
our
Pilots
had
found
out
amongst
others
that
he
had
.
For
comprehending
the
Reasons
of
this
Conduct
,
Several
Revolutions
that
have
happened
in
the
Kingdom
of
Bantam
.
which
seemed
to
be
so
strange
in
the
Dutch
,
it
will
be
pertinent
to
give
a
brief
History
of
the
Prince
Regnant
,
who
hath
made
so
much
noise
in
the
Indies
,
and
given
occasion
of
Discourse
enough
also
in
Europe
.
Sultan
Agoum
,
the
Father
of
Sultan
Agui
,
who
reigns
at
present
,
being
weary
of
wearing
the
Crown
,
resigned
over
the
Government
of
Affairs
into
the
Hands
of
his
Son
,
and
confined
himself
for
the
future
to
his
Seraglio
and
Pleasures
.
The
King
of
Bantam
having
resigned
the
Crown
to
his
Son
,
attempts
to
resume
it
again
.
This
young
Prince
had
a
Mind
to
govern
after
his
own
Fancy
,
without
any
regard
to
the
Instructions
that
his
Father
gave
him
at
his
Coronation
.
He
began
by
removing
all
those
from
Court
,
who
had
had
the
greatest
share
in
the
Administration
of
Affairs
under
the
late
Reign
;
whether
it
was
that
he
was
displeased
with
their
Conduct
,
or
that
he
looked
upon
them
as
secret
Spies
,
that
would
give
his
Father
an
Account
of
all
that
he
should
act
in
the
Government
.
Amongst
others
,
he
banished
two
Pangrans
,
whom
his
Father
had
chiefly
recommended
to
him
.
This
was
a
sensible
Blow
to
Sultan
Agoum
,
who
began
to
be
convinced
,
but
too
late
,
that
it
was
easier
to
quit
a
Scepter
,
than
not
to
repent
of
it
after
one
hath
laid
it
down
.
He
could
not
forbear
to
complain
of
it
to
his
Son
,
and
to
tell
him
,
that
it
surprised
him
to
see
that
his
Recommendation
,
and
the
wise
Councils
which
he
had
given
him
,
had
made
but
so
small
an
Impression
upon
his
Mind
;
but
the
young
King
netled
at
this
Expostulation
,
which
he
lookt
upon
as
a
heinous
Reproach
,
sent
Orders
immediately
to
have
those
two
Lords
dispatched
.
This
,
conspiring
with
the
Sollicitations
of
the
antient
Subjects
,
who
lookt
upon
themselves
to
be
oppressed
under
this
new
Government
,
and
with
the
secret
Jealousies
,
as
some
have
given
it
out
,
which
People
who
found
their
Interest
in
the
bad
Understanding
betwixt
Father
and
Son
,
sowed
betwixt
them
,
prevailed
upon
the
old
King
to
take
Arms
,
and
endeavour
by
force
,
to
recover
a
Kingdom
,
which
of
his
own
free
Consent
he
had
just
before
willingly
resigned
.
He
marched
then
at
the
Head
of
a
great
Army
against
his
Son
,
who
was
soon
forsaken
of
all
,
besieged
in
the
Capital
Town
,
and
upon
the
point
of
surrendring
,
or
of
being
delivered
up
Prisoner
to
the
Conqueror
.
Being
reduced
to
this
Extremity
,
he
resolved
to
put
all
to
a
risk
,
rather
than
to
submit
to
the
Clemency
of
his
so
much
provoked
Father
.
In
short
,
The
young
Sultan
〈◊〉
●ed
by
his
Father
,
begs
Assistance
from
the
Dutch
.
seeing
no
other
way
of
Relief
in
this
his
Distress
,
he
implored
the
Assistance
of
the
Dutch
by
a
trusty
Javaner
,
who
made
his
Escape
to
Batavia
,
by
favour
of
the
Night
.
General
Spelman
was
then
alive
,
who
being
a
Man
of
a
quick
Wit
,
a
Lover
of
great
Enterprises
,
and
not
stinted
to
the
common
Measures
of
Conduct
,
called
his
Council
to
consult
what
was
best
to
be
done
.
It
was
the
Opinion
of
all
the
Council
that
there
was
no
medling
in
a
Quarrel
betwixt
Father
and
Son
,
that
they
could
espouse
no
Party
betwixt
the
two
Princes
,
seeing
they
were
both
alike
their
Allies
and
Friends
;
that
if
they
should
resolve
to
assist
Sultan
Agui
,
the
English
and
French
would
infallibly
declare
against
them
,
and
that
so
they
would
bring
a
troublesome
War
upon
themselves
.
It
was
to
no
purpose
for
the
General
to
represent
to
them
what
an
occasion
they
would
lose
of
rendring
themselves
Masters
of
so
considerable
a
Place
and
Kingdom
,
and
lying
so
conveniently
for
them
;
that
by
raising
the
Siege
,
which
would
be
done
without
doubt
,
they
would
intirely
oblige
the
young
Sultan
to
their
Interests
,
and
perhaps
render
themselves
Masters
of
his
Person
,
Kingdom
,
and
of
all
the
Trade
of
the
Isle
of
Java
,
which
was
the
thing
the
Company
could
most
desire
.
None
of
these
reasons
wrought
upon
the
Council
to
change
their
Opinion
;
they
still
persisted
in
this
,
that
it
was
best
to
continue
Neuter
.
General
Spelman
sends
a
strong
Assistance
to
Sultan
●gui
besieged
.
Then
the
General
,
who
had
views
of
a
far
different
nature
,
making
use
of
the
Sovereign
Authority
which
he
hath
on
such
Occasions
,
said
publickly
,
that
he
would
assist
the
Prince
his
Allie
,
that
the
Success
he
would
take
upon
himself
,
and
get
his
Proceedings
approved
by
the
East-India
Company
in
Holland
.
He
presently
sent
for
the
Heer
St.
Martin
,
Major
General
of
Batavia
,
declares
him
Chief
of
the
Enterprise
,
and
having
ordered
him
to
muster
together
as
many
Forces
as
he
could
of
the
Garrison
,
and
Towns-People
,
both
Europeans
and
Indians
,
he
put
them
on
Board
twelve
Ships
,
which
were
then
in
the
Road
of
Batavia
.
So
soon
as
the
Heer
St.
Martin
arrived
before
Bantam
,
he
made
a
Descent
,
and
found
but
little
resistance
.
Then
,
without
giving
the
Enemy
time
to
take
breath
,
he
marched
streight
to
their
Trenches
,
and
at
the
second
Attack
forced
them
to
raise
the
Siege
in
disorder
.
After
this
Victory
the
Sultan
Agui
commanded
the
Gates
to
be
opened
,
and
received
the
Heer
St.
Martin
with
all
his
Forces
into
the
Town
.
Sultan
Agui
guarded
by
the
Dutch
.
The
Dutch
finding
themselves
Masters
of
the
Capital
Town
,
resolved
to
subdue
the
whole
Kingdom
,
and
to
make
sure
of
the
Persons
of
both
Kings
.
They
set
a
good
Guard
of
Dutch
over
Sultan
Agui
,
whom
they
had
in
their
Hands
,
under
Pretext
of
doing
him
Honour
,
and
securing
him
from
the
Insults
of
his
Enemies
.
And
so
pursuing
their
Victory
,
with
Sword
in
Hand
,
they
took
the
Citadel
of
Tangran
.
The
old
Sultan
having
fled
to
the
Town
of
Carthiace
;
they
drove
him
from
thence
,
and
cut
to
pieces
the
Garison
,
consisting
of
1600
Macassars
,
the
best
Soldiers
of
all
the
Barbarians
,
who
after
a
vigorous
Resistance
,
were
killed
every
Man
of
them
in
their
Posts
.
Then
they
took
that
poor
Prince
,
who
was
endeavouring
to
make
his
Escape
,
and
delivered
him
up
Prisoner
to
his
Son
,
who
to
punish
his
Father
for
his
Revolt
,
would
presently
have
put
him
to
Death
;
but
the
Dutch
perswaded
him
not
to
embrew
his
hand●
in
the
Blood
of
him
who
had
given
him
Life
.
So
that
he
thought
it
enough
to
shut
him
up
in
a
very
close
Prison
,
without
allowing
him
the
Company
of
his
Wives
.
Nevertheless
he
hath
remitted
his
Severity
as
to
this
last
point
,
since
he
is
become
peaceable
Possessor
of
the
Kingdom
.
Some
days
after
the
young
King
commanded
the
English
and
French
to
withdraw
,
The
English
and
French
leave
the
Town
by
the
King
of
Banta●s
Order
.
under
pretext
of
Jealousies
he
had
of
them
,
and
that
he
had
been
told
they
favoured
the
Party
of
the
King
his
Father
.
The
French
carried
away
their
Effects
and
left
Bantam
,
but
the
English
protested
against
the
Dutch
for
the
Violence
they
did
them
under
the
Cloak
of
the
Kings
Authority
,
and
leaving
the
Town
,
left
all
their
Effects
in
their
Ware-houses
.
This
was
the
Matter
that
caused
the
great
Difference
that
hath
made
so
much
Noise
betwixt
those
two
Nations
,
and
which
was
not
determined
when
we
came
out
of
Europe
.
After
this
Digression
concerning
the
Revolution
that
hath
hapned
in
the
Isle
of
Java
,
we
must
now
pursue
our
Voyage
again
.
Saturday
the
Eighteenth
of
August
,
betwixt
five
and
six
a
Clock
in
the
Evening
we
came
to
Anchor
in
the
Road
of
Batavia
,
amidst
seventeen
or
eighteen
huge
Ships
belonging
to
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
,
and
a
great
number
of
Barks
which
we
found
there
at
Anchor
.
This
is
a
very
fair
and
safe
Road
,
as
may
be
seen
by
the
Cut.
The
Civilities
of
the
General
of
Batavia
to
the
Ambassador
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
had
dispatched
the
Night
before
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
to
go
Compliment
the
General
of
Batavia
,
and
to
deliver
them
the
Heer
Van
Rheeden's
Letter
.
He
came
on
board
again
,
just
as
we
were
about
to
drop
Anchor
,
and
told
us
that
the
General
had
granted
all
that
was
demanded
of
him
.
He
said
we
might
take
in
fresh
Water
and
Wood
,
provide
our selves
of
all
sorts
of
Refreshments
,
and
set
our
Sick
Men
ashoar
;
that
the
Dutch
would
give
us
a
Pilot
to
carry
us
to
Siam
;
and
that
when
we
saluted
the
Fort
,
they
would
return
Gun
for
Gun
,
a
thing
not
hitherto
done
.
It
is
true
,
the
General
made
some
difficulty
as
to
this
last
Point
,
saying
,
that
the
Fort
had
never
returned
that
Salute
,
neither
to
the
English
,
Portuguese
,
nor
any
other
Nation
whatsoever
,
and
that
it
was
always
thought
enough
to
be
Re-saluted
by
the
Admiral
Ship
riding
in
the
Road.
But
it
being
represented
to
him
that
there
was
a
great
deal
of
difference
betwixt
Kings
Ships
and
other
Ships
,
and
if
the
Fort
had
never
as
yet
rendred
a
Salute
,
it
was
because
they
had
never
seen
any
Kings
Ships
:
The
General
condescended
,
and
promised
that
in
consideration
of
the
King
and
of
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
he
should
for
that
time
,
but
not
as
a
President
,
order
Gun
for
Gun
to
be
given
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
was
very
well
satisfied
in
the
Sequel
with
the
Civilities
of
the
Heer
Campiche
(
for
that
is
the
Generals
Name
)
who
very
frequently
sent
the
Chief
of
the
Town
to
compliment
him
,
and
almost
daily
presented
him
with
all
sorts
of
fresh
Provisions
for
his
Table
,
and
for
both
the
Ships
Companys
.
When
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
had
thus
given
the
Ambassador
an
account
of
his
Voyage
,
and
assured
him
that
the
General
would
give
his
Excellence
all
the
Marks
of
Respect
and
Esteem
which
were
due
to
his
Character
;
The
Jesuits
land
at
Batavia
to
make
Observations
.
he
added
that
the
Jesuits
would
not
be
so
well
received
in
this
Town
as
they
had
been
at
the
Cape
;
that
the
General
of
Batavia
had
put
a
Guard
upon
a
Father
of
their
Society
lately
come
from
Tunquin
,
and
that
he
had
been
confined
to
his
House
for
having
assisted
Catholicks
who
applied
themselves
to
him
in
their
Spiritual
Necessities
.
Having
considered
a
little
what
was
best
for
us
to
do
,
by
the
Advice
of
the
Ambassador
,
we
took
the
same
Course
that
we
had
done
at
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
,
which
was
to
go
visit
the
General
.
Father
Fontenay
and
I
arrived
at
the
Town
about
ten
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
.
The
good
Reception
they
had
from
the
Officers
of
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
.
The
Officer
who
was
upon
Guard
at
the
Gate
carried
us
to
the
chief
Treasurer
,
who
introduces
Strangers
to
the
General
.
After
the
first
Compliments
we
told
him
who
we
were
,
and
prayed
him
to
present
us
to
the
General
,
that
we
might
pay
him
our
Respects
.
He
promised
us
Audience
of
his
Excellency
,
(
for
that
's
the
Title
commonly
given
to
the
General
of
Batavia
)
the
very
same
day
.
But
seeing
it
was
now
but
about
ten
of
the
Clock
,
and
that
no
Audience
was
given
till
towards
the
Evening
;
we
desired
to
know
of
him
whether
or
not
it
would
be
taken
ill
if
we
went
to
see
one
of
our
Fathers
who
came
from
Tunquin
,
and
was
in
General
Spelmans's
Garden
.
He
told
us
that
we
might
do
what
we
pleased
without
Offence
,
and
that
he
would
give
us
his
Boat
to
carry
us
thither
,
but
that
it
must
be
after
Dinner
,
because
it
was
already
late
,
and
at
the
same
time
he
urged
us
to
eat
with
him
.
Having
thanked
him
for
all
his
Civilities
,
we
went
into
his
Boat
with
design
to
go
see
Father
Fuciti
in
the
place
where
they
had
lodged
him
.
A
Description
of
the
Garden
of
the
late
General
Spelman
.
It
is
a
House
standing
without
the
Town
,
but
so
near
the
Citadel
,
that
it
is
only
parted
from
it
by
the
River
which
serves
for
a
Ditch
,
and
this
River
being
covered
all
over
with
little
Boats
,
one
may
cross
it
at
all
times
.
This
House
was
built
by
the
late
General
Spelman
,
that
he
might
take
the
Air
there
during
the
excessive
heats
of
Summer
,
which
is
almost
constant
at
Batavia
,
and
that
he
might
treat
the
Officers
of
the
Company
,
and
the
Ambassadors
and
Envoys
of
Princes
or
Foreign
States
.
It
consists
in
two
great
Galleries
open
on
all
hands
,
which
form
a
double
square
.
The
Gallery
at
the
end
which
crosses
upon
the
other
is
extremely
wide
,
from
both
of
them
you
enter
into
Halls
with
several
Closets
,
and
all
this
is
environed
with
Grass-plots
and
Gardens
;
on
the
right
hand
there
is
a
Menagerie
full
of
several
sorts
of
Animals
,
as
Stags
,
Hinds
,
Wild-goats
,
Antelopes
,
Estridges
,
Storks
,
Ducks
and
Geese
of
a
singular
kind
.
On
the
left
hand
are
the
Gardens
and
Country-Houses
of
the
Towns-people
of
best
quality
.
Behind
it
there
is
a
little
Pavilion
consisting
of
three
low
Rooms
and
a
Kitchin
,
which
is
separated
from
the
Galleries
by
a
large
Court
that
reaches
on
one
hand
to
the
Ditches
of
the
Fort
,
and
on
the
other
as
far
as
the
Sea
.
A
little
River
runs
under
one
of
these
Galleries
and
cross
the
Grass-plots
,
which
serves
to
make
Ponds
where
Fish
are
kept
.
Seeing
this
Building
was
only
made
for
taking
the
fresh
Air
,
there
is
no
regularity
in
the
whole
,
tho
every
part
be
regular
enough
.
The
Gardens
are
full
of
Flowers
at
all
times
,
but
we
saw
none
there
that
were
rare
,
the
Trees
are
Orange
,
Limon
and
Pomegranat
Trees
planted
in
rows
that
make
lovely
Walks
.
There
we
found
Father
Fucity
,
The
French
Jesuits
go
to
to
see
Father
Dominic
Fucity
.
who
having
been
already
informed
of
our
arrival
,
impatiently
expected
us
.
It
is
not
to
be
exprest
how
much
joy
and
resolution
we
felt
at
the
sight
of
that
holy
Man
honourable
for
his
great
Age
and
his
long
Labours
in
the
Mission
of
Cochinchine
and
Tunquin
.
He
came
from
his
Church
the
nine
and
twentieth
of
October
,
1684
,
with
Father
Emanuel
Fereira
who
was
the
superior
of
the
Mission
.
It
was
a
great
grief
to
many
good
Christians
to
see
them
leave
the
Country
,
and
many
tears
were
shed
on
both
sides
.
Nay
,
if
the
Fathers
had
not
left
them
some
hopes
of
their
return
,
there
would
have
been
no
comforting
of
them
.
Every
Idolatrous
Mandarins
bewailed
their
departure
,
and
the
Christians
conceived
so
great
an
aversion
to
those
whom
they
suspected
to
be
the
causes
of
it
,
that
they
would
not
confess
any
more
,
incessantly
calling
for
their
first
Masters
and
ancient
Pastors
.
This
we
were
told
by
a
Church-man
in
the
Indies
who
was
a
person
of
good
credit
,
and
very
well
acquainted
with
affairs
of
that
nature
.
These
two
Fathers
arrived
at
Batavia
the
twenty
third
of
December
,
The
good
usage
that
the
Fa●her●
Missioners
of
Tu●q●in
met
with
at
Batavia
.
in
a
Dutch
Ship
that
by
a
Storm
was
forced
off
of
Siam
whither
they
were
bound
.
Father
Fucity
stayed
at
Batavia
for
a
Passage
to
Siam
where
he
was
to
receive
by
way
of
Macao
Or●
from
his
Superiours
,
and
Money
to
perform
his
●oyage
before
he
returned
to
Europe
;
Father
Fereira
was
himself
gone
for
them
six
weeks
before
,
and
in
that
design
went
on
Board
a
Ship
of
Macao
.
The
Character
of
Father
Fucity
,
and
his
Apostolick
Labours
in
several
Kingdoms
.
Father
Dominico
Fucity
is
a
Neapolitan
,
and
left
Rome
with
that
great
Company
of
Jesuits
,
whom
the
famous
Father
de
Rhodes
had
obtain'd
from
the
Reverend
Father
General
for
the
Indies
.
So
that
he
had
been
almost
thirty
years
in
that
Country
,
where
he
hath
always
laboured
as
a
true
Apostle
,
with
admirable
success
and
benediction
.
He
lived
eight
years
in
Conchinchine
,
where
he
Baptized
above
four
thousand
Souls
with
his
own
hands
,
and
sixteen
whole
years
in
Tunquin
,
where
he
has
Baptized
eighteen
thousand
.
He
hath
suffered
long
and
irksom
Imprisonments
:
He
hath
been
eight
days
and
eight
nights
with
the
cangue
about
his
neck
which
is
a
great
and
heavy
Ladder
,
and
eight
or
nine
Months
in
Irons
.
He
hath
been
condemned
to
death
,
and
oftner
then
once
upon
the
brink
of
Martyrdom
.
His
life
hath
been
almost
nothing
else
but
a
continual
Martyrdom
;
he
hath
made
sixteen
Voyages
by
Sea
,
and
hath
been
five
times
in
danger
of
being
killed
by
the
Infidels
:
he
hath
lived
ten
or
eleven
years
in
Tunquin
without
daring
to
appear
abroad
,
keeping
himself
in
the
day
time
hid
in
a
little
Boat
,
and
in
the
night
time
making
his
excursions
through
the
Towns
of
the
Country
,
visiting
the
Christians
by
turns
,
Preaching
,
Catechising
,
Baptising
,
and
administring
the
Sacraments
with
infinite
Troubles
.
It
is
not
from
him
that
we
came
to
know
these
things
,
he
is
humble
and
modest
,
and
we
observed
many
great
Virtues
in
him
during
our
abode
at
Batavia
and
Siam
.
We
were
particularly
charmed
with
his
mildness
towards
all
People
,
his
reservedness
in
speaking
of
those
who
had
persecuted
him
with
greatest
violence
,
with
his
continual
union
with
God
,
his
tender
Devotion
that
makes
him
melt
in
tears
every
time
he
says
Mass
,
or
hears
it
;
his
patience
in
suffering
all
things
without
complaining
,
and
with
his
zeal
for
the
salvation
of
Souls
.
In
short
,
he
is
a
Man
really
Apostolical
,
and
would
receive
Elogies
at
Rome
,
whether
he
is
called
to
justifie
himself
,
if
his
Virtues
were
known
there
as
they
are
in
the
Indies
.
When
the
Arrival
of
those
two
Fathers
was
known
at
Batavia
,
The
earnestness
of
the
Catholics
of
Batavia
to
receive
the
Sacraments
.
not
only
the
Portuguese
who
live
there
,
but
the
Catholics
also
of
other
Nations
that
are
there
,
as
we
were
told
,
in
great
numbers
came
daily
to
see
them
,
were
present
at
their
Masses
on
Sundays
and
Holy-days
,
and
confessed
to
them
.
Sometime
after
Father
Fereira
went
away
in
a
Portuguese
Ship
for
Macao
,
whither
Father
Fucity
thought
it
not
fit
to
accompany
him
,
lest
the
Magistrates
of
that
Town
might
force
him
to
return
to
Tunquin
,
with
the
Ambassadors
whom
they
were
about
to
send
thither
,
because
that
Father
is
extremely
well
known
and
respected
there
.
The
zeal
of
the
Catholics
made
too
great
a
noise
,
at
Batavia
,
and
so
great
was
the
concourse
of
People
that
came
flocking
to
Father
Fucity
,
that
the
Protestant
Ministers
complained
to
the
General
,
that
a
Jesuit
performed
the
publick
Exercise
of
the
Catholic
Religion
in
Batavia
:
the
Mahometism
and
Idolatrous
Worship
and
Sacrifice
be
permitted
there
,
and
the
Ministers
don't
at
all
trouble
the
Magistrates
with
their
Scruples
upon
that
account
.
Upon
their
Remonstrances
,
the
General
set
a
Sentinel
at
the
Fathers
door
,
to
hinder
Catholics
from
entring
his
House
,
and
sent
him
word
that
he
desired
him
not
to
walk
abroad
in
the
Town
,
but
with
a
Guard
to
wait
upon
him
.
After
a
long
Conference
with
Father
Fuciti
,
we
returned
to
the
Treasurers
House
,
thinking
that
the
hour
of
Audience
drew
nigh
.
About
four
of
the
Clock
in
the
Afternoon
we
heard
the
Drums
,
Fifes
,
and
Trumpets
of
the
Fort
,
not
being
far
from
it
.
Then
the
Treasurer
told
us
,
that
now
we
might
go
wait
upon
his
Excellency
.
He
took
us
into
his
Boat
,
and
would
needs
force
us
to
sit
above
him
.
We
quickly
got
to
the
Palace
,
where
we
found
the
Governors
Guards
a
Mustring
before
him
,
in
a
large
Court.
There
was
four
Companies
of
Foot
and
two
Troops
of
Horse
of
them
,
of
about
an
hundred
Men
apiece
,
all
Men
of
good
meen
,
well
armed
,
and
cloathed
in
one
Livery
.
Their
Coats
was
yellow
,
their
Breeches
red
and
very
wide
,
and
all
of
them
had
Silk
Stockins
.
The
Horse-Guards
were
mounted
on
Persian
Horses
,
which
,
indeed
are
not
very
big
,
but
are
light
and
full
of
Mettle
.
These
Horses
seem
to
be
hard
in
the
mouth
,
hang
upon
the
Bitt
,
and
always
toss
up
their
heads
;
but
I
believe
these
faults
proceed
from
their
Bridles
and
the
neglect
of
breaking
them
well
.
The
Muster
being
over
,
we
went
up
a
pair
of
Stone
Stairs
on
the
outside
of
a
great
Hall
,
where
we
found
Guards
and
the
Generals
Pages
,
all
cloathed
after
the
same
fashion
,
with
this
difference
only
,
that
the
last
wear
no
Swords
.
The
Treasurer
desired
us
to
stay
in
that
Hall
,
until
he
went
and
spoke
to
the
General
.
A
moment
after
he
came
back
and
led
us
through
a
Gallery
into
another
Hall
,
which
was
nothing
near
so
big
as
the
former
.
The
General
of
B●tavia
receives
the
Jesuit●
with
much
Civility
and
Goodness
.
There
we
found
the
General
with
five
or
six
Friends
of
whom
two
spoke
very
good
French.
We
could
not
have
expected
greater
Civilities
nor
Testimonies
of
Friendship
than
we
received
from
him
at
this
first
Audience
.
The
joy
that
appeared
in
his
looks
,
his
caresses
and
obliging
discourses
sufficiently
convinced
us
of
the
sincerity
of
his
heart
and
actions
.
He
ordered
our
Letters
Patents
for
being
the
Kings
Mathematicians
,
to
be
read
to
him
,
and
prayed
us
●o
give
him
an
account
of
the
Observations
we
made
at
the
Cape
of
Good
H●pe
,
still
praising
us
,
before
the
Gentlemen
that
attended
him
.
When
he
understood
that
the
Heer
Van
Rheed●n
had
lodged
us
at
the
Cape
,
and
how
he
had
received
and
treated
us
,
He
protested
he
would
not
be
short
of
him
,
and
that
if
we
had
a
design
to
come
on
Shoar
,
he
entreated
us
to
lodge
with
Father
Fuciti
,
to
whom
from
that
day
forward
he
gave
all
sort
of
liberty
for
our
s●k●s
.
He
told
us
that
the
place
was
very
commodious
for
making
Observations
in
;
that
on
the
one
hand
we
had
a
prospect
of
the
Sea
,
and
on
the
other
a
vast
Plain
reaching
out
of
sight
,
and
that
,
in
short
,
if
the
weather
offered
fair
,
and
that
there
was
any
curious
observation
to
be
made
,
he
himself
would
be
present
at
it
.
We
made
the
best
answer
we
could
to
all
his
goodness
,
assuring
him
that
the
King
should
be
informed
of
it
,
and
that
my
Lord
Ambass●d●r
would
resent
it
.
At
length
,
after
a
three
〈◊〉
conference
,
which
was
only
interrupted
by
〈◊〉
,
Sweet-meats
and
Healths
to
the
King
,
the
Royal
Family
,
the
Ambassador
,
and
our
own
,
which
he
drank
to
us
,
he
suffered
us
with
much
ado
to
withdraw
.
He
waited
on
us
to
the
end
of
a
long
Gallery
which
leads
into
the
first
Hall
,
and
ordered
the
Governor
of
a
Province
and
the
Treasurer
,
not
to
leave
us
before
we
were
safely
returned
to
General
Spelmans
Garden
,
where
we
were
to
lodge
.
As
we
went
out
of
the
Hall
we
found
a
Coach
,
with
two
Pages
carrying
Torches
to
conduct
us
to
our
Lodging
.
What
resistance
soever
we
could
make
,
we
were
necessitated
to
obey
,
and
it
was
a
new
sight
to
see
two
Jesuits
in
the
Generals
Coach
riding
through
the
capital
City
of
the
Indies
.
We
soon
got
to
our
Lodging
,
where
Father
Fuciti
waited
for
us
,
and
was
not
a
little
astonished
to
see
us
come
home
in
that
Equipage
.
No
sooner
were
we
got
there
,
but
a
plentiful
Supper
was
brought
us
from
the
Generals
Palace
,
who
during
all
the
time
we
were
at
Batavia
allowed
us
a
Magnificent
Table
for
a
dozen
of
Guests
,
where
we
were
served
by
his
Officers
in
fine
China
and
Plate
,
with
all
neatness
,
and
daintiness
,
and
plenty
imaginable
.
Next
day
Father
Fucity
entreated
the
Father
superiour
to
carry
him
on
Board
and
present
him
to
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
that
he
might
pay
his
respects
unto
him
,
and
thank
him
for
his
goodness
in
concerning
himself
in
his
liberty
.
We
were
all
three
carried
thither
in
the
Generals
Chaloop
,
which
,
as
he
sent
us
word
,
he
wholly
left
to
us
to
be
made
use
of
●s
often
as
we
had
occasion
.
The
four
Fathers
who
remained
on
Board
were
in
pain
for
us
;
because
we
could
not
send
them
word
how
we
were
,
and
they
were
apprehensive
that
some
unwelcome
accident
might
have
befallen
us
at
Batavia
.
But
they
were
much
surprised
when
they
saw
us
return
in
a
stately
Chaloop
,
with
the
Dutch
Flag
aboard
and
all
the
marks
of
Grandeur
that
attend
the
General
,
except
his
Guards
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
to
whom
we
gave
an
account
of
all
that
past
,
received
Father
Fuciti
very
kindly
,
and
offered
him
his
Passage
to
Siam
.
Monsieur
de
Vandi●court
,
shewed
him
the
like
Civilities
;
so
that
it
was
immediately
resolved
upon
that
the
Father
should
Embarque
with
us
and
compleat
the
rest
of
the
Voyage
.
Presently
after
it
behoved
us
to
go
ashoar
again
with
some
Instruments
to
Observe
with
the
night
following
.
But
the
sky
was
so
overcast
both
night
and
day
all
the
while
we
were
at
Batavia
,
that
we
could
make
but
very
few
Observations
,
and
these
too
did
not
appear
to
us
to
be
sure
enough
to
deserve
to
be
communicated
to
the
publick
.
Assoon
as
we
came
ashoar
we
went
all
six
to
visit
the
General
with
Father
Fuciti
.
He
received
us
with
the
same
signs
of
kindness
and
good
will
,
as
he
had
done
the
day
before
.
It
is
true
,
he
complained
a
little
of
the
conduct
of
Father
Fuciti
,
who
had
been
rendred
suspected
to
him
because
of
his
Zeal
in
assisting
and
instructing
the
Catholics
,
adding
,
that
he
was
obliged
to
see
the
Laws
of
the
East-India
Company
put
in
Execution
;
that
he
believed
we
would
not
think
his
proceeding
either
ungentile
or
unjust
;
that
he
prayed
us
to
observe
measures
,
and
so
to
carry
our selves
in
relation
to
Catholics
that
he
might
not
be
reproached
for
any
testimony
of
Friendship
and
Esteem
that
he
had
already
expressed
towards
us
,
and
was
ready
still
to
testifie
upon
all
occasions
.
We
made
answer
in
Portuguese
that
his
Excellence
should
be
satisfied
with
our
Conduct
,
and
that
he
should
never
have
cause
to
repent
the
Favours
which
hitherto
he
had
heaped
upon
us
,
and
was
still
willing
to
honour
us
with
for
the
future
.
Then
we
fell
to
Discourse
on
several
matters
,
we
talked
of
News
,
and
particularly
of
the
French
King
,
whose
Glory
and
Greatness
the
General
seemed
to
admire
.
Before
he
let
us
go
which
was
pretty
late
,
he
shewed
us
several
Curiosities
of
Japan
,
amongst
others
two
human
Figures
of
a
kind
of
Plaister
,
extremely
well
done
,
and
clad
in
Silk
after
the
manner
of
the
Japanese
,
one
of
a
Lord
and
the
other
of
a
Lady
.
He
also
shewed
us
certain
Trees
whose
Roots
were
enclosed
within
foraminous
and
very
porous
stones
where
they
are
so
insinuated
that
they
receive
all
their
nourishment
from
the
water
that
is
now
and
then
thrown
upon
them
.
Tho
we
were
not
so
much
obliged
as
we
are
to
Monsieur
Campiche
General
of
Batavia
,
yet
we
could
not
but
speak
well
of
him
:
His
Merit
hath
raised
him
by
degrees
to
the
higest
place
of
the
I●dies
,
which
at
present
he
so
worthily
discharges
,
after
he
hath
been
thrice
President
of
the
Company
of
Japan
.
He
is
about
fifty
years
of
age
,
somewhat
taller
then
ordinary
,
an
honest
,
sincere
and
circumspect
Man
,
speaking
little
,
but
very
Judiciously
and
to
purpose
.
These
qualities
accompanied
with
a
mild
popular
way
of
Carriage
,
have
got
him
the
love
of
his
own
Country
,
and
the
esteem
of
Stangers
,
both
Europeans
and
Indians
.
We
were
told
that
he
had
some
Pictures
in
his
Closet
,
and
amongst
others
,
one
of
our
Saviours
praying
in
the
Garden
of
Olives
,
with
these
words
written
with
his
own
Hand
,
Anima
mea
Christus
est
.
The
days
following
we
went
and
visited
the
chief
Officers
of
the
East-India
Company
;
all
of
them
shew'd
us
great
Civilities
;
nay
,
many
of
them
returned
our
Visit
at
the
Companies
Garden
.
We
were
visited
also
by
the
Catholics
of
all
sorts
and
conditions
,
who
desired
to
receive
the
Sacraments
;
but
that
we
might
not
displease
the
General
,
nor
bring
the
Catholics
into
Trouble
,
we
appointed
such
as
were
able
to
come
on
board
of
us
,
and
confessed
the
rest
so
privately
,
either
in
their
Houses
at
Home
,
or
in
the
Place
where
we
were
,
that
no
notice
was
taken
of
it
.
Father
Fucity
especially
,
took
no
Rest
all
the
while
that
we
were
with
him
.
For
having
upon
our
coming
,
got
Liberty
to
go
about
every
where
,
he
was
taken
up
from
Morning
to
Night
in
comforting
and
confessing
here
and
there
all
that
stood
in
need
of
his
Assistance
.
It
is
with
the
Catholic
Religion
in
Batavia
,
The
Catholic
Religion
is
the
only
Religion
prohibited
at
Batavia
.
and
in
the
Indies
Subject
to
the
Dutch
,
as
it
is
in
Holland
.
All
sorts
,
and
even
Idolatry
it self
,
are
tolerated
,
provided
they
pay
a
certain
Tribute
to
the
Magistrates
.
None
but
the
Catholic
Religion
is
prohibited
;
not
that
they
reckon
it
the
worst
of
all
,
but
because
they
look
upon
it
as
the
most
dangerous
,
and
fear
that
many
who
do
not
prefer
their
Interest
before
their
Salvation
,
would
embrace
it
if
they
knew
it
.
We
were
confidently
told
that
some
Months
before
;
the
Portuguese
,
who
are
very
numerous
,
had
offered
a
vast
Sum
of
Money
to
the
East-India
Company
to
have
leave
to
build
a
Catholic
Church
,
either
in
the
Town
or
in
the
Suburbs
,
and
that
they
would
engage
themselves
besides
,
to
pay
sixteen
thousand
Crowns
a
year
.
This
Affair
having
been
proposed
to
the
Council
of
the
Indies
,
was
referred
to
the
Chief
of
the
Company
in
Holland
,
but
there
is
no
hopes
that
they
will
grant
this
Favour
to
Catholics
,
for
fear
,
it
is
said
,
they
should
become
the
Masters
in
Batavia
.
There
are
four
Protestant
Churches
there
,
two
where
they
preach
every
Sunday
in
Dutch
,
the
one
in
the
Fort
,
and
the
other
in
the
Town
.
A
third
where
they
preach
in
Portuguese
,
which
is
the
most
common
Language
of
the
Country
.
And
a
fourth
for
the
French
,
who
are
in
pretty
considerable
number
there
.
The
Description
of
Batavia
.
As
for
Batavia
,
it
is
the
pleasantest
Town
in
all
the
Indies
,
and
would
pass
for
a
very
handsome
Place
in
Europe
.
The
Dutch
have
built
it
at
their
pleasure
,
with
a
Design
to
make
it
the
Capital
City
of
their
Empire
.
The
Streets
are
long
and
broad
,
all
in
a
streight
Line
,
betwixt
two
Walks
of
Trees
of
the
Country
that
are
always
green
;
most
part
of
them
are
even
divided
into
fair
smooth
Ways
,
and
lovely
Canals
warfed
,
which
in
all
Seasons
are
filled
by
a
great
River
,
that
at
this
Place
discharges
it self
into
the
Sea
.
They
have
conveighed
the
Water
of
this
River
into
the
Ditches
of
the
Town
and
Fort
,
at
small
Charges
,
because
the
Ground
is
level
and
easie
to
be
cast
up
.
This
Warf
is
a
great
Ornament
to
the
Town
,
and
a
great
Convenience
for
the
Inhabitants
,
who
may
go
abroad
and
take
the
Air
a
Foot
,
or
by
Water
in
Boat
,
which
they
please
.
For
during
the
Heat
,
they
walk
under
the
Shadow
of
the
Trees
;
and
the
Streets
are
so
laid
,
having
a
Descent
towards
the
Canal
,
that
the
Rain-water
runs
off
of
them
as
fast
as
it
falls
.
The
Houses
are
neater
still
than
the
Streets
;
the
truth
is
,
they
are
not
very
magnificent
,
neither
inside
nor
outside
,
but
they
are
pretty
and
commodious
.
Every
thing
smiles
there
,
the
Walls
are
as
white
as
Snow
,
there
is
not
the
least
Spot
to
be
seen
upon
them
,
nor
upon
the
Furniture
,
which
is
all
polished
,
and
shines
like
Looking-Glasses
.
Though
Batavia
be
but
six
Degrees
from
the
Line
,
and
by
consequence
in
a
very
hot
Climate
,
yet
the
Houses
are
built
in
such
a
manner
,
that
they
have
always
the
Cool
,
by
reason
of
certain
little
Courts
contrived
in
the
middle
,
where
for
eight
or
nine
Months
in
the
Year
the
Sun
never
shines
but
at
Noon
.
It
is
fortified
after
the
European
manner
,
encompassed
with
Ditches
full
of
Water
,
and
in
a
Ground
that
is
all
cut
by
Channels
,
which
makes
it
difficult
to
besiege
it
.
The
Citadel
hath
four
Bastions
faced
and
mounted
with
a
great
number
of
brass
Guns
.
There
is
a
good
Garison
kept
in
it
,
not
only
to
hold
it
out
against
Indians
and
Europeans
,
and
to
succour
the
other
Places
in
case
of
necessity
;
but
also
to
shew
the
Greatness
and
Power
of
the
Company
to
Ambassadors
and
Princes
,
who
come
thither
from
all
Places
of
the
Indies
.
Batavia
is
of
a
very
large
Circumference
,
and
nevertheless
extreamly
full
of
People
of
all
sorts
of
Nations
,
of
Malays
,
Maures
,
Chineses
,
who
pay
so
much
Tribute
a
Head
,
for
the
free
Exercise
of
Commerce
;
of
these
last
there
are
four
or
five
thousand
there
,
who
for
most
part
fled
thither
that
they
might
not
submit
themselves
to
the
Tartars
,
when
these
made
themselves
Masters
of
China
.
The
Chineses
being
an
industrious
and
skilful
People
,
improve
every
thing
at
Batavia
,
and
without
their
Help
it
would
be
hard
to
live
conveniently
there
.
They
labour
the
Land
,
there
is
hardly
any
other
Artificers
but
them
,
and
in
a
word
,
they
do
every
thing
almost
.
Some
of
them
are
very
rich
,
and
we
were
told
that
one
of
them
died
lately
,
who
left
behind
him
a
Million
in
coined
Money
.
Having
learnt
of
a
Catholic
Soldier
,
that
these
People
had
their
Temple
and
Sepulchres
abroad
in
the
Country
,
about
half
a
League
from
Batavia
,
we
pray'd
him
to
conduct
us
thither
that
we
might
see
their
Ceremonies
.
In
that
Walk
we
see
the
Avenues
of
the
Town
at
leisure
,
they
are
very
broad
Walks
or
Allies
,
that
reach
out
of
sight
.
On
each
side
they
are
bordered
with
certain
Woods
always
green
,
which
are
streighter
,
and
at
least
as
high
as
our
tallest
Trees
,
beautified
with
Country
Houses
and
Gardens
kept
in
good
order
,
which
belong
to
the
chief
Towns-people
.
As
we
went
out
of
Batavia
we
found
three
or
four
of
these
Walks
,
all
which
at
their
end
,
met
at
the
chief
Gate
,
by
which
we
went
out
,
we
took
the
middlemost
,
which
was
our
way
to
the
place
intended
.
If
the
other
Gates
that
look
into
the
Country
have
as
lovely
Avenues
as
this
,
nothing
more
pleasant
can
be
imagined
.
Within
half
a
League
we
found
the
first
burying
Place
of
the
Chineses
in
a
Coppis
Wood
,
where
they
had
made
several
small
Paths
,
which
all
led
to
several
Sepulchres
.
There
it
is
where
the
Chinese
of
mean
Quality
are
buried
,
and
indeed
the
Place
is
somewhat
in
disorder
,
and
there
is
nothing
of
State
in
their
Tombs
:
A
few
steps
from
thence
stands
the
little
Fort
of
Jacatra
;
It
has
four
Bastions
,
not
at
all
faced
,
with
a
sorry
Ditch
.
The
Dutch
keep
fifty
or
sixty
Men
in
Garison
there
.
Beyond
that
Fort
we
entered
into
a
Wood
,
or
rather
into
a
large
Champian
full
of
little
Hills
,
covered
over
with
Groves
and
Thickets
on
all
sides
,
which
yielded
a
pretty
pleasant
Prospect
,
and
in
that
second
Burying-place
the
Chinese
Bonzes
interr
the
Persons
of
Quality
of
their
Nation
.
Upon
the
top
of
one
of
those
little
Hills
I
saw
an
Arbour
very
well
made
,
and
a
Table
standing
in
the
middle
of
it
,
with
Benches
all
round
it
,
where
near
forty
People
might
commodiously
sit
.
There
I
saw
a
great
many
very
little
and
odd
antick
Idols
hanging
upon
the
Branches
that
covered
this
Arbour
.
They
say
that
the
Bonzes
make
Feasts
for
the
Dead
,
and
bring
them
thither
for
them
to
eat
;
most
part
of
these
Tombs
are
so
many
little
Mausoleums
,
very
neat
and
pretty
;
here
is
the
Figure
of
one
of
the
loveliest
of
them
,
by
which
you
may
judge
of
the
rest
,
for
they
are
all
made
after
the
same
Fashion
,
with
this
difference
only
,
that
some
have
Dragons
in
stead
of
Lyons
upon
the
Gate
,
as
you
enter
into
them
,
and
that
they
are
more
or
fewer
Steps
high
,
according
to
their
Magnificence
.
Being
come
out
of
the
Burying-Place
,
we
heard
the
Noise
of
Cimbals
and
little
Bells
,
and
following
the
Sound
,
came
to
a
little
Temple
of
the
Chineses
,
where
their
Priests
were
assembled
to
offer
a
Sacrifice
.
That
Temple
is
built
much
in
the
manner
of
our
little
Churches
,
both
without
and
within
At
the
entry
there
was
a
pretty
big
Porch
open
on
all
hands
.
There
they
entertain
the
Chineses
that
are
present
at
the
Sacrifices
;
there
they
Talk
,
Eat
,
Drink
freely
,
and
make
no
scruple
to
invite
Strangers
to
do
so
.
We
would
not
accept
of
the
Betle
and
Areka
which
they
presented
us
,
for
fear
they
might
have
been
offered
to
Idols
.
The
truth
is
,
under
the
Porch
on
each
side
of
the
Temple-door
,
there
was
a
kind
of
Altar
with
their
Steps
,
loaded
with
Pyramids
of
all
sorts
of
sweet
Meats
,
Betle
and
Areka
in
fifty
or
sixty
China
Dishes
as
big
as
Plates
,
which
they
pres●nted
to
their
Idols
,
before
they
gave
them
to
their
Bonzes
,
or
eat
of
them
themselves
.
Upon
these
Degrees
there
were
several
Statues
of
Men
and
different
Animals
.
In
the
middle
of
the
Figures
of
the
Men
,
there
was
one
that
represented
a
Bonze
with
a
very
long
and
black
Beard
,
attentively
reading
in
a
Book
which
he
held
very
near
his
Eyes
,
as
if
he
had
been
short
sighted
.
Near
to
him
there
was
another
Doctor
with
a
white
Beard
,
and
a
kind
of
Surplice
,
who
seemed
to
be
speaking
in
publick
.
As
we
entered
into
the
Temple
,
we
saw
seven
or
eight
Priests
cloathed
in
their
Sacerdotal
Habits
,
pretty
like
to
ours
:
He
who
seemed
to
be
the
Superior
was
in
the
middle
,
and
always
attended
by
two
or
four
,
who
with
him
performed
the
same
Ceremonies
.
Behind
them
there
were
two
or
three
Officers
,
who
bowed
their
Bodies
down
to
the
Ground
,
when
the
others
made
but
moderate
Inclinations
,
and
then
other
two
who
had
each
a
little
Bell
in
their
Hand
.
In
a
Corner
near
the
Door
,
there
was
a
Timbreler
beating
upon
Timbrels
,
to
the
Sound
whereof
,
and
of
four
little
Bells
which
two
Priests
who
assisted
the
Superior
held
,
all
came
out
in
cadence
from
the
Altar
with
a
slow
and
modest
Pace
,
making
some
Turns
,
sometimes
following
one
another
,
and
sometimes
putting
themselves
in
a
Ring
,
and
always
singing
in
a
manner
that
was
not
unpleasing
.
During
the
Sacrifice
,
two
Ministers
came
away
from
the
Altar
,
and
lighted
Pastilles
and
Candles
upon
all
the
Altars
,
for
besides
the
chief
Altar
that
was
at
the
end
of
the
Chappel
,
there
was
one
also
on
the
Left-hand
.
When
they
advanced
to
,
or
returned
from
the
Altars
,
they
made
low
Bows
.
Now
the
Chineses
seeming
to
be
surprised
to
see
us
,
we
told
them
that
we
were
Priests
of
the
most
high
God
of
Heaven
and
Earth
,
who
were
going
to
China
to
preach
the
only
true
Religion
.
They
gave
us
to
understand
that
they
knew
there
was
a
great
many
of
our
Fathers
in
their
Country
,
who
were
very
able
Doctors
,
and
highly
esteemed
by
the
Emperor
and
great
Men
of
the
Kingdom
.
We
had
a
mind
to
see
all
to
the
very
last
,
but
being
informed
that
that
Sacrifice
was
performed
for
chasing
the
Devil
out
of
a
sick
Person
,
and
that
the
Ceremony
would
continue
till
night
;
after
we
had
stayed
there
near
an
hour
,
we
went
our
way
;
much
pitying
the
Blindness
of
these
People
,
and
being
very
desirous
to
endeavour
the
Conversion
of
their
Country-men
.
August
the
Twenty
fourth
,
the
Eve
of
St.
Louis
,
my
Lord
Ambassador
did
the
General
the
Civility
to
give
him
notice
,
that
he
would
not
have
him
to
be
surprised
,
if
in
the
Evening
he
heard
Guns
fired
in
the
Road
,
that
it
was
the
Custom
of
the
Kings
Ships
to
honour
the
Festival
of
St.
Louis
by
such
Rejoycings
.
The
Ambassador
charged
another
Jesuit
and
me
with
that
Commission
,
and
we
went
to
the
Palace
when
the
General
was
at
Council
.
So
soon
as
he
was
told
that
we
waited
for
him
,
he
came
to
us
,
and
we
made
him
our
Compliment
in
the
Name
of
the
Ambassador
.
He
was
sensibly
obliged
by
that
Civility
,
and
said
that
the
French
shew'd
him
greater
Respect
than
the
English
would
do
in
such
a
case
.
He
asked
us
if
it
was
the
Kings
Birth-day
,
because
then
he
would
take
a
share
in
our
Rejoycings
,
and
testifie
his
Respects
for
that
great
Monarch
,
by
a
Discharge
of
all
the
Guns
of
the
Fort
and
Ships
.
But
being
informed
that
by
that
publick
Expression
of
Joy
we
honoured
the
Festival
of
St.
Louis
King
of
France
,
whose
Name
the
King
bore
;
I
am
very
sorry
,
Fathers
,
said
he
,
that
I
cannot
do
in
Honour
of
St.
Louis
,
what
,
with
all
my
heart
I
would
have
done
in
Honour
of
Louis
the
Great
.
When
we
took
our
Leave
of
him
,
he
made
us
a
thousand
offers
of
Services
,
and
obliged
us
to
promise
him
that
we
would
not
trust
our
Letters
to
any
but
him
,
and
that
we
should
do
the
same
when
we
wrote
from
China
to
France
,
that
he
would
take
that
Commission
upon
himself
,
that
he
might
entertain
a
Correspondence
with
us
.
We
embraced
the
Liberty
he
gave
us
,
and
entrusted
him
with
our
Letters
at
our
Departure
.
Being
come
out
of
the
Palace
we
went
streight
on
board
to
give
the
Ambassador
an
Account
of
what
we
had
done
,
and
to
Confess
the
Catholicks
who
were
to
be
there
next
Morning
.
When
we
were
got
within
three
Musquet
shot
of
the
Ocean
,
we
saw
her
fire
seventeen
,
Guns
,
and
the
Maligne
thirteen
,
which
were
followed
by
several
Huzza's
,
and
some
Volleys
of
small
Shot
.
We
were
informed
at
Batavia
,
that
it
is
not
now
so
difficult
to
enter
into
China
as
formerly
,
and
that
the
Emperor
had
a
mind
to
try
whether
Freedom
of
Trade
would
encrease
the
Wealth
of
his
Empire
or
not
.
It
is
said
the
Dutch
laid
hold
on
that
Occasion
,
and
this
Year
sent
a
solemn
Embassie
with
Presents
to
the
Emperor
of
China
,
that
they
might
obtain
the
Liberty
of
Commerce
in
his
Dominions
,
and
that
upon
the
News
thereof
,
the
English
had
sent
also
one
of
their
Ships
to
Chiucheu
;
but
that
they
would
not
let
those
who
were
on
board
come
ashoar
,
and
that
they
were
obliged
to
return
back
again
with
the
loss
of
their
Time
,
Fraught
and
Goods
.
Sunday
in
the
Evening
,
the
five
and
twentieth
of
August
,
all
that
were
ashoar
had
Orders
forthwith
to
come
on
board
.
Before
we
embarked
we
went
all
seven
to
the
Palace
,
to
take
our
leave
of
the
General
,
and
to
thank
him
for
all
his
Civilites
.
We
promised
him
never
to
forget
his
Favours
,
and
to
pray
God
that
he
would
reward
him
in
another
Life
.
He
spoke
very
obligingly
to
us
,
and
addressing
himself
to
Father
Fucity
;
I
was
in
good
hopes
,
Father
,
said
he
,
that
I
might
have
fitted
you
with
a
Passage
for
Siam
in
one
of
our
Ships
;
but
seeing
you
will
not
part
from
your
Fathers
,
I
will
not
be
against
your
Design
.
Once
more
I
intreat
you
,
that
you
would
give
me
occasion
to
serve
you
.
Having
thanked
him
a
thousand
times
,
we
took
our
Leaves
with
hearts
full
of
Gratitude
.
Next
day
he
sent
us
his
Boat
to
carry
us
on
board
,
and
therein
a
great
quantity
of
fine
Bisket
,
dry
Fish
,
Fruit
,
and
other
Provisions
for
Father
Fucity
.
He
knew
very
well
that
we
were
magnificently
treated
by
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
at
the
Ambassadors
Table
,
and
that
we
wanted
for
nothing
,
but
he
could
not
tell
if
the
same
Favour
would
be
shew'd
to
Father
Fucity
.
Before
we
parted
from
Batavia
we
informed
our selves
of
the
Dutch
Government
in
the
Indies
,
and
the
principal
Points
of
it
are
as
follow
.
The
Generalship
is
the
highest
Office
:
it
gives
him
who
enjoys
it
a
Right
over
every
thing
without
exception
:
it
is
given
for
Life
,
but
revocable
at
the
Companies
pleasure
;
the
General
may
lay
down
his
Place
after
three
Years
service
.
The
Council
of
State
consists
of
the
General
,
the
Director
General
,
and
six
Counsellors
.
The
Plurality
of
Voices
carries
it
in
the
Decision
of
Affairs
;
but
the
Generals
,
who
have
commonly
but
two
Voices
pass
over
that
Formality
,
when
they
'l
answer
for
the
Success
of
any
Affair
.
The
Places
of
Counsellors
are
the
Rewards
of
considerable
Services
done
to
the
Company
.
They
have
a
Salary
of
two
thousand
Livers
a
Month
,
and
the
General
has
but
twelve
thousand
Livers
a
Year
,
and
the
Charges
of
House-keeping
defray'd
.
But
seeing
he
hath
all
in
his
Power
,
without
being
obliged
to
give
an
Account
,
it
may
be
said
that
he
has
what
he
pleases
.
Every
Counsellor
has
his
Province
,
and
the
Affairs
relating
to
it
must
be
managed
by
him
.
The
Great
or
Supream
Council
,
which
is
the
highest
Judicature
of
the
Country
,
and
judges
sovereignly
in
all
Causes
Civil
and
Criminal
,
consists
of
a
President
,
a
Vice-president
,
and
two
Proctors
Generals
.
That
Tribunal
may
Judge
and
Condemn
the
General
himself
.
The
third
Council
is
that
of
the
Sheriffs
,
who
take
Cognisance
of
Matters
concerning
the
Town
.
The
fourth
,
which
is
like
a
Presidial
Court
in
France
,
judges
Causes
of
less
importance
,
to
the
Sum
of
an
hundred
Crowns
,
without
appeal
.
The
Director
General
holds
a
second
Rank
;
all
that
concerns
Trade
passes
through
his
Hands
,
and
he
is
obliged
to
give
an
Account
of
it
.
Next
to
the
Counsellors
of
State
for
the
Government
,
are
the
Governours
of
the
Provinces
,
to
the
number
of
six
,
of
Coromandel
,
who
resides
at
Pasicate
,
of
Amboyna
,
the
Capital
of
which
is
Victoria
,
of
Tarnata
,
the
King
whereof
hath
been
obliged
to
quit
his
Kingdom
to
the
Company
,
and
content
himself
with
a
Pension
of
twelve
hundred
Crowns
;
of
Ceilan
,
who
resides
at
Colombo
,
and
lastly
of
Malaca
.
This
last
Government
has
sometimes
Governours
,
and
sometimes
none
at
all
.
The
most
considerable
next
to
the
Governours
of
Provinces
,
are
the
chief
Merchants
,
the
Commanders
of
Places
,
and
the
Presidents
or
Heads
of
Factories
.
As
for
War
,
next
to
the
General
,
all
the
Command
rests
upon
the
Major
General
.
He
that
has
that
Charge
at
present
is
a
French-man
by
birth
,
and
is
called
the
Heer
St.
Martin
.
That
Command
is
afterwards
divided
amongst
the
Captains
of
Batavia
,
who
are
Colonels
when
they
are
abroad
out
of
the
Town
.
They
have
twelve
thousand
Men
of
regimented
Forces
,
and
an
hundred
and
fifty
Ships
;
there
is
besides
a
Bayliff
or
Commander
of
the
Town
of
Batavia
.
A
Dutch
Ship
that
ran
foul
of
us
.
Munday
morning
the
26th
.
we
put
out
of
the
Road
of
Batavia
with
a
fair
wind
.
Betwixt
eight
and
nine
a
Clock
in
the
Evening
,
it
being
pretty
dark
,
we
made
all
of
a
sudden
a
Ship
as
big
as
our
own
,
within
two
Musquet-shot
of
us
,
bearing
down
upon
us
before
the
wind
.
We
presently
hailed
her
and
asked
who
were
on
Board
,
but
it
was
to
no
purpose
;
for
no
body
made
answer
.
In
the
mean
time
the
wind
being
good
she
was
presently
up
with
us
.
By
her
way
of
working
it
was
thought
at
first
she
intended
to
run
us
on
Board
in
the
quarter
,
and
perceiving
her
low
Sail
furled
as
if
she
had
been
to
fight
,
it
was
not
doubted
but
that
in
Boarding
of
us
she
would
pour
in
a
whole
Broadside
.
No
Body
was
startled
at
that
surprise
,
but
all
seemed
ready
to
do
their
Duty
.
The
clutter
that
the
Seamen
and
Souldiers
who
were
upon
the
Watch
kept
,
some
running
to
their
Arms
and
others
minding
the
Sails
,
soon
awaked
those
that
were
asleep
;
so
that
in
a
trice
all
were
upon
the
deck
.
The
Ambassador
perceiving
that
this
Ship
had
run
her
Bolt-sprit
into
our
Stern
,
and
that
no
Enemy
appeared
,
concluded
that
they
who
were
on
Board
had
no
ill
design
.
He
thought
it
enough
to
command
five
and
twenty
or
thirty
small
shot
to
be
fired
amongst
them
,
as
a
warning
to
them
to
be
better
upon
their
Guard
another
time
.
But
the
other
Ship
having
with
her
Bolt-sprit
done
some
damage
to
our
Galleries
,
got
clear
of
her self
,
without
any
Seamans
appearing
on
Board
.
That
adventure
occasioned
various
reasoning
.
Those
of
most
sense
were
of
the
opinion
of
the
Ambassador
and
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
,
who
attributed
it
to
a
careless
working
of
the
Ship.
The
truth
is
,
if
she
had
had
any
bad
design
,
she
would
not
have
failed
to
fire
her
Guns
,
when
she
laid
us
on
board
,
and
to
have
poured
in
a
volley
of
small-shot
amonst
us
.
We
were
informed
at
Siam
by
Hollanders
that
came
from
Batavia
after
us
,
that
it
was
one
of
their
Ships
coming
from
Palimbam
and
that
all
the
Men
on
Board
were
drunk
or
asleep
.
The
wind
was
good
,
The
Streight
of
Banka
difficult
to
be
passed
because
of
the
want
of
Water
.
and
so
that
accident
did
not
at
all
hinder
us
to
pursue
our
Voyage
.
It
was
not
long
before
we
got
to
the
entry
of
the
Streight
of
Banka
,
which
is
made
by
an
Isle
so
called
and
the
Isle
of
Sumatra
.
The
Banks
and
Shelves
that
are
at
the
entry
of
this
Streight
,
make
it
a
difficult
passage
for
those
that
are
not
acquainted
with
it
.
We
had
a
Dutch
Pilot
on
Board
and
a
very
able
Man
,
who
had
several
times
before
past
that
Streight
,
and
for
all
that
,
tho
we
continually
also
heaved
the
Head
,
our
Ship
stuck
aground
,
and
so
did
the
Frigat
too
;
But
the
Ground
being
owzy
,
we
were
in
no
danger
,
and
having
put
out
an
Anchor
at
a
distance
in
deeper
water
,
we
weighed
our selves
off
again
without
any
prejudice
.
The
wind
continuing
fair
in
a
short
time
we
repassed
the
Line
.
We
felt
it
a
great
deal
better
in
this
place
encompassed
with
Land
,
then
when
we
passed
it
the
first
time
out
at
Sea
,
before
we
came
to
the
Cape
.
Calms
are
not
so
much
to
be
dreaded
here
,
because
of
winds
that
reign
there
and
blow
sometime
from
the
Land
,
and
sometime
from
the
Sea
.
The
safest
way
of
Sailing
in
those
Calm
Seas
that
are
as
smooth
as
a
Mill-pond
,
is
to
keep
always
along
the
Shoar
,
in
twelve
,
fifteen
or
twenty
Fathom
water
,
and
never
go
out
of
sight
of
Land
,
as
we
did
,
observing
this
circumspection
,
you
have
always
the
advantage
of
coming
to
an
Anchor
when
you
please
,
which
you
will
be
forced
to
do
very
often
,
because
of
the
Currents
,
that
set
in
to
Land
,
and
of
certain
strong
gusts
and
flurries
,
which
commonly
blow
from
the
Isle
of
Sumatra
.
Some
days
after
we
set
out
from
Batavia
we
were
all
of
a
sudden
surprised
with
one
of
those
Flurries
,
which
put
us
into
great
fear
,
because
all
our
Sails
were
then
abroad
;
but
the
diligence
that
was
used
in
taking
of
them
in
,
cleared
us
of
the
danger
.
October
5.
we
began
to
make
the
Land
of
Asia
,
and
the
first
we
made
was
the
point
of
Malaca
.
We
all
felt
a
secret
Joy
to
see
those
places
that
had
been
watered
with
the
sweat
of
St.
Francis
Xavier
,
and
to
find
our selves
in
these
Seas
so
famous
for
his
Voyages
and
Miracles
.
We
publicly
and
daily
invoked
the
assistance
of
that
great
Saint
after
the
Litanies
of
the
Virgin
,
on
Board
.
We
then
ranged
along
the
Coasts
of
Johor
,
Patane
and
Pahan
,
whose
Kings
are
Tributary
to
the
King
of
Siam
;
but
the
Dutch
have
all
the
Trade
of
these
Kingdoms
.
September
6.
Monsieur
de
Vanderets
D'
Hebouville
one
of
the
Gentlemen
of
the
Ambassadors
Retinue
,
died
on
Board
the
Frigat
,
in
the
Flower
of
his
Age.
He
was
handsome
,
Discreet
,
and
the
eldest
Son
of
a
very
Ancient
and
Rich
Family
in
Normandy
.
His
Distemper
was
a
Bloody-Flux
,
common
enough
in
the
Indies
,
especially
to
those
who
eat
too
much
Fruit
,
as
this
young
Gentleman
did
during
the
five
or
six
days
that
he
was
at
Batavia
.
We
had
notice
of
his
Death
by
the
Frigats
handling
their
Colours
at
eight
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
and
in
the
Evening
we
came
to
know
the
time
of
his
obsequies
,
by
means
of
five
Guns
slowly
fired
one
after
another
.
Funerals
at
Sea
are
performed
with
like
Ceremonie
.
Having
sung
some
Prayers
,
they
wrap
up
the
Body
in
a
Linnen
Cloath
,
tye
a
great
shot
to
the
Feet
,
and
upon
a
Plank
to
which
it
is
made
fast
,
let
it
gently
drop
into
the
Sea
.
Next
day
all
we
that
were
Priests
,
said
a
Mass
on
Board
of
our
Ship
,
for
the
rest
of
his
Soul.
At
length
,
September
22.
we
came
in
sight
of
the
River
of
Siam
,
and
next
day
to
an
Anchor
three
Leagues
from
the
Bar
,
which
is
at
the
entry
of
it
.
The
sight
of
that
Kingdom
raised
an
incredible
Joy
in
all
of
us
,
after
the
dangers
and
fatigues
of
so
tedious
a
Voyage
.
There
had
been
but
little
talk
till
then
of
the
Conversion
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
which
was
the
cause
of
the
Embassie
,
but
at
that
time
it
was
almost
the
subject
of
every
discourse
.
It
was
known
to
all
that
the
King
had
publickly
said
to
my
Lord
Ambassador
that
he
was
in
hopes
,
that
by
his
prudent
Conduct
he
would
accomp●ish
that
great
work
which
was
so
far
advanced
.
We
earne
●●y
begg'd
it
of
God
in
our
prayers
,
and
from
our
first
coming
on
Board
,
our
Father
Superiour
had
ordered
every
one
of
us
to
say
a
Mass
weekly
for
that
intention
.
So
soon
as
we
were
come
to
an
Anchor
,
the
Ambassador
dispatched
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
and
Monsieur
Vachet
with
the
news
of
his
arrival
to
the
King
of
Siam
and
his
Ministers
.
The
first
was
to
go
no
higher
than
Bancok
which
is
the
first
place
of
the
Kingdom
upon
the
River
,
ten
Leagu●s
from
the
mouth
of
it
,
and
the
other
was
to
take
a
Balon
,
which
is
a
Boat
of
that
Countrey
very
light
,
and
make
all
hast
to
Siam
.
The
Governor
of
Bancok
by
Nation
a
Turk
and
of
the
Mahometan
Religion
,
being
informed
that
the
Ambassador
of
the
King
of
France
was
in
the
Road
,
prayed
Monsieur
Vachet
to
take
his
repose
for
the
rest
of
that
night
,
and
suffer
him
to
send
an
express
,
that
he
might
give
the
Court
speedy
notice
thereof
.
The
Governor
of
Bancoks
Messenger
arrived
at
Siam
next
day
about
noon
.
The
Lord
Constance
Minister
of
State
,
was
acquainted
by
a
Letter
which
he
had
received
that
Morning
from
Coromandel
,
that
the
most
Christian
King
had
named
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
to
be
his
Ambassador
extraordinary
at
the
Court
of
Siam
,
and
that
he
had
set
out
from
France
ever
since
the
Month
of
March
with
two
Men
of
War
.
Seeing
we
are
often
to
mention
this
Minister
in
the
sequel
of
this
relation
,
and
that
he
alone
was
deputed
by
the
King
his
Master
to
treat
about
the
Affairs
of
this
Embassie
,
it
is
proper
we
should
make
it
known
who
he
is
.
The
Lord
Constance
is
properly
called
Constantin
Phaulkon
,
and
so
he
writes
his
name
.
He
is
a
Grecian
by
Nation
born
in
Cephalonia
,
his
Father
being
a
noble
Venetian
the
Son
of
the
Governor
of
the
Island
,
and
his
Mother
a
Daughter
of
one
of
the
Ancientest
Families
of
the
Country
.
About
the
year
1660.
when
as
yet
he
was
but
about
twelve
years
of
Age
,
he
had
discretion
enough
to
reflect
upon
the
bad
condition
into
which
his
Parents
had
reduced
the
Affairs
of
his
Family
.
The
thought
of
that
made
him
take
a
Resolution
that
could
hardly
be
expected
from
a
Child
of
his
years
.
Not
being
able
to
support
his
quality
in
his
own
Countrey
he
went
on
Board
with
an
English
Captain
,
who
was
returning
into
England
.
His
wit
and
sprightliness
,
his
compliant
humour
,
and
agreeable
Carriage
quickly
made
him
be
known
,
and
gained
him
the
kindness
of
some
of
the
Lords
of
Court
,
but
despairing
of
success
there
,
he
went
to
Sea
with
a
design
to
go
to
the
Indies
.
His
purpose
was
to
raise
his
Fortune
,
his
Genius
put
him
in
the
way
of
it
,
and
if
his
probity
had
been
less
,
he
might
in
a
short
time
have
got
a
considerable
Estate
.
But
he
chose
rather
to
pass
through
all
the
degrees
of
Seafaring
,
and
to
rise
by
little
and
little
with
Reputation
,
than
to
hasten
to
be
Rich
all
of
a
sudden
by
sneaking
and
unlawful
ways
.
Having
lived
some
years
at
Siam
,
and
scraped
together
a
little
Estate
,
He
resolved
to
quit
the
Service
of
the
English
East-India-Company
,
to
get
a
Ship
of
his
own
,
and
to
Trade
by
himself
.
He
had
much
ado
to
get
out
of
Siam
,
being
detained
by
his
Friends
,
and
by
his
effects
which
he
could
not
as
yet
get
in
.
At
length
he
put
out
,
but
was
beaten
back
again
by
bad
weather
,
and
was
cast
away
twice
in
the
mouth
of
the
River
.
Putting
out
again
to
Sea
once
more
,
he
was
Shipwracked
a
third
time
and
much
more
unfortunately
,
upon
the
Coast
of
Malabar
;
he
was
in
danger
of
having
perished
there
,
and
could
not
save
of
all
he
had
above
two
thousand
Crowns
.
In
this
sad
condition
being
oppressed
with
sorrow
,
weariness
and
sleep
,
he
had
laid
himself
down
upon
the
Shore
,
when
,
whether
he
was
asleep
or
awake
,
for
he
hath
protested
to
me
oftner
than
once
he
could
not
tell
himself
,
he
thought
he
saw
a
Person
full
of
Majesty
,
who
looking
upon
him
with
a
smiling
eye
,
most
mildly
said
unto
him
;
Return
,
Return
from
whence
you
came
:
These
words
so
wrought
upon
him
,
that
it
was
impossible
for
him
to
sleep
all
the
rest
of
the
night
,
and
his
thoughts
were
wholly
taken
up
about
finding
a
way
to
return
to
Siam
.
Next
day
whilst
he
walked
by
the
Sea
side
,
musing
upon
what
he
had
seen
in
the
night
time
,
and
uncertain
what
to
think
of
it
,
he
saw
a
Man
coming
towards
him
dropping
wet
with
a
sad
and
dejected
countenance
.
It
was
an
Ambassador
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
who
upon
his
return
from
Persia
had
been
cast
away
,
without
saving
any
thing
but
his
life
.
Since
both
of
them
spoke
Siamese
,
they
soon
acquainted
one
another
with
their
adventures
.
The
Ambassador
discovered
himself
,
and
told
what
extreme
necessity
he
was
reduced
to
.
The
Lord
Constance
condoling
his
misfortune
,
offered
to
carry
him
back
to
Siam
:
and
with
the
two
thousand
Crowns
that
he
had
saved
after
his
Shipwreck
,
he
bought
a
small
Barque
,
cloaths
for
himself
and
the
Ambassador
,
and
Victuals
for
their
Passage
.
This
so
obliging
a
Conduct
charmed
the
Ambassador
of
Siam
,
who
from
that
time
forward
cast
about
every
way
how
he
might
testifie
to
him
his
gratitude
.
When
they
arrived
at
Siam
,
and
that
the
Ambassador
had
given
account
of
his
Negotiation
and
Shipwreck
to
Barcalon
who
is
the
first
Minister
of
State
in
the
Kingdom
,
he
told
him
all
the
good
Offices
which
he
had
received
from
Monsieur
Constance
,
with
so
great
applause
to
his
merit
,
that
the
Minister
had
a
mind
to
know
him
.
He
entertained
him
in
discourse
,
liked
him
,
and
resolved
to
keep
him
about
him
;
where
he
soon
gained
the
esteem
and
confidence
of
his
Master
.
This
Barcalon
was
a
witty
Man
,
and
well
versed
in
business
,
but
he
avoided
trouble
as
much
as
he
could
and
loved
his
pleasures
.
It
ravished
him
that
he
had
found
an
able
,
faithful
and
industrious
Person
on
whom
he
might
repose
the
cares
of
his
place
.
Nay
he
often
spoke
of
him
to
the
King
;
but
that
which
contributed
most
to
beget
a
good
Opinion
of
him
in
the
mind
of
that
Prince
,
was
the
occasion
that
I
am
about
to
relate
.
The
King
of
Siam
had
a
design
to
send
an
Ambassador
into
a
Foreign
Kingdom
;
and
seeing
he
loves
Magnificence
and
Grandeur
,
he
was
willing
to
spare
no
cost
that
he
might
render
it
famous
by
rich
and
splend
d
Presents
.
The
Mores
to
whom
he
usually
addressed
himself
on
such
occasions
,
demanded
of
him
pr●digious
sums
of
Money
to
set
out
that
Embassie
in
the
manner
he
desired
it
should
be
.
The
Barcalon
to
whom
the
King
complained
of
it
,
●old
it
to
the
Lord
Constance
,
who
promised
〈◊〉
,
th●●r
the
King
would
honour
him
with
that
Commission
,
he
would
make
much
finer
P●s●●●s
,
and
at
less
Charges
than
what
the
King
〈◊〉
the
Mores
.
The
King
being
informed
of
〈…〉
him
;
and
charged
him
with
his
〈◊〉
.
H●
obeyed
them
with
so
much
exactness
and
〈…〉
,
that
from
that
time
his
Majesty
〈…〉
esteem
of
his
ability
.
The
Mor
s
▪
in
the
〈◊〉
time
,
taking
it
ill
that
they
had
no●
th●
〈◊〉
which
they
demanded
given
them
,
〈…〉
Petition
to
the
King
,
praying
hi●
〈…〉
th●●
payment
of
the
Money
which
his
〈…〉
them
.
In
that
Petition
they
had
gi●●●
〈◊〉
●●rticular
account
of
what
they
had
receiv●●
,
〈◊〉
what
they
had
laid
out
.
So
that
according
to
their
account
he
stood
indebted
to
them
in
a
great
summ
,
which
,
as
they
said
,
they
wanted
.
The
King
would
hereupon
know
the
opinion
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
and
put
the
memoirs
of
the
Mores
into
his
hand
,
so
soon
as
he
had
examined
it
,
he
told
the
King
,
that
he
was
cheated
,
and
that
his
Majesty
was
so
far
from
owing
them
any
thing
,
that
they
stood
indebted
to
him
in
threescore
thousand
Crowns
.
The
Morish
Captain
was
fain
to
acknowledge
it
before
the
Commissioners
whom
the
King
deputed
to
enquire
into
the
business
,
that
they
had
been
mistaken
in
their
accounts
.
The
Barcalon
dying
not
long
after
,
the
King
would
needs
put
Monsieur
Constance
in
his
place
.
He
declined
it
,
and
made
answer
to
his
Majesty
,
that
that
post
would
raise
him
the
envy
of
all
the
great
Men
,
that
he
most
humbly
besought
him
not
to
raise
him
higher
than
he
was
,
for
that
was
all
his
Ambition
,
being
happy
enough
in
that
he
stood
fair
in
his
Favours
.
His
modesty
,
his
skill
in
affairs
and
diligence
in
dispatching
them
,
his
Fidelity
in
managing
the
publick
Revenue
,
and
his
disinterestedness
in
refusing
both
the
appointments
of
his
Office
,
and
all
presents
from
private
people
,
have
more
and
more
encreased
the
Kings
confidence
in
him
.
At
present
every
thing
passes
through
his
hands
,
and
there
is
nothing
done
without
him
.
However
his
greatness
hath
not
at
all
changed
him
,
he
is
easie
to
be
spoken
with
,
mild
and
affable
to
all
People
,
always
ready
to
listen
to
the
poor
,
and
to
do
justice
to
the
meanest
of
the
Kingdom
.
He
is
the
refuge
of
the
wretched
and
afflicted
;
but
the
great
Men
and
Officers
who
do
not
do
their
Duty
,
think
him
severe
and
morose
.
Seeing
he
left
his
own
Countrey
when
he
was
young
,
and
by
consequence
but
little
instructed
in
the
Catholic
Religion
,
wherein
he
was
bred
,
it
was
no
hard
matter
for
the
English
to
make
him
embrace
the
Protestant
Religion
,
which
seemed
to
him
to
differ
little
from
his
own
.
But
having
had
since
some
Conferences
with
Father
Thomas
and
Father
Maldonat
of
our
Company
,
for
whom
he
still
retains
a
kind
Friendship
,
and
being
convinced
in
his
own
Judgment
of
the
bad
way
he
had
been
put
into
,
after
full
instruction
he
left
it
,
and
abjured
his
Heresie
to
Father
Thomas
.
Since
that
time
,
he
hath
led
a
very
regular
and
edifying
Life
,
and
by
his
Example
and
Credit
contributes
much
to
the
establishment
of
the
Catholic
Faith
,
as
will
appear
by
the
Sequel
of
this
History
.
So
soon
as
the
King
of
Siam
was
informed
by
his
Minister
of
the
Honour
the
King
of
France
did
him
,
by
the
splendid
Embassy
he
sent
to
him
,
and
was
told
that
the
Ambassador
was
arrived
at
the
Mouth
of
the
River
,
he
was
over-joyed
,
and
publickly
expressed
it
to
all
his
Court.
He
called
his
Council
,
and
ordered
,
upon
pain
of
his-Displeasure
,
that
care
should
be
immediatly
taken
to
receive
the
Ambassador
well
;
that
they
should
shew
him
all
the
Honour
that
he
who
represented
the
person
of
a
great
Prince
deserved
,
and
that
they
should
not
stand
upon
the
Ceremonies
and
Customs
that
were
observed
in
the
reception
of
other
Ambassadors
.
At
the
same
time
he
named
two
of
the
chief
Lords
of
his
Court
,
the
one
,
first
Gentleman
of
his
Bed-Ch
amber
,
and
the
other
chief
Captain
of
his
Guards
,
to
go
as
far
as
the
Bar
,
to
congratulate
late
in
〈…〉
his
happy
Arrival
,
and
to
tell
him
that
〈…〉
●xpected
the
Day
of
his
Audience
a●●
〈…〉
hours
after
,
the
Lord
Constance
〈◊〉
one
of
his
●●●ret●ries
to
complement
his
Excellence
,
and
〈…〉
him
with
all
sorts
of
Refreshments
〈…〉
Retinue
,
and
both
his
Ships
Comp●●●e●
Th●
Governor
of
Bancok
had
alr●●dy
〈…〉
like
before
;
so
that
in
a
trice
we
had
〈…〉
.
Since
it
was
his
Majesti●
〈…〉
,
That
the
Ambassador
should
〈…〉
Reception
,
the
Lord
〈…〉
on
his
part
also
,
to
do
him
the
〈…〉
●ody
before
him
had
ever
received
〈…〉
only
that
he
might
perform
his
Master
〈…〉
but
also
that
he
might
testifie
the
prof●●nd
●●spect
which
he
had
always
entertained
for
〈◊〉
King
of
France
.
He
went
in
person
to
the
Town
o●
Siam
,
to
pitch
upon
the
Lodgings
where
my
Lord
Ambassador
was
to
be
accommodated
;
and
by
his
Orders
,
diverse
Appartments
were
built
hard
by
for
lodging
his
Gentlemen
and
all
his
Retinue
.
He
caused
the
Balons
of
State
to
be
made
ready
,
which
were
to
bring
the
Ambassador
and
those
which
were
to
follow
him
;
because
in
the
Month
of
September
,
as
it
was
then
,
the
River
of
Siam
is
much
out
,
and
all
the
Countrey
about
overflow'd
.
He
gave
Orders
that
at
every
five
Leagues
distance
,
neat
Houses
should
be
forthwith
built
on
the
River
side
,
and
very
sumptuously
furnished
;
and
that
as
far
as
Tabangue
,
an
hours
journey
from
Siam
,
where
my
Lord
Ambassador
was
to
stay
,
till
all
things
were
ready
for
his
Reception
.
In
the
mean
time
,
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
Vicar
Apostolic
of
a
great
part
of
the
Indies
,
came
on
board
,
and
the
Abbot
of
Lyonne
with
him
.
They
were
received
with
all
the
Marks
of
Esteem
and
Respect
that
were
due
to
the
Dignity
of
the
one
,
and
the
Quality
of
the
other
.
The
Ambassador
and
Bishop
after
Mass
shut
up
themselves
together
,
and
had
a
long
Conference
upon
the
Subject
of
the
Embassie
.
Though
we
had
had
the
Honour
to
kiss
the
Bishop's
Hands
when
he
came
on
board
,
yet
our
Father
Superior
judged
it
convenient
,
that
we
should
again
all
six
together
go
and
pay
our
most
humble
Respects
to
him
.
This
Prelate
,
who
is
a
person
of
a
very
sweet
and
good
Nature
,
received
us
with
all
testimonies
of
Joy
and
Affection
:
Nay
he
offered
us
his
Seminary
to
live
in
so
long
as
we
should
be
at
Siam
;
telling
us
,
that
the
House
of
the
Company
was
too
small
to
accommodate
us
all
.
And
we
rendered
him
our
hearty
Thanks
for
his
Goodness
.
At
that
time
the
two
great
Mandarins
whom
the
King
of
Siam
sent
to
his
Excellence
,
came
on
board
of
us
in
a
Galley
.
They
were
introduced
into
the
Ambassador's
Cabin
,
that
was
spred
with
a
Foot-Carpet
:
Being
come
in
,
they
sate
down
upon
the
Carpet
;
and
then
the
Elder
of
the
two
asked
my
Lord
Ambassador
in
the
Name
of
the
King
his
Master
,
News
of
the
King
of
France
,
and
of
all
the
Royal
Family
,
and
congratulated
his
happy
Arrival
.
He
added
,
according
to
the
Visions
of
the
Metempsychosis
,
wherewith
most
of
the
Orientals
are
infatuated
,
that
he
well
knew
his
Excellence
had
heretofore
been
employed
in
great
Affairs
,
and
that
it
was
above
a
thousand
years
since
he
came
to
Siam
to
renew
the
Friendship
of
the
Kings
who
at
that
time
governed
the
two
Kingdoms
of
France
and
Siam
.
The
Ambassador
having
very
civilly
answered
their
Complements
,
added
with
a
Smile
,
that
he
did
not
remember
he
had
ever
been
charged
with
so
important
a
Negotiation
,
and
that
this
was
the
first
Voyage
he
had
ever
made
to
Siam
.
After
a
short
stay
,
they
took
leave
,
assuring
the
Ambassador
,
that
the
King
was
impatient
to
see
him
:
and
that
he
had
ordered
the
luckiest
day
of
the
Year
to
be
pitched
upon
for
his
Reception
.
They
were
served
with
Tea
and
Sweet
Meats
;
and
one
of
them
,
who
was
a
very
handsom
man
,
and
of
a
pleasant
aspect
,
drank
Wine
;
but
the
other
would
not
so
much
as
taste
it
.
So
they
went
into
their
Galley
again
,
where
they
wrote
down
all
they
had
seen
and
heard
in
this
Congress
.
Towards
the
Evening
our
Father
Superior
would
have
me
go
before
with
Father
Visdelou
and
Father
Bouvet
,
to
take
order
about
our
Affairs
.
There
offered
a
very
fair
occasion
by
the
return
of
the
Bishop
and
Abbot
of
Lyonne
,
who
were
to
part
next
day
,
and
who
offered
us
their
Balons
.
The
Ambassador
commanded
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
and
the
Chevalier
du
Fay
to
wait
upon
the
Bishop
and
Abbot
,
who
went
into
the
Chaloop
;
where
we
had
the
honour
to
accompany
them
,
because
their
Balons
were
not
strong
enough
to
come
on
board
.
Pretty
late
in
the
Evening
we
got
to
the
mouth
of
the
River
;
at
that
place
it
is
but
a
short
League
over
;
half
a
League
further
up
,
it
is
not
a
quarter
of
a
League
over
;
and
a
little
higher
,
it
is
not
at
the
broadest
place
above
an
hundred
and
threescore
paces
or
thereabouts
over
.
It
has
a
very
fair
pretty
deep
Channel
.
The
Bar
is
a
Bank
of
Owze
lying
in
the
mouth
of
it
,
where
there
is
not
above
thirteen
foot
water
when
the
Tides
are
at
the
highest
.
There
is
nothing
more
charming
than
the
sight
of
that
River
,
the
Banks
on
both
sides
being
covered
over
with
Trees
always
green
,
and
beyond
them
there
being
nothing
but
vast
Plains
reaching
out
of
sight
covered
with
Rice
.
It
was
Night
when
we
put
ashoar
at
a
little
Lodging
where
the
Balons
of
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
stayed
for
him
.
Seeing
the
Countrey
about
within
a
days
Journey
of
Siam
,
is
very
low
Land
;
it
is
all
overflowed
for
one
half
of
the
year
.
The
Rains
which
fall
for
several
Months
together
swelling
the
River
,
cause
these
great
Inundations
,
and
that
's
the
thing
which
makes
the
Countrey
so
fertil
;
were
it
not
for
that
the
Rice
that
grows
only
in
Water
,
and
wherewith
all
the
Fields
are
covered
,
could
not
supply
,
as
it
does
,
all
the
Siamese
and
neighbouring
Countries
with
Food
.
This
is
another
Convenience
of
these
Inundations
,
that
one
may
go
all
about
in
a
Balon
,
even
into
the
Fields
;
which
makes
so
great
a
number
of
Boats
to
be
in
all
places
,
that
in
the
greatest
part
of
the
Kingdom
there
are
more
Balons
than
Men.
There
are
some
of
them
very
big
,
covered
with
Houses
,
which
serve
to
lodge
whole
Families
;
and
several
of
these
being
joyned
together
,
make
a
kind
of
floating
Villages
in
those
places
where
they
chance
to
meet
.
We
continued
going
up
the
River
all
night
long
,
during
which
we
saw
a
very
pleasant
sight
,
and
that
was
an
infinite
number
of
Fire-flies
,
wherewith
all
the
Trees
upon
the
sides
of
the
River
were
so
covered
over
,
that
they
appeared
like
so
many
great
Branches
set
thick
with
innumerable
Lights
,
which
the
reflection
of
the
Water
,
at
that
time
as
smooth
as
a
Looking-glass
,
infinitely
multiplied
.
Whilst
we
were
taken
up
in
viewing
of
them
,
all
of
a
sudden
we
were
beset
with
a
prodigious
quantity
of
Musketo's
or
Maringoiiins
.
These
are
a
kind
of
very
troublesom
Gnats
,
that
sting
through
Peoples
Cloaths
,
and
leave
the
Marks
of
it
a
long
time
behind
them
.
The
Siamese
who
row'd
our
Balon
,
though
they
were
naked
,
and
tugg'd
at
the
Oar
,
made
a
better
shift
against
them
than
we
;
they
gave
themselves
a
flap
with
the
hand
every
time
they
felt
a
Musketoe
,
and
struck
so
pat
that
they
never
missed
them
,
without
losing
one
single
stroak
of
their
Oar
for
all
that
.
We
found
a
great
many
Monkeys
and
Sapajous
upon
the
River
side
,
which
clambered
up
the
Trees
,
and
went
together
in
Troops
.
But
no
pleaseanter
sight
can
be
seen
than
the
vast
numbers
of
Criel
Herons
that
swarm
upon
the
Trees
;
at
a
distance
one
would
take
them
for
their
Blossoms
.
The
White
of
the
Birds
mingling
with
the
Green
of
the
Trees
,
makes
the
most
lovely
Land-skip
imaginable
.
The
Criel
Heron
is
a
Fowl
shaped
like
a
common
Heron
,
but
far
less
;
it
is
of
a
neat
proportion
of
Body
,
and
has
fair
Feathers
whiter
than
Snow
.
It
hath
Tops
or
Tufts
upon
the
Head
,
Back
and
Belly
,
wherein
its
chief
Beauty
consists
,
and
which
render
it
extraordinary
.
All
the
wild
Birds
have
most
lovely
Feathers
,
there
are
of
them
of
several
colours
,
all
yellow
,
all
red
,
all
blew
,
all
green
,
and
that
in
great
numbers
:
For
the
Siamese
believing
the
Transmigration
of
Souls
into
other
Bodies
,
kill
no
Animals
,
for
fear
,
as
they
say
▪
of
driving
out
from
thence
the
Souls
of
their
Relations
,
which
may
very
well
be
lodged
there
.
We
did
not
make
a
League
of
way
without
meeting
with
some
Pagod
,
that
is
to
say
,
a
Temple
of
Idols
.
It
hath
always
by
it
a
little
Monastery
of
Talapoins
,
who
are
the
Priests
and
the
Religious
of
the
Countrey
.
These
Talapoins
live
in
common
,
and
their
Houses
are
so
many
Seminaries
,
where
the
Children
of
Quality
are
bred
.
So
long
as
Children
continue
there
,
they
wear
the
habit
of
Telapoins
,
which
consists
in
two
pieces
of
a
kind
of
yellow
Cotton
Cloth
,
whereof
the
one
serves
to
cover
them
from
the
Girdle
down
to
the
Knees
,
and
the
other
,
they
use
sometimes
as
a
Scarf
,
putting
it
about
their
Shoulders
like
a
Shoulder-Belt
;
and
sometimes
they
wrap
it
about
them
like
a
little
Cloak
.
They
have
their
Heads
and
Eye-brows
shaved
as
well
as
their
Masters
,
who
are
perswaded
that
it
would
be
immodest
and
sinful
to
let
them
grow
:
Their
Blindness
made
us
heartily
pity
them
.
Having
row'd
on
all
night
long
,
about
Ten
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
we
arrived
at
Bancok
.
This
is
the
most
important
Place
of
the
Kingdom
,
because
it
defends
the
Passage
of
the
River
with
a
Fort
that
is
on
the
other
side
.
Both
are
well
furnished
with
Brass
Guns
,
but
ill
fortified
.
Monsieur
de
la
Mare
a
French
Engineer
,
whom
my
Lord
Ambassador
left
at
Siam
,
hath
received
Orders
from
the
King
to
fortifie
it
regularly
,
and
to
make
a
good
place
of
it
.
We
saw
the
Governor
of
it
in
passing
;
he
is
a
tall
very
handsom
man
,
who
received
us
with
a
great
deal
of
Civility
.
We
went
afterwards
to
dine
with
a
French
Artisan
;
for
there
are
no
Inns
in
that
Countrey
.
That
day
we
began
to
use
Rice
instead
of
Bread
,
and
to
drink
nothing
but
River-water
.
The
Rice
being
only
boiled
with
Water
,
is
but
an
insipid
kind
of
Food
,
and
we
could
hardly
accustom
our
selve
to
it
at
first
,
but
within
a
Fortnights
time
we
came
to
like
it
as
well
as
Bread
,
which
is
very
scarce
and
dear
there
,
because
the
Wheat
must
be
brought
from
Surrat
or
Japan
.
Betwixt
Bancock
and
Siam
,
you
meet
with
a
great
many
Aldees
or
Villages
,
that
almost
every
where
border
the
River
.
These
Villages
are
no
more
than
a
great
many
Huts
or
Hovels
raised
upon
high
Pillars
,
because
of
the
Inundation
.
They
are
made
of
Bambous
,
which
is
a
Tree
whose
Timber
is
much
used
in
that
Countrey
.
The
Trunk
and
great
Branches
serve
for
making
of
Pillars
and
Joysts
,
and
the
small
Branches
to
makes
the
Walls
and
Roof
.
Near
the
Villages
are
the
Bazars
or
floating
Market-places
,
where
the
Siamese
,
who
go
up
or
down
the
River
,
find
their
Victuals
ready
drest
;
that
's
to
say
,
Fruit
,
boyl'd
Rice
,
Rack
(
which
is
a
kind
of
Strong
Water
made
of
Rice
and
Lime
)
and
some
Ragousts
after
the
Siamese
Mode
,
which
a
French-man
could
not
taste
.
Next
day
,
the
Third
of
October
,
we
came
to
Siam
.
We
thought
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
had
got
before
us
,
and
therefore
went
streight
to
the
Seminary
,
to
pay
him
our
dutiful
Respects
at
home
;
but
he
was
not
as
yet
arrived
.
Whilst
we
stayed
for
him
,
we
said
Mass
,
to
give
God
thanks
for
his
Protection
during
all
our
Voyage
,
which
had
been
exactly
seven
Months
long
;
for
we
set
out
from
Brest
the
Third
of
March
,
and
arrived
at
Siam
the
Third
of
October
.
From
thence
we
went
to
the
House
of
Father
Suarez
,
the
only
Jesuit
that
was
then
at
Siam
;
Father
Maldonat
being
gone
for
some
time
before
to
Macao
,
from
whence
he
was
to
return
towards
March
following
.
We
passed
by
the
French
Factory
,
and
there
saluted
the
Officers
of
the
Company
.
Then
we
were
conducted
to
the
Palace
which
was
preparing
for
my
Lord
Ambassador
;
where
we
met
with
the
Lord
Constance
,
the
first
,
The
Lord
Constance
receives
the
Jesuits
with
extraordinary
goodness
.
or
to
say
better
,
the
only
Minister
of
the
Kingdom
.
We
knew
before
that
he
was
a
man
of
Merit
,
and
had
a
kindness
for
us
;
but
we
had
the
experience
of
both
far
beyond
our
expectation
.
In
that
first
Interview
,
he
gave
us
many
Testimonies
of
Goodness
,
we
thanked
him
for
the
Balon
which
he
sent
to
meet
us
,
and
for
the
Chambers
that
he
was
pleased
to
order
to
be
built
for
us
near
to
Father
Suarez
,
whose
House
was
too
little
to
accommodate
us
with
Lodgings
.
He
told
us
that
it
was
pleasure
to
him
to
oblige
us
;
and
that
he
did
but
his
Duty
,
when
he
built
an
Appartment
for
his
Brethren
(
for
so
he
did
us
the
honour
to
call
us
)
seeing
he
could
not
lodge
us
in
his
own
house
;
that
moreover
he
expected
more
Jesuits
,
whom
he
had
demanded
from
the
Father
General
at
least
a
year
ago
.
Then
he
shewed
us
all
the
Appartments
of
the
Ambassador's
Palace
,
which
we
thuught
very
handsom
and
neat
.
The
King
of
Siam
had
ordered
a
stately
House
to
be
built
for
the
Ambassador
;
but
seeing
it
was
not
as
yet
finished
,
and
that
there
was
no
delay
to
be
made
because
of
the
Season
that
pressed
his
Return
,
Monsieur
Constance
went
himself
and
pitched
upon
the
fairest
and
most
commodious
House
of
the
Town
,
which
belonged
to
a
great
Mandarin
,
a
Persian
by
Nation
,
and
had
it
splendidly
furnished
.
A
Description
of
the
Palace
where
the
Ambassador
lodged
at
Siam
.
In
the
first
Story
there
was
two
Halls
of
a
Floor
,
hung
with
very
lovely
fine
painted
Cloth.
The
first
was
furnished
with
Chairs
with
blew
Velvet
,
and
the
other
with
Chairs
of
red
Velvet
and
Gold
Fringes
;
and
the
Ambassador's
Chamber
was
encompassed
with
a
Japan-Skreen
,
of
singular
Beauty
;
but
the
Divan
seemed
to
us
to
be
the
prettiest
of
all
.
It
was
a
great
sieled
Hall
,
separated
from
the
other
Appartments
by
a
large
Court
,
and
built
for
taking
the
fresh
Air
during
the
Heats
.
There
was
a
Water-work
at
the
entry
,
a
half
pace
within
,
with
a
very
rich
Canopy
of
State
and
armed
Chair
,
and
in
the
obscurer
Retreats
two
Closets
joyning
the
River
,
which
served
for
bathing
places
.
Which
way
soever
one
cast
his
Eyes
,
there
was
nothing
to
be
seen
but
fine
China
of
all
sizes
,
placed
in
niches
;
in
a
word
,
every
thing
lookt
cool
and
pleasant
.
Mr.
Constance
causes
Appartments
to
be
built
for
lodging
the
Jesuits
at
Siam
.
Having
stayed
some
time
there
,
we
took
our
leave
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
and
returned
home
;
where
we
found
Father
Suarez
staying
for
us
.
He
received
us
with
extraordinary
expressions
of
Joy
,
and
treated
us
in
the
best
manner
his
Poverty
could
allow
.
He
is
a
Portuguese
Jesuit
threescore
and
ten
years
old
,
and
hath
lived
above
thirty
years
in
the
Indies
,
where
,
by
his
Zeal
and
Capacity
,
he
hath
gained
the
Esteem
and
Friendship
of
all
that
know
him
.
He
streight
carried
us
to
see
the
Lodgings
that
the
Lord
Constance
ordered
to
be
prepared
for
us
.
They
were
building
for
us
upon
Pilotis
in
the
River
six
little
Rooms
to
lodge
us
in
,
and
a
Gallery
where
where
we
might
lay
our
Instruments
:
there
were
near
a
hundred
Workmen
employ'd
about
it
,
who
had
two
Mandarins
to
oversee
them
and
keep
them
to
their
Business
both
day
and
night
.
Without
that
Augmentation
Father
Suarez
could
not
have
accommodated
us
at
his
House
;
he
had
but
one
Chamber
and
a
Closet
,
both
so
beggarly
poor
and
so
ill
shut
,
that
the
Wood-slaves
,
which
are
a
kind
of
very
venomous
Lizards
,
were
in
all
places
,
behind
his
Trunks
and
amongst
his
Furniture
.
Whilst
things
were
thus
a
preparing
,
The
King
of
Siam
sends
a
stately
Balon
to
the
Ambassador
.
the
King
sent
two
dignified
Lords
of
his
Court
with
ten
Mandarins
of
the
fourth
and
fifth
Rank
,
each
with
a
Balon
of
State
to
go
wait
upon
the
Ambassador's
Balon
to
the
Mouth
of
the
River
.
It
was
very
magnificent
,
all
over
gilt
,
threescore
and
twelve
foot
long
,
and
rowed
by
seventy
handsom
men
,
with
Oars
covered
with
Plates
of
Silver
.
The
Chirole
,
which
is
a
kind
of
little
Dome
,
placed
in
the
middle
,
was
covered
with
Scarlet
,
and
lined
with
Chinese
Cloth
of
Gold
,
having
Curtains
of
the
same
Stuff
.
The
Balisters
were
of
Ivory
,
the
Cushions
of
Velvet
,
and
a
Persian
Carpet
was
spred
under
foot
.
This
Balon
was
accompanied
with
sixteen
more
,
four
of
which
,
adorned
also
with
Foot-Carpets
,
and
Scarlet
Covers
,
were
for
the
Gentlemen
of
the
Ambassador's
Retinue
,
and
the
other
twelve
for
the
rest
of
his
Attendants
.
The
Governor
of
Bancok
joyned
them
with
the
chief
Mandarins
of
the
Neighbourhood
;
so
that
they
made
about
sixty
six
Balons
when
they
came
to
the
Mouth
of
the
River
.
These
Boats
are
of
an
extraordinary
shape
,
they
are
very
long
and
narrow
;
some
of
them
are
as
long
as
Galleys
,
that
is
to
say
,
an
hundred
or
sixscore
foot
in
length
,
which
at
the
broadest
place
are
not
six
foot
wide
.
Their
Crew
consists
of
an
hundred
,
sixscore
,
and
sometimes
an
hundred
and
thirty
Rowers
.
The
Deputies
found
a
Galley
at
the
Mouth
of
the
River
,
which
was
to
carry
them
on
Board
;
it
was
attended
by
three
others
,
and
six
Mirous
,
which
are
long
Barks
for
carrying
the
Baggage
.
Being
come
to
the
Ambassador's
Ship
,
they
complemented
him
in
the
Name
of
the
King
,
telling
him
,
that
they
had
Orders
from
his
Majesty
,
to
wait
upon
his
Excellence
to
the
City
,
where
the
King
impatiently
expected
him
,
that
he
might
have
certain
News
of
the
King
of
France
his
good
Friend
,
and
of
all
the
Royal
Family
.
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
Fourth
BOOK
.
The
Voyage
from
the
Bar
of
Siam
,
to
the
Cities
of
Siam
and
Louvo
.
OCtober
the
8th
.
The
Ambassador
Embarks
in
the
Balon
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
my
Lord
Ambassador
being
acquainted
that
Kings
Balons
were
to
come
and
receive
him
and
all
his
Retinue
that
day
,
went
into
his
Chaloop
with
a
noise
of
Trumpets
,
and
was
saluted
by
his
own
Ship
with
fifteen
Guns
.
He
arrived
in
good
time
at
the
mouth
of
the
River
,
whither
the
Kings
Balons
came
.
He
went
into
that
which
was
appointed
for
him
with
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
and
was
followed
by
all
the
rest
.
That
day
they
advanced
but
two
Leagues
from
the
mouth
of
the
River
,
and
the
Balons
drawing
up
round
the
Maligne
,
which
was
got
up
so
far
,
all
lay
that
night
in
their
Boats.
Next
day
they
went
to
Prepadem
,
where
the
first
resting
Palace
was
prepared
.
Though
these
little
Buildings
be
run
up
in
a
weeks
time
,
and
made
only
of
Reeds
and
Mats
,
yet
they
are
commodious
and
pleasant
.
Since
this
was
the
first
,
and
that
all
the
rest
were
of
the
same
nature
,
it
is
fit
I
should
give
a
description
of
it
.
A
description
of
the
Houses
built
on
the
Rivers
side
to
receive
him
.
Coming
out
of
the
Balon
,
we
mounted
a
pair
of
Stairs
of
six
or
seven
Steps
,
that
reached
down
to
the
surface
of
the
Water
,
and
led
into
a
kind
of
Platform
,
where
after
ten
or
twelve
steps
,
you
find
two
pretty
large
Halls
,
one
on
the
right
hand
and
the
other
on
the
left
,
which
serve
the
Ambassadors
Servants
for
Kitchin
,
Lodging
and
all
.
Beyond
that
there
were
two
Rooms
on
one
side
the
Ambassadors
Chamber
,
and
on
the
other
a
Chapel
.
The
Corridor
or
Platform
butted
upon
a
Hall
which
the
Portuguese
call
Sala
da
presensa
;
on
the
right
as
you
entered
it
,
there
was
a
half
pace
covered
with
a
Persian
Carpet
,
a
large
Canopy
of
State
of
a
Stuff
made
of
Gold
and
Silk
,
with
a
gilt
Chair
underneath
and
Crimson
Velvet
Cushions
with
Gold
galloon
.
Over
against
it
there
was
a
Cupboard
covered
with
a
Carpet
of
lovely
China-work
Cloath
of
Gold
,
and
in
the
middle
of
the
Hall
a
long
Table
for
threescore
persons
.
All
these
Appartments
were
neatly
furnished
,
and
seeing
the
heats
are
excessive
in
that
Country
,
they
were
hung
only
with
very
fine
Indian
Tapestry
,
and
the
Floors
were
covered
with
extraordinary
fine
Mats
.
The
Floor
of
the
Ambassadors
Chamber
was
covered
with
a
large
Persian
Carpet
,
and
the
rising
with
a
very
rich
Stuff
.
In
all
these
Palaces
of
repose
there
were
seven
Officers
of
the
Kings
houshold
,
of
whom
the
first
were
Gentlemen
of
the
Kings
Bed-chamber
,
and
the
seventh
,
Captain
of
the
Life-guards
with
some
Soldiers
who
kept
Guard
day
and
night
,
and
went
several
Rounds
about
the
House
to
prevent
noise
and
disorder
.
The
first
six
and
those
whom
they
commanded
,
took
care
that
nothing
was
wanting
to
the
Magnificence
of
the
Table
and
Neatness
of
the
Appartments
.
As
soon
as
the
Ambassador
stept
ashore
at
Prepadem
,
he
was
complemented
by
the
Governor
of
Bancok
and
Piplis
,
who
had
waited
for
him
there
,
since
the
day
before
.
After
Dinner
he
Embarked
again
,
with
the
same
Court
and
Attendance
and
went
to
Bancok
.
Half
a
League
from
the
Town
two
Olouans
Mandarins
of
the
third
Order
,
of
whom
the
last
was
,
as
it
were
,
General
of
the
Galleys
,
came
in
the
Kings
name
to
receive
him
,
and
so
to
wait
upon
him
to
the
Capital
City
.
It
was
five
a
Clock
before
he
arrived
at
Bancok
.
An
English
Ship
lying
at
Anchor
under
the
Fort
,
saluted
his
Excellence
with
One
and
Twenty
Guns
,
and
the
Town
that
was
over
against
it
,
with
One
and
Thirty
.
As
he
went
ashoar
,
he
was
received
by
a
great
number
of
Mandarins
drawn
up
in
two
ranks
,
having
the
Governor
of
Bancok
and
Piplis
at
the
head
of
them
,
and
he
was
conducted
to
the
Lodging
that
had
been
prepared
for
him
in
the
Town
.
The
streets
through
which
he
past
were
perfumed
with
Aquila
which
is
a
very
precious
wood
,
and
of
a
rare
smell
.
So
soon
as
he
was
come
into
his
Palace
,
the
Fort
which
had
not
as
yet
saluted
him
,
discharged
a●
its
Artillary
.
Next
morning
after
Breakfast
hi●
Excellence
was
conducted
back
to
his
Balon
with
the
same
Ceremonies
.
As
he
put
off
,
the
For●
which
was
on
the
same
side
,
saluted
him
with
One
and
Twenty
Guns
,
the
other
Fort
fired
Twenty
Nine
;
and
the
English
Ships
Twenty
One
▪
and
it
was
the
Lord
Constances
Recommendation
that
made
the
Ship
shew
that
civility
to
the
Lord
Ambassador
.
The
same
Honours
were
performed
to
him
in
all
places
where
he
went
ashoar
,
and
the
King
daily
sent
Mandarins
of
the
chiefest
quality
to
salute
him
on
his
part
,
who
being
all
ordered
to
stay
with
him
till
he
came
to
a
place
called
the
Tabangue
,
his
Court
and
Attendance
was
thereby
rendred
very
numerous
.
A
quarter
of
Leagu●
from
thence
,
he
found
the
Presidents
of
all
th●
Nations
that
are
at
Siam
.
The
English
cam●
with
Eight
Balons
,
and
then
the
Chineses
and
Maure●
When
the
Nations
had
made
severally
their
Com●pliments
,
they
all
together
waited
upon
him
t●
his
Lodging
,
and
then
took
leave
.
The
Gover●nors
of
places
who
had
received
him
at
the
en●try
into
their
Governments
,
waited
upon
him
also
so
far
.
It
is
an
Extraordinary
honour
,
an●
had
never
before
been
rendered
to
any
Ambassa●dor
.
It
was
the
King
of
Siam's
pleasure
,
that
th●
Ambassador
of
the
King
of
France
,
should
be
treat●ed
with
marks
of
distinction
from
all
others
,
an●
even
from
those
of
the
Emperor
of
China
,
wh●
all
over
the
East
is
reckoned
the
greatest
Monarc●
of
the
Universe
.
The
Ambassadors
of
the
King
of
Cochinchinc
,
How
the
King
of
Siam
receives
the
Ambassadors
of
Neighbouring
Princes
.
●●quin
,
Golconde
,
Malayes
,
and
Laos
,
are
received
〈◊〉
a
Court
covered
with
a
Carpet
.
The
great
●●en
of
the
Kingdom
are
prostrate
in
two
Halls
on
●●e
two
sides
,
and
the
other
Mandarins
of
inferior
●uality
,
are
prostrate
in
the
Court.
The
Ambassador
is
with
all
his
retinue
in
another
more
remote
Court
,
where
he
waits
till
he
be
called
to
Audience
by
the
Kings
Order
.
The
King
within
the
prefixed
time
,
with
sound
of
Trumpets
,
Drums
and
other
musical
Instruments
,
that
are
used
in
the
Courts
of
Eastern
Princes
,
appears
at
a
kind
of
Tribune
or
Window
,
raised
six
foot
higher
than
the
first
Court.
Then
the
chief
Minister
having
demanded
the
Kings
Orders
,
sends
for
the
Ambassador
,
by
an
Officer
of
his
Chamber
of
more
or
less
quality
,
according
as
he
intends
to
honour
the
King
his
Master
.
When
the
door
of
the
Court
is
opened
,
the
Ambassador
appears
prostrate
with
the
Interpreters
of
his
Nation
,
and
the
Gentleman
who
commonly
serves
on
such
occasions
as
Master
of
the
Ceremonies
.
All
together
perform
before
his
Majesty
the
Zombaye
,
which
is
a
profound
inclination
of
the
body
;
and
then
come
creeping
along
upon
hands
and
knees
,
till
they
come
to
the
middle
of
the
Court
;
then
raising
themselves
thrice
on
their
knees
,
with
their
hand
joyned
upon
their
head
,
they
bow
down
and
knock
their
forehead
as
often
against
the
ground
.
When
that
is
done
,
they
advance
,
creeping
as
before
till
they
come
to
a
pair
of
stairs
betwixt
the
two
Halls
where
the
great
Men
are
prostrate
,
and
there
having
made
the
Zombaye
,
the
Ambassador
waits
till
the
King
do
him
the
honour
to
speak
to
him
.
Before
he
receives
Audience
,
he
ought
to
send
the
Presents
and
Letter
to
the
Minister
,
who
having
fully
examined
them
in
Council
,
causes
them
to
be
laid
upon
a
Table
betwixt
the
King
and
the
Ambassador
.
Betwixt
that
Table
and
the
Ambassador
,
there
is
still
a
Mandarin
to
receive
the
Kings
Orders
,
when
it
pleases
his
Majesty
to
send
the
Betle
,
which
at
the
end
of
the
Audience
he
presents
to
the
Ambassador
.
At
the
Court
of
Siam
there
are
Mandarins
appointed
to
take
care
of
the
affairs
of
the
several
Nations
.
To
these
private
men
apply
themselves
to
have
their
Petitions
presented
to
the
King
,
and
to
obtain
Audience
of
him
.
They
wait
upon
the
Ambassadors
of
the
Kingdoms
,
whose
affairs
concern
their
Province
,
and
therefore
are
called
Mandarins
of
the
Nations
or
Captains
of
the
Port.
In
public
Audiences
these
Mandarins
are
betwixt
the
Ambassador
and
chief
Minister
,
to
carry
the
word
from
the
one
to
the
other
.
The
King
speaks
first
,
and
bids
his
Minister
ask
the
Ambassador
how
long
it
is
since
he
parted
from
the
King
his
Master
,
if
he
and
all
the
Royal
Family
were
in
health
when
he
left
him
;
the
Ambassador
makes
what
Answer
he
has
to
give
by
his
Interpreter
,
not
immediately
to
the
King
,
but
to
the
Captain
of
his
Nation
,
and
this
man
repeats
it
to
the
Barcalon
,
who
tells
it
to
the
King.
He
is
then
questioned
in
the
same
manner
as
to
the
chief
points
of
his
Ambassie
,
and
so
soon
as
he
hath
made
his
Answer
,
they
bring
him
Betle
and
a
Vest
by
the
Kings
Orders
,
who
thereupon
immediately
retires
without
any
other
Ceremony
,
but
the
sound
Trumpets
and
other
Instruments
,
in
the
same
manner
as
he
entred
.
But
for
the
Ambassadors
of
Independant
Kings
,
How
the
Ambassadors
of
Independant
Kings
are
received
at
Siam
.
as
of
the
King
of
Persia
,
the
Great
Mogul
,
of
the
Emperors
of
China
and
Japan
,
he
uses
them
in
this
manner
.
The
great
Mandarins
of
the
first
and
second
Order
,
lye
prostrate
in
a
Lane
according
to
their
Rank
,
at
the
foot
of
the
Kings
Throne
,
and
the
other
Mandarins
are
prostrate
in
the
two
low
Halls
on
the
sides
which
we
have
mentioned
already
.
The
Ambassador
is
to
come
with
his
Interpreter
to
a
place
assigned
him
near
the
Palace
,
where
he
stays
till
the
chief
Master
of
the
Ceremonies
,
comes
and
introduces
him
to
his
Audience
.
As
he
enters
the
Palace
,
he
sits
down
upon
the
ground
,
and
lays
his
hands
upon
his
head
,
which
is
a
mark
of
the
profound
respect
he
pays
to
his
Majesty
.
Then
he
rises
again
,
and
advances
betwixt
the
two
Halls
,
where
the
Mandarins
of
the
third
,
fourth
and
fifth
Order
,
lye
prostrate
with
great
silence
;
when
he
comes
to
the
foot
of
the
stairs
that
lead
into
the
Hall
of
Audience
,
he
kneels
,
crawling
along
upon
his
hands
until
he
come
into
the
Hall
,
and
in
that
posture
appears
before
the
King
,
who
is
upon
his
Throne
raised
ten
or
twelve
foot
high
,
upon
a
very
broad
half
pace
,
where
the
great
Mandarins
lye
prostrate
.
He
stops
at
the
side
of
the
half
pace
,
above
thirty
foot
from
the
Throne
.
In
the
space
betwixt
,
there
is
a
Table
carrying
a
great
golden
Bason
,
where
the
Presents
which
he
hath
brought
are
,
and
the
Letter
of
the
King
his
Master
open
,
having
been
already
read
by
the
Barcalon
.
When
he
is
come
to
his
place
,
he
continues
there
without
risiing
up
.
The
chief
Minister's
Lieutenant
takes
the
Princes
Letter
that
is
upon
the
Table
,
and
reads
it
aloud
to
the
King.
When
the
Letter
is
read
,
his
Majesty
asks
the
Ambassador
News
of
the
King
his
Masters
Health
,
and
of
all
the
Royal
Family
.
The
King
speaks
to
the
Barcalon
,
the
Barcalon
repeats
it
to
the
Captain
of
the
Nation
,
and
the
Captain
to
the
Interpreter
,
who
explains
it
to
the
Ambassador
.
He
again
makes
answer
to
his
Interpreter
,
and
from
him
it
passes
through
the
same
hands
to
the
King.
In
short
,
his
Majesty
having
in
this
manner
put
some
Questions
,
and
heard
the
Answers
,
orders
Betle
and
a
Vest
to
be
presented
to
the
Ambassador
,
and
so
withdraws
with
sound
of
Trumpet
.
The
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
being
informed
of
those
ways
of
receiving
Ambassadors
below
the
Character
which
he
bore
,
sent
for
the
chief
Mandarins
,
who
accompanied
him
by
Order
from
the
King
their
Master
,
and
told
them
that
he
would
be
glad
the
King
of
Siam
would
name
some
Lord
of
his
Court
to
adjust
the
Ceremonies
of
his
Entry
and
Audience
,
that
so
nothing
might
pass
but
what
suited
the
Grandeur
and
Friendship
of
both
Kings
.
The
Mandarins
made
Answer
to
his
Excellence
,
that
they
should
acquaint
the
Barcalon
,
who
would
have
the
Honour
to
speak
of
it
to
his
Majesty
.
The
King
of
Siam
orders
the
Lord
Constance
to
adjust
with
the
Ambassador
the
Ceremonies
of
his
Reception
.
They
failed
not
to
do
it
,
and
the
King
immediately
named
the
Lord
Constance
,
with
Orders
to
go
forthwith
to
the
Ambassador
,
and
concert
with
him
the
Manner
how
he
was
to
be
received
in
the
capital
City
and
Palace
.
His
Majesty
had
already
said
publickly
,
that
he
would
not
have
the
ancient
Ceremonies
observed
as
to
him
,
which
were
used
at
the
Reception
of
the
Ambassadors
of
the
Mogul
,
Persia
,
and
China
,
and
that
he
consented
that
the
Ambassador
of
France
should
enter
his
Palace
with
a
Sword
by
his
side
,
and
that
he
should
sit
at
his
Audience
,
which
had
never
been
before
granted
to
any
Ambassador
.
The
Lord
Constance
thought
himself
much
honoured
by
that
Commission
,
and
came
to
wait
on
his
Excellence
.
After
their
first
Complements
M.
de
Chaumont
spoke
of
the
Kings
Conversion
as
the
chief
Subject
of
his
Embassie
.
The
Lord
Constance
seemed
astonished
at
it
,
and
told
the
Ambassador
,
that
it
was
the
thing
in
the
World
which
he
most
desired
,
but
that
there
was
no
appearance
of
effecting
it
;
that
the
King
was
extreamly
addicted
to
the
Religion
of
his
Ancestors
,
and
that
he
would
be
strangely
startled
at
an
Overture
for
which
he
was
not
at
all
prepared
;
that
he
adjured
the
Ambassador
not
to
speak
of
that
Affair
,
which
without
doubt
,
would
cause
Disorder
in
the
present
Junctures
,
and
could
produce
no
Good.
The
Ambassador
made
answer
,
that
he
would
consider
of
it
,
but
that
he
could
hardly
suppress
the
most
considerable
,
and
almost
Sole
Reason
of
his
Voyage
.
Then
they
treated
about
the
manner
how
the
Ambassador's
Gentlemen
should
be
present
at
the
Audience
,
for
they
would
have
had
them
either
not
to
come
at
all
,
or
that
they
should
be
in
a
Posture
of
profound
Humility
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
was
positive
that
they
should
enter
with
him
into
the
Hall
of
Audience
,
and
stay
there
as
long
as
he
did
.
It
was
to
no
purpose
for
the
Lord
Constance
to
tell
him
that
it
was
a
new
thing
,
and
never
practised
at
the
Court
of
Siam
,
and
that
the
King
would
hardly
condescend
to
that
;
that
the
Ambassadors
of
the
Kings
of
Tunquin
and
Cochinchine
themselves
came
only
creeping
to
the
Hall-stairs
,
and
appeared
prostrate
before
the
King.
My
Lord
Ambassador
stood
his
ground
,
adding
,
that
he
could
not
go
to
Audience
but
upon
that
Condition
;
that
to
compound
the
Matter
,
he
was
willing
to
consent
that
his
Gentlemen
should
not
stand
in
the
Kings
Presence
;
that
they
should
enter
the
Hall
before
his
Majesty
appeared
there
,
and
that
they
should
be
sitting
upon
the
Carpet
when
he
should
appear
upon
his
Throne
.
The
Minister
thought
these
Proposals
reasonable
;
but
seeing
he
knew
how
nice
the
King
would
be
upon
that
Point
,
he
prayed
the
Ambassador
to
give
him
time
to
speak
of
it
to
his
Majesty
;
whereupon
,
after
a
long
Conference
they
parted
full
of
Esteem
and
Friendship
for
one
another
.
The
Lord
Constance
managed
that
Affair
so
well
,
that
the
King
granted
the
Ambassador
all
that
he
desired
;
and
so
there
was
no
more
now
to
be
done
,
but
to
compleat
the
Preparatives
of
the
Entry
.
The
several
Nations
at
Siam
come
and
complement
the
Ambassador
.
Two
days
after
,
all
the
Eastern
Nations
that
live
at
Siam
,
would
needs
shew
the
high
Esteem
which
they
had
conceived
of
the
King
of
France
.
About
three
and
forty
of
different
Countries
of
the
Indies
,
joyned
together
to
make
their
Ceremonies
more
splendid
,
and
came
in
a
vast
number
of
Balons
,
variously
decked
to
complement
the
Ambassador
.
Next
day
,
four
great
Balons
of
State
came
by
Orders
from
the
Lord
Constance
,
each
manned
with
fourscore
Rowers
,
and
we
had
never
seen
the
like
.
The
two
first
were
shaped
like
Sea-Horses
,
they
were
all
over
gilt
,
and
to
see
them
coming
at
a
distance
upon
the
River
,
one
would
have
taken
them
to
be
alive
.
Two
Officers
of
the
Kings
Guards
were
in
them
,
to
receive
the
Presents
of
the
King
of
France
.
So
soon
as
they
were
loaded
,
they
put
out
with
great
silence
,
and
took
their
station
in
the
middle
of
the
Channel
.
All
the
while
that
they
lay
there
,
there
was
not
the
least
Noise
to
be
heard
upon
the
Shoar
,
and
no
Balon
was
then
suffered
to
come
up
or
down
the
River
,
lest
they
might
fail
in
the
Respect
that
is
due
to
the
Balons
of
State
,
and
to
the
Presents
they
carried
.
The
Day
before
that
which
was
appointed
for
the
Ambassadors
Entry
into
the
City
of
Siam
,
and
for
his
first
Audience
,
the
King
sent
two
Princes
of
his
Court
to
attend
him
next
day
:
The
first
was
called
Oya
Prassedet
,
and
the
other
Peya
Teph
de
Cha.
This
last
was
Cousin-german
to
the
King
of
Camboye
,
and
Oya
Prassadet
was
the
Chief
and
Protector
of
all
the
Talapoins
of
the
Kingdom
,
having
power
to
Judge
,
and
Sentence
them
to
be
punished
when
they
deserve
it
,
which
is
one
of
the
Chief
and
most
Important
Offices
of
the
State.
They
brought
with
them
sixteen
Balons
of
State
,
with
other
six
for
the
Guards
,
and
they
were
followed
by
forty
Mandarins
of
the
third
,
fourth
,
and
fifth
Order
,
all
in
their
Balons
of
Ceremony
,
appointed
to
wait
upon
that
which
was
to
carry
the
Ambassador
,
and
was
one
of
the
finest
that
belonged
to
the
King.
They
began
to
set
out
upon
the
River
about
eight
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
.
The
Balons
of
the
Mandarins
of
inferior
Quality
,
to
the
number
of
forty
,
went
first
by
Pairs
,
and
keeping
a
due
distance
from
one
another
:
After
them
came
ten
or
twelve
Mandarins
of
the
second
and
third
Rank
,
who
had
come
all
the
way
from
Bancok
,
and
the
last
were
followed
by
the
two
Princes
,
whom
the
King
had
sent
the
Evening
before
.
After
a
competent
Interval
appeared
the
four
Balons
,
whereinto
they
had
put
the
Kings
Presents
,
and
then
that
which
carried
his
Letter
separated
from
all
the
rest
by
a
considerable
Space
;
for
before
the
Ambassador
parted
from
the
Tabangue
,
it
behoved
him
to
conform
to
the
Custom
of
these
People
,
to
take
the
Kings
Letter
with
great
Respect
,
and
put
it
into
the
Hands
of
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
,
who
was
to
carry
it
to
the
Balon
solely
appointed
for
it
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
came
next
,
in
a
magnificent
Balon
,
all
shining
and
covered
over
with
Gold.
On
his
Right
and
Left-hand
he
had
six
Gallies
of
the
Guards
,
in
which
were
the
Trumpets
,
Drums
,
and
other
Instruments
that
go
before
the
King
when
he
goes
abroad
publickly
.
He
was
followed
by
four
of
the
Kings
Balons
,
where
his
Gentlemen
and
Servants
were
;
after
them
came
so
vast
and
confused
a
number
of
great
and
small
Balons
of
all
the
Nations
,
that
they
covered
the
Menam
,
which
is
the
Name
of
the
River
,
and
in
the
Siam
Language
,
signifies
the
Mother
of
Waters
.
That
long
Train
of
Balons
of
State
which
advanced
in
good
order
to
the
number
of
an
hundred
and
fifty
,
and
a
Crowd
of
others
covered
over
all
the
River
as
far
as
ones
Sight
could
reach
,
and
made
a
pleasant
Show
.
The
Shouts
that
the
Water-men
made
,
according
to
the
Custom
of
the
Siamese
,
as
if
they
had
been
going
to
charge
an
Enemy
,
brought
Crowds
of
People
to
both
sides
of
the
River
to
be
Spectators
of
that
August
Ceremony
.
None
but
the
Portuguese
absented
themselves
,
except
three
or
four
who
are
Officers
in
the
King
of
Siams
Forces
.
By
that
they
pretended
to
be
even
with
the
French
,
who
two
years
before
had
not
assisted
at
the
Entry
of
the
Ambassador
of
Portugal
.
Only
Father
Suarez
,
for
all
his
great
Age
and
Infirmities
came
and
pay'd
his
Respects
to
my
Lord
Ambassador
.
This
good
old
Man
expressed
his
Joy
by
all
the
Means
he
could
,
and
made
his
Bells
to
ring
when
the
Ambassador
past
by
our
Church
.
The
Dutch
Factory
which
is
on
the
other
side
of
the
River
,
and
one
of
their
Ships
riding
at
Anchor
hard
by
saluted
the
Ambassador
with
all
their
Guns
:
The
City
of
Siam
did
the
same
,
when
he
past
by
the
first
Bastion
,
and
the
French
Company
made
their
Ship
,
which
was
splendid
in
Pennets
and
Streamers
,
fire
all
its
Guns
twice
when
the
Ambassador
past
by
it
,
going
and
coming
from
his
Audience
.
Having
coasted
along
part
of
the
Town
Walls
,
The
Lord
Constance
receives
the
Ambassador
at
the
Rivers
side
.
he
came
to
the
Landing-place
,
which
was
a
quarter
of
a
League
from
the
Palace
.
The
Lord
Constance
was
there
to
give
Orders
,
and
to
receive
the
Ambassador
,
and
so
soon
as
he
had
intelligence
that
the
Balon
drew
nigh
,
he
mounted
his
Elephant
,
and
put
himself
at
the
Head
of
twenty
Elephants
of
War
more
,
who
were
drawn
up
on
the
River
side
.
When
my
Lord
Ambassador
landed
he
alighted
from
off
his
Elephant
,
and
having
made
a
deep
Bow
to
the
Balon
that
carried
the
Kings
Letter
,
he
advanced
to
meet
his
Excellence
,
with
whom
he
exchanged
many
Civilities
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
went
afterward
to
take
the
Kings
Letter
out
of
the
Balon
where
it
was
put
,
but
he
found
that
the
Mandarin
had
already
brought
it
ashoar
with
the
gilt
Pyramid
wherein
it
was
.
This
poor
Mandarin
committed
a
great
fault
,
when
he
thought
that
he
did
very
well
;
he
was
punished
for
it
upon
the
Spot
,
and
had
his
Head
pricked
,
as
an
Earnest
of
a
severer
Chastisement
.
For
in
Embassies
of
the
East
,
The
Respect
shewn
to
the
Kings
Letter
.
there
is
another-guess
Respect
shew'd
to
the
Letters
which
Princes
send
,
than
to
their
Ambassadors
.
The
Letter
they
look
upon
as
the
Royal
Word
,
whereof
the
Ambassador
is
no
more
but
the
Carrier
.
The
Ambassador
then
took
the
Letter
and
gave
it
to
the
Abbot
of
Choisi
,
who
went
with
great
Reverence
and
laid
it
upon
a
gilt
Chariot
,
which
was
to
carry
it
enclosed
within
a
high
Pyramid
to
the
Palace
Gate
.
The
Ambassador
is
carried
to
the
Palace
.
After
that
Ceremony
was
over
,
the
Ambassador
sate
down
in
a
great
gilt
Chair
,
raised
upon
a
half
Pace
covered
with
a
rich
Velvet
Carpet
.
In
that
manner
he
was
carried
upon
ten
Mens
Shoulders
,
environed
with
Mandarins
,
who
walked
afoot
,
except
two
who
were
carried
by
his
Sides
upon
lower
Chairs
.
The
Abbot
de
Choisi
followed
him
,
carried
in
a
Chair
painted
Red
,
and
adorned
with
Ivory
,
and
the
Gentlemen
rode
upon
Horses
that
were
prepared
for
them
.
This
March
was
somewhat
singular
,
it
began
by
twenty
Elephants
of
War
,
that
filed
off
first
amidst
a
double
Lane
of
Pikes
and
Musquets
drawn
up
along
a
great
Street
,
that
reached
from
the
Water-side
to
the
Palace
:
next
came
the
Guards
and
Officers
of
the
Governor
of
the
Town
,
and
many
Mandarins
on
Horseback
.
The
Lord
Constance
marched
last
upon
an
Elephant
,
and
went
immediately
before
the
Chariot
that
carried
the
Kings
Letter
,
to
which
the
People
sitting
on
the
Ground
,
made
the
Zombaye
so
soon
as
it
began
to
appear
.
After
the
Chariot
came
the
Ambassadors
three
Trumpeters
on
Horseback
,
with
their
magnificent
Liveries
,
and
the
Ambassador
seemed
to
be
raised
upon
a
Throne
.
He
was
colathed
in
a
rich
flowered
Silk
of
a
Fire-colour
,
embroydered
with
Gold
,
that
looked
very
splendid
.
The
Abbot
de
Choisi
followed
after
in
a
Surplice
and
Cama●l
,
carried
in
an
open
Chair
.
Then
marched
the
Gentlemen
on
Horse-back
,
all
glittering
with
Gold
and
Silver
,
and
followed
by
Pages
,
Foot-men
,
and
a
great
many
Menial
Servants
,
all
very
neatly
cloathed
.
The
March
was
brought
up
by
an
incredible
Multitude
of
People
keeping
profound
silence
.
The
Palace
of
the
King
of
Siam
is
of
a
vast
Extent
,
A
Description
of
the
Palace
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
but
in
the
Architecture
there
is
nothing
that
is
regular
nor
like
to
our
Building
.
It
consists
of
spacious
Courts
encompassed
with
Walls
and
containing
some
Piles
of
Building
;
on
one
side
are
the
Apartments
of
the
Kings
Officers
,
and
on
the
other
a
great
number
of
Pavilions
,
where
the
Elephants
are
.
There
are
a
great
many
Pagods
in
it
also
,
both
great
and
small
,
which
though
irregular
,
make
still
an
Object
pleasing
enough
to
the
Eye
.
When
we
came
to
the
first
Gate
of
the
Palace
all
alighted
,
and
my
Lord
Ambassador
went
and
took
the
Letter
out
of
the
Triumphant
Chariot
,
and
gave
it
to
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
.
In
this
manner
we
entered
into
the
first
Court
of
the
Palace
,
where
on
one
side
were
fifty
Elephants
of
War
harnessed
with
Gold
,
and
on
the
other
two
Regiments
of
Guards
,
to
the
number
of
eight
hundred
Men
drawn
up
in
Batalia
.
From
thence
we
advanced
into
the
second
Court
,
where
were
eight
Elephants
of
War
more
,
and
a
Troop
of
threescore
Mores
on
Horseback
;
they
were
armed
with
Lances
,
and
had
a
very
good
Meen
.
In
the
third
Court
were
sixty
Elephants
,
with
Harness
richer
than
the
first
,
and
two
Regiments
of
Life-Guards
that
made
two
thousand
Men
under
their
Arms.
Upon
entering
into
the
fourth
Court
,
which
had
one
half
the
Pavement
covered
with
Mats
,
we
found
two
hundred
Souldiers
who
wore
Sabres
adorned
with
Gold
and
Tambag
,
called
by
the
Portugues
,
Os
Bracos
Pintados
,
because
their
Arms
are
painted
Red.
These
Soldiers
are
the
Rowers
of
the
Kings
Balon
,
and
as
it
were
,
the
Guards
of
the
Channel
.
In
two
Halls
more
forward
there
were
five
hundred
Persians
of
the
Kings
Guard
sitting
on
the
Ground
cross-legg'd
,
because
in
the
Kings
Palace
no
Man
is
suffered
to
be
upon
his
Legs
,
unless
he
be
going
,
and
all
the
Siam
Soldiers
were
squatted
upon
the
Tail
,
holding
their
Arms
betwixt
their
joyned
Hands
.
The
fifth
Court
into
which
we
entered
,
was
covered
with
fine
Mats
,
on
which
lay
prostrate
all
the
Mandarins
of
the
third
,
fourth
,
and
fifth
Order
,
and
at
a
little
distance
those
of
the
second
Order
were
in
the
same
Posture
upon
Persian
Carpets
.
Having
passed
amongst
all
the
Mandarins
,
and
crossed
so
many
Courts
,
we
came
at
length
to
the
foot
of
a
pair
of
Stairs
,
where
on
the
Right-hand
were
two
Elephants
covered
all
over
with
Gold
,
and
on
the
Left
,
six
Persian
Horses
,
part
of
whose
Saddles
and
Stirrups
were
of
massie
Gold
,
and
their
Harness
set
with
Pearls
,
Diamonds
,
Rubies
and
Emeralds
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
stopt
there
,
and
the
Gentlemen
going
up
to
the
Hall
of
Audience
,
where
the
King
was
not
come
as
yet
,
sate
down
upon
Persian
Carpets
over
against
the
Throne
,
at
twenty
Paces
distance
,
as
it
had
been
agreed
upon
.
A
Description
of
the
Throne
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
This
Throne
,
to
speak
properly
,
is
no
more
but
a
large
Window
raised
seven
or
eight
foot
higher
than
the
half
Pace
,
and
answering
to
the
middle
of
the
Hall.
On
the
Right
and
Left-Hand
were
two
great
Parassols
of
Cloth
of
Gold
,
consisting
of
seven
or
eight
Stories
,
whose
Staves
were
of
beaten
Gold
,
and
so
high
that
they
almost
touched
the
Cieling
.
The
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
the
Abbot
of
Lyonne
,
and
Monsieur
Vachet
,
sate
in
the
Hall
in
the
same
manner
as
the
Gentlemen
did
,
near
the
Seat
which
was
prepared
for
the
Ambassador
.
In
that
Hall
the
Princes
,
Ministers
and
Mandarins
of
the
first
Order
lay
prostrate
,
to
the
Right
and
Left
,
according
to
their
Rank
and
Quality
.
There
are
three
sorts
of
Princes
at
the
Court
of
Siam
;
the
first
are
the
Princes
of
the
Blood
Royal
of
Camboie
,
and
other
Kingdoms
that
are
Tributary
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
The
second
are
the
Princes
of
Laos
,
Chiamay
,
and
Banca
,
who
have
been
taken
in
the
Wars
,
and
some
others
that
have
voluntarily
put
themselves
under
the
Kings
Protection
.
The
third
are
those
whom
the
King
has
raised
to
the
Degree
of
Princes
;
every
one
of
them
had
before
them
great
Cups
of
Gold
and
Silver
,
which
are
the
Badges
of
their
Dignity
,
and
they
lay
prostrate
with
profound
Silence
,
expecting
the
coming
of
the
King.
Sometime
after
all
were
thus
placed
,
a
great
Noise
of
Trumpets
,
Drums
,
and
many
other
Instruments
was
heard
,
and
then
the
Throne
was
opened
,
and
the
King
appeared
sitting
on
it
.
But
he
was
to
be
seen
only
to
the
Girdle
,
the
rest
being
hid
by
the
Front
of
the
Window
.
All
the
prostrate
Mandarins
rose
up
upon
their
Knees
,
and
having
their
Hands
joyned
over
their
Heads
,
made
profound
Inclinations
of
Body
,
and
knocked
their
Foreheads
against
the
Ground
:
The
King
wore
a
Tiara
all
shining
with
precious
Stones
.
It
is
a
long
Cap
ending
in
a
Point
like
a
Pyramid
,
encompassed
with
three
Rings
of
Gold
,
at
some
distance
from
one
another
.
On
his
Fingers
he
wore
a
great
many
large
Diamonds
that
cast
a
great
Luster
,
his
Vest
was
Red
on
a
Ground
of
Gold
,
and
over
that
he
had
a
Gaze
of
Gold
with
Buttons
of
big
Diamonds
;
all
these
Ornaments
,
together
with
a
brisk
Air
,
full
of
Life
,
and
always
smiling
,
made
him
look
with
a
great
deal
of
Gracefulness
and
Majesty
.
The
Ambassador
enters
the
Hall
of
Audience
.
No
sooner
was
the
Ambassador
advertised
by
the
Noise
of
the
Instruments
that
the
King
was
come
,
but
he
entred
the
Hall
,
followed
by
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
and
the
Lord
Constance
.
Having
advanced
four
Steps
,
and
looking
upon
the
King
,
as
if
that
had
been
the
first
time
he
had
perceived
him
;
he
made
a
Bow
to
the
Ground
,
a
second
he
made
in
the
middle
of
the
Hall
,
and
a
third
when
he
was
come
near
to
the
Seat
that
was
prepared
for
him
.
The
King
answered
every
Bow
he
made
by
an
Inclination
of
Body
,
which
he
accompanied
with
a
serene
and
smiling
Countenance
.
Then
my
Lord
Ambassador
began
his
Compliments
in
this
manner
,
and
having
uttered
the
first
Words
,
sate
down
and
put
on
his
Hat.
SIR
,
THe
King
my
Master
,
The
Harangue
of
the
French
Ambassador
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
at
present
so
famous
in
the
World
by
His
great
Victories
,
and
the
Peace
be
hath
so
often
given
His
Enemies
at
the
Head
of
His
Armies
,
hath
commanded
me
to
wait
upon
Your
Majesty
,
and
to
assure
You
of
the
particular
Esteem
He
hath
conceived
for
Your
Person
:
He
knows
,
Sir
,
Your
August
Qualities
,
the
Wisdom
of
Your
Government
,
the
Magnificence
of
Your
Court
,
the
Greatness
of
Your
Dominions
,
and
what
particularly
You
were
willing
that
He
should
know
by
Your
Ambassadors
,
the
Esteem
You
have
for
Him
,
confirmed
by
that
constant
Protection
which
You
give
His
Subjects
,
especially
the
Bishops
who
are
by
me
,
and
who
are
the
Ministers
of
the
true
God.
He
is
very
sensible
of
the
many
Illustrious
Effects
of
the
Esteem
You
have
for
Him
;
and
He
resolves
,
Sir
,
to
correspond
with
it
to
the
utmost
of
His
Power
.
In
that
Design
He
is
ready
to
treat
with
Your
Majesty
,
to
send
You
of
His
Subjects
to
entertain
●nd
encrease
Commerce
,
to
give
You
all
the
Testimonies
of
a
sincere
Friendship
,
and
to
begin
betwixt
the
two
Crowns
an
Vnion
that
may
remain
as
strict
to
Posterity
,
as
Your
Territories
are
separated
from
His
by
those
vast
Seas
that
disjoyn
them
.
But
nothing
will
more
confirm
Him
in
that
Resolution
,
nor
unite
You
more
closely
together
,
than
to
live
in
the
Sentiments
of
the
same
Belief
.
And
it
is
that
particularly
,
Sir
,
which
the
King
my
Master
,
a
Prince
so
Wise
and
Sharp
sighted
,
tbat
He
hath
always
given
good
Counsel
to
the
Kings
that
are
His
Allies
,
hath
commanded
me
to
represent
to
You
on
His
Part.
He
adjures
You
by
the
Interest
,
which
as
being
one
of
Your
most
sincere
Friends
,
he
takes
in
Your
real
Glory
,
to
consider
that
Sovereign
Majesty
wherewith
You
are
invested
upon
Earth
,
cannot
be
derived
from
any
but
the
true
God
,
that
's
to
say
,
from
an
Omnipotent
,
Eternal
,
and
Infinite
God
,
such
as
Christians
acknowledge
him
to
be
,
who
alone
makes
Kings
to
Reign
and
Rules
the
Fortune
of
all
People
.
To
submit
Your
Grandure
to
this
God
who
governs
Heaven
and
Earth
,
is
much
more
Rational
,
Sir
,
than
to
refer
them
to
the
other
Deities
that
are
worshiped
in
the
East
,
whose
Impotence
,
Your
Majesty
,
who
hath
so
much
Light
and
Penetration
,
cannot
but
easily
see
.
But
it
will
be
made
far
more
palpable
to
You
,
Sir
,
if
You
'l
be
pleased
for
some
time
,
to
give
a
Hearing
to
the
Bishops
and
other
Missionaries
that
are
here
.
It
will
be
the
welcomest
News
that
I
can
carry
to
my
Master
,
Sir
,
that
Your
Majesty
being
convinced
of
the
Truth
,
takes
pains
to
be
instructed
in
the
Christian
Religion
.
This
will
raise
in
Him
a
greater
Esteem
and
Admiration
for
Your
Majesty
,
and
make
His
Subjects
more
eager
to
come
into
Your
Dominions
;
and
in
a
Word
,
Sir
,
will
compleat
Yoor
Glory
,
seeing
by
that
Means
,
Your
Majesty
,
having
so
prosperously
Reigned
upon
Earth
,
makes
sure
of
an
Eternal
Reign
in
the
Heavens
.
The
Bishop
told
the
Lord
Constance
in
Portuguese
the
Sense
of
his
Excellencies
Complement
,
and
that
Minister
explained
it
to
the
King
in
Siamese
,
keeping
in
the
mean
while
in
a
very
respectful
Posture
,
as
the
other
Princes
and
Lords
did
,
who
still
continued
prostrate
in
the
Hall
at
his
Side
,
but
a
little
lower
.
It
would
be
no
easie
matter
to
describe
the
Joy
and
Gladness
which
King
of
Siam
expressed
on
that
occasion
and
during
the
whole
Day
.
It
was
a
Surprise
to
the
Ambassador
,
In
what
manner
the
Ambassador
presented
the
Kings
Letter
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
when
he
entered
the
Hall
,
to
see
the
King
so
high
above
him
,
and
he
seemed
somewhat
troubled
that
he
had
not
been
told
of
it
.
When
his
Complement
was
made
,
the
next
thing
he
was
to
do
in
course
,
was
to
advance
and
present
the
King
his
Masters
Letter
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
It
was
agreed
upon
with
the
Lord
Constance
,
that
to
shew
greater
Respect
to
the
Kings
Letter
,
the
Ambassador
should
take
it
from
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
,
who
for
that
end
should
stand
by
his
Side
during
his
Speech
,
and
hold
the
Letter
in
a
golden
Cup
with
a
very
long
Foot.
But
the
Ambassador
perceiving
the
King
so
high
above
him
,
that
to
reach
up
to
him
he
must
have
taken
the
Cup
by
the
lower
part
of
the
Foot
,
and
raised
his
Arm
very
high
,
thought
that
that
Distance
suited
not
with
his
Dignity
,
and
that
he
ought
to
present
the
Letter
nearer
hand
.
Having
a
little
considered
,
he
thought
it
was
his
best
Course
to
hold
the
Cup
by
the
Boul
,
and
to
stretch
his
Arm
but
half
out
.
The
King
perceiving
the
reason
why
he
acted
so
,
rose
up
smiling
,
and
stooping
with
his
Body
over
the
Throne
,
met
him
half
way
to
receive
the
Letter
:
He
then
put
it
upon
his
Head
which
was
a
Mark
of
extraordinary
Honour
and
Esteem
that
he
was
willing
to
shew
to
the
great
King
that
sent
it
.
After
that
he
made
answer
to
the
Ambassador
,
that
he
was
extreamly
obliged
to
his
most
Christian
Majesty
for
the
Honour
he
did
him
,
and
that
he
had
no
greater
desire
than
to
entertain
an
eternal
Peace
and
Amity
with
his
Majesty
.
He
then
asked
him
about
that
Princes
Health
,
whom
he
always
called
his
good
Friend
,
and
about
the
Health
of
all
the
Royal
Family
,
and
expressed
his
Gladness
that
his
Excellence
and
all
his
Retinue
were
arrived
in
good
Health
.
The
Ambassador
presents
the
Abbot
of
Choisi
and
the
Gentlemen
of
his
Retinue
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
The
Ambassador
having
thanked
his
Majesty
for
all
his
Favours
,
presented
to
him
the
Abbot
of
Choisi
as
a
Person
of
Merit
,
and
the
Gentlemen
of
his
Retinue
,
saying
that
they
were
all
Officers
in
the
Kings
Fleet
;
that
most
of
them
had
been
on
several
Occasions
engaged
against
the
Enemy's
of
the
State
,
and
therein
signalized
their
Valour
.
The
King
listned
to
him
with
a
great
deal
of
satisfaction
,
and
then
turned
the
Discourse
upon
the
Ambassadors
,
whom
he
had
sent
into
France
,
of
whom
he
had
no
News
.
He
enlarged
a
pretty
while
upon
the
Praises
of
the
King
,
seeming
overjoyed
to
hear
what
the
Ambassador
told
him
of
his
Greatness
,
Wisdom
,
Conquests
,
and
of
the
Peace
which
he
had
given
to
Europe
,
In
fine
,
he
bid
tell
the
Ambassador
,
that
if
he
stood
in
need
of
any
thing
in
his
Kingdom
for
himself
and
Followers
,
he
should
address
himself
to
his
Barcalon
,
whom
he
had
expresly
charged
to
satisfie
him
in
all
things
.
So
the
first
Audience
ended
with
much
satisfaction
on
both
sides
.
The
Ambassador
sees
the
white
Elephant
in
his
Apartment
.
When
the
Ambassador
came
out
of
the
Hall
,
the
Lord
Constance
carried
him
to
see
the
white
Elephant
which
is
so
highly
esteemed
in
the
Indies
,
and
which
hath
been
the
cause
of
so
many
Wars
.
He
is
but
little
,
and
so
old
,
that
he
is
wrinkly
all
over
.
Several
Mandarins
are
appointed
to
take
care
of
him
,
and
he
is
only
served
in
Gold
,
at
least
the
two
Basons
that
were
set
before
him
were
of
beaten
Gold
of
an
extraordinary
Size
and
Thickness
.
His
Apartment
is
stately
,
and
the
Ceiling
of
the
Pavilion
where
he
stands
very
neatly
gilt
.
It
being
now
late
,
the
Ambassador
came
out
of
the
Royal
Palace
,
and
in
the
same
Pomp
and
Order
that
he
came
to
his
Audience
went
to
the
House
that
was
prepared
for
him
.
Sometime
after
the
Bishop
was
sent
for
by
Orders
from
the
King
,
to
translate
the
King
of
France
his
Letter
into
the
Siam
Language
,
which
being
done
,
it
made
a
great
impression
on
the
mind
of
that
Prince
.
These
are
the
terms
wherein
it
was
conceived
.
MOST
High
,
most
Excellent
,
The
French
Kings
Letter
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
and
most
Magnanimous
Prince
,
Our
most
Dear
and
Good
Friend
,
God
augment
Your
Glory
with
a
happy
end
.
I
have
learnt
to
My
Trouble
,
the
loss
of
the
Ambassadors
which
You
sent
to
Vs
in
the
Year
1681.
and
We
have
been
informed
by
the
Fathers
Missionaries
who
are
returned
from
Siam
,
and
by
the
Letters
which
Our
Ministers
have
recived
from
him
to
whom
You
entrust
the
principal
care
of
Your
Affairs
,
how
earnestly
You
desire
Our
Royal
Friendship
.
To
correspond
therewith
,
We
have
chosen
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
for
Our
Ambassador
to
You
,
who
will
inform
You
more
particularly
of
Our
Intentions
,
as
to
every
thing
that
may
contribute
to
the
setling
of
a
solid
and
lasting
Friendship
betwixt
us
.
In
the
mean
time
we
should
be
extreamly
glad
to
find
occasions
of
expressing
to
You
the
Gratitude
wherewith
we
have
learnt
that
you
continue
your
Protection
to
the
Bishops
and
other
Apostolic
Emissaries
,
who
labour
to
instruct
your
Subjects
in
the
Christian
Religion
;
and
the
particular
esteem
we
have
for
You
,
makes
us
ardently
desire
,
that
you
would
your self
condescend
to
hear
them
,
and
learn
of
them
the
true
Maxims
and
Sacred
Mysterys
of
so
holy
a
Law
,
wherein
one
has
the
Knowledg
of
the
True
God
,
who
alone
can
,
after
a
long
and
Glorious
Reign
over
Your
Subjects
here
,
make
You
eternally
Happy
hereafter
.
We
have
entrusted
Our
Ambassador
with
some
Presents
of
some
of
the
most
curious
things
of
our
Kingdom
,
which
he
will
present
to
You
as
a
mark
of
our
esteem
,
and
he
will
also
tell
You
what
it
is
We
may
desire
for
the
benefit
of
the
Trade
of
our
Subjects
.
Whereupon
We
pray
God
that
He
would
augment
Your
Greatness
with
a
most
happy
end
.
Given
at
our
Castle
of
Versailles
the
One
and
twentieth
day
of
January
1685.
Your
most
dear
and
good
Friend
,
COLBERT
.
LOUIS
.
The
Ambassador
Visits
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
.
After
the
Ambassador
had
had
Audience
of
the
King
,
he
rendred
his
first
Visit
to
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
at
the
Seminary
.
This
Prelate
is
Apostolical
Vicar
in
the
greatest
part
of
the
Indies
submitted
to
Apostolical
Vicars
:
He
has
been
labouring
for
a
long
time
with
much
assiduity
and
zeal
,
in
the
Conversion
of
the
Siamese
,
whose
Language
he
hath
carefully
studied
.
We
received
from
him
our
approbations
in
writing
,
and
when
he
sent
us
them
he
signified
to
us
that
we
might
exercise
our
Functions
in
the
Indies
as
well
as
in
Europe
.
He
resides
commonly
at
the
Seminary
ever
since
he
hath
been
weakned
by
long
Sickness
,
It
is
one
of
the
prettiest
Houses
in
the
whole
Town
or
Countrey
about
Siam
;
consisting
of
a
large
double
house
,
built
after
the
French
way
and
two
Stories
high
,
where
twenty
people
may
be
conveniently
lodged
.
The
rooms
are
large
and
high
,
some
of
them
lying
towards
the
Garden
,
and
the
rest
towards
a
Church
,
which
the
King
of
Siam
orders
to
be
built
hard
by
,
and
is
not
as
yet
finished
.
It
will
be
very
large
,
and
if
they
had
been
so
careful
at
first
as
to
have
made
a
regular
design
of
it
,
it
might
have
passed
for
a
pretty
Church
even
in
Europe
.
It
is
a
Custom
established
at
the
Court
of
Siam
,
The
King
of
Siam
sends
a
Present
to
the
Ambassador
.
to
give
a
Vest
to
all
who
have
the
honour
of
being
introduced
into
the
Kings
Presence
,
and
it
is
always
brought
to
the
Ambassadors
at
the
end
of
the
Audience
when
they
present
them
the
Betle
.
The
King
being
informed
that
the
French
made
no
use
of
Betle
,
and
that
perhaps
a
Suit
of
Cloaths
made
at
Siam
would
not
fit
them
,
he
would
not
have
it
given
them
at
that
time
,
but
some
days
after
he
sent
his
Excellence
twenty
pieces
of
a
very
rich
Stuff
with
flowers
of
Gold
,
and
as
much
silk
stuff
for
linings
.
He
made
a
like
Present
to
the
Gentlemen
of
his
Retinue
,
that
they
might
make
lighter
Cloaths
,
(
these
are
the
Kings
own
words
)
and
so
suffer
with
less
inconvenience
the
great
heats
of
a
Climate
to
which
they
were
not
accustomed
.
When
the
Ambassador
received
the
Kings
Present
,
The
Ambassador
ordered
Money
to
be
thrown
out
at
the
Windows
to
those
who
brought
him
the
Present
.
he
caused
a
great
deal
of
Money
to
be
thrown
out
at
the
Windows
,
to
the
Servants
of
the
Mandarins
who
brought
it
,
and
to
the
People
who
were
gathered
together
there
in
great
Crouds
.
This
made
much
noise
in
the
City
of
Siam
,
and
surprised
all
the
People
who
had
never
before
seen
that
kind
of
Magnificence
.
There
was
no
othe●
talk
for
a
long
time
but
of
that
rich
shower
〈◊〉
Gold
and
Silver
,
which
fell
in
the
Court
of
th●
Ambassador
of
France
.
That
piece
of
seasonabl●
liberality
much
encreased
the
esteem
which
th●
Great
Men
and
People
had
conceived
of
the
Frenc●
Nation
.
So
soon
as
the
Ambassador
was
setled
in
th●
City
of
Siam
,
the
Lord
Constance
who
lived
before
in
the
Field
of
the
Japanese
,
came
to
a
f●
House
that
he
has
near
the
Ambassadors
Palace
and
lodged
there
;
Nay
all
the
while
that
we
wer●
at
Siam
he
kept
open
Table
for
the
French
,
an●
upon
their
account
to
all
the
other
Nations
.
H●
House
was
very
well
furnished
,
and
instead
〈◊〉
Tapistry
which
would
be
intolerable
at
Siam
b●cause
of
the
heat
,
all
round
the
Divan
there
was
〈◊〉
great
Japan
Skreen
,
of
a
surprising
height
an●
beauty
.
He
kept
always
two
Tables
for
twelv●
People
apiece
,
where
all
things
were
very
delica●
and
in
very
great
plenty
.
There
we
had
all
sor●
of
Wine
,
Spanish
,
Rhenish
,
French
,
Cephal●nian
and
Persian
.
We
were
served
in
gre●
Silver
Dishes
,
and
the
Cupboard
was
furnish●
with
most
lovely
Gold
and
Silver
Plate
of
Jap●
rarely
well
wrought
,
with
a
great
many
la●
Dishes
of
the
same
Metal
and
Workmanship
.
Tht
King
of
Siam
sends
his
Presents
to
the
Pagods
with
much
Pomp.
The
Rumor
that
was
then
spread
abroad
th●
the
King
was
about
to
go
in
great
State
a●
make
a
Present
to
his
Pagod
,
raised
the
curios●
of
the
French
Gentlemen
,
to
be
spectators
of
t●
Pomp.
One
of
the
Mandarins
who
was
alwa●
in
the
House
to
prevent
disorders
,
and
to
to●
heed
that
nothing
were
wanting
,
took
them
,
●o●
place
where
they
might
conveniently
see
that
she●
The
Streets
through
which
the
King
was
to
go
were
paled
in
with
red
Lattice
breast-high
,
and
strewed
with
Flowers
in
several
places
.
The
King
came
not
abroad
that
day
,
nevertheless
his
Present
was
carried
to
the
Pagod
with
great
Ceremony
.
First
came
a
Man
upon
an
Elephant
playing
upon
Timbrels
,
with
two
Trumpeters
on
horseback
before
him
,
several
Mandarins
on
horseback
also
marching
two
and
two
came
after
,
and
then
a
great
number
of
Foot-Soldiers
of
those
who
are
called
painted
Arms
advanced
in
good
order
.
They
were
followed
by
fifteen
Elephants
,
of
which
seven
or
eight
carried
Parasols
of
three
Stories
with
gilt
Chairs
,
wherein
sate
as
many
Mandarins
who
were
charged
with
Presents
of
the
King.
After
these
Elephants
came
the
Mandarins
of
the
first
and
second
Order
who
were
known
by
the
Silver
and
Gold
Rings
that
went
about
their
round
Caps
made
in
shape
of
a
Pyramid
.
Ambassadors
have
never
more
than
two
Audiences
at
the
Court
of
Siam
,
one
first
when
they
come
,
and
the
other
of
Leave
when
they
depart
.
Nay
many
times
they
have
but
one
allowed
them
,
and
all
their
Affairs
are
to
be
treated
with
the
Barcalon
,
who
gives
the
King
an
account
of
them
.
But
his
Majesty
as
a
mark
of
particular
distinction
to
this
Embassie
,
sent
the
Ambassador
word
,
that
as
often
as
he
had
a
mind
to
have
Audience
,
he
was
ready
and
willing
to
give
it
him
.
Indeed
,
eight
or
ten
days
after
the
Audience
of
Entry
,
the
Ambassador
had
another
;
it
was
private
,
and
the
Gentlemen
was
not
admitted
to
it
.
The
Ambassador
took
none
with
him
but
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
and
the
Abbot
de
Lyonne
,
the
rest
stayed
in
the
first
Court
of
the
Palace
,
where
upon
the
side
of
a
Canal
under
the
shade
of
Trees
there
was
a
long
Table
of
twenty
four
covers
placed
,
with
two
side
Tables
furnished
with
most
lovely
Gold
and
Silver
Plate
of
Japan
and
several
sweet
boxes
,
wherein
the
precious
wood
of
Aquila
was
not
spared
.
The
King
treats
the
Ambassador
in
his
Palace
magnificently
.
The
Audience
being
ended
they
sate
down
to
Table
,
and
continued
at
it
almost
four
hours
.
There
were
above
an
hundred
and
fifty
dishes
served
up
,
and
infinite
number
of
Ragoes
,
not
to
speak
of
sweet-meats
,
of
which
commonly
they
make
two
Courses
.
Wine
they
had
of
five
or
six
sorts
;
every
thing
was
magnificent
and
delicate
,
and
it
was
the
Kings
pleasure
that
the
greatest
Men
of
his
Kingdom
should
that
day
serve
the
French
at
Table
,
to
shew
the
greater
honour
to
the
Ambassador
,
and
render
that
Regal
more
agreeable
.
About
that
time
they
began
to
examine
the
conduct
of
the
two
Mandarins
whom
the
Barcalon
sent
to
France
with
Monsieur
Vachet
.
The
complaints
that
were
made
of
them
had
reached
the
Kings
Ears
,
who
was
offended
at
their
proceedings
.
The
Ambassador
spoke
in
favour
of
them
,
and
the
eldest
came
off
for
a
Months
Imprisonment
,
and
some
other
small
punishment
:
But
it
is
not
as
yet
known
what
the
other
will
suffer
,
tho
it
be
certain
that
had
it
not
been
for
so
powerful
an
intercession
,
he
had
lost
his
head
.
The
Ambassador
could
not
at
first
send
the
Presents
which
he
brought
to
the
Barcalon
,
who
enjoys
the
highest
place
in
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
It
behoved
him
to
delay
sometime
to
have
them
viewed
,
and
what
was
spoiled
by
the
Air
and
Sea
,
refitted
.
When
every
thing
was
in
good
condition
,
Monsieur
Vachet
went
to
his
House
and
presented
them
to
him
,
and
two
days
after
the
Ambassador
payed
him
a
visit
.
Seeing
there
are
no
Coaches
at
Siam
,
he
was
carried
in
a
very
neat
Chair
which
he
brought
with
him
from
France
.
The
Bishop
took
one
like
to
those
which
the
Superiors
of
the
Talapoins
use
;
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
was
carried
in
a
Palanquin
,
and
the
Gentlemen
went
on
Horseback
,
the
Barcalons
Lodgings
were
above
a
large
quarter
of
a
League
from
the
Ambassadors
Palace
,
tho
there
be
but
three
Streets
betwixt
them
,
but
they
are
extreamly
long
,
all
paved
with
Brick
and
bordered
on
each
side
with
low
houses
,
behind
which
there
are
trees
that
cast
a
shade
into
the
Streets
,
and
which
make
pleasant
walks
when
the
heat
is
over
.
The
Barcalons
House
is
large
,
but
built
of
Wood
,
as
most
of
the
Houses
of
Siam
are
,
with
this
difference
that
it
hath
three
Roofs
one
over
another
,
which
are
the
badge
of
his
Dignity
.
It
was
then
surrounded
with
water
by
reason
of
the
Inundation
,
and
the
entry
into
it
was
over
a
Bridge
which
Landed
upon
a
Terrass
.
A
great
many
Mandarins
made
a
Lane
at
the
entry
into
the
Bridge
;
and
all
allighted
except
the
Ambassador
,
who
was
carried
over
to
the
Terrass
,
from
whence
he
entred
into
the
Hall
where
the
Ambassador
gives
Audience
.
He
came
to
receive
the
Ambassador
at
the
Hall-door
,
and
conducted
him
to
the
end
of
it
,
where
he
made
him
sit
down
in
an
Armed
Chair
opposite
to
his
own
.
The
Bishop
and
Abbot
de
Choisi
had
also
Chairs
brought
them
to
sit
in
by
the
Ambassador
;
and
the
Gentlemen
stood
at
his
back
.
The
Conversation
lasted
not
long
;
all
the
discourse
was
about
matters
indifferent
,
and
so
the
Ambassador
returned
in
the
same
manner
as
he
went.
The
Ambassador
Visits
the
most
famous
Pagod
of
Siam
.
The
Ambassador
had
been
told
so
much
of
the
Pagod
of
the
Palace
,
and
of
the
Idols
that
are
in
it
,
that
he
had
a
great
mind
to
see
them
;
and
seeing
in
every
thing
they
were
ready
to
please
him
,
a
proper
day
was
pitched
upon
,
when
they
might
be
all
shewn
to
him
at
leisure
,
about
eight
a
clock
in
the
Morning
he
was
conducted
to
the
Palace
,
where
the
Lord
Constance
expected
him
.
Having
crossed
over
eight
or
nine
Courts
,
we
came
at
length
to
the
Richest
and
most
Celebrated
Pagod
of
the
Kingdom
,
it
is
covered
with
Calin
,
which
is
a
kind
of
a
very
white
Metal
betwixt
Tinn
and
Lead
,
with
three
Roofs
one
over
another
.
At
the
door
of
it
,
there
is
on
the
one
hand
a
Cow
,
and
on
the
other
a
most
hideous
Monster
.
This
Pagod
is
pretty
long
,
but
very
narrow
,
and
when
one
is
within
it
,
there
is
nothing
to
be
seen
but
Gold.
The
Pillars
,
Walls
,
Cieling
and
all
the
Figures
are
so
well
gilt
,
that
all
seem
to
be
covered
with
plates
of
Gold.
The
building
is
pretty
like
to
our
Churches
,
and
supported
by
thick
Pillars
.
Advancing
forwards
within
it
you
find
a
kind
of
Altar
upon
which
there
are
three
or
four
Figures
of
beaten
Gold
near
about
the
heighth
of
a
Man
;
some
of
them
stand
,
and
others
are
sitting
cross-legged
after
the
manner
of
the
Siamese
.
Beyond
that
there
is
a
kind
of
Quire
,
where
they
keep
the
richest
and
most
precious
Pagod
or
Idol
of
the
Kingdom
,
for
that
is
a
name
given
indifferently
to
the
Temple
,
or
the
Idol
that
is
within
it
.
That
Statue
is
standing
and
the
head
of
it
reaches
up
to
the
Roof
.
It
is
about
five
and
forty
foot
high
and
seven
or
eight
broad
;
but
what
is
most
surprising
,
it
is
all
of
Gold.
Of
the
bigness
it
is
,
the
Mass
of
it
must
needs
contain
above
an
hundred
picks
of
that
Metal
,
A
Pick
weighs
an
hundred
and
twenty
five
pound
weight
.
and
be
worth
at
least
twelve
Millions
six
hundred
thousand
Livers
.
They
say
that
this
Prodigious
Colossus
was
cast
in
the
same
place
where
it
stands
,
and
that
afterwards
they
built
the
Temple
over
it
.
It
cannot
be
comprehended
,
where
those
people
otherwise
poor
enough
could
find
so
much
Gold
;
but
it
must
needs
touch
one
to
the
quick
to
see
one
single
Idol
richer
than
all
the
Tabernacles
of
the
Churches
of
Europe
.
At
the
sides
of
it
there
are
several
others
less
but
of
Gold
also
and
inriched
with
precious
Stones
.
However
this
is
not
the
best
built
Temple
of
Siam
.
It
is
true
there
are
none
that
have
any
Figures
of
so
great
value
,
but
there
are
several
that
have
greater
proportion
,
and
Beauty
and
one
amongst
others
,
which
I
must
here
give
a
description
of
.
About
an
hundred
paces
South
of
the
Palace
there
is
a
great
Park
walled
in
,
A
description
of
one
of
the
fairest
Temples
of
Siam
.
in
the
middle
whereof
stands
a
vast
and
high
Fabric
built
cross-ways
in
the
manner
of
our
Churches
,
having
over
it
five
solid
gilt
domes
of
Stone
or
Brick
,
and
of
extraordinary
Architecture
,
the
dome
in
the
middle
is
far
bigger
than
the
rest
,
which
are
on
the
extremities
and
at
the
ends
of
the
Cross
.
This
Building
rests
upon
several
Bases
or
Pedistals
,
which
are
raised
one
over
another
,
tapering
and
growing
narrower
towards
the
top
.
The
way
up
to
it
on
the
four
sides
is
only
by
narrow
and
steep
Stairs
of
betwixt
thirty
and
forty
steps
three
hands
broad
apiece
and
all
covered
with
gilt
Calin
or
Tin
like
the
Roof
.
The
bottom
of
the
great
Stair-case
is
adorned
on
both
sides
with
above
twenty
Statues
bigger
than
the
Life
,
some
whereof
are
of
Brass
,
and
the
rest
of
Calin
and
all
gilt
,
but
representing
but
sorrily
the
Persons
and
Animals
for
whom
they
have
been
made
.
This
great
Pile
of
Building
is
encompassed
with
forty
four
great
Piramides
of
different
form
and
well
wrought
,
ranked
orderly
upon
different
Plat-forms
.
On
the
lowest
Plat-form
stand
the
four
greatest
at
the
four
corners
of
it
upon
large
bases
.
These
Piramides
end
at
the
top
in
a
long
very
slender
Cone
,
extreamly
well
gilt
,
and
supporting
a
Needle
or
Arrow
of
Iron
,
that
pierces
through
several
Christal
balls
of
an
unequal
bigness
.
The
body
of
those
great
Piramides
as
well
as
of
the
rest
,
is
of
a
kind
of
Architecture
that
comes
pretty
near
ours
;
but
it
has
too
much
Sculpture
upon
it
,
and
wanting
both
the
simplicity
and
proportions
of
ours
,
it
comes
short
of
its
beauty
,
at
least
in
the
eyes
of
those
that
are
not
accustomed
to
it
.
If
we
have
time
we
may
give
a
more
perfect
Idea
of
that
Architecture
upon
the
second
Plat-form
,
which
is
a
little
above
the
first
,
there
are
six
and
thirty
other
Piramides
some
what
less
than
the
former
:
making
a
square
round
the
Pagod
,
nine
on
each
side
.
They
are
of
two
different
Figures
,
some
taper
into
a
point
as
the
former
did
,
and
the
rest
are
made
round
like
a
Bell
on
the
top
,
after
the
manner
of
the
domes
which
crown
the
Building
;
they
are
so
mingled
that
there
are
not
two
together
of
the
same
form
.
Over
these
in
the
third
Plat-form
,
are
other
four
Piramides
on
the
four
corners
of
it
,
which
terminate
in
a
point
.
They
are
less
indeed
than
the
first
,
but
bigger
than
the
second
.
All
the
Fabrick
and
Piramides
are
inclosed
in
a
kind
of
square
Cloyster
,
above
sixscore
common
paces
in
length
,
about
an
hundred
in
breadth
,
and
fifteen
foot
high
.
All
the
Galleries
of
the
Cloyster
are
open
towards
,
the
Pagod
;
the
Cieling
thereof
is
not
ugly
;
for
it
is
all
painted
and
gilt
after
the
Moresko
way
.
Within
the
Galleries
along
the
out
Wall
which
is
all
close
ranges
along
Pedestal
breast
high
,
on
which
stand
above
four
hundred
Statues
,
rarely
well
gilt
,
and
placed
in
most
excellent
order
.
Though
they
be
only
of
Brick
gilt
,
yet
they
appear
to
be
very
well
shaped
,
but
they
are
so
like
one
another
,
that
if
they
were
not
unequal
in
bigness
,
one
would
think
that
they
had
been
all
cast
in
the
same
Mould
.
Amongst
these
Figures
we
reckoned
twelve
of
a
Gigantick
Stature
,
one
in
the
middle
of
each
Gallery
,
and
two
at
each
Angle
.
These
Figures
,
because
of
their
height
are
sitting
upon
flat
bases
cross-leg'd
,
after
the
manner
of
the
Country
and
of
all
the
Orientals
.
We
had
the
curiosity
to
measure
one
of
their
legs
,
which
from
the
Toes
to
the
Knee
,
was
full
six
foot
long
,
the
Thumb
of
it
was
as
big
as
an
ordinary
Arm
,
and
the
rest
of
the
Body
proportionably
big
and
tall
.
Besides
these
which
are
of
the
first
magnitude
,
there
are
about
an
hundred
others
that
are
as
it
were
Demi-Giants
,
having
the
Leg
from
the
extremity
of
the
Foot
to
the
Knee
four
foot
long
.
In
short
between
the
first
and
second
,
we
reckoned
above
three
hundred
,
of
which
none
are
less
than
the
life
,
and
these
stand
upright
.
I
mention
not
a
great
many
other
little
Pagods
no
bigger
than
Puppets
,
which
are
mingled
among
the
rest
.
We
never
saw
a
Fabrick
no
not
in
France
,
where
Symmetry
is
better
observed
,
either
for
the
body
of
the
Building
,
or
the
Ornaments
about
it
,
than
in
this
Pagod
.
The
Cloister
of
it
is
flancked
on
the
outside
on
each
hand
with
sixteen
great
solid
Piramids
,
rounded
at
the
top
in
form
of
a
Dome
,
above
fourty
foot
high
,
and
above
twelve
foot
square
,
placed
in
a
Line
like
a
row
of
great
Pillars
,
in
the
middle
whereof
there
are
larger
niches
filled
with
gilt
Pagods
.
We
were
so
long
taken
up
with
the
sight
of
these
things
that
we
had
not
time
to
consider
several
other
Temples
close
by
the
Post
within
the
same
compass
of
Walls
.
They
judge
of
the
Nobility
of
Families
at
Siam
by
the
number
of
roofs
that
cover
their
Houses
.
This
hath
five
one
over
another
,
and
the
Kings
Apartment
hath
seven
.
Some
days
after
we
were
arrived
at
Siam
,
there
were
two
solemn
Services
performed
in
the
Church
which
we
have
in
the
field
of
the
Portuguese
,
the
one
for
the
late
Queen
of
Portugal
,
and
the
other
for
the
late
King
Don
Alphonso
.
Father
Suarez
a
Dominican
Frier
made
the
Funeral
Sermons
.
After
that
the
Festivals
of
the
Coronation
of
Don
Pedro
King
of
Portugal
,
who
reigns
at
present
,
was
celebrated
in
the
Church
of
the
Dominicans
,
where
one
of
their
Fathers
Preached
.
The
Lord
Constance
was
at
the
charges
of
the
Obsequies
and
Festivals
.
He
would
also
have
had
a
solemn
Service
performed
for
the
late
King
of
England
,
if
he
had
had
certain
intelligence
that
he
died
a
Catholic
.
He
only
expressed
his
Joy
at
the
Coronation
of
the
Duke
of
York
by
Illuminations
and
Fire-works
,
which
for
their
Novelties
pleased
the
French
very
much
.
There
were
long
Horns
out
of
which
were
streams
of
Fire
that
spouted
up
to
a
height
like
Water-works
,
and
lasted
a
long
while
,
these
Festivals
were
accompanied
with
great
Feasting
,
to
which
the
chief
of
all
the
Nations
of
Europe
,
to
wit
,
the
French
,
English
,
Portuguese
and
Dutch
were
invited
.
Rejoycings
performed
at
Siam
for
the
Coronation
of
the
Kings
of
England
and
Portugal
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
could
not
excuse
himself
from
being
present
at
two
Feasts
,
which
were
made
for
the
Coronation
of
the
Kings
of
England
and
Portugal
.
We
were
obliged
to
be
there
too
,
the
Lord
Constance
having
come
and
taken
us
with
him
in
his
own
Balon
.
The
healths
of
all
the
Kings
and
Royal
Families
were
drank
there
,
with
the
noise
of
many
great
Guns
.
After
these
Rejoycings
came
several
Divertisements
;
the
first
was
a
kind
of
a
Chinese
Comedy
,
divided
into
Acts
,
various
bold
and
antick
postures
,
and
some
pretty
surprising
feats
of
Agility
of
Body
served
for
Interludes
.
Unless
on
the
one
side
the
Chinese
were
acting
their
Comedy
,
the
Laos
who
are
a
people
than
border
on
that
Kingdom
to
the
North
,
gave
the
Ambassador
on
the
other
side
the
diversion
of
an
Indian
Puppet-show
,
which
differ
not
much
from
ours
.
Betwixt
the
Chinese
and
the
Laos
there
was
a
Troop
of
Siamese
Men
and
Women
,
cast
into
a
Ring
,
who
danced
after
a
pretty
odd
manner
,
that
's
to
say
,
with
their
hands
aswell
as
feet
,
making
as
many
Figures
with
the
one
as
they
did
with
the
other
.
The
voices
of
some
Men
and
Women
,
who
sung
a
little
in
the
Nose
,
joyned
to
the
noise
they
made
with
their
Hands
,
regulated
all
the
cadence
.
After
these
Plays
Tumblers
appeared
,
who
mounted
to
the
top
of
high
Bambous
planted
on
the
one
end
like
Masts
.
and
about
fourscore
or
an
hundred
foot
high
;
they
stood
on
the
top
of
them
on
one
foot
,
and
holding
the
other
in
the
Air
,
then
placing
their
Head
where
their
Foot
had
stood
,
they
raised
their
Feet
upright
,
standing
upon
their
Head.
At
length
having
hung
by
the
Chin
that
rested
only
on
the
top
of
the
B●mbous
,
their
Hands
and
the
rest
of
their
Body
hanging
in
the
Air
,
they
came
down
a
long
Ladder
standing
upright
,
turning
their
Body
about
every
step
of
the
Ladders
with
incredible
swiftness
and
agility
.
Another
placed
upon
a
kind
of
Litter
or
portable
Couch
seven
or
eight
Daggers
with
the
points
upwards
,
sate
down
,
and
then
lay
along
upon
them
,
without
hurting
his
Body
which
was
stark
naked
;
he
afterwards
made
a
very
heavy
Man
stand
upright
upon
his
Belly
,
and
none
of
the
points
which
touched
his
naked
Skin
pierced
him
.
These
diversions
were
followed
by
several
Consorts
that
were
performed
by
Musicians
of
divers
Nations
.
There
was
nothing
extraordinary
,
neither
in
the
Musick
nor
Voices
;
yet
the
novelty
and
diversity
of
them
,
made
them
pleasant
enough
not
to
prove
tedious
the
first
time
.
The
Siamese
,
Malayes
,
Pegus
and
Laos
,
gave
a
tryal
of
their
harmony
by
turns
,
striving
to
surpass
one
another
.
Their
Instruments
much
resemble
ours
,
but
are
very
imperfect
:
there
was
one
that
seemed
extraordinary
to
us
,
it
was
mounted
with
a
dozen
of
little
Bells
hanging
by
it
,
which
being
gently
struck
upon
with
little
sticks
,
rendred
a
most
harmonious
sound
.
In
fine
the
Scene
concluded
with
another
Chinese
Comedy
,
which
began
a
little
to
cloy
the
Spectators
,
who
were
already
weary
.
We
were
fain
to
be
present
at
all
these
Shows
.
The
Lord
Constance
having
obliged
us
to
stay
them
out
to
the
end
;
and
the
Ambassador
pressing
us
not
to
leave
him
.
The
Eight
and
Twentieth
of
October
being
Sunday
,
The
King
of
Siam
goes
abroad
publickly
to
visit
a
Pagod
.
we
had
notice
that
the
King
was
to
go
abroad
to
do
his
Devotions
,
as
his
custome
was
,
at
a
famous
Pagod
upon
the
side
of
the
River
,
three
Leagues
from
the
Town
,
and
at
the
same
time
to
render
a
visit
to
the
Sancra
,
who
is
chief
of
the
Religion
,
and
of
all
the
Talapoins
of
the
Kingdom
,
and
much
respected
by
that
Prince
.
He
was
accustomed
on
that
occasion
heretofore
,
to
do
the
Ceremony
of
cutting
the
Waters
,
that
's
to
say
,
to
strike
the
River
with
his
Dagger
at
the
time
of
the
greatest
inundation
,
and
to
command
the
Waters
to
retire
:
But
this
Prince
having
found
by
many
years
experience
,
that
the
Waters
encreased
sometimes
,
for
all
they
were
ordered
to
abate
,
hath
left
off
that
ridiculous
Ceremony
,
and
thought
it
enough
this
year
by
going
as
in
Triumph
to
the
Pagod
,
to
show
the
zeal
he
has
for
his
Religion
.
That
this
Magnificence
might
be
seen
by
the
Ambassador
,
who
in
secret
bewailed
the
blindness
of
that
Prince
,
there
was
a
Gallery
purposely
prepared
on
the
side
of
the
River
for
him
and
his
whole
Family
.
The
Lord
Constance
who
was
there
to
explain
the
Order
of
all
the
Procession
,
would
have
us
also
to
be
present
.
This
was
the
Order
and
Pomp
of
this
Show
.
Three
and
twenty
Mandarins
of
the
lowest
Order
of
the
Palace
appeared
first
,
every
one
in
a
Balon
of
State
,
with
a
Red
Chirole
.
These
Balons
advanced
in
file
on
two
Lines
,
and
went
along
the
side
of
the
River
.
They
were
followed
by
Fifty
other
Balons
of
his
Majesties
Officers
,
who
were
all
sitting
in
their
Chiroles
,
some
of
them
being
all
over
gilt
,
and
the
rest
only
on
the
sides
.
The
Balons
had
from
Thirty
to
Sixty
Oars
a
peece
,
taking
up
a
very
large
space
,
by
reason
of
the
Order
they
went
in
.
After
these
came
twenty
Balons
more
,
bigger
than
the
former
,
in
the
middle
of
which
there
was
a
very
high
seat
,
all
gilt
and
spiring
into
a
Piramide
;
These
were
the
Balons
of
Guards
,
as
they
call
them
,
of
which
some
had
Fourscore
Rowers
and
gilt
Oars
,
and
the
other
four
had
only
Oars
streaked
with
Gold.
Next
after
that
long
train
of
Balons
,
the
King
appeared
in
his
raised
upon
a
Throne
of
a
Piramidal
Figure
and
extraordinary
well
gilt
.
He
was
cloathed
in
a
rich
Cloath
of
Gold
set
with
precious
Stones
:
He
wore
a
white
Cap
ending
in
a
point
,
encompassed
with
a
Ring
of
Gold
all
flowered
,
and
set
thick
with
Precious
Stones
.
The
Kings
Balon
was
gilt
as
low
as
the
Water
,
and
rowed
by
Sixscore
Watermen
,
who
wore
upon
their
heads
a
kind
of
Toque
covered
with
plates
of
Gold
,
and
on
their
Stomack
,
Stomagers
adorned
in
the
same
manner
.
The
Kings
Standard-bearer
all
glittering
with
Gold
stood
behind
towards
the
Stern
,
with
the
Banner
Royal
of
Cloath
of
Gold
on
a
Red
ground
;
and
four
great
Mandarins
lay
prostrate
at
the
four
corners
of
the
Throne
.
The
Balon
was
attended
by
three
others
of
the
same
form
,
that
were
every
whit
as
stately
,
but
the
Toques
and
Breast-plates
of
the
Rowers
were
not
so
rich
.
The
King
intending
that
my
Lord
Ambassador
should
see
him
,
past
near
to
him
,
advancing
but
slowly
that
he
might
have
time
to
consider
him
.
The
Ambassador
rose
up
out
of
his
Seat
,
and
made
three
profound
bows
to
the
King
,
all
the
rest
who
sate
upon
a
Carpet
made
him
low
inclinations
of
Body
.
The
Siamese
that
were
upon
the
sides
of
the
River
sitting
on
the
ground
,
so
soon
as
they
saw
the
King
at
a
great
distance
,
got
upon
their
knees
,
and
putting
their
joyned
hands
upon
their
heads
,
in
that
posture
touched
the
ground
with
their
forehead
,
and
left
not
off
making
the
Zombaye
,
till
the
King
was
out
of
sight
.
Twenty
Balons
with
Chiroles
and
Oars
streaked
with
Gold
followed
the
Kings
,
and
other
sixteen
half
painted
and
half
gilt
,
brought
up
the
Rear
.
We
reckoned
in
all
One
hundred
and
fifty
nine
,
of
which
the
biggest
were
near
Sixscore
foot
long
,
and
hardly
six
foot
over
at
the
broadest
place
.
I
have
inserted
the
bigness
of
the
most
extraordinary
,
the
sides
of
them
are
even
with
the
Water
,
and
the
ends
bend
and
are
crooked
and
rise
very
high
;
most
part
of
these
Balons
have
the
Figure
of
Sea
Horses
,
Dragons
,
and
other
sorts
of
Animals
.
Nothing
but
the
Poop
and
Prow
are
gilt
,
the
rest
hardly
appearing
above
Water
;
some
of
them
are
beautified
with
several
Figures
made
of
pieces
of
Mother
of
Pearl
wherewith
they
are
in●aid
.
After
that
the
King
had
said
his
Prayers
at
the
Pagod
,
and
there
made
his
Presents
,
he
went
to
one
of
his
Palaces
hard
by
,
and
in
the
Evening
returned
to
the
Town
,
according
to
his
custom
,
upon
his
Return
he
took
pleasure
to
make
a
Match
at
Rowing
,
and
proposed
a
Reward
to
those
that
should
get
first
to
the
Palace
,
from
whence
he
set
out
in
the
Morning
,
all
the
Afternoon
was
spent
in
drawing
up
the
Balons
into
Squadrons
,
and
to
match
one
against
another
,
Whilst
matters
were
thus
ordering
the
Ambassador
came
to
see
the
Show
.
He
was
conducted
by
the
Lord
Constance
,
who
also
invited
us
,
and
sent
us
a
Balon
to
carry
us
along
with
him
.
The
King
would
needs
be
one
of
the
Antagonists
,
but
seeing
his
Balon
was
manned
with
more
Rowers
,
and
those
all
choice
Men
,
he
quickly
got
the
better
on
't
,
and
victoriously
entred
the
Town
,
long
before
the
rest
.
We
placed
our selves
near
the
Ambassador
,
that
we
might
see
the
King.
As
he
passed
along
by
our
Balon
we
saw
him
very
near
,
and
he
looked
upon
us
in
such
a
manner
,
as
made
us
conclude
,
that
the
Lord
Constance
had
already
spoken
of
us
to
him
.
It
was
pleasant
to
see
with
what
rapidity
these
Balons
every
way
proper
for
cleaving
the
Water
,
mounted
up
the
River
in
emulation
one
of
another
,
and
none
of
the
Rowers
in
the
space
of
three
Leagues
took
so
much
as
one
Minutes
rest
.
They
shouted
either
for
joy
or
grief
,
according
as
they
gained
or
lost
the
advantage
.
All
the
City
and
People
about
came
running
to
see
this
Show
.
They
drew
up
in
their
Balons
by
the
shoar
,
as
in
two
Lines
which
reached
three
Leagues
off
of
the
City
;
so
that
having
seen
and
considered
that
confluence
of
people
that
went
down
and
came
up
the
River
,
we
judged
that
there
could
not
be
less
than
about
twenty
thousand
Balons
,
and
above
two
hundred
thousand
souls
;
the
other
French
reckoned
a
great
many
more
,
and
confidently
averred
that
there
were
above
six
hundred
thousand
souls
of
them
.
When
the
King
past
by
upon
the
River
all
the
windows
and
doors
of
the
Houses
were
shut
,
and
the
Port
holes
of
the
Ships
too
.
All
commanded
to
go
out
,
that
so
no
body
might
be
in
a
higer
place
than
the
King.
The
King's
Progress
from
Siam
to
Louvo
.
Eight
days
after
,
the
King
with
the
Princess
,
and
all
his
Wives
,
went
abroad
again
in
a
Progress
to
Louvo
.
This
is
a
Town
fifteen
or
twenty
Leagues
to
the
Northward
of
Siam
,
where
he
●pends
nine
or
ten
Months
of
the
year
,
because
●e
is
more
at
liberty
there
,
and
is
not
obliged
to
be
shut
up
as
he
is
at
Siam
,
that
he
may
keep
his
Subjects
in
Obedience
and
Respect
.
The
Lord
Constance
,
who
having
seen
our
Parents
for
being
the
most
Christian
King's
Mathematicians
,
was
resolved
to
procure
us
a
private
Audience
at
Louvo
,
would
have
us
go
thither
with
our
Instruments
,
and
intimated
to
us
,
that
the
King
was
desirous
to
entertain
us
at
Court
,
until
we
should
embark
for
Macao
.
He
sent
us
two
great
Balons
for
our
Baggage
,
and
another
of
four
and
twenty
Oars
to
carry
us
.
We
parted
the
fifteenth
of
November
about
One
of
the
Clock
in
the
Afternoon
,
and
went
in
the
Retinue
of
my
Lord
Ambassador
.
About
two
Leagues
from
the
Town
upon
a
vast
Plain
covered
with
Water
,
The
Funeral
of
a
great
Talapoin
.
and
reaching
out
of
sight
,
we
met
with
a
new
Spectacle
;
and
that
was
the
Obsequies
of
a
famous
Talapoin
,
chief
of
the
Religion
of
the
Peguins
.
His
Body
was
laid
in
a
Coffin
of
Aromatic
Wood.
The
Coffin
was
mounted
upon
a
Funeral
Pile
,
round
which
were
four
great
Pillars
of
gilt
Wood
,
which
carried
an
high
Pyramid
of
several
Stories
.
This
kind
of
burning
Chappel
was
accompanied
with
several
little
pretty
high
and
square
Towers
made
of
Wood
,
and
covered
with
Pastboard
very
rudely
painted
,
with
a
great
many
Paper
Figures
.
All
this
was
surrounded
with
an
Enclosure
built
square
,
upon
which
several
other
Towers
were
placed
at
competent
distances
.
Four
of
them
were
as
high
as
the
Pyramid
in
the
middle
,
and
stood
in
the
four
Corners
;
and
on
each
side
of
that
great
Square
there
were
two
other
Towers
less
than
the
former
.
They
were
all
full
of
Fire-works
,
and
we
saw
many
flying
Fuzes
come
out
of
them
.
The
four
great
Towers
placed
at
the
four
Corners
of
the
great
Square
,
were
joyned
together
by
little
Wooden
Houses
,
painted
with
several
antic
Figures
of
Dragons
,
Apes
,
Devils
with
horns
on
their
heads
,
&c.
Betwixt
these
Hovels
there
were
at
competent
distances
certain
Openings
contrived
in
form
of
a
Portal
to
let
Balons
in
and
out
.
The
Telapoins
of
Pegu
,
to
a
vast
number
,
in
their
Balons
,
took
up
almost
the
whole
space
that
was
betwixt
the
Funeral
Pile
and
the
great
square
Enclosure
.
They
all
looked
with
a
grave
and
modest
Countenance
,
now
and
then
singing
,
and
sometimes
keeping
profound
Silence
.
An
infinite
number
of
People
,
Men
and
Women
indifferently
came
after
them
,
and
assisted
at
this
Funeral
Pomp.
So
new
and
unexpected
a
Scene
made
my
Lord
Ambassador
stop
for
some
time
,
and
us
with
him
,
that
we
might
view
the
Ceremonies
of
that
stately
Funeral
.
However
,
we
saw
nothing
but
mimical
Dances
,
and
certain
ridiculous
Farces
,
acted
by
the
Peguins
and
Siamese
under
Sheds
of
Bambous
that
were
open
on
all
hands
.
They
acted
the
postures
of
Men
possest
,
with
hideous
Masks
upon
their
Faces
.
Seeing
this
Funeral
Pomp
was
to
last
till
Night
,
and
that
we
had
four
or
five
Leagues
to
go
before
we
could
come
to
the
place
of
Lodging
,
we
saw
only
the
beginning
of
it
,
and
some
Fire-Works
.
The
Honours
of
this
Nature
given
to
the
Dead
amongst
the
Siamese
,
makes
them
strongly
addicted
to
their
Religion
.
The
Talapoins
,
who
are
very
interested
Doctors
,
teach
,
that
the
more
Expence
is
made
in
the
Obsequies
of
a
dead
man
,
the
more
advantageously
his
Soul
is
lodged
in
the
Body
of
some
Prince
,
or
some
other
considerable
Animal
.
In
that
Belief
the
Siamese
many
times
undo
themselves
by
making
magnificent
Funerals
.
We
came
in
very
good
time
to
the
House
where
we
were
to
lie
;
it
was
in
all
things
like
to
those
little
Palaces
which
were
erected
for
my
Lord
Ambassador
upon
the
River
.
It
may
be
said
of
this
Countrey
,
that
there
cannot
be
a
more
pleasant
Prospect
than
it
affords
.
When
we
were
upon
the
Canal
cut
through
the
Fields
to
shorten
the
Way
from
Siam
to
Louvo
,
we
saw
Plains
reaching
out
of
sight
full
of
Rice
,
and
when
we
entred
into
the
River
,
the
green
Trees
and
Villages
wherewith
it
was
bordered
,
refreshed
our
sight
with
an
agreeable
variety
.
Before
we
left
that
place
,
the
Ambassador
had
a
mind
to
see
one
of
the
King's
Palaces
that
was
hard
by
.
We
only
saw
the
outside
of
it
,
because
the
House-keeper
had
Orders
to
suffer
none
to
enter
it
.
It
seems
to
be
a
very
little
and
narrow
Palace
,
encompassed
on
the
outside
with
a
little
low
Gallery
in
form
of
a
Cloyster
,
but
very
irregular
in
its
Architecture
,
the
Pedestals
being
full
as
high
as
the
Pilasters
.
Round
that
Gallery
runs
a
low
Balcony
encompassed
with
Rails
and
Balisters
of
Stone
Breast-high
.
About
an
hundred
paces
from
that
Palace
,
The
description
of
a
Palace
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
built
after
the
European
manner
.
we
saw
another
much
bigger
,
and
far
more
regular
.
On
the
outside
there
are
great
Pilasters
at
an
equal
distance
from
one
another
,
which
savour
very
much
of
Art
:
It
stands
in
a
great
Square
above
an
hundred
and
fifty
or
sixty
paces
in
length
.
On
the
four
sides
there
are
four
very
high
Piles
of
Buildings
in
form
of
Galleries
,
and
covered
with
a
double
Roof
made
round
above
like
an
Arch.
These
Galleries
on
the
outside
are
adorned
with
most
lovely
Pilasters
,
having
their
Bases
and
Capitols
proportioned
much
after
the
manner
of
ours
;
so
that
the
Architector
who
built
that
old
Palace
,
abandoned
at
present
,
tho'
it
be
almost
entire
,
and
incomparably
finer
than
the
new
one
,
must
have
had
great
skill
in
the
Architecture
of
Europe
,
so
regular
is
that
Fabrick
.
These
Galleries
are
only
open
at
the
doors
that
are
in
the
middle
of
each
Front
;
and
over
these
there
are
Buildings
on
all
hands
higher
than
the
first
,
and
in
the
middle
of
all
a
great
Body
of
Lodgings
overlooking
all
the
rest
,
which
with
them
makes
a
Fabrick
of
most
excellent
Symmetry
.
It
is
the
only
regular
and
well
proportioned
Building
that
we
found
in
that
Countrey
.
Having
seen
that
Palace
,
we
went
streight
to
Louvo
,
where
the
Palace
which
was
just
finished
,
and
built
at
the
King's
Charges
,
for
the
Lord
Constance
,
was
prepared
for
my
Lord
Ambassador
.
This
Minister
came
and
received
him
there
,
and
told
him
,
casting
a
most
obliging
Eye
upon
us
,
that
having
been
informed
of
the
Goodness
he
had
for
his
Brethren
,
he
made
no
doubt
but
that
he
would
willingly
take
up
his
Quarters
in
a
House
which
belonged
to
them
.
After
Supper
we
were
conducted
into
a
little
Apartment
of
Mats
and
Bambous
made
purposely
for
us
,
hung
with
painted
Cloth
,
and
furnished
with
very
neat
Summer-Beds
.
But
the
Lord
Constance
perceiving
that
our
Instruments
and
Baggage
would
not
be
stowed
in
that
place
with
us
,
ordered
large
Lodgings
belonging
to
the
King
,
to
be
furnished
for
us
,
that
we
might
have
more
room
there
,
whilst
he
could
accommodate
us
more
conveniently
.
Within
a
few
days
after
our
Arrival
at
Louvo
the
Lord
Constance
conducted
my
Lord
Ambassador
to
an
Audience
.
The
King
gives
the
Ambassador
an
Audience
at
Louvo
.
We
all
waited
on
him
to
the
Palace
,
it
being
the
Lord
Constance's
desire
that
we
should
do
so
;
because
the
King
had
a
mind
to
see
us
privately
,
and
would
have
us
make
the
Observation
of
the
Eclipse
of
the
Moon
which
was
to
be
within
three
Weeks
,
in
his
Presence
.
The
Bishop
and
Abbot
of
Lyonne
followed
the
Ambassador
to
the
Hall
of
Audience
.
In
the
mean
time
we
considered
the
Garden
and
outside
of
the
Palace
.
It
has
a
most
excellent
Situation
,
being
seated
by
the
River
side
upon
a
smooth
and
even
Eminence
,
and
is
of
a
large
Compass
.
We
saw
nothing
remarkable
but
two
great
separated
Piles
of
Building
,
and
the
Roofs
all
shining
with
Gold.
In
this
they
are
singular
,
that
they
are
covered
with
yellow
varnished
Tiles
,
which
glitter
like
Gold
when
the
Sun
shines
upon
them
;
we
were
told
that
every
one
of
these
Tiles
cost
about
ten
groats
.
Without
the
Palace
we
saw
a
Lion
presented
by
the
French
Company
to
the
King
:
It
seemed
to
be
bigger
,
handsomer
and
stronger
than
those
at
Vincennes
,
but
his
Hair
is
not
altogether
so
yellow
.
The
Audience
lasted
almost
two
hours
.
Whilst
they
discoursed
of
several
things
,
the
King
took
occasion
to
tell
the
Ambassador
,
that
he
was
informed
six
Jesuits
were
come
with
him
;
that
they
were
the
French
Kings
Mathematicians
,
whom
his
Majesty
sent
to
make
Observations
in
the
Indies
,
and
to
labour
in
the
perfection
of
Arts
;
and
that
he
should
be
glad
to
see
those
Learned
Men.
The
Ambassador
let
not
slip
the
occasion
of
doing
us
that
good
Office
,
and
spoke
many
things
in
our
Favours
.
The
King
was
not
then
so
high
above
the
Ambassador
as
he
was
at
the
firlt
Audience
.
He
wore
upon
his
Head
a
white
painted
Cap
,
encompassed
below
with
a
Circle
of
Diamonds
.
He
was
cloathed
in
a
strait
Coat
purled
with
Gold
,
having
over
it
a
large
Vest
of
a
very
fine
and
transparent
Stuff
.
He
had
some
large
Diamonds
on
his
Fingers
,
but
they
were
ill
cut
and
ill
set
.
As
he
has
more
wit
than
your
Oriental
Princes
commonly
have
,
he
said
many
things
very
wittily
to
the
Glory
of
the
most
Christian
King
,
and
obligingly
for
the
Ambassador
.
He
added
,
that
he
prayed
the
God
of
Heaven
to
give
him
a
more
speedy
and
successful
Voyage
homeward
than
he
had
in
coming
abroad
.
In
the
Evening
the
Lord
Constance
invited
abroad
the
Ambassador
with
all
his
Attendants
,
to
take
the
Air
,
all
severally
mounted
upon
Elephants
,
They
that
ride
them
sit
on
the
middle
of
their
Back
in
a
kind
of
a
very
wide
Chair
environed
with
small
gilt
Rails
,
but
without
a
Back
,
whilst
two
Officers
that
serve
the
Elephant
,
one
upon
his
Neck
,
and
another
on
his
Rump
,
govern
him
with
a
great
Iron
Hook
,
as
may
be
seen
by
the
Figure
.
It
is
to
be
observed
,
that
these
Beasts
have
their
Domestic
Servants
as
Persons
of
Quality
have
:
The
least
have
fifteen
men
that
wait
upon
them
quarterly
,
and
others
have
twenty
,
twenty
five
,
thirty
and
forty
,
according
to
their
Rank
;
but
the
white
Elephant
has
an
hundred
.
The
Lord
Constance
told
me
that
the
King
hath
at
least
twenty
thousand
in
his
whole
Kingdom
,
not
to
reckon
the
wild
that
are
among
the
Woods
and
Mountains
.
Sometimes
they
'l
take
fifty
,
sixty
,
nay
eighty
of
them
at
one
single
bout
of
Hunting
.
The
Gentlemen
of
the
Academy
Royal
of
Sciences
recommended
it
to
us
to
examine
whether
or
not
all
Elephants
had
Claws
in
their
feet
;
The
Elephants
have
five
Toes
in
each
Foot.
we
saw
not
so
much
as
one
but
that
had
five
on
each
foot
,
at
the
end
of
five
great
Toes
;
but
their
Toes
are
so
short
,
that
they
hardly
peep
out
of
the
fleshy
Lump
.
We
observed
that
their
Ears
are
nothing
near
so
big
as
they
are
commonly
painted
,
and
are
less
by
a
half
than
they
are
made
to
be
in
the
Cut
that
was
given
us
of
one
.
Some
we
have
seen
who
had
Teeth
of
extraordinary
Beauty
and
Length
;
they
reach
above
four
foot
out
of
the
mouth
of
some
of
them
,
and
at
certain
distances
are
adorned
with
Rings
of
Gold
,
Silver
and
Copper
.
In
one
of
the
King's
Countrey-Houses
,
upon
the
River
side
,
about
a
League
from
Siam
,
I
saw
a
little
white
Elephant
,
which
they
design
shall
be
the
Successor
of
him
that
is
in
the
Palace
,
who
,
as
they
say
,
is
near
three
hundred
years
old
.
This
little
Elephant
is
somewhat
bigger
than
an
Ox
,
hath
many
Mandarins
in
his
Service
;
and
for
his
sake
there
is
great
respect
shew'd
to
his
Mother
and
Aunt
that
are
kept
with
him
.
The
King
of
Camboy
presented
him
to
the
King
of
Siam
about
two
or
three
years
since
,
when
he
sent
to
demand
assistance
from
him
against
one
of
his
Subjects
that
had
revolted
,
and
was
supported
by
the
King
of
Cochinchine
.
A
Description
of
Louvo
.
The
Town
of
Louvo
stands
most
pleasantly
,
and
in
a
most
wholsom
Air
;
the
Compass
of
it
is
pretty
large
,
and
it
is
become
very
populous
since
the
King
hath
been
pleased
to
live
much
there
:
He
designs
to
fortifie
it
,
and
Monsieur
de
la
Marre
,
an
able
Engineer
,
whom
the
Ambassador
left
at
Siam
,
hath
already
drawn
the
Plat
of
the
Fortifications
that
are
to
be
made
,
to
render
it
a
strong
and
regular
place
.
It
is
seated
upon
a
Height
which
discovers
all
the
Countrey
about
,
is
not
commanded
by
any
Place
,
and
on
one
side
is
washed
by
a
great
River
that
runs
at
the
Foot
of
it
.
It
is
true
,
that
River
is
not
at
all
considerable
but
during
the
time
of
the
Inundation
.
But
seeing
the
Inundation
and
Rains
last
seven
or
eight
Months
,
on
that
side
which
besides
is
very
steep
,
the
Town
cannot
be
besieged
.
The
other
sides
are
2either
Marshes
which
may
be
easily
overflowed
,
or
rising
Grounds
in
form
of
an
Amphitheater
,
which
are
designed
to
be
taken
into
the
Town
,
and
which
will
serve
for
deep
Ditches
and
terrassed
Ramparts
,
proof
against
all
Artillery
.
They
'l
set
about
the
Fortifications
of
Louvo
as
soon
as
Hancok
is
fortified
,
which
is
a
place
of
greater
importance
,
and
,
as
it
were
,
the
Key
of
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
These
Works
will
soon
be
compleated
,
because
an
infinite
number
of
Workmen
will
be
employed
,
and
the
Ground
is
easie
to
be
cast
up
.
The
King
of
Si●m
gives
a
p●ivate
Audience
to
the
French
Jesuits
.
November
the
two
and
twentieth
we
had
Not●ce
sent
us
,
that
the
King
would
give
us
a
private
Audience
the
same
day
.
About
Four
of
the
Clock
in
the
Afternoon
the
Lord
Constance
carried
us
to
the
Palace
,
and
made
us
pass
three
Courts
,
where
we
saw
several
Mandarins
lying
prostrate
on
each
side
.
As
we
entred
the
inner
Court
,
we
found
a
large
Carpet
,
where
that
Minister
made
us
sit
down
.
We
had
no
habit
of
Ceremony
,
nor
did
they
oblige
us
to
be
barefooted
,
which
was
a
great
Work
of
distinction
.
So
soon
as
we
were
set
down
,
the
King
,
who
was
going
abroad
to
see
a
Fight
of
Elephants
,
wherewith
he
thought
fit
to
entertain
the
Ambassador
,
mounted
his
Elephant
magnificently
harnessed
,
which
waited
for
him
at
the
Gate
of
his
Apartment
;
and
having
perceived
us
at
ten
or
twelve
steps
distance
from
him
,
he
came
up
to
us
.
Our
Father
Superior
had
prepared
a
Complement
to
thank
him
for
the
honour
he
did
us
in
admitting
of
us
into
his
Presence
,
as
it
had
been
concerted
with
the
Lord
Constance
;
but
that
Minister
perceiving
the
King
in
haste
to
be
gone
,
spoke
for
us
.
The
King
eyeing
us
one
after
another
attentively
,
and
with
a
smiling
and
gracious
Countenance
,
told
us
,
how
being
informed
that
the
King
of
France
had
sent
us
all
six
into
China
upon
a
great
Design
,
he
had
desired
to
see
us
,
that
he
might
tell
us
by
word
of
mouth
,
that
if
we
stood
in
need
of
any
thing
in
his
Kingdom
,
either
for
the
Service
of
the
King
our
Master
,
or
for
our selves
in
particular
,
we
should
address
our selves
to
his
Minister
,
whom
he
had
ordered
to
furnish
us
with
all
we
wanted
.
We
had
no
time
to
make
Answer
to
that
Favour
any
otherwise
than
by
humble
Thanks
and
profound
Inclinations
.
We
only
let
him
know
that
we
should
acquaint
the
King
our
Master
with
the
Obligations
that
he
had
put
upon
us
.
The
King
went
his
way
,
and
having
past
through
this
Court
into
another
,
amidst
a
Lane
of
Mandarins
prostrate
before
him
in
great
silence
,
with
their
Foreheads
against
the
ground
,
he
found
at
the
first
Gate
of
the
Palace
the
chief
of
the
Companies
of
the
European
Merchants
bare-footed
,
on
their
knees
,
and
leaning
upon
their
elbows
,
to
whom
he
gave
a
short
Audience
.
The
Lord
Constance
having
told
us
that
it
would
be
fit
we
should
write
the
Complement
that
was
to
be
made
to
the
King
,
and
then
present
it
to
his
Majesty
,
Father
Fontenay
,
who
foresaw
that
that
Circumspection
would
not
be
unnecessary
;
because
perhaps
he
might
not
have
time
to
read
it
,
presented
it
to
the
King
,
who
ordered
the
Lord
Constance
to
take
it
.
It
was
both
in
the
Siam-Language
and
the
French
,
and
conceived
in
these
Terms
.
SIR
,
The
Jesuits
Harangue
presented
to
the
King.
WE
have
left
the
greatest
King
that
France
ever
had
,
but
have
had
the
Happiness
in
coming
hither
,
to
find
again
in
your
Majesty
the
Qualities
of
that
Prince
.
That
Greatness
of
Soul
which
so
generously
inclines
you
to
assist
your
Allies
,
the
Courage
wherewith
you
repress
your
Enemies
,
the
Advantages
you
have
lately
got
over
them
,
that
extraordinary
Submission
of
your
Subjects
,
that
Magnificence
wherein
you
shew
your self
to
them
,
these
famous
Embassies
which
you
receive
from
the
remotest
Parts
of
the
World
,
that
Protection
you
give
to
Strangers
,
that
particular
Affection
you
express
toward
the
Ministers
of
the
Gospel
,
that
Goodness
which
you
so
bountifully
make
also
appear
towards
us
;
All
these
things
,
Sir
,
are
convincing
Arguments
that
you
are
a
Magnanimous
,
Victorious
,
Politic
and
Equitable
King
,
and
as
Fame
and
the
Acclamations
of
your
Subjects
publish
it
,
the
greatest
Prince
that
ever
sway'd
the
Scepter
of
Siam
.
The
Sciences
,
Sir
,
that
we
make
Profession
of
,
are
esteemed
all
over
Europe
.
Our
King
does
so
encourage
them
,
that
for
their
Vse
,
he
has
erected
stately
Observatories
,
and
for
their
sake
given
his
August
Name
to
our
Companies
College
where
they
are
taught
.
We
have
studied
to
improve
them
from
our
Youth
upwards
,
especially
Astronomy
,
which
best
agrees
with
our
Inclinations
,
because
it
raises
our
Minds
to
the
frequent
Contemplation
of
Heaven
,
the
Habitation
of
the
Blessed
,
and
the
Countrey
we
only
aspire
unto
.
His
most
Christian
Majesty
knowing
that
it
is
our
Profession
to
make
use
of
Human
Sciences
,
that
by
means
of
them
we
may
bring
Men
to
the
Knowledge
and
Love
of
the
true
God
;
and
being
perswaded
that
the
Mathematics
have
been
our
particular
Study
,
has
chosen
us
to
go
to
China
in
quality
of
Mathematicians
:
So
that
it
is
a
Charge
laid
upon
us
to
joyn
our
Endeavors
with
those
whom
he
keeps
at
home
by
himself
in
the
improvement
of
Arts
and
Sciences
.
For
the
more
easie
accomplishment
of
so
great
a
Design
,
our
great
Monarch
hath
given
us
Letters
Patents
,
which
recommend
us
to
all
the
Princes
of
the
Earth
;
in
consideration
whereof
,
your
Majesty
heaps
Honour
upon
us
by
admitting
us
into
your
Presence
.
It
is
impossible
for
us
,
Sir
,
to
make
any
suitable
Returns
for
so
great
Favours
;
but
since
we
cannot
do
it
as
we
ought
to
do
,
we
hope
your
Majesty
will
suffer
us
to
do
it
the
best
way
we
can
.
We
are
the
Servants
of
the
true
God
,
and
the
Subjects
of
a
great
Monarch
.
As
the
Subjects
of
so
great
a
King
,
we
will
inform
him
of
the
Favours
your
Majesty
hath
shewed
us
,
and
as
Servants
of
the
true
God
,
we
will
make
our
earnest
Prayers
to
him
,
that
he
would
in
all
things
prosper
your
Reign
,
and
so
enlighten
your
Majesty
with
his
Divine
Truths
,
that
after
so
glorious
a
Reign
upon
Earth
,
you
may
come
to
the
Possession
of
the
Glories
of
Heaven
.
Some
days
after
the
L.
Constance
discoursed
his
Majesty
about
a
Project
which
he
had
had
a
long
time
in
his
thoughts
,
of
bringing
to
Siam
twelve
Jesuits
Mathematicians
,
whom
he
had
already
demanded
of
our
Reverend
Father
General
,
and
about
the
Design
of
building
an
Observatory
in
imitation
of
Paris
and
Pekin
.
He
made
his
Majesty
sensible
of
the
Glory
and
Profit
that
would
thereby
redound
to
him
,
and
the
Advantage
that
his
Subjects
would
reap
from
it
;
who
would
be
taught
the
finest
Arts
and
Sciences
of
Europe
.
His
Majesty
much
approved
that
Project
,
and
bid
the
Lord
Constance
tell
us
,
that
he
would
have
an
Observatory
built
in
his
Kingdom
,
which
he
would
bestow
upon
the
Fathers
of
the
Company
of
Jesus
,
whom
he
much
esteemed
,
and
whom
he
would
protect
and
favour
in
all
things
that
lay
in
his
power
.
Whereupon
the
Lord
Constance
thought
it
fit
that
some
of
us
should
return
to
France
to
press
that
Affair
,
which
seemed
to
him
to
be
of
extream
consequence
for
Religion
.
He
mentioned
it
one
day
to
the
Father
Superior
when
we
were
all
three
together
.
We
joyfully
consented
to
it
;
and
the
Commission
falling
upon
me
,
I
had
Orders
presently
to
prepare
for
my
Return
.
It
grieved
me
to
the
heart
then
,
to
see
my self
for
a
long
time
removed
to
so
great
a
distance
from
China
,
which
I
had
longed
after
for
so
many
years
.
The
Lord
Constance
,
who
is
no
less
ready
to
embrace
the
Occasions
of
advancing
the
Glory
of
God
,
than
of
procuring
Advantages
to
his
Master
,
communicated
to
us
another
View
,
which
he
thought
might
contribute
much
to
the
Conversion
of
the
Siamese
.
He
pretends
that
if
once
their
Esteem
and
Affection
can
be
gained
by
Zeal
,
Meekness
and
Learning
,
it
will
be
no
difficult
matter
to
dispose
them
to
hearken
to
Instruction
:
That
he
throughly
knew
the
temper
of
that
Nation
,
and
no
man
better
;
why
Christianity
hath
made
no
greater
progress
at
Siam
after
so
many
years
endeavours
of
having
it
planted
there
;
that
besides
the
Observatory
,
there
must
be
another
House
of
Jesuits
,
where
they
should
as
much
as
lay
in
their
power
lead
the
austere
and
retired
Life
of
the
Talapoins
,
that
have
so
great
credit
with
the
people
;
that
they
should
take
their
Habit
,
visit
them
often
,
and
endeavour
to
convert
some
of
them
to
the
Christian
Religion
;
that
in
short
,
it
was
well
known
how
that
Conduct
had
succeeded
with
the
Portuguese
Jesuits
who
are
at
Madura
towards
Bengal
.
The
truth
is
,
we
have
learnt
from
several
places
,
and
very
lately
too
at
Siam
from
a
French
Missionary
who
had
been
at
St.
Thomas
two
Months
before
,
that
these
Fathers
had
li●ed
several
years
amongst
those
People
,
and
applied
themselves
with
care
and
pains
to
their
Conversion
without
any
considerable
fruit
.
One
of
them
,
who
had
been
made
Superior
of
that
Mission
,
having
long
implored
Assistance
from
heaven
,
and
reflecting
on
the
Reverence
that
those
People
had
for
the
Bramines
,
who
are
their
Priests
and
Religious
,
thought
that
if
he
did
take
the
Habit
of
the
Bramens
,
and
lived
after
their
manner
,
he
might
gain
Credi●
amongst
them
,
and
win
them
over
to
Jesus
Christ
.
He
communicated
that
Design
to
his
Superiors
,
who
proposed
it
to
the
Congregation
de
propaganda
Fide.
It
was
considered
of
at
Rome
,
and
it
being
represented
to
the
Cardinals
that
the
Habits
the
Bramens
wore
were
no
Mark
of
Religion
,
but
of
Nobility
and
eminent
Quality
,
they
permitted
that
Father
and
some
other
Jesuits
who
approved
his
Judgment
,
to
try
that
last
way
for
the
Conversion
of
those
People
.
Having
so
taken
the
Badge
of
the
Bramens
,
they
began
to
live
as
they
did
;
and
since
that
time
these
Apostolic
Men
have
been
seen
walking
upon
the
burning
hot
Sand
bare-footed
and
bare-headed
,
and
continually
exposed
to
the
heat
of
the
Sun
,
which
is
extraordinary
there
,
because
the
Bramens
wear
no
Stockings
nor
Shoes
,
and
never
cover
their
Head
;
living
on
nothing
but
Herbs
,
and
spending
three
or
four
days
without
eating
,
under
a
Tree
,
or
on
the
high
way
,
waiting
till
some
Indian
affected
with
such
surprizing
austerity
,
should
come
and
hear
them
.
God
hath
so
much
blessed
their
Zeal
and
Mortification
,
that
they
have
converted
above
threescore
thousand
Indians
,
and
the
People
come
flocking
in
so
great
numbers
to
be
instructed
,
that
they
value
not
all
the
hardship
and
trouble
they
have
endured
.
The
same
Church-man
added
,
that
he
had
seen
one
of
those
Fathers
,
whose
feet
had
been
all
chopt
with
the
burning
Sand
,
which
getting
afterwards
into
the
Wounds
,
put
him
to
extream
pain
,
and
raised
strange
Swellings
.
Upon
what
he
told
us
of
these
Missions
,
we
earnestly
desired
to
see
a
more
ample
Relation
of
them
,
being
perswaded
that
we
should
therein
meet
with
rare
Examples
of
Zeal
,
and
great
ground
of
Edification
.
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
Fifth
BOOK
.
Of
our
Return
from
Siam
.
WHen
it
was
resolved
upon
,
that
I
should
return
to
France
,
the
Lord
Constance
redoubled
the
Testimonies
of
Friendship
,
wherewith
he
had
till
then
honour'd
me
,
telling
me
that
he
wished
he
might
frequently
discourse
me
in
private
.
Next
day
I
went
to
see
him
,
according
as
he
had
enjoyned
me
at
parting
.
I
found
him
taken
up
in
preparing
Presents
for
those
who
had
had
the
greatest
hand
in
the
Favour
which
the
King
had
done
us
of
sending
us
to
China
;
and
making
us
draw
near
to
see
them
,
these
are
but
very
mean
Presents
,
said
he
,
for
so
great
Lords
.
But
you
shall
tell
them
,
Father
,
that
I
came
to
know
of
it
but
very
late
,
and
after
I
had
given
away
all
the
finest
and
most
curious
things
I
had
.
For
besides
the
Presents
which
he
sent
to
France
,
and
that
he
had
given
to
the
French
who
were
at
Siam
,
he
had
sent
some
very
considerable
to
Portugal
,
by
the
three
Ambassadors
whom
the
King
of
Siam
had
dispatched
to
Lisbone
,
sometime
before
we
arrived
there
.
Nor
is
it
,
said
he
,
a
Present
that
I
would
have
them
take
as
from
me
,
but
as
from
one
of
your
Brothers
,
to
thank
them
for
the
Goodness
they
have
for
you
,
and
the
Protection
they
honour
you
with
.
We
could
make
no
answer
to
such
obliging
Expressions
,
but
by
our
most
humble
Thanks
;
but
he
would
not
hear
us
,
interrupting
and
adjuring
us
not
to
speak
to
him
in
that
Strain
,
that
being
our
Brother
,
he
was
perwaded
he
did
no
more
but
his
Duty
.
The
same
day
that
we
had
Audience
,
the
King
was
to
treat
the
Ambassador
with
a
Fight
of
Elephants
,
and
his
Majesty
had
already
commanded
six
to
be
made
ready
for
us
,
that
we
might
follow
him
to
the
Field
of
Battle
,
which
was
out
of
Town
.
The
Lord
Constance
gave
us
a
Mandarin
to
be
our
Guide
,
and
as
we
came
out
of
the
Palace
we
found
six
Elephants
with
their
gilt
Chairs
,
and
very
neat
Cushions
.
Every
one
got
up
on
the
Back
of
his
own
in
this
manner
.
The
Pastor
(
for
so
they
call
the
Man
that
sits
on
the
Elephants
Neck
to
govern
him
)
made
the
Elephant
kneel
,
who
afterward
lay
half
down
on
one
side
,
so
that
one
could
put
his
Foot
upon
one
of
his
Fore-legs
,
which
he
thrust
out
,
and
then
upon
his
Belly
;
after
that
,
the
Beast
rising
a
little
up
again
,
gave
one
time
to
sit
down
conveniently
in
the
Chair
which
he
carried
on
his
Back
;
one
may
also
make
use
of
a
Ladder
,
as
some
do
,
to
get
upon
the
Elephants
Back
.
It
is
for
the
Convenience
of
Strangers
,
who
are
not
accustomed
to
Elephants
,
that
they
put
Chairs
on
their
Backs
.
The
Natives
of
the
Country
,
whatsoever
their
Quality
be
,
unless
it
be
the
King
,
ride
on
the
Neck
and
conduct
them
themselves
,
except
when
they
go
to
War
,
for
then
,
besides
two
Pastors
,
who
get
up
one
upon
the
Neck
,
and
the
other
on
the
Rump
,
the
Mandarin
armed
with
a
Lance
,
or
a
kind
of
Javelin
,
sets
on
the
Elephants
Back
,
as
I
my self
have
seen
it
at
a
Hunting
of
Elephants
,
whether
the
Mandarins
go
armed
as
to
a
Battle
.
I
observed
also
that
the
King
,
who
was
in
a
kind
of
Throne
,
started
up
upon
his
Legs
when
the
wild
Elephants
would
have
forced
their
way
through
on
his
side
,
and
got
upon
the
Neck
of
his
to
stop
them
.
We
followed
the
King
then
into
a
large
Plain
,
about
an
hundred
Paces
from
the
Town
.
The
King
,
mounted
on
an
Elephant
,
had
my
Lord
Ambassador
on
his
Right-hand
at
fifteen
or
twenty
steps
distance
,
the
Lord
Constance
on
his
Left-hand
,
and
all
round
a
great
many
Mandarins
prostrate
at
the
Feet
of
his
Elephant
out
of
respect
.
We
presently
heard
some
Trumpets
which
make
a
very
harsh
and
inarticulate
Sound
;
then
the
two
Elephants
which
were
to
fight
roared
and
made
a
most
horrid
Noise
:
They
were
tied
by
the
Hind-feet
with
great
Ropes
;
held
by
several
Men
,
that
they
might
be
drawn
off
,
in
case
the
Shock
proved
too
hard
.
They
let
them
approach
in
such
a
manner
,
that
their
Teeth
crossed
,
and
yet
they
could
not
hurt
one
another
.
They
say
that
sometimes
they
'l
encounter
so
fiercely
,
that
breaking
one
anothers
Teeth
by
their
Efforts
,
the
Splinters
of
them
will
fly
about
:
These
fought
but
with
little
Violence
,
they
encountered
but
four
or
five
times
,
and
then
were
parted
,
and
the
Engagement
was
so
short
,
that
it
was
thought
the
King
had
only
appointed
it
that
he
might
have
occasion
in
a
more
agreeable
manner
,
to
make
a
Present
to
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
,
who
had
brought
the
two
Siamese
Mandarins
,
and
was
to
carry
the
Ambassadors
to
France
;
for
at
the
end
of
the
Show
,
his
Majesty
drew
near
him
,
and
with
his
own
Hand
,
gave
him
a
Shable
with
a
Handle
of
beaten
Gold
,
and
a
Tortoise-shell
Scabbard
,
adorned
with
five
Plates
of
Gold
,
with
a
great
Filigrane
gold
Chain
also
,
to
serve
for
a
Shoulder-belt
,
and
a
Vest
of
Cloth
of
Gold
,
with
Gold
Buttons
:
He
told
him
that
he
put
that
Cimeter
into
his
Hands
,
that
he
might
securely
conduct
his
Ambassadors
,
and
therewith
serve
the
King
his
Master
against
his
Enemies
.
The
King
of
Siam
never
gives
that
kind
of
Shable
but
to
his
Generals
of
Armies
,
when
they
are
setting
out
upon
a
Warlike
Expedition
,
He
made
such
another
Present
to
Monsieur
de
Joyeux
Captain
of
the
Frigat
,
but
not
so
Magnificent
.
Some
days
after
,
the
Lord
Constance
sent
rich
Presents
to
the
Ambassador
,
the
Abbot
de
Choisi
,
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
,
Monsieur
de
Joyeux
,
and
to
every
one
of
the
Gentlemen
of
the
Ambassador's
Retinue
.
These
were
Japan
Plate
,
wrought
Agats
,
a
great
many
fine
China-dishes
of
all
Sizes
,
China-Night
Gowns
,
right
Bezoar-Stones
,
the
Ginseng
Root
that
is
worth
eight
times
its
weight
in
Silver
,
the
odoriferous
Wood
of
Aquila
,
so
much
esteemed
in
the
Indies
,
and
excellent
Tea
in
great
quantity
.
These
Presents
seemed
to
be
of
so
considerable
a
Value
,
that
for
some
time
it
was
thought
by
many
that
they
had
been
sent
by
the
King.
We
spent
most
of
the
days
we
stayed
at
Louvo
in
Shows
.
The
Fight
we
just
now
mentioned
,
was
followed
by
another
of
Elephants
against
a
Tygre
;
we
were
obliged
to
be
there
as
well
as
the
rest
,
and
mounted
on
Elephants
.
We
made
use
of
no
other
Beast
to
ride
on
,
that
we
might
not
scandalize
the
Talapoins
,
who
say
that
it
is
prohibited
to
them
to
ride
on
Horse-back
.
About
a
quarter
of
a
League
from
the
Town
,
they
had
raised
a
high
Palissado
of
Bambous
,
about
an
hundred
Paces
square
.
Three
Elephants
appointed
to
fight
the
Tyger
,
were
got
into
the
middle
of
the
Lists
.
They
had
a
kind
of
large
Breast-plate
,
which
covered
their
Head
and
part
of
their
Trunk
.
So
soon
as
we
were
come
,
out
of
a
Lodge
that
was
in
a
low
place
,
they
brought
a
Tyger
,
of
a
Shape
and
Colour
which
seemed
strange
to
the
French
that
were
Spectators
.
For
besides
that
,
he
was
much
taller
,
grosser
,
and
more
lumpish
than
those
that
we
had
seen
in
France
;
his
Skin
was
not
spotted
in
that
Fashion
,
but
instead
of
Spots
scattered
here
and
there
without
order
,
it
had
long
broad
Streaks
that
encompassed
it
like
Rings
.
These
Streaks
beginning
at
the
Back
joyned
under
the
Belly
,
and
continuing
to
the
End
of
the
Tail
,
made
thereupon
white
and
black
Rings
,
which
were
set
very
thick
,
and
covered
it
all
over
.
The
Head
and
Limbs
of
the
Beast
had
nothing
extraordinary
,
save
that
they
were
longer
and
bigger
than
those
of
common
Tygers
,
though
this
was
but
a
young
Tyger
;
and
not
yet
come
to
his
full
Growth
,
for
the
Lord
Constance
told
us
that
there
were
some
in
the
Kingdom
three
times
bigger
than
that
,
and
that
being
a
hunting
one
day
with
the
King
,
he
saw
one
at
a
very
near
distance
that
was
as
big
as
a
Mule.
They
have
little
ones
in
that
Country
also
,
like
those
they
bring
from
Africa
to
Europe
,
and
they
shew'd
us
one
of
them
at
Louvo
the
same
Day
.
They
did
not
let
slip
the
Tyger
that
was
to
fight
at
first
,
but
held
him
tied
by
two
Ropes
,
so
that
not
having
liberty
to
shoot
himself
out
,
the
first
Elephant
that
came
near
him
,
gave
him
two
or
three
Blows
with
his
Trunk
on
the
Back
.
This
Shock
was
so
rude
that
it
laid
the
Tyger
for
some
time
all
along
upon
the
Ground
,
and
without
motion
,
as
if
he
had
been
dead
.
Nevertheless
,
so
soon
as
he
was
untied
,
though
the
first
bout
had
quelled
much
of
his
Fury
,
he
made
a
terrible
Cry
,
and
would
have
thrown
himself
upon
the
Elephants
Trunk
,
but
the
Elephant
turning
it
cunningly
inwards
,
secured
it
by
his
Teeth
,
which
he
presently
presented
to
the
Tyger
,
and
therewith
struck
him
so
pat
,
that
he
tossed
him
up
to
a
great
height
,
in
the
Air.
This
so
stun'd
the
Beast
,
that
he
durst
no
more
approach
the
Elephant
,
but
taking
several
turns
about
the
Yard
,
he
sometimes
sprung
at
those
whom
he
saw
in
the
Galleries
.
Then
three
Elephants
were
let
loose
against
him
,
who
mauled
him
so
by
turns
,
that
once
more
he
counterfeited
to
be
dead
,
and
afterward
made
all
the
shifts
he
could
to
avoid
them
.
They
would
certainly
have
killed
him
,
had
not
the
Ambassador
begg'd
his
Pardon
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
who
put
an
end
to
the
Combat
.
Next
Day
towards
the
Evening
,
we
went
to
the
Palace
with
my
Lord
Ambassador
;
there
we
saw
an
Illumination
,
which
is
yearly
made
at
the
beginning
of
the
Year
:
It
consisted
of
eighteen
hundred
or
two
thousand
Lights
,
some
whereof
were
placed
in
little
Windows
purposely
made
in
the
Walls
that
environ
the
Palace
,
and
the
rest
in
Lanthors
,
in
a
pretty
singular
Order
.
Above
all
we
admired
some
certain
large
China-Lanthorns
like
to
Globes
,
which
are
made
of
one
single
piece
of
transparent
Horn
as
clear
as
Glass
,
and
some
others
of
a
kind
of
China-glass
made
of
Rice
.
These
Illuminations
were
accompanied
with
the
Noise
of
Drums
,
Fifes
and
Trumpets
.
All
the
while
that
the
King
was
present
at
this
Show
,
the
Princess
gave
the
like
to
the
Court
Ladies
in
another
part
of
the
Palace
.
When
the
King
was
gone
,
we
had
time
to
consider
all
things
at
a
near
distance
.
The
Lord
Constance
show'd
us
the
Elephant
Prince
,
who
is
of
an
extraordinary
Height
and
Beauty
;
we
were
told
that
they
called
him
by
that
Name
,
because
he
came
into
the
World
the
same
day
that
the
present
King
was
born
.
He
made
us
also
observe
near
to
the
Kings
Apartment
,
a
Pavilion
where
they
keep
the
Elephant
that
is
upon
Guard
,
it
is
one
of
those
that
are
in
the
Palace
,
and
are
relieved
by
turns
,
being
always
kept
in
a
readiness
,
if
the
King
should
chance
to
want
them
by
Day
or
by
Night
.
Having
often
mentioned
Elephants
,
and
the
different
manner
,
they
are
harnassed
according
to
the
Qualities
of
those
that
mount
them
,
it
hath
been
thought
fit
to
give
the
Reader
the
following
Cuts
of
the
several
sorts
of
them
.
These
Illuminations
lasted
several
days
;
all
the
while
we
were
in
the
Palace
to
observe
them
,
a
great
many
Mandarins
of
the
first
and
second
Order
,
lay
prostrate
upon
the
Ground
before
the
King
in
two
different
Halls
,
making
to
him
the
Zombaye
,
which
is
the
most
reverential
Mark
of
Adoration
.
Much
about
the
same
time
the
Moors
made
great
Illuminations
for
eight
days
together
,
in
Honour
of
their
Prophet
Mahomet
and
his
Son
,
whose
Funerals
they
celebrated
.
They
began
to
solemnize
the
Festival
the
Evening
before
about
four
of
the
Clock
at
Night
,
by
a
kind
of
Procession
,
wherein
there
were
above
two
thousand
Souls
.
There
they
carried
the
Figure
of
the
Tombs
of
those
two
Impostors
,
with
many
Symbols
of
a
pretty
neat
Representation
,
amongst
others
,
certain
great
Cages
covered
with
painted
Cloth
,
and
carried
by
Men
that
marched
and
continually
turned
in
cadence
to
the
Sound
of
Drums
and
Timbrels
.
The
quick
and
regular
Motion
of
these
huge
Machines
which
we
saw
at
a
distance
,
without
perceiving
those
that
carried
them
,
occasioned
an
agreeable
Surprise
.
At
the
Head
of
this
great
Confluence
of
People
,
some
Grooms
led
three
or
four
Horses
in
rich
Trappings
,
and
a
great
many
People
carrying
several
Lanthorns
at
the
end
of
long
Poles
,
lighted
all
the
Procession
and
sung
in
divers
Quires
after
a
very
odd
manner
.
With
the
same
Zeal
they
continued
this
Festival
for
several
Nights
together
till
five
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
.
It
is
hardly
to
be
conceived
how
these
Porters
of
Machines
,
The
Moors
make
a
Feast
to
celebrate
the
Memory
of
their
Prophet
.
that
uncessantly
turned
,
could
perform
that
Exercise
for
fifteen
or
sixteen
Hours
together
,
nor
how
the
Singers
that
raised
their
Voices
as
high
as
was
possible
for
them
,
could
sing
so
long
.
The
rest
of
the
Procession
looked
modest
enough
,
some
marched
before
the
Singers
,
who
surrounded
Coffins
carried
upon
eight
Mens
Shoulders
,
and
the
rest
were
mingled
in
the
Croud
with
them
.
There
were
a
great
many
Siamese
Men
and
Women
,
Young
and
Old
there
,
who
have
embraced
the
Mahometan
Religion
.
For
since
the
Moors
have
got
footing
in
the
Kingdom
,
they
have
drawn
over
a
great
many
People
to
their
Religion
,
which
is
an
Argument
that
they
are
not
so
addicted
to
their
Superstitions
,
but
that
they
can
forsake
them
,
when
our
Missionaries
have
had
Patience
and
Zeal
enough
to
instruct
them
in
our
Mysteries
.
It
is
true
,
that
Nation
is
a
great
Lover
of
Shows
and
splendid
Ceremonies
,
and
by
that
means
it
is
that
the
Moors
,
who
celebrate
all
their
Festivals
with
a
great
deal
of
Magnificence
,
have
perverted
many
of
them
to
the
Sect
of
Mahomet
.
These
Shows
made
us
heartily
condole
the
Misfortune
of
those
poor
Infidels
,
and
we
often
discoursed
of
the
Fruit
that
so
many
able
Men
as
are
in
Europe
,
and
particularly
in
France
,
might
reap
amongst
them
,
if
they
had
as
much
Zeal
as
Learning
.
The
King
who
took
pleasure
to
give
the
Ambassador
new
Diversions
dayly
,
would
have
him
to
see
the
manner
of
taking
and
taming
,
Elephants
.
This
being
a
thing
unknown
in
Europe
and
we
having
been
Witnesses
of
it
,
the
Render
,
I
hope
,
will
be
glad
to
find
here
an
example
and
exact
description
of
the
same
.
The
way
of
taking
and
taming
Elephants
.
About
a
quarter
of
a
League
from
Louvo
there
is
a
kind
of
an
Amphitheater
,
of
a
large
and
long
square
Figure
,
encompassed
with
high
Walls
and
Terrasses
,
where
the
Spectators
are
placed
.
Along
these
Walls
within
runs
a
Palisadoe
of
thick
Pillars
fastened
in
the
Ground
at
a
foot
distance
one
from
another
,
behind
which
the
Huntsmen
retreat
when
they
are
pursued
by
the
fretted
Elephants
.
There
is
a
very
large
opening
made
towards
the
Countrey
,
and
opposite
to
it
,
on
the
side
of
the
Town
one
less
,
which
leads
into
a
narrow
Alley
through
which
an
Elephant
can
hardly
pass
,
and
that
Alley
ends
in
a
large
manage
,
where
they
compleatly
tame
him
at
length
.
When
the
day
appointed
for
this
Hunting
is
come
.
Huntsmen
go
into
the
Woods
,
mounted
on
She-Elephants
which
are
trained
to
the
Game
;
and
cover
themselves
with
leaves
of
Trees
that
they
may
not
be
seen
by
the
wild
Elephants
.
When
they
are
got
pretty
forward
in
the
Forest
,
where
they
think
some
Elephant
may
be
,
they
make
the
Female
give
some
neys
that
are
proper
to
attract
the
Males
,
who
presetnly
answer
by
dreadful
roarings
.
Then
the
Huntsmen
perceiving
them
at
a
vast
distance
return
back
again
,
and
gently
lead
the
Females
towards
the
Amphitheater
we
mentioned
:
the
wild
Elephants
never
fail
to
follow
them
;
he
whom
we
saw
tamed
entred
with
them
,
and
so
soon
as
he
was
there
the
Barr
was
shut
;
the
females
kept
on
their
way
cross
the
Amphitheater
,
and
at
one
anothers
tails
past
along
the
little
Ally
that
was
at
the
other
end
:
The
wild
Elephant
which
had
followed
them
to
that
place
,
stopping
at
the
entry
of
the
narrow
pass
,
all
manner
of
ways
were
used
to
make
engagement
,
they
made
the
females
who
were
beyond
the
Alley
,
cry
;
some
Siamese
provoked
him
by
clapping
their
hands
and
crying
pat
,
pat
,
others
pricked
him
with
long
sharp
p●inted
p●les
,
and
when
they
were
pursued
by
him
,
〈…〉
●ix●
the
Pillars
and
hid
themselves
〈◊〉
th●
Pal●adoes
which
the
Elephant
could
〈…〉
●gh
:
at
length
having
pursued
〈…〉
●en
he
made
at
one
single
Man
〈…〉
of
Fury
.
The
Man
ru●
〈…〉
Elephant
after
him
;
But
〈…〉
was
taken
,
for
the
Man
having
〈…〉
let
fall
purposely
too
P●
〈…〉
other
behind
the
Elephant
,
〈…〉
of
his
power
to
go
forwards
〈…〉
himself
,
he
strugled
prodigi●
〈…〉
●errible
cries
.
They
endeavoured
〈…〉
●im
b●
throwing
buckets
full
of
wa●
〈…〉
Body
,
rubbing
him
with
leaves
,
p●
〈…〉
upon
h●s
Ears
,
and
they
brought
〈◊〉
●phants
both
Males
and
Females
to
hi●
〈◊〉
caressed
him
with
their
Truncks
.
In
〈…〉
time
they
●stened
Ropes
under
his
b●
〈◊〉
to
his
hind-seen
,
that
so
they
might
pull
〈◊〉
out
from
thence
,
and
they
persisted
in
thr●
water
upon
his
Trunk
and
Body
to
c●
.
At
length
they
brought
to
him
one
of
●se
tame
Elephants
that
are
accustomed
to
in●ruct
the
new-comers
.
An
Officer
was
mounted
upon
him
who
made
him
go
forwards
and
backwards
,
to
shew
the
wild
Elephant
that
there
was
no
danger
,
and
that
he
might
come
out
.
So
at
length
they
opened
the
gate
to
him
and
he
followed
the
other
to
the
end
of
the
Alley
.
So
soon
as
he
was
there
they
fastned
an
Elephant
to
each
side
of
him
,
another
went
before
and
pulled
him
by
a
rope
into
the
way
that
they
would
have
him
take
,
whilst
a
fourth
made
him
go
forwards
by
thumping
him
with
his
head
behind
,
until
he
came
to
a
kind
of
manage
where
they
tyed
him
to
a
great
Pillar
made
for
that
purpose
,
which
turns
like
the
Capstern
of
a
Ship.
They
left
him
there
till
next
day
that
he
might
spend
his
anger
;
but
whilst
he
tormented
himself
about
that
Pillar
,
a
Bramen
(
that
is
to
say
one
of
the
Indian
Priests
who
are
numerous
in
Siam
)
cloathed
in
white
and
mounted
on
another
Elephant
drew
nigh
,
and
turning
gently
about
this
which
was
tied
,
sprinkled
him
with
a
certain
water
consecrated
after
their
manner
,
which
he
carried
in
a
Vessel
of
Gold.
They
believe
that
that
Ceremony
makes
the
Elephant
loose
his
natural
fierceness
,
and
fits
him
for
to
serve
the
King.
The
day
following
he
begins
to
go
with
the
rest
,
and
in
a
fortnights
time
is
fully
tamed
.
Amidst
all
those
diversions
the
Ambassador
was
wholly
taken
up
about
the
Subject
of
his
Embassie
,
which
was
the
Conversion
of
the
King
;
but
perceiving
that
he
had
no
solid
nor
positive
answer
as
to
that
,
he
resolved
to
draw
up
a
short
memoir
,
which
he
intended
should
be
presented
to
the
King
by
the
Lord
Constance
.
He
spoke
of
it
to
that
Minister
,
who
in
a
long
conference
they
had
together
disswaded
him
from
pressing
the
King
upon
that
point
;
but
the
Ambassador
very
prudently
still
persisted
in
his
opinion
,
and
prayed
the
Lord
Constance
to
present
that
writing
to
his
Majesty
,
wherein
he
besought
him
to
give
him
a
positive
answer
that
might
be
acceptable
to
the
King
his
Master
.
The
Lord
Constance
having
received
the
Memoir
from
the
Ambassador
,
went
to
the
Palace
in
the
Evening
and
there
prostrating
himself
at
the
Kings
feet
,
made
him
a
discourse
full
of
that
Asiatic
Eloquence
that
was
so
much
esteemed
in
ancient
Greece
.
Here
you
have
a
true
translation
of
the
very
words
he
used
.
SIR
,
THE
Ambassador
of
France
hath
put
into
my
hands
a
Memoir
which
contains
certain
propositions
whereof
he
is
to
give
an
account
to
the
King
his
Master
;
but
before
I
read
it
to
your
Majesty
,
The
Harangue
of
the
Lord
Constance
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
suffer
me
,
Sir
,
if
you
please
,
to
lay
before
you
the
principal
motive
that
engaged
the
most
Christian
King
to
send
you
so
solemn
an
Embassie
.
That
so
wise
a
Prince
,
your
good
Friend
,
Sir
,
knowing
the
greatness
of
your
Soul
and
the
generosity
of
your
Majesties
Royal
heart
by
the
Ambassadors
and
Magnificent
Presents
which
you
designed
for
him
,
without
other
interest
than
that
of
desi●ng
the
Royal
Vnity
of
a
Prince
so
Glorious
,
and
so
Renowned
over
the
World
:
and
then
perceiving
that
your
Majesties
Ministers
had
sent
to
the
Ministers
of
his
Kingdom
two
Mandarins
with
considerable
Presents
to
congratulate
the
birth
of
the
Grand-son
of
their
great
King
,
worthy
of
a
perpetual
P●sterity
,
which
ma●
eternally
represent
to
France
the
Image
of
his
admirable
Virtues
,
and
secure
the
happiness
of
his
People
.
That
great
Monarch
,
Sir
,
being
surprised
by
so
disinterested
a
procedure
resolved
to
answer
th●se
obliging
cares
,
and
to
do
so
,
devised
a
means
worthy
of
himself
and
suitable
to
the
dignity
of
your
Majesty
;
for
to
present
you
with
Riches
;
it
is
in
your
Kingdom
,
Sir
,
that
Strangers
come
in
search
of
Wealth
,
To
offer
you
his
Forces
?
He
knew
very
well
that
your
Majesty
is
dreaded
by
all
your
Neighbours
,
and
in
a
condition
to
punish
them
if
they
should
offer
to
break
the
Peace
which
by
their
prayers
they
have
obtained
from
you
.
Could
he
have
thought
of
bestowing
Lands
and
Provinces
upon
the
Sovereign
of
so
many
Kings
,
and
the
Master
of
so
great
a
number
of
Kingdoms
,
as
make
almost
the
fourth
part
of
Asia
;
Neither
could
it
enter
into
his
thoughts
to
send
hither
his
Subjects
only
upon
the
account
of
Trade
,
because
that
would
be
a
common
Interest
to
his
People
and
your
Majesties
Subjects
.
So
that
it
would
have
been
hard
for
him
to
have
hit
upon
the
right
course
,
had
he
not
reflected
that
he
might
offer
to
your
Majesty
somewhat
infinitely
more
considerable
,
and
which
,
was
congruous
to
the
Dignity
of
two
so
great
Kings
.
Having
considered
what
it
was
that
had
raised
him
to
that
high
pitch
of
Glory
where
at
present
he
is
seated
,
what
had
made
him
take
so
many
Towns
,
subdue
so
many
Provinces
,
and
gain
so
many
Victories
,
what
to
this
present
had
made
the
happiness
of
his
people
,
and
what
had
brought
him
from
the
extremities
of
the
Earth
so
many
Ambassadors
of
Kings
and
Princes
who
Court
his
Friendship
,
what
,
in
fine
,
had
obliged
your
Majesty
to
prevent
this
incomparable
Prince
by
so
splendid
an
Embassie
which
you
sent
to
him
;
Having
,
I
say
,
attentively
considered
all
these
great
things
,
that
King
so
wise
and
prespicatious
,
found
that
the
God
whom
he
adores
was
the
s●le
Author
of
them
,
that
his
Divine
Providence
had
so
disposed
them
for
him
,
and
that
he
owed
them
to
the
intercession
of
the
holy
Mother
of
the
Saviour
of
the
World
,
under
whose
Protection
he
hath
consecrated
his
Person
and
Kingdom
to
the
true
God.
That
〈◊〉
and
the
extream
desire
he
hath
to
communicate
to
your
Majesty
all
th●se
great
advantages
,
hath
made
him
resolve
to
propose
to
you
,
Sir
,
the
same
means
that
have
procured
him
so
much
Glory
and
happiness
,
and
which
are
no
other
than
the
Knowledge
and
Worship
of
the
true
God
,
which
is
only
to
be
found
in
the
Christian
Religion
.
He
offers
your
Majesty
then
,
by
his
Ambassador
adjuring
you
and
your
whole
Kingdom
to
embrace
and
follow
it
.
That
Prince
,
Sir
,
is
more
admirable
still
by
his
Wisdom
,
Judgment
,
and
Prudence
,
than
by
his
Conquests
and
Victories
.
Your
Majesty
knows
his
generosity
and
Royal
Friendship
,
you
cannot
make
a
better
choice
than
to
follow
the
wise
Counsels
of
so
great
a
King
your
good
friend
.
For
my
part
,
Sir
,
I
never
begg'd
any
thing
of
the
great
God
for
your
Majesty
,
but
that
Grace
,
and
I
would
be
ready
to
lay
down
a
thousand
lives
that
I
might
obtain
it
of
the
Divine
Bounty
.
May
it
please
your
Majesty
to
consider
that
by
that
action
,
you
will
Crown
all
the
Great
and
Illustrious
exploits
of
your
Reign
,
you
will
eternize
your
Memory
,
and
procure
to
your self
immortal
Honour
and
Glory
in
the
next
World.
Ah
,
Sir
,
I
adjure
your
Majesty
not
to
send
back
the
Embassador
of
so
great
a
King
with
discontent
,
he
begs
that
in
the
name
of
the
King
his
Master
,
for
establishing
and
rendring
your
Alliances
and
Royal
Amities
inviolable
;
at
least
if
your
Majesty
hath
entertained
any
good
thought
,
or
if
you
find
the
least
inclination
to
embrace
that
Party
,
that
you
would
make
it
known
.
It
is
the
most
acceptable
news
that
he
can
carry
to
the
King
his
Master
.
Now
if
your
Majesty
hath
resolved
not
to
condescend
to
what
I
have
had
the
honour
to
represent
to
you
,
or
that
you
cannot
give
a
favourable
answer
to
the
Ambassador
,
I
beg
of
you
to
excuse
me
from
carrying
your
Royal
answer
,
which
cannot
but
be
displeasing
to
the
Great
God
whom
I
adore
.
You
ought
not
to
think
it
strange
that
I
speak
to
you
in
this
manner
;
whosoever
is
not
faithful
to
his
God
,
cannot
be
so
to
his
Prince
,
and
your
Majesty
ought
not
to
do
me
the
honour
to
suffer
me
in
your
Service
,
if
I
entertained
other
Sentiments
.
The
King
of
Siam
answers
the
Lord
Constance
.
The
King
heard
the
Discourse
of
the
Lord
Constance
without
interrupting
him
,
and
having
a
little
pondered
with
himself
,
as
one
whose
mind
was
taken
up
with
great
thoughts
,
he
answered
him
upon
the
spot
in
these
terms
.
FEAR
not
that
I
will
force
your
Conscience
.
But
who
hath
made
the
King
of
France
my
good
Friend
believe
that
I
entertained
any
such
Sentiments
?
Ah
,
Sir
,
who
can
doubt
,
replied
the
Lord
Constance
,
but
that
your
Majesty
has
those
great
thoughts
,
when
they
consider
the
Protection
you
give
to
Missionaries
,
the
Churches
you
have
caused
to
be
built
,
the
Charity
you
give
to
the
Fathers
of
China
.
It
is
upon
that
,
Sir
,
that
the
King
of
France
grounds
his
perswasion
that
your
Majesty
had
an
inclination
towards
Christianity
.
But
when
you
told
the
Ambassador
,
(
added
the
King
)
the
reasons
that
make
me
continue
in
the
Religion
of
my
Ancestors
,
what
answer
had
you
from
him
?
The
Ambassador
of
France
,
replied
the
Lord
Constance
,
found
your
Reasons
to
be
very
weighty
,
but
seeing
the
propositions
he
made
you
in
the
name
of
the
King
his
Master
was
sincere
and
disinterested
,
and
that
that
great
Monarch
had
no
other
prospect
but
your
Majesties
good
,
he
did
not
think
that
any
of
the
reasons
which
I
told
him
ought
to
hinder
him
from
obeying
his
Masters
Commands
,
especially
when
he
understood
that
the
Ambassador
of
Persia
was
arrived
in
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
,
and
that
he
brought
your
Majesty
the
Alcoran
to
the
end
you
might
follow
it
.
In
that
view
the
Ambassador
of
France
thought
himself
obliged
to
offer
your
Majesty
the
Christian
Religion
,
and
to
adjure
you
to
embrace
it
.
Is
it
true
,
answered
the
King
,
that
the
Ambassador
of
Persia
brings
me
the
Alcoran
?
It
is
so
reported
(
reply'd
the
Lord
Constance
.
)
To
which
the
King
forthwith
made
answer
.
I
wish
with
all
my
heart
the
Ambassador
of
France
were
here
to
see
what
Reception
the
Ambassador
of
Persia
should
have
from
me
.
Certainly
if
I
had
no
Religion
at
all
I
would
never
choose
the
Mahometan
.
But
to
answer
the
Ambassador
of
France
,
continued
the
King
,
you
shall
tell
him
from
me
,
I
think
my self
extreamly
obliged
to
the
King
of
France
his
Master
,
finding
in
his
Memoirs
the
marks
of
his
most
Christian
Majesties
Royal
Friendship
,
and
since
the
honour
that
that
great
Prince
hath
done
me
is
already
made
publick
all
over
the
East
,
I
cannot
sufficiently
acknowledge
his
Civility
;
but
that
I
am
extreamly
vexed
that
the
King
of
France
my
good
Friend
should
propose
so
difficult
a
thing
unto
me
,
wherewith
I
am
not
in
the
least
acquainted
:
that
I
refer
my self
to
the
Wisdom
of
the
most
Christian
King
,
that
he
himself
may
judge
of
the
importance
and
difficulty
which
occur
in
so
nice
a
matter
as
the
change
of
a
Religion
received
and
followed
throughout
my
whole
Kingdom
without
interruption
during
the
pace
of
two
thousand
two
hundred
twenty
nine
years
.
After
all
,
The
Motives
that
keep
the
King
of
Siam
firm
in
his
Religion
.
it
is
strange
to
me
that
the
King
of
France
my
good
Friend
should
so
much
concern
himself
in
an
Affair
that
relates
to
God
,
wherein
it
would
seem
God
does
not
at
all
interest
himself
,
but
leaves
it
wholly
to
our
Discretion
.
For
would
not
the
true
God
that
made
Heaven
and
Earth
,
and
all
things
that
are
therein
,
and
hath
given
them
so
different
natures
and
inclinations
,
when
he
gave
to
Men
like
Bodies
and
Souls
,
if
he
had
pleased
have
also
inspired
into
them
the
same
sentiments
for
the
Religion
they
ought
to
follow
,
and
for
the
Worship
that
was
most
acceptable
to
him
,
and
make
all
Nations
live
and
die
in
the
same
Laws
?
That
Order
amongst
Men
and
that
Vnity
in
Religion
depending
absolutely
on
Divine
Providence
,
who
could
as
easily
introduce
it
into
the
World
,
as
the
diversity
of
Sects
that
in
all
times
have
been
established
in
it
;
ought
not
one
to
think
that
the
true
God
takes
as
great
pleasure
to
be
honoured
by
different
Worships
and
Ceremonies
,
as
to
be
Glorified
by
a
prodigious
number
of
Creatures
that
Praise
him
every
one
in
their
own
way
?
Would
that
Beauty
and
Variety
which
we
admire
in
the
order
of
Nature
,
be
less
admirable
in
the
supernatural
Order
,
or
less
beseeming
the
Wisdom
of
God
?
However
it
be
,
continued
his
Majesty
,
since
we
know
that
God
is
the
absolute
Master
of
the
World
,
and
that
we
are
perswaded
that
nothing
comes
to
pass
contrary
to
his
will
,
I
wholly
resign
my
Person
and
Dominions
into
the
Arms
of
the
Divine
Mercy
and
Providence
,
and
with
all
my
heart
obtest
his
eternal
Wisdom
to
dispose
thereof
according
to
his
good
will
and
pleasure
.
So
that
I
most
expresly
command
you
to
tell
that
Ambassador
that
I
shall
omit
nothing
that
lies
in
my
power
,
to
cherish
the
Royal
friendship
of
the
most
Christian
King
,
and
instead
of
complying
with
the
means
that
he
hath
proposed
to
me
,
I
shall
take
such
care
during
the
time
that
God
grants
me
life
,
that
hereafter
my
Successors
and
Subjects
,
shall
on
all
occasions
testifie
as
well
as
I
,
the
grateful
acknowledgment
and
high
esteem
which
they
ought
to
have
for
the
Royal
Person
of
his
most
Christian
Majesty
,
and
for
all
his
Successors
.
This
was
the
answer
of
the
King
of
Siam
in
the
same
terms
that
he
delivered
it
to
his
Minister
,
and
as
he
gave
it
in
writing
to
my
Lord
Ambassador
.
The
wit
of
that
Prince
sufficiently
appears
by
that
reasoning
who
without
any
knowledge
of
the
Sciences
of
Europe
,
hath
alledged
with
so
much
force
and
perspicuity
the
most
plausible
reasons
of
the
Pagan
Philosophy
against
the
only
true
Religion
.
They
who
know
the
uprightness
of
that
Prince
cannot
doubt
but
that
he
sincerely
said
what
he
thought
,
and
what
seemed
to
him
most
rational
.
The
King
having
said
so
,
was
silent
for
some
time
,
and
then
eyeing
the
Lord
Constance
:
The
Lord
Constance
his
Reply
to
the
King
of
Siam's
Objections
about
changing
of
Religion
.
What
do
you
think
(
added
he
)
the
Ambassador
will
answer
to
these
Reasons
which
I
command
you
to
give
him
in
writing
?
I
shall
not
fail
Sir
,
answered
the
Lord
Constance
to
obey
your
Majesties
Orders
;
but
I
cannot
tell
what
the
Ambassador
of
France
will
answer
to
what
you
have
now
said
to
me
,
which
seems
to
be
of
very
great
weight
and
consequence
.
Sure
I
am
,
he
must
needs
be
surprised
at
the
high
wisdom
and
wonderful
perspicuity
that
he
'll
perceive
thereby
in
your
Majesty
.
However
I
fancy
he
may
answer
,
that
it
is
true
all
the
Beings
which
God
hath
Created
Glorifie
him
every
one
after
its
way
;
but
that
there
is
this
difference
betwixt
Man
and
Beasts
,
that
when
God
Created
these
,
be
gave
them
different
properties
and
particular
instincts
,
to
know
what
is
good
for
them
and
pursue
it
without
any
reflection
,
to
discern
their
evil
,
and
avoid
it
without
any
ratiocination
.
So
the
Stag
flies
from
the
Lion
,
and
Tyger
the
first
time
he
sees
them
,
the
Chickens
new
hatched
dread
the
Kite
and
flie
under
the
wings
of
the
Hen
,
without
any
other
instruction
but
what
they
have
received
from
Nature
.
But
in
the
Creation
of
Man
God
hath
endowed
him
with
a
Mind
and
Reason
to
distinguish
the
Good
from
the
Evil
,
and
Divine
Providence
hath
thought
it
fit
that
in
pursuing
and
loving
the
good
which
is
proper
for
him
,
and
avoiding
the
evil
that
is
contrary
to
him
,
with
reference
to
his
ultimate
end
which
is
to
know
and
love
God
,
Man
should
from
the
Divine
Bounty
merit
an
eternal
Reward
.
The
truth
is
,
it
is
as
easie
for
Man
to
make
use
of
his
hands
,
eyes
,
and
feet
,
in
the
commission
of
evil
as
in
doing
of
good
,
if
his
prudence
enlightned
by
the
Wisdom
of
God
directed
him
not
to
pursue
the
ways
of
real
Grandeur
,
which
are
not
to
be
found
but
in
the
Christian
Religion
,
wherein
Man
finds
the
means
of
serving
God
as
best
pleases
his
Divine
Goodness
.
But
all
Men
follow
not
so
holy
and
so
rational
notices
.
It
is
just
so
as
with
your
Majesties
Officers
,
who
are
not
all
equally
addicted
to
your
Interests
,
as
you
but
too
well
know
,
tho
all
of
them
call
themselves
your
Subjects
,
and
account
it
an
honour
to
be
employed
●in
your
Service
.
So
all
Men
serve
God
,
it
is
true
;
but
in
a
very
different
manner
.
Some
like
Beasts
follow
their
Passions
and
irregular
appetites
and
live
in
the
Religion
they
have
been
brought
up
in
,
without
examining
it
.
But
others
perceiving
so
great
a
difference
betwixt
themselves
and
Beasts
raise
themselves
above
their
senses
,
and
by
means
of
their
Reason
,
which
God
fails
not
to
enlighten
endeavour
to
know
their
Creator
,
and
the
true
Worship
which
he
would
have
men
render
unto
him
,
without
any
interest
but
that
of
pleasing
him
,
and
to
this
sincere
search
of
the
truth
,
God
Almighty
hath
annexed
Mans
Salvation
.
Hence
it
is
that
negligence
in
not
being
instructed
,
and
weakness
in
not
following
that
we
judge
the
best
,
will
render
us
guilty
in
the
sight
of
God
who
is
the
Sovereign
Judge
of
all
Flesh
.
This
answer
from
a
Man
of
no
Studies
,
who
from
ten
years
of
age
had
been
applied
to
Trade
and
Commerce
,
wrought
a
great
surprize
in
me
,
when
he
did
me
the
honour
to
acquaint
me
with
it
.
I
confessed
to
him
,
without
any
fear
of
flattery
,
that
a
Divine
consummated
in
the
Study
of
Religion
,
would
have
been
hard
put
to
it
to
have
answered
better
.
The
King
was
smitten
with
the
discourse
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
and
if
any
knowing
Man
,
who
is
acceptable
to
him
,
hath
the
happiness
to
insinuate
into
his
favour
,
and
procure
his
esteem
,
it
is
not
to
be
dispaired
but
that
he
may
be
brought
to
know
and
embrace
the
Truth
:
and
if
once
he
come
to
know
it
,
seeing
he
is
the
absolute
Master
of
his
People
,
who
adore
him
,
all
the
Nations
who
are
under
his
Dominion
,
will
humbly
follow
his
example
.
The
King
of
Siam
who
Reigns
at
present
is
about
fifty
five
years
of
Age.
A
Character
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
He
is
without
contradiction
,
the
greatest
Prince
that
ever
governed
that
State.
He
is
somewhat
under
the
middle
Stature
,
but
streight
and
well
shaped
.
He
hath
an
engaging
Air
,
a
sweet
and
obliging
carriage
,
especially
to
Strangers
.
And
amongst
them
particularly
to
the
French.
He
is
active
and
brisk
,
an
enemy
of
idleness
and
laziness
which
seems
to
be
so
delightful
to
the
Princes
of
the
East
,
and
which
they
look
upon
as
the
greatest
Prerogative
of
their
Crown
.
This
Prince
,
on
the
contrary
,
is
always
either
in
the
Woods
a
hunting
of
Elephants
,
or
in
his
Palace
minding
the
Affairs
of
his
Kingdom
.
He
is
no
lover
of
War
,
because
it
ruins
his
People
whom
he
tenderly
loves
;
but
when
his
Subjects
revolt
,
or
that
neigbouring
Princes
offer
him
the
least
affront
,
or
transgress
the
bounds
of
the
respect
that
's
due
to
him
;
there
is
no
King
in
the
East
that
takes
a
more
conspicuous
revenge
,
nor
appears
more
passionate
for
glory
.
Some
great
men
of
his
Kingdom
having
rebelled
,
and
having
been
openly
supported
by
the
Forces
of
three
Kings
,
whose
Territories
environ
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
He
attacked
those
Princes
so
briskly
,
that
they
were
obliged
to
abandon
the
Rebels
to
his
wrath
.
He
would
know
every
thing
,
and
having
a
pregnant
and
piercing
Wit
,
he
easily
is
Master
of
what
he
has
a
mind
to
learn.
He
is
magnificent
,
generous
,
and
as
true
a
friend
as
can
be
imagined
.
These
are
the
great
qualities
which
acquire
him
the
difference
of
his
Neighbours
,
the
fear
of
his
Enemies
,
the
esteem
and
respect
of
his
Subjects
that
's
nothing
short
of
adoration
.
He
hath
never
been
given
to
those
vices
which
are
so
common
to
the
Princes
of
the
East
,
nay
he
hath
severely
punished
the
most
considerable
Mandarins
,
and
principal
Officers
of
the
Crown
,
for
being
too
much
addicted
to
their
pleasures
:
So
that
the
most
invincible
obstacle
to
the
Conversion
of
Idolatrous
Princes
,
is
not
to
be
found
in
him
,
I
mean
,
the
immoderate
love
of
Women
.
By
the
sharpness
of
his
Wit
,
he
hath
discovered
the
erroneousness
of
the
Religion
of
his
Ancestors
.
And
he
does
not
believe
an
annihilated
God
,
according
to
the
Popular
opinion
,
or
as
some
of
their
Doctors
say
,
a
God
,
who
weary
of
governing
the
Heavens
,
plunges
himself
to
repose
,
and
for
ever
buries
himself
in
the
forgetfulness
of
what
passes
in
the
world
,
nor
a
thousand
other
Superstitions
preached
by
the
Talapoins
,
who
are
the
Preachers
and
Priests
of
the
Kingdom
.
On
the
contrary
,
he
believes
that
God
is
Eternal
,
that
his
Providence
continually
governs
the
World
and
disposes
of
all
things
.
To
the
same
immortal
God
he
often
makes
his
Prayers
,
and
implores
his
assistance
with
most
profound
Reverence
at
least
twice
a
Day
,
for
two
hours
time
,
in
the
Morning
after
he
is
up
,
and
at
Night
before
he
goes
to
rest
.
The
Pope
having
sent
him
two
Pictures
,
one
of
our
Saviour
,
and
the
other
of
the
Blessed
Virgin
,
he
hath
a
singular
veneration
for
them
,
and
as
a
sign
thereof
,
hath
placed
them
in
a
very
high
place
of
his
Chamber
far
above
him
;
and
never
speaks
of
them
but
with
honour
and
respect
.
The
Embassy
which
the
King
sent
to
him
,
if
it
hath
not
determined
him
to
embrace
Christianity
,
hath
at
least
,
made
him
reflect
and
consider
.
As
he
has
an
extraordinary
esteem
for
the
wisdom
of
the
most
Christian
King
,
so
when
the
Lord
Constance
explained
to
him
the
sole
reason
that
moved
that
great
Monarch
to
send
the
Ambassador
to
him
,
he
seemed
affected
therewith
,
and
it
is
known
that
he
hath
many
times
reflected
thereupon
since
.
These
are
considerations
that
should
excite
those
who
may
read
these
momoires
,
to
pray
to
God
for
the
Conversion
of
that
Prince
,
which
would
be
attended
with
the
Conversion
of
an
innumerable
multitude
of
People
,
and
which
without
doubt
would
gain
to
our
holy
Law
the
neighbouring
Princes
,
who
admire
the
conduct
and
parts
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
There
lye
great
obligations
upon
us
to
that
Monarch
,
for
all
the
marks
of
esteem
and
good
will
wherewith
he
was
pleaased
to
honour
us
,
and
we
are
glad
we
have
the
occasion
of
publishing
the
same
;
from
the
time
that
the
Lord
Constance
made
him
sensible
of
our
ways
and
the
prospects
that
put
us
upon
acting
,
that
Prince
favoured
us
upon
all
occasions
,
notwithstanding
the
bad
impressions
that
some
endeavoured
to
give
him
of
Jesuits
.
The
Lord
Constance
omitted
not
to
set
off
to
him
to
the
best
advantage
the
extraordinary
goodness
that
the
King
of
France
hath
for
our
company
,
and
that
's
the
thing
that
contributed
most
to
make
us
merit
his
favours
.
It
is
an
Example
of
great
influence
upon
the
mind
of
the
King
of
Siam
;
and
so
indeed
,
he
hath
by
obliging
cares
intimated
to
us
that
he
will
imitate
it
,
and
hath
often
assured
us
of
his
Royal
protection
,
and
that
we
should
never
fail
of
a
safe
refuge
in
his
Kingdom
.
We
began
to
make
observations
at
Louvo
.
So
soon
as
we
arrived
at
Louvo
we
begun
to
make
observations
,
and
especially
such
as
might
be
needful
to
us
for
observing
exactly
the
Ecclipse
of
the
Moon
,
which
was
to
happen
on
the
Eleventh
of
December
.
We
could
not
till
then
make
use
of
our
Instruments
for
these
operations
;
because
all
the
while
we
were
at
Siam
,
the
City
and
Country
about
were
so
overflown
,
that
we
had
no
place
to
fix
them
upon
.
Nay
and
the
house
too
where
we
lodged
being
only
of
Wood
,
the
least
motion
made
it
so
shake
,
that
our
Pendulums
and
Quadrants
were
thereby
wholy
disordered
.
December
the
sixth
and
seventh
we
observed
by
the
Astronomical
Ring
of
Mr.
Butterfield
,
Observation
about
the
variation
of
the
Needle
.
that
the
variation
of
the
Needle
was
two
degrees
twenty
Minutes
towards
the
West
.
This
observation
was
constantly
alike
during
those
two
days
.
The
ninth
of
the
same
Month
by
the
heights
taken
of
the
same
border
of
the
Sun
,
Morning
and
Evening
the
true
hour
of
Noon
by
the
Pendulum
with
Seconds
,
was
12
h.
5.
3.
The
variation
of
the
Needle
by
the
Parallatick
Engine
of
the
Sieur
Chapotot
was
observed
.
-
One
time
16.
min.
only
-
Another
31.
min.
-
Another
35.
min.
-
Another
38.
min.
Towards
the
West
.
That
variation
was
found
by
taking
several
times
Morning
and
Evening
the
height
of
the
Sun
,
and
every
time
observing
the
Azimuth
,
the
Needle
still
continuing
upon
the
Line
of
the
South
and
North.
In
the
last
Audience
that
his
Majesty
gave
the
Ambassador
,
The
King
of
Siam
observes
with
the
Jesuits
an
Ecclipse
of
the
Moon
in
his
Palace
.
he
told
him
that
he
would
take
it
well
that
we
made
the
observation
of
the
first
Ecclipse
in
his
presence
.
Some
days
after
he
commanded
the
Lord
Constance
to
acquaint
us
with
the
honour
he
intended
to
put
upon
us
.
For
that
effect
they
pitched
upon
a
Royal
house
called
Thlee-Poussonne
,
a
short
League
from
Louvo
Eastwards
,
not
far
from
the
Forrest
where
the
King
was
a
hunting
of
Elephants
.
The
Lord
Constance
carried
us
to
view
the
place
two
days
before
the
Ecclipse
,
that
's
to
say
the
ninth
of
December
.
A
more
convenient
place
could
not
have
been
chosen
,
we
saw
the
Heavens
on
all
hands
,
and
had
room
enough
to
place
our
Instruments
.
Having
put
all
things
in
order
we
came
back
to
Louvo
.
Next
day
December
the
tenth
,
by
the
Elevations
of
the
same
border
of
the
Sun
,
taken
in
the
Morning
betwixt
nine
and
ten
a
Clock
,
and
in
the
Evening
betwixt
two
and
three
,
the
true
hour
of
Noon
by
the
same
Pendulum
with
Seconds
was
12.
h.
2.
31.
The
variation
of
the
Needle
by
the
Parallatick
Engine
.
-
One
time
28
min.
-
Another
33
min.
-
Another
21
min.
Towards
the
West
.
In
the
sequel
we
shall
examine
whether
or
no
the
Needle
of
the
Astronomical
Ring
decline
too
much
towards
the
West
,
as
it
is
very
probable
;
for
if
so
,
then
something
is
to
be
deducted
from
the
variation
of
the
Cape
of
good
Hope
,
which
we
found
to
be
Eleven
degrees
and
a
half
towards
the
West
,
and
the
Pilots
with
their
Compasses
only
nine
degrees
.
The
King
of
Siam
invites
the
Ambassador
to
an
Elephant
hunting
The
same
day
the
King
invited
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
to
come
and
see
the
Illuminations
that
were
made
for
the
hunting
of
Elephants
.
It
was
his
Majesties
pleasure
that
we
also
should
be
there
;
and
did
us
the
honour
about
four
in
the
Afternoon
to
send
us
six
Elephants
with
the
Barcalon
:
Lieutenant
to
be
our
guide
.
We
sent
to
Thlee-poussonne
our
Telescope
and
a
spiral
Pendulum
that
went
very
right
and
was
set
by
the
Sun.
For
we
were
to
observe
the
Ecclipse
there
according
to
the
Orders
.
The
Kings
method
of
the
hunting
was
in
the
manner
that
I
am
now
about
to
relate
.
About
fourty
six
or
fourty
seven
thousand
men
had
surrounded
and
made
an
inclosure
in
the
Woods
and
upon
the
Mountains
of
a
long
square
,
A
description
of
that
hunting
.
whereof
the
two
great
sides
might
very
well
be
ten
Leagues
a
piece
,
and
the
other
two
,
each
three
Leagues
.
All
that
vast
extent
was
bordred
by
two
rows
of
Fires
,
which
ranged
all
round
upon
two
Lines
at
four
or
five
steps
distance
one
from
another
.
These
Fires
are
kept
burning
all
night
long
with
the
wood
of
the
Forest
,
and
stand
seven
or
eight
foot
high
in
the
Air
,
being
supported
by
little
square
Plat-forms
raised
upon
four
Stakes
,
which
was
the
cause
that
they
would
be
all
seen
at
once
and
very
far
off
too
.
It
seem●d
to
me
in
the
dark
the
finest
sight
and
loveliest
illumination
that
ever
I
saw
.
Great
Lanthorns
placed
at
convenient
distances
made
the
dist●nction
of
quarters
,
which
were
commanded
by
different
heads
,
with
a
certain
number
of
Elephants
of
War
and
Hunts-men
armed
like
Souldiers
.
Ever
now
and
then
they
fired
some
small
Field
Pieces
,
that
by
that
noise
and
the
Fires
they
might
frighten
the
Elephants
,
that
should
attempt
to
force
their
passage
through
as
they
had
done
some
days
before
,
because
that
circumspection
had
not
been
used
.
There
was
a
very
steep
mountain
within
the
Precincts
of
the
Hunting
;
but
that
being
looked
upon
to
be
inaccessible
to
th●se
creatures
,
they
had
the
time
before
neglected
to
secure
it
by
Fires
,
Guards
and
Artillary
:
However
ten
or
twelve
of
them
escaped
that
way
,
and
for
that
purpose
made
use
of
a
very
surprising
expedient
;
fastening
themselves
by
their
Trunks
to
one
of
the
Trees
that
were
upon
the
side
of
that
very
steep
Mountain
,
they
made
a
Skip
to
the
Root
of
the
next
,
and
in
the
same
manner
clambered
from
Tree
to
Tree
with
incredible
efforts
,
until
they
got
to
the
top
of
the
Mountain
,
from
whence
they
saved
themselves
in
the
Woods
.
What
had
hapned
at
that
time
,
was
the
cause
that
nothing
was
neglected
at
this
bout
,
that
so
none
might
any
more
escape
.
The
King
of
Siam
demands
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
from
the
Ambassador
.
The
King
upon
his
return
from
hunting
,
found
the
French
drawn
up
in
a
Line
at
the
entry
into
the
Forest
,
and
mounted
on
Elephants
.
He
eyeed
them
very
much
,
and
took
pleasure
to
see
men
of
so
good
meen
.
He
had
just
given
,
Audience
to
the
Ambassador
,
which
had
been
pretty
long
.
About
the
end
of
it
,
he
sent
for
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
,
an
old
Officer
,
who
had
gained
reputation
on
many
occasions
.
The
Lord
Constance
had
prayed
the
Ambassador
to
leave
him
at
Siam
with
the
King
his
Master
.
Nay
his
Majesty
himself
thought
fit
to
demand
him
of
the
Ambassador
,
and
made
him
a
Present
of
a
very
lovely
Shable
,
as
a
Mark
that
he
received
him
into
his
Service
.
He
added
to
the
Present
besides
,
a
Vest
of
a
flowered
Stuff
,
with
Gold
Buttons
.
In
the
mean
time
it
was
late
,
and
the
King
was
gone
home
;
however
we
alighted
in
a
pleasant
place
,
where
a
splendid
Collation
of
all
sorts
of
Sweet-Meats
and
Fruit
was
prepared
for
us
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
drank
the
King
of
Siam's
Health
in
a
large
Cup
of
beaten
Gold
which
he
had
presented
to
him
.
The
Lid
and
Salver
of
it
were
of
the
same
Metal
.
This
place
was
presently
encompassed
with
Elephants
of
War
and
Fires
,
to
secure
us
from
Tigers
and
other
wild
Beasts
,
that
were
enclosed
within
the
Precincts
.
Afterward
the
Ambassador
took
his
way
back
to
Louvo
,
and
the
Lord
Constance
conducting
us
streight
to
the
Castle
of
Thlee-possonne
,
where
the
King
was
already
come
to
be
present
at
the
Observation
of
the
Eclipse
.
About
Nine
of
the
Clock
we
came
to
the
side
of
the
Canal
,
which
leads
to
the
Castle
,
The
Jesuits
prepare
to
observe
in
the
Kings
presence
at
Thee-possonne
.
and
there
we
found
one
of
the
King's
Balons
,
which
had
waited
for
us
a
long
while
.
This
Canal
is
very
broad
,
and
above
a
League
in
length
.
It
was
lighted
on
both
sides
with
an
infinite
number
of
such
Fires
as
were
mentioned
before
,
which
all
together
in
the
obscurity
of
the
Night
rendred
a
very
charming
prospect
.
When
we
were
got
within
half
a
quarter
of
a
League
of
the
Castle
,
our
Watermen
,
who
till
then
had
pulled
hard
and
made
much
noise
in
rowing
,
began
to
row
so
easily
,
that
we
hardly
heard
the
noise
of
their
Oars
.
They
told
us
,
that
we
must
either
hold
our
peace
,
or
speak
very
low
.
The
truth
is
,
when
we
landed
,
all
was
so
quiet
,
though
there
were
a
great
many
Soldiers
and
Mandarins
thereabouts
,
that
we
thought
we
were
in
some
remote
Solitude
.
The
Reverence
they
have
for
the
King's
Person
,
makes
them
observe
that
profound
silence
in
all
places
where
he
is
.
We
presently
fitted
several
Telescopes
upon
some
Props
that
had
been
raised
to
support
them
.
It
did
not
require
much
time
to
adjust
our
Instruments
;
so
that
we
took
Boat
again
an
hour
after
,
and
went
to
spend
part
of
the
Night
in
the
House
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
which
is
almost
an
hundred
paces
from
the
Palace
.
When
we
were
to
step
ashoar
at
the
foot
of
the
Wall
which
is
on
the
other
side
of
the
Canal
,
there
was
danger
of
being
pricked
by
a
kind
of
Caltrops
;
for
there
were
a
great
many
iron
Chains
laid
in
length
at
half
a
foot
distance
from
one
another
,
and
these
take
up
the
breadth
of
the
ground
betwixt
the
Canal
and
the
Wall.
They
are
armed
with
a
double
Row
of
thick
Iron
Spikes
;
they
are
every
night
,
without
fail
,
stretched
round
the
Castle
,
and
serve
to
hinder
any
approaching
to
it
.
At
our
coming
ashoar
,
the
Lord
Constance
gave
us
very
timely
notice
to
take
heed
to
our selves
,
having
observed
that
one
of
our
Fathers
was
about
to
step
on
Land
.
He
sent
for
the
Officer
of
the
Guard
,
and
ordered
him
to
take
up
those
Caltrops
,
which
hindred
our
coming
ashoar
.
Having
then
got
as
near
the
Walls
as
we
could
,
we
walked
in
a
little
path
two
foot
broad
,
which
is
left
free
,
for
making
the
Rounds
in
the
Night
time
,
and
about
Eleven
a
Clock
at
Night
we
arrived
at
the
House
of
the
Lord
Constance
.
They
begin
the
Observation
of
the
Eclipse
before
the
King.
Having
rested
three
or
four
hours
there
,
we
re-imbarked
and
went
to
the
Gallery
where
the
Observation
was
to
be
made
.
It
was
then
near
Three
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
.
So
soon
as
we
were
come
,
we
put
all
things
in
readiness
:
We
had
already
shew'd
his
Majesty
,
by
the
Lord
Constance's
Mediation
;
a
great
Figure
of
an
Eclipse
,
wherein
one
might
see
the
Moon
entring
by
little
and
little
under
the
Shadow
,
with
the
immersion
of
the
Spots
,
and
his
Majesty
seemed
to
be
pleased
with
it
.
We
prepared
a
very
good
Telescope
for
him
five
foot
long
,
in
the
Window
of
a
Room
that
looked
into
the
Gallery
where
we
were
.
The
Penumbra
being
pretty
far
advanced
,
notice
was
sent
to
the
King
,
who
immediatly
came
to
that
Window
.
We
were
sitting
upon
Persian
Carpets
,
some
at
the
Telescopes
,
others
at
the
Pendulum
,
and
others
were
to
write
down
the
time
of
the
Observation
.
We
saluted
his
Majesty
with
a
profound
inclination
of
Body
,
and
then
began
to
observe
,
After
Midnight
,
|
Hou
.
|
Min.
|
Sec.
|
The
Beginning
of
the
Penumbra
,
|
02
|
53
|
00
|
The
Penumbra
thicker
,
|
03
|
02
|
00
|
The
Penumbra
very
thick
,
|
00
|
12
|
00
|
The
doubtful
Begin
.
of
the
Ecl.
|
00
|
15
|
08
|
The
certain
Beginning
,
|
00
|
19
|
00
|
Riccioli
,
|
00
|
19
|
45
|
The
Beginning
of
Grimaldi
,
|
00
|
21
|
34
|
The
End
of
Grimaldi
,
|
00
|
22
|
36
|
Kepler
,
|
00
|
29
|
32
|
Gassendi
,
|
00
|
32
|
36
|
Heraclides
.
|
00
|
36
|
40
|
|
Hou
.
|
Min.
|
Sec
:
|
The
Beginning
of
Capricorn
,
|
00
|
37
|
10
|
The
Middle
of
Capricorn
,
|
00
|
39
|
00
|
The
Beginning
of
Plato
,
|
03
|
48
|
25
|
The
Middle
of
Plato
,
|
00
|
49
|
05
|
The
End
of
Plato
,
|
00
|
49
|
24
|
Menelaus
,
|
00
|
58
|
45
|
St.
Denis
,
|
00
|
59
|
49
|
Plinius
,
|
04
|
02
|
11
|
Promontorium
acutum
,
|
00
|
07
|
40
|
The
Beginning
of
Mare
Chrysium
,
|
00
|
14
|
30
|
The
Middle
of
Mare
Chrysium
,
|
00
|
17
|
45
|
The
End
of
Mare
Chrysium
,
|
00
|
19
|
18
|
The
total
Immersion
.
|
00
|
22
|
45
|
The
King
puts
several
Questions
of
Astronomy
to
the
Jesuits
.
The
King
expressed
a
particular
Satisfaction
,
seeing
all
the
Spots
of
the
Moon
in
the
Telescope
,
and
especially
perceiving
that
the
Type
or
Map
that
was
made
at
the
Observatory
of
Paris
,
agreed
so
well
with
it
.
He
put
several
Questions
to
us
during
the
Eclipse
;
as
for
instance
,
Why
did
the
Moon
appear
revers'd
in
the
Telescope
?
Why
was
the
part
of
the
Moon
eclipsed
,
still
to
be
seen
?
What
a
Clock
was
it
at
Paris
?
For
what
could
Observations
made
by
concert
in
remote
Countries
be
useful
?
&c.
Whilst
we
satisfied
all
his
Questions
,
one
of
the
chief
Officers
of
his
House
brought
us
upon
a
large
Silver
Bason
six
Cassocks
and
as
many
Cloaks
of
flowred
Sattin
,
wherewith
the
King
presented
us
in
a
most
obliging
manner
.
He
had
a
mind
to
look
in
a
Telescope
twelve
foot
long
,
which
Father
Fontenay
made
use
of
;
and
we
presently
carried
it
to
him
.
He
suffered
us
to
rise
and
stand
in
his
Presence
,
and
would
look
in
the
Telescope
after
us
;
for
we
must
needs
set
it
to
its
Point
when
we
presented
it
to
him
.
They
who
know
what
Reverence
and
Respect
the
Kings
of
Siam
expect
from
those
who
are
in
their
Presence
,
have
spoken
of
that
Favour
to
us
,
as
of
a
very
rare
thing
.
His
Majesty
would
then
know
which
of
the
Fathers
was
to
return
to
France
;
and
being
told
that
it
was
I
,
he
told
me
very
obligingly
,
that
seeing
he
was
sending
Ambassadors
to
France
,
who
were
not
well
acquainted
with
the
Customs
and
Manners
of
Europe
,
he
trusted
much
to
the
good
Counsels
that
I
should
give
them
,
and
especially
the
good
Offices
that
I
would
render
them
by
means
of
our
Friends
;
that
he
had
ordered
them
to
demand
of
the
King
of
France
twelve
Mathematicians
of
our
Society
,
and
for
that
end
to
address
themselves
to
Father
de
la
Chaize
,
that
he
might
second
their
Demand
;
in
short
,
that
he
made
no
doubt
but
that
I
would
also
in
particular
do
what
lay
in
my
power
in
managing
of
that
Affair
.
At
the
same
time
the
Lord
High
Chamberlain
,
in
his
Majesty's
Presence
presented
me
with
two
lovely
Crucifixes
in
a
large
Gold
Bason
.
The
Christ
was
of
Masse
Gold
,
the
Cross
of
Tambag
,
which
is
made
of
a
mixture
of
seven
parts
of
Gold
,
and
three
parts
more
of
a
Metal
as
precious
as
Gold
it self
,
the
Foot
was
of
Silver
.
His
Maiesty
told
me
,
that
the
biggest
was
designed
for
Father
la
Chaize
the
King's
Confessor
,
whose
Merit
and
Fidelity
in
the
Service
of
his
Master
,
he
knew
by
the
Character
that
the
Lord
Constance
had
given
of
him
.
Then
he
fell
a
praising
the
Zeal
and
Disinterestedness
of
his
own
Minister
,
whom
he
always
called
our
Brother
;
telling
us
,
that
he
had
received
most
signal
Services
from
him
on
all
occasions
that
ever
presented
.
After
that
his
Majesty
commanded
me
to
tell
the
Father
Confessor
,
when
in
his
Name
I
presented
him
that
Crucifix
,
that
he
could
not
render
him
more
acceptable
Service
,
nor
more
useful
to
his
State
,
than
in
obtaining
for
him
twelve
Mathematicians
from
the
King
;
that
I
might
assure
them
,
that
before
their
Arrival
,
there
would
be
an
Observatory
,
a
House
and
a
Church
for
them
at
Louvo
as
well
as
at
Siam
.
At
the
same
time
he
enjoyned
the
Lord
Constance
to
get
them
forthwith
built
,
and
with
assistance
of
the
Fathers
to
chuse
Places
for
them
in
the
two
Towns
I
have
been
speaking
of
.
As
for
the
other
Crucifix
,
I
freely
give
it
you
,
said
he
,
with
a
most
gracious
Look
,
that
it
may
serve
you
for
a
faithful
Companion
during
all
your
Voyage
.
Let
me
hear
News
from
you
as
oft
as
you
can
;
and
above
all
things
,
endeavour
to
return
back
again
with
the
first
opportunity
.
I
beseech
Divine
Providence
,
that
takes
care
of
the
Conduct
of
the
Universe
,
to
give
you
a
prosperous
Voyage
.
At
length
,
having
recommended
to
my
Care
what
he
then
had
enjoyned
me
,
and
what
he
was
told
by
others
from
him
,
he
again
wished
me
a
speedy
Return
,
and
so
went
away
,
expressing
the
pleasure
and
satisfaction
that
he
had
received
during
the
two
hours
that
he
had
done
us
the
Honour
to
be
present
at
our
Observations
.
No
body
was
near
his
Person
all
the
while
he
was
with
us
,
but
the
Lord
Constance
,
the
Lord
Chamberlain
,
and
a
Gentleman
of
his
Bed-chamber
.
So
many
Favours
to
which
it
behoved
us
to
answer
upon
the
Spot
,
hindred
us
from
observing
the
immersion
of
several
Spots
.
After
the
King
was
gone
,
the
Lord
Constance
staid
alone
with
us
;
and
having
well
remarked
the
Circle
of
the
Shadow
,
and
Mare
Chrysium
in
the
Telescope
,
he
observed
together
with
us
the
rest
of
the
Phases
until
the
total
immersion
.
From
thence
we
returned
to
the
House
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
where
we
expected
the
emersion
of
the
Moon
,
which
appeared
above
a
quarter
of
an
hour
before
Sun-rising
,
that
is
to
say
,
at
six
a-clock
and
six
minutes
,
the
beginning
of
the
Emersion
was
at
6.
h.
1.
m.
11.
sec.
or
rather
,
at
6.
h.
9.
m.
and
to
that
Observation
it
was
concluded
we
must
hold
:
It
is
true
,
the
Vapors
of
the
Horizon
hindred
us
a
little
.
The
Moon
was
still
to
be
seen
near
the
Horizon
at
6.
h.
22
m.
0
sec.
but
soon
after
she
set
,
and
the
Sun
rose
.
The
Pendulum
was
set
at
One
a
clock
after
Noon
,
and
from
Three
a-clock
in
the
Afternoon
the
day
before
had
lost
but
three
Minutes
and
three
Seconds
.
The
Hours
set
down
in
the
Observation
are
according
to
the
clock
not
rectified
.
Thus
the
hours
of
Noon
by
the
great
Pendulum
,
observed
the
Ninth
and
Tenth
of
December
,
1685.
and
the
loss
of
the
little
one
in
respect
of
the
great
,
according
to
which
it
was
set
the
Tenth
of
March
,
at
Three
a-clock
in
the
Afternoon
,
shew
that
the
little
Pendulum
at
4.
h.
22.
m.
45.
Sec.
after
Midnight
,
next
day
went
too
slow
by
a
Minute
,
and
that
the
true
Hour
was
4.
h.
23
m.
45.
Sec.
I
have
communicated
these
Observations
to
the
Members
of
the
Academy
Royal
of
Sciences
,
and
it
was
found
that
the
total
immersion
having
been
observed
the
Eleventh
of
that
instant
,
|
Hou
.
|
Min.
|
Sec.
|
At
Louvo
,
|
04
|
23
|
45
|
At
Paris
by
Mr.
Cassini
,
|
09
|
49
|
30
|
The
Difference
of
Merid.
|
06
|
34
|
15
|
At
6.
h.
9.
m.
the
same
litie
Pendulum
went
too
slow
1.
m.
25.
Sec.
the
hour
then
was
6.
h.
10.
m.
25.
Sec.
at
that
time
the
Emersion
began
,
as
it
appeared
at
Louvo
.
The
same
Emersion
was
observed
at
the
Observatory
of
Paris
by
Monsieur
Cassini
.
|
Hou
.
|
Min
,
|
Sec.
|
The
Difference
of
Meridians
,
|
11
|
36
|
18
|
|
06
|
34
|
07
|
|
Deg.
|
Min.
|
So
that
the
Diff.
of
Longit.
will
be
|
98
|
32
|
The
Longitude
of
Paris
being
|
22
|
30
|
Then
that
of
Louvo
will
be
|
121
|
02
|
By
the
Observations
of
the
Lunar
Eclipse
,
February
21.
1682.
the
Longitude
of
Siam
was
found
to
be
of
121
degrees
,
which
exactly
agrees
with
these
new
Observations
.
It
is
a
strange
thing
that
there
should
be
modern
Maps
that
put
the
Longitude
of
Siam
in
the
145.
degree
,
whereas
the
great
Map
of
the
Observatory
made
long
before
these
Observations
,
gives
it
122
degrees
,
within
a
degree
or
little
more
of
these
Observations
.
A
Bramen
Astrologer
,
who
was
at
Louvo
,
had
foretold
this
Eclipse
to
a
quarter
of
an
hour
almost
;
but
he
was
mightily
mistaken
as
to
the
duration
of
it
,
saying
that
the
Emersion
would
not
appear
above
the
horizon
till
after
the
Sun
was
up
.
Some
days
before
,
we
had
a
Conference
with
that
Bramen
;
but
since
we
understood
not
the
Siam-Language
,
we
could
not
learn
any
thing
of
the
manner
how
he
calculates
Eclipses
.
He
proposed
to
us
some
Questions
about
the
Sun
and
Stars
,
which
were
easily
answered
,
as
for
instance
,
in
what
Sign
the
Sun
was
?
how
many
fixed
Stars
we
reckoned
,
&c.
He
asked
us
,
if
what
we
had
read
in
some
China-Books
,
was
true
,
that
there
always
appeared
a
fixed
and
very
sparkling
Star
perpendicularly
over
the
Palace
of
the
Emperor
of
China
at
Peguin
?
We
told
him
it
was
a
Fable
;
and
it
was
no
hard
matter
to
make
him
of
the
same
mind
.
He
was
not
of
the
Opinion
of
the
Siamese
Talapoins
,
who
imagine
and
teach
,
that
when
the
Moon
is
eclipsed
,
a
Dragon
devours
her
,
and
casts
her
up
again
.
When
it
is
objected
to
them
,
how
it
comes
to
pass
then
that
we
know
and
foretell
the
very
moment
of
the
Eclipse
,
how
great
it
will
be
,
how
long
it
is
to
last
;
how
comes
it
to
pass
that
sometimes
there
is
but
part
of
the
Moon
eclipsed
,
and
sometimes
all
of
it
?
They
dryly
answer
,
that
this
Dragon
has
his
Meals
regulated
,
that
we
know
the
time
of
them
,
and
the
measure
likewise
of
his
Appetite
,
which
is
sometimes
greater
and
sometimes
less
.
One
had
as
good
say
nothing
at
all
,
as
to
offer
to
prove
that
those
all
are
Chimerical
Notions
;
for
they
wilfully
persist
in
their
illusion
.
To
conclude
this
Matter
,
I
shall
here
subjoyn
the
Letter
which
the
Lord
Constance
wrote
to
Father
de
la
Chaize
,
wherein
that
Minister
hath
been
pleased
to
give
him
an
Account
of
what
past
at
the
last
Audience
which
the
King
gave
us
upon
occasion
of
the
Eclipse
;
it
hath
been
translated
out
of
Portuguese
.
Most
Reverend
Father
,
I
Cannot
express
to
your
most
Reverend
Paternity
the
Joy
that
I
have
felt
this
Year
,
and
I
hope
you
will
not
take
it
ill
,
if
I
give
you
a
particular
Account
of
the
Grounds
and
Causes
of
it
.
The
first
was
the
Arrival
of
His
most
Christian
Majesties
Ambassador
at
〈◊〉
Court
,
which
hath
furnished
me
the
Occasion
that
I
so
passionately
desired
of
rendring
to
that
Prince
in
the
Person
of
His
Ambassador
all
the
Services
I
am
capable
of
.
The
second
was
the
great
and
pious
Matters
which
that
Ambassador
came
here
to
manage
,
and
lastly
,
the
coming
of
six
of
my
Brethren
,
whom
the
most
Christian
King
hath
sent
into
these
Parts
on
so
noble
a
Design
.
These
Enterprizes
,
worthy
of
so
great
a
Monarch
,
have
ravished
into
admiration
all
the
Princes
of
the
East
,
and
have
wrought
in
them
an
ardent
desire
of
solliciting
the
Friendship
of
so
wise
and
generous
a
King.
But
the
King
my
Master
hath
been
more
affected
with
these
things
,
than
all
the
other
Princes
of
the
Indies
besides
.
Though
before
any
thing
of
these
mutual
Expressions
of
Friendship
,
the
King
my
Master
had
conceived
a
high
esteem
and
particular
Amity
for
his
most
Christian
Majesty
,
I
dare
assure
your
Paternity
,
that
since
the
time
I
have
had
the
honour
to
serve
him
,
he
hath
never
seemed
better
pleased
than
in
hearing
the
Relations
of
the
Conquests
,
Victories
and
other
Grandeurs
that
always
attend
his
most
Christian
Majesty
.
I
will
not
enlarge
any
more
upon
that
,
because
it
would
be
impossible
for
me
or
any
else
who
has
the
honour
to
know
the
King
,
my
Master
,
to
express
how
sensible
he
is
of
any
thing
that
regards
the
Glory
of
the
most
Christian
King
,
whom
he
most
particularly
loves
and
esteems
.
Besides
,
that
which
compleats
my
Joys
in
this
Juncture
,
is
,
that
I
hereby
find
an
occasion
of
demanding
the
good
correspondence
of
your
Paternity
,
for
whom
I
shall
ever
entertain
the
esteem
I
ought
.
Wherefore
I
adjure
you
most
heartily
,
to
let
me
know
your
intentions
,
and
to
assist
me
with
your
good
Counsels
,
and
you
will
find
me
ready
to
do
any
thing
,
especially
when
the
Glory
of
God
,
or
the
Interests
of
the
most
Christian
King
are
concerned
.
These
Reasons
have
obliged
me
in
the
Name
of
the
King
my
Master
,
to
demand
Father
Trachard
of
the
Reverend
Superior
to
return
into
France
,
and
I
have
intrusted
him
with
certain
Affairs
,
which
he
is
to
communicate
to
your
Paternity
.
I
have
presented
the
Father
Superior
and
my
other
Brethren
who
are
come
with
him
,
to
the
King
my
Master
:
His
Majesty
did
me
the
honour
to
receive
them
with
extraordinary
Marks
of
Affection
.
He
hath
also
honoured
them
with
his
Presence
,
having
no
body
near
him
but
four
of
his
chief
Mandarins
,
when
they
observed
the
Eclipse
which
happened
the
Eleventh
of
the
Month
of
December
.
During
all
that
time
,
his
Majesty
was
not
four
foot
distant
from
the
Fathers
who
sate
,
making
use
of
their
Instruments
,
and
acting
with
as
great
freedom
as
if
they
had
been
in
the
Observatory
of
Paris
.
Nay
,
the
King
had
the
goodness
to
call
the
Father
Superior
to
him
,
and
to
order
him
to
fit
his
Telescope
,
to
the
end
his
Majesty
might
the
more
easily
observe
;
taking
the
Instrument
out
of
the
Father's
hand
,
as
if
he
had
been
his
familiar
Friend
.
During
that
Observation
,
he
did
the
Fathers
the
honour
to
bestow
upon
each
of
them
a
Cassock
and
Cloak
of
China
Damask
;
and
for
Father
Trachard
,
who
will
present
you
this
Letter
,
he
added
a
Golden
Crucifix
,
that
he
might
give
him
a
faithful
Companion
for
his
Voyage
(
these
are
the
King
's
own
Words
)
charging
the
same
Father
to
present
another
much
bigger
to
your
Paternity
,
with
his
particular
desires
that
you
would
procure
frum
the
most
Christian
King
twelve
Fathers
Mathematicians
of
the
Society
,
who
will
be
received
here
with
much
Joy.
The
King
my
Master
,
having
already
ordered
the
Father
Superior
to
chuse
a
place
at
Louvo
,
and
another
at
Siam
,
there
to
build
Churches
,
Observatories
,
and
Houses
that
may
be
proper
for
them
;
he
chargtd
me
at
the
same
time
to
t●ke
a
course
that
all
these
things
should
be
ready
to
receive
the
Fathers
upon
their
Arrival
.
If
the
six
Fat●●rs
Mathematicians
and
my
Brethren
ha●e
been
able
to
do
such
brave
things
in
two
Mon●●●
time
,
wh●●
w
ul●
not
fifty
or
more
be
able
to
do
in
the
space
of
twenty
years
?
I
have
given
the
Ambassador
of
the
King
my
Master
some
Curiosities
of
this
Country
,
to
be
presented
in
my
Name
to
your
Paternity
.
I
pray
you
to
accept
of
them
,
and
it
shall
be
to
me
a
new
occasion
of
Joy
to
receive
your
Orders
,
and
to
render
you
my
Services
in
all
things
that
depend
on
me
.
I
commend
my self
to
your
Holy
Sacrifices
,
and
am
,
with
all
due
Respect
and
Friendship
,
Most
Reverend
Father
,
Your
most
Humble
,
and
Obedient
Servant
and
Brother
,
CONSTANTINE
PHAVLKON
.
The
way
of
catching
Elephants
.
After
the
King
had
observed
the
Eclipse
with
us
in
the
manner
I
have
related
,
he
invited
us
to
participate
in
the
Diversion
which
that
day
he
gave
in
the
Forest
,
for
taking
the
Elephants
which
were
there
kept
enclosed
.
We
made
ready
to
set
out
about
seven
of
the
Clock
:
Then
we
were
told
that
my
Lord
Ambassador
was
set
out
,
and
that
the
King
was
coming
out
of
his
Palace
.
Presently
after
the
Ambassador
arrived
on
Horse-back
with
all
his
Retinue
;
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
the
Abbot
de
Lyonne
,
and
Monsieur
Vachet
attended
him
.
No
sooner
had
all
alighted
from
their
Horses
,
and
mounted
the
Elephants
that
were
prepared
for
us
,
but
the
King
appeared
attended
by
a
great
number
of
Mandarins
mounted
on
Elephants
of
War
.
We
followed
,
and
entered
about
a
League
into
the
Wood
,
as
far
as
the
Enclosure
where
the
wild
Elephants
were
.
It
was
a
square
Park
of
about
three
or
four
hundred
Geometrical
Paces
,
paled
in
by
great
Stakes
;
however
large
Openings
were
left
at
convenient
Distances
,
and
within
there
were
fourteen
Elephants
of
all
Sizes
.
So
soon
as
the
Company
came
,
they
made
a
Ring
of
about
an
hundred
Elephants
of
War
posted
round
the
Park
,
to
hinder
the
Wild
ones
from
breaking
through
the
Palisado
;
we
were
behind
this
Ring
,
and
near
to
the
King.
Twelve
of
the
strongest
of
the
tame
Elephants
were
sent
in
within
the
Precincts
of
the
Park
,
every
one
of
them
carrying
two
Men
with
great
Ropes
and
running
Nooses
,
whereof
the
ends
were
made
fast
to
the
Elephants
they
rode
upon
.
They
presently
made
up
to
the
Elephant
they
had
a
mind
to
catch
,
who
finding
himself
pursued
,
offered
at
the
Barrier
to
break
through
and
make
his
Escape
;
but
all
the
way
was
blocked
up
by
Elephants
of
War
,
by
whom
they
were
forced
back
within
the
Inclosure
again
,
and
as
they
ran
to
and
again
within
that
Space
,
the
Huntsmen
,
who
were
mounted
on
tame
Elephants
,
threw
their
Nooses
so
exactly
upon
the
places
where
the
Beasts
were
to
set
their
Foot
,
that
they
never
failed
catching
of
them
;
Indeed
,
they
were
all
taken
in
the
space
of
an
hour
.
They
afterwards
tied
every
wild
Elephant
,
and
on
each
side
of
him
put
a
tame
one
,
which
were
to
be
left
a
Fortnight
with
him
,
that
by
their
means
he
might
be
daunted
.
Amongst
that
Herd
of
wild
Elephants
,
there
were
two
or
three
very
young
and
little
ones
.
The
King
said
he
would
send
one
of
them
to
the
Duke
of
Burgundy
;
but
considering
that
the
Duke
of
Anjou
might
be
emulous
and
take
Exceptions
thereat
,
he
added
that
he
would
also
send
him
one
less
,
that
so
there
might
be
no
Jealousie
nor
Dispute
betwixt
them
.
When
the
Hunting
was
over
,
the
King
told
the
Ambassador
,
that
they
had
never
had
better
sport
in
so
short
a
time
,
that
Providence
had
so
ordered
it
for
his
sake
,
and
that
therefore
they
ought
to
give
God
thanks
.
He
then
prayed
him
to
leave
with
him
Monsieur
de
la
Mare
.
The
Ambassador
presented
him
to
him
,
and
his
Majesty
presently
made
the
Lord
Constance
give
him
a
Vest
of
Cloth
of
Silver
with
Gold
Buttons
.
Monsieur
de
la
Mare
is
a
very
able
Ingeneer
,
and
a
very
honest
Man
:
He
hath
long
served
both
by
Sea
and
Land
;
having
from
his
Youth
applied
himself
to
the
Mathematicks
,
wherein
he
hath
made
great
progress
.
He
is
very
skilful
in
Navigation
,
Fortification
,
and
Geometry
.
On
that
occasion
all
the
Gentlemen
took
their
Leave
of
the
King
,
who
wished
them
a
happy
Voyage
,
and
expressed
himself
with
condescending
Civility
towards
them
.
The
Ambassador
takes
his
Audience
of
Leave
of
his
Majesty
of
Siam
.
The
King
returned
to
Thlee-poussonne
,
and
the
Ambassador
to
Louvo
.
The
King
came
there
also
in
the
Evening
,
that
next
day
he
might
give
the
Ambassador
his
Audience
of
Leave
.
December
the
Twelfth
,
about
eight
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
an
Oya
who
is
a
Mandarin
of
the
first
Rank
,
came
with
a
pompous
Train
to
wait
upon
the
Ambassador
from
his
House
to
Audience
:
〈…〉
The
Ceremonies
were
much
the
same
that
were
observed
the
Day
of
his
Entry
and
first
Audience
,
save
that
the
Ambassadors
Gentlemen
followed
him
no
farther
than
into
the
second
Court
of
the
Palace
.
The
Audience
was
not
long
:
The
King
having
charged
the
Ambassador
with
his
Complements
for
the
most
Christian
King
,
and
all
the
Royal
Family
,
made
him
a
Present
of
a
great
piece
of
golden
Plate
,
which
in
the
Siam-Language
is
called
Telom
,
and
in
Portuguese
,
Bolseta
,
and
is
the
Badge
of
a
great
Oya
and
Prince
.
None
at
the
Court
of
Siam
but
only
the
Prince
of
Camboye
is
allowed
to
have
the
like
.
The
Lord
Constance
told
the
Ambassador
from
the
King
,
that
his
Majesty
would
willingly
have
compleated
the
Ceremony
which
is
observed
on
such
Occasions
,
but
that
he
omitted
it
because
of
some
things
,
which
perhaps
would
not
be
agreeable
to
the
Europeans
.
His
Majesty
ordered
a
Crucifix
,
such
as
he
had
given
me
the
day
before
,
to
be
presented
to
the
Abbot
de
Lyonne
,
and
another
to
Monsieur
Vachet
,
whom
he
sent
to
France
to
accompany
his
Ambassadors
.
As
they
came
from
the
Audience
,
a
Table
was
prepared
with
above
fifty
Covers
,
in
a
neat
Hall
,
in
the
middle
of
a
Grass-plat
,
encompassed
with
Water-works
;
all
were
served
in
large
Dishes
of
Plate
,
and
the
Plenty
of
Dishes
was
no
less
considerable
,
than
the
Ragoes
were
delicious
.
No
kind
of
Wine
was
wanting
,
and
the
Sweet-meats
of
China
and
Japan
were
highly
esteemed
above
any
thing
that
was
there
.
The
Ambassador
and
Lord
Constance
would
needs
have
us
to
be
present
at
the
Treat
.
When
that
splendid
Entertainment
was
over
,
the
Ambassador
embarked
for
Siam
,
being
accompanied
by
a
great
many
Mandarins
of
all
the
Orders
.
I
stayed
with
the
Lord
Constance
till
next
day
,
and
when
I
was
to
part
from
our
Fathers
,
it
troubled
me
extreamly
to
leave
them
.
The
Father
Superior
and
other
two
would
needs
go
along
with
me
,
and
wait
upon
my
Lord
Ambassador
on
Shipboard
.
Our
Water-men
rowed
all
night
long
,
and
December
the
Fourteenth
,
about
seven
a
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
we
arrived
at
the
Ambassadors
House
in
Siam
.
His
Servants
were
employed
in
putting
on
board
the
China
and
other
Furniture
of
his
Palace
,
which
the
King
had
presented
him
with
.
Before
I
left
the
City
,
I
had
a
long
Discourse
with
Father
Suarez
and
Father
Fucity
.
These
Fathers
have
learnt
to
suffer
without
complaining
,
and
as
to
that
point
they
have
a
niceness
of
Conscience
that
makes
them
observe
Measures
,
that
the
strictest
Morality
could
not
always
comply
with
.
They
only
hinted
to
me
that
they
had
been
surprised
,
that
the
Jesuits
of
the
Indies
should
be
accused
of
taking
Money
(
as
it
is
practised
in
Parishes
)
for
Administring
,
Baptism
,
saying
Mass
,
&c.
seeing
an
infinite
Number
of
People
could
bear
Witness
to
the
contrary
,
and
they
protested
to
me
before
God
that
never
any
thing
had
been
done
,
that
might
in
the
least
alter
the
Rule
of
our
Institution
.
I
had
long
desired
an
Opportunity
of
being
cleared
as
to
a
Matter
of
Fact
that
had
made
a
Noise
,
but
I
had
forgot
to
do
it
till
then
.
I
asked
them
if
it
was
true
,
that
a
certain
Minister
of
Batavia
,
called
Ferreira
,
was
an
Apostate
Jesuit
,
as
it
was
given
out
.
They
made
me
answer
,
that
he
had
never
been
neither
of
our
Company
,
nor
of
any
other
religious
Society
,
which
he
had
acknowledged
to
several
Persons
,
and
to
Father
Fucity
himself
at
Batavia
;
that
perhaps
the
thing
that
had
given
occasion
to
the
Report
,
was
the
Conformity
in
Name
which
he
had
with
a
Jesuit
,
who
is
also
called
Ferreira
,
and
who
hath
been
formerly
mentioned
,
from
whence
ground
had
been
taken
to
confound
the
two
into
one
Person
.
Would
to
God
that
the
Original
of
such
kind
of
Reports
were
only
to
be
attributed
to
a
bare
Mistake
;
for
how
many
such
have
been
of
late
years
published
in
certain
Libels
that
have
flown
about
in
Holland
?
Distance
of
Place
hath
in
this
favoured
the
Malicious
,
and
the
natural
Inclination
or
Interest
that
Men
have
to
give
Credit
to
that
that
's
Evil
,
has
been
the
cause
that
some
have
believed
it
.
Having
viewed
things
at
nearer
distance
,
I
have
with
humble
Submission
adored
Providence
,
that
suffers
Men
sometimes
to
lash
out
and
speak
the
worst
of
those
,
of
whom
,
had
they
been
just
,
they
might
have
said
the
best
.
They
ought
to
consider
that
very
far
from
injuring
those
whom
they
would
decry
,
they
only
exercise
their
Patience
,
keep
them
humble
,
and
hinder
them
from
receiving
in
this
World
a
weak
recompence
for
the
Labours
which
deserve
a
more
solid
Reward
in
Heaven
,
which
is
a
great
Kindness
to
them
;
whereas
all
reflects
upon
Religion
,
which
is
exposed
to
the
Censure
of
Hereticks
,
and
the
Contempt
of
Infidels
.
We
parted
from
Siam
the
Fourteenth
of
December
,
about
four
or
five
a
Clock
in
the
Evening
.
Departure
from
Siam
.
The
Lord
Constance
who
would
wait
upon
the
Ambassador
as
far
as
the
Bar
,
followed
him
in
a
stately
and
princely
Balon
,
which
the
King
sometime
since
had
obliged
him
to
take
,
and
just
such
another
as
that
which
carried
the
Ambassador
.
The
Train
consisted
of
twenty
Balons
of
State
,
which
went
as
low
as
the
Tabangue
,
where
he
was
received
the
Day
of
his
Entry
.
As
soon
as
they
arrived
there
,
they
drew
up
and
made
a
Lane
,
according
to
their
Quality
,
that
the
Ambassadors
Balon
might
pass
betwixt
them
,
and
so
the
Mandarins
who
were
on
board
of
them
took
their
Leave
and
returned
.
We
came
to
Bancok
about
four
a
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
where
the
Lord
Constance
prayed
the
Ambassador
to
stay
till
next
Day
,
that
he
might
view
the
Fortifications
of
the
Citadel
,
and
give
his
Judgment
of
them
.
Whilst
we
were
at
Bancok
,
The
King
of
Siams
Letter
is
carried
on
board
the
Oyseau
.
a
Frigat
of
the
King
of
Siam's
past
that
way
,
carrying
the
Letter
which
his
Majesty
wrote
to
the
King
of
France
.
The
Letter
was
in
a
Gold
Box
shaped
like
a
Cone
,
and
this
Box
was
put
up
in
another
bigger
Silver
Box
,
which
also
was
enclosed
within
a
third
of
Japan
Wood
varnished
,
wrapped
up
in
a
piece
of
rich
Silk
Stuff
flowered
with
Gold.
All
this
was
in
a
gilt
Pyramid
placed
aloft
on
the
Stern
of
the
Frigat
,
with
many
Parasols
to
cover
it
.
When
the
Frigat
past
by
with
its
Convoy
of
Balons
of
State
,
the
Governors
of
Places
that
lye
upon
the
River
,
made
a
Discharge
of
all
their
Artillery
,
and
every
one
of
them
waited
upon
the
Letter
as
far
as
their
Government
reached
,
receiving
it
from
one
another
with
the
same
Honours
and
Ceremonies
.
Sunday
,
December
the
Sixteenth
,
the
Ambassador
arrived
at
the
Bar
,
and
the
same
Day
about
seven
of
the
Clock
at
Night
went
on
board
the
Oyseau
.
As
I
had
been
all
along
in
the
Balon
of
the
Lord
Constance
,
so
he
would
have
me
to
go
on
board
of
one
of
his
Frigats
at
the
Mouth
of
the
River
,
and
stay
with
him
there
two
Days
to
dispatch
some
Business
.
There
he
gave
me
a
Letter
to
the
King
,
which
I
have
had
the
Honour
to
present
to
his
Majesty
.
We
afterwards
weighed
and
came
to
an
Anchor
again
near
the
Ambassadors
Ship
,
to
do
him
the
Honour
that
he
had
never
done
to
any
before
.
The
King
of
Siam's
Ambassadors
,
who
were
not
as
yet
come
on
board
the
Oyseau
,
desired
the
Ambassador
to
send
them
the
Long-boat
to
carry
on
board
their
Masters
Letter
.
They
went
and
fetcht
it
from
the
Frigat
,
and
when
they
were
come
to
the
Ships
side
,
the
second
Ambassador
put
the
Pyramid
wherein
it
was
upon
his
Shoulders
,
and
so
came
on
board
,
no
body
daring
to
touch
it
.
It
was
placed
upon
aloft
on
the
Stern
with
the
Parasols
,
and
one
and
twenty
Guns
were
fired
at
the
Ceremony
.
Nevertheless
the
Ambassadors
were
prevailed
upon
to
carry
it
into
their
Cabin
,
because
being
so
placed
,
it
would
hinder
the
working
of
the
Ship.
The
Ambassador
and
Lord
Constance
visited
one
another
on
board
their
Ships
,
with
the
usual
Salutes
;
and
the
last
time
that
the
Lord
Constance
came
on
board
the
Oyseau
to
take
his
Leave
of
the
Ambassador
,
they
gave
one
another
great
marks
of
mutual
Friendship
,
and
parted
with
Grief
.
Our
three
Fathers
who
were
come
so
far
,
returned
with
the
Lord
Constance
and
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
,
leaving
me
troubled
and
pensive
,
but
I
endeavoured
to
moderate
my
Sorrow
by
the
hopes
of
seeing
them
again
within
a
few
years
.
When
all
were
gone
into
the
Chaloop
,
the
Lord
Constance
called
me
and
gave
me
a
Chapelet
made
of
the
costly
Wood
of
Calamba
;
but
the
Cross
and
great
Beads
were
of
Tambag
.
Then
the
Chaloop
put
off
,
and
we
saluted
her
with
thirteen
Guns
for
the
last
Farewel
.
We
were
ready
to
set
sail
,
and
stayed
for
nothing
now
but
Monsieur
Vachet
,
and
the
Ambassadors
Secretary
;
they
had
fallen
down
with
the
rest
to
the
Mouth
of
the
River
;
but
for
three
Days
time
no
body
could
tell
what
was
become
of
them
.
This
put
a
stop
to
our
Voyage
,
and
we
were
just
going
to
weigh
Anchor
when
we
saw
them
coming
with
two
or
three
Mandarins
of
the
Retinue
of
the
Ambassadors
of
Siam
.
The
Currents
had
carried
away
the
Galley
they
were
on
board
of
with
so
much
violence
,
that
they
could
not
resist
it
,
nor
come
up
with
us
sooner
;
several
others
were
to
have
embarked
with
us
;
but
the
Season
already
far
spent
,
suffered
us
not
to
stay
for
them
,
so
that
we
put
under
Sail.
Departure
from
the
Bar
of
Siam
.
And
parted
from
the
Bar
of
Siam
with
a
good
Wind
the
two
and
twentieth
of
December
.
The
Lord
Constance
had
sent
us
on
board
all
sorts
of
fresh
Provisions
in
so
great
abundance
,
that
we
were
fain
to
pray
him
to
send
no
more
,
and
even
to
leave
some
of
them
.
We
came
to
Bantam
the
Tenth
of
January
,
after
we
had
run
aground
in
the
Streight
of
Banca
through
the
Fault
of
the
Dutch
Pilot
,
whom
we
took
in
at
Batavia
.
No
Body
can
well
tell
what
whimsy
made
him
cast
Anchor
,
which
put
us
in
danger
of
being
cast
away
;
for
had
not
the
Ground
been
so
owzy
as
it
was
,
the
Anchor
we
dropt
would
have
bulged
the
Ship
that
ran
foul
of
it
;
and
it
was
some
trouble
to
get
her
off
.
A
Dutch
Ship
that
came
after
,
had
more
Wit
than
to
follow
us
,
and
so
was
not
stranded
as
we
were
So
soon
as
we
came
to
an
Anchor
before
Bantam
,
the
Ambassador
sent
M.
de
Cibois
,
Lieutenant
of
the
Ship
to
make
a
Complement
to
the
Governor
,
not
doubting
but
that
he
would
come
off
with
better
Grace
than
he
did
the
time
before
,
and
the
rather
,
that
he
was
not
ignorant
of
the
Civilities
that
the
General
of
Batavia
had
shewn
the
Ambassador
;
but
we
were
mistaken
.
Monsieur
Cibois
could
not
speak
to
the
Governor
,
who
,
they
said
,
was
sick
,
and
bid
the
Governor
of
the
Fort
tell
him
,
that
they
would
send
on
board
fresh
Provisions
.
This
Promise
amounted
to
no
more
but
the
sending
of
two
or
three
Bullocks
,
with
an
Excuse
that
there
was
no
more
to
be
had
.
In
the
Evening
came
a
Man
,
who
pretended
to
be
sent
from
the
Governor
,
and
demanded
Money
for
the
Bullocks
,
which
it
was
thought
the
Governor
had
presented
to
my
Lord
Ambassador
.
That
Messenger
was
used
as
he
deserved
,
and
had
an
Answer
given
him
to
carry
to
the
Governor
,
sutable
to
such
a
clownish
and
uncivil
Behaviour
.
So
next
day
we
made
Sail
towards
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
We
had
the
best
Luck
,
imaginable
in
passing
the
Streight
of
the
Sound
,
which
is
a
very
difficult
Passage
to
shoot
,
because
of
contrary
Winds
that
commonly
reign
there
in
that
Season
.
But
God
was
graciously
pleased
to
send
us
most
excellent
Weather
,
which
in
a
few
Hours
put
us
out
of
all
Danger
.
We
had
a
more
particular
Instance
of
his
Divine
Providence
three
days
after
.
Our
Pilots
had
a
mind
to
keep
thirty
or
forty
Leagues
to
the
Southward
of
the
Isle
Mony
,
and
thought
they
had
steered
their
Course
accordingly
,
when
about
break
of
day
Monsieur
de
Vaud●●court
made
Land
at
three
or
four
Leagues
distance
from
us
,
we
had
certainly
run
foul
of
it
,
had
it
blown
a
little
fresher
in
the
Night-time
.
This
Land
is
so
low
that
it
is
not
to
be
known
but
by
the
Breaks
.
We
were
obliged
to
bear
away
to
the
Leeward
,
and
leave
it
to
the
South
,
contrary
to
our
first
Design
.
During
the
whole
Voyage
,
we
had
as
fair
Weather
as
Heart
could
wish
,
untill
we
were
off
of
the
Isle
of
Bourbon
,
February
the
Thirteenth
,
where
we
met
with
one
of
the
most
violent
Gusts
of
Wind
that
the
old
Officers
,
as
they
said
,
had
ever
seen
.
It
lasted
three
days
,
and
having
carried
away
the
Frigats
main
Sail
,
separated
her
from
us
much
about
the
same
place
that
we
lost
her
when
we
were
outward
bound
,
and
we
had
no
more
sight
of
her
,
till
that
Day
we
came
to
an
Anchor
at
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
,
whither
she
had
got
two
Days
before
us
.
News
from
an
English
Ship
outward
bound
.
March
the
Tenth
,
we
made
a
Sail
bound
towards
the
Indies
:
As
we
drew
nearer
,
we
knew
her
to
be
an
English
Ship
by
her
Colours
.
My
Lord
Ambassador
being
willing
to
hear
News
from
Europe
,
sent
Monsieur
Cibois
and
his
Secretary
,
who
spoke
very
good
English
,
to
the
Captain
.
They
brought
back
word
that
that
Ship
had
been
five
Months
out
of
England
,
and
that
she
was
bound
streight
for
Tunquin
,
without
touching
any where
;
that
all
was
quiet
in
Europe
;
that
the
King
of
England
had
defeated
the
Rebels
,
and
made
the
Duke
of
Monmouth
,
who
commanded
them
,
Prisoner
,
who
was
shortly
after
beheaded
;
that
many
of
his
Followers
had
suffered
Death
,
and
other
tasted
of
his
Britannick
Majesties
Mercy
.
These
were
very
acceptable
News
to
us
,
and
especially
when
they
told
us
that
the
English
Ship
had
made
the
Cape
the
Day
before
about
seven
Leagues
off
.
We
then
found
that
we
were
much
nearer
it
than
we
imagined
,
and
next
day
casting
out
the
Lead
,
we
found
our selves
about
seven
a
Clock
in
the
Morning
,
upon
the
Bank
of
the
Needles
,
in
ninety
Fadom
Water
,
and
about
Noon
we
made
the
Cape
of
the
Needles
.
The
Wind
was
then
fair
,
and
we
made
the
best
use
of
it
all
Night
long
,
so
that
next
day
we
made
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
about
eight
Leagues
off
.
About
three
in
the
Afternoon
we
came
to
the
Mouth
of
the
Bay
;
but
the
Wind
blowing
too
high
for
putting
in
,
we
came
to
an
Anchor
betwixt
Isle
Robin
and
the
main
Land
,
near
the
Frigat
.
The
Day
following
,
March
the
Thirteenth
,
the
Wind
being
abated
,
we
came
to
an
Anchor
in
the
Bay
,
amongst
seven
great
Dutch
Ships
,
that
made
up
the
East-India
Fleet
that
was
to
return
to
Europe
,
so
soon
as
three
or
four
Ships
more
,
which
they
daily
expected
,
were
come
to
the
Cape
.
The
Ambassador
sent
a
Compliment
to
the
Governour
of
the
Fort
,
who
received
it
as
kindly
as
the
time
before
,
when
we
past
that
way
.
We
saluted
the
Fort
with
seven
Guns
,
and
they
returned
us
Gun
for
Gun.
Whilst
we
were
taking
in
Water
,
and
providing
other
necessary
Provisions
,
I
went
to
pay
a
Visit
to
the
Governour
,
who
had
asked
News
of
the
six
Jesuits
whom
he
had
seen
the
Year
before
.
He
made
me
many
Offers
of
Services
,
offering
me
a
Friends
House
,
if
I
would
stay
ashoar
,
because
the
Observatory
,
which
was
pulled
down
to
be
built
again
with
greater
Magnificence
,
was
not
yet
finished
.
Being
informed
that
I
was
to
return
to
the
Indies
with
several
other
Jesuits
,
he
added
very
obligingly
,
that
all
should
be
ready
against
our
Arrival
,
and
invited
me
and
all
my
Companions
before
hand
,
to
come
and
refresh
our selves
there
.
After
all
these
Civilities
,
he
made
me
a
Present
of
four
lovely
Tygers
Skins
,
and
of
a
little
tame
Beast
which
he
had
taken
in
his
last
Expedition
;
by
the
Hair
and
Size
of
it
,
it
resembles
a
Squirril
,
and
had
much
the
Shape
of
one
,
when
he
gave
it
me
,
he
told
me
it
was
the
implacable
Enemy
of
Serpents
,
and
was
at
cruel
Wars
with
them
.
It
was
then
Vintage
time
,
which
was
very
far
advanced
;
we
eat
of
the
Grapes
of
Africa
that
are
plentiful
,
and
have
a
rare
good
Taste
.
The
White-wine
is
very
delicate
,
and
if
the
Dutch
knew
as
well
how
to
cultivate
Vines
,
as
to
make
Colonies
and
pursue
Trade
,
they
might
have
excellent
Wines
there
of
the
other
Colour
.
The
Governour
told
me
that
he
was
just
returned
from
a
great
Journey
he
had
made
up
into
the
Country
Northward
,
where
he
had
discovered
many
Nations
,
who
have
some
Form
of
Government
,
and
well
ordered
Oeconomy
,
as
may
be
seen
in
the
Description
of
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
.
Putting
out
from
the
Bay
of
the
Cape
.
Having
taken
on
board
Provisions
,
and
our
sick
Men
,
who
were
recovered
by
the
Land-air
,
we
put
out
of
the
Bay
the
twenty
sixth
of
March.
We
steered
our
Course
towards
the
Ascension
Island
.
This
Isle
lies
in
eight
Degrees
South
Lati●ude
,
and
seven
Degrees
fifteen
Minutes
Longitude
.
There
is
so
great
plenty
of
Tortoises
or
Turtle
to
be
had
there
,
that
in
a
Night
or
two
as
many
may
be
caught
as
will
satisfie
to
feed
a
whole
Ships
Company
,
consisting
of
four
hundred
Men
,
for
a
Fortnights
time
.
These
Tortoises
are
of
an
extraordinary
bigness
,
and
in
the
Evening
after
Sun-set
,
when
they
come
ashoar
to
lay
their
Eggs
,
Men
turn
as
many
of
them
as
they
intend
to
take
,
upon
their
Backs
,
for
the
Sea-shoar
is
full
of
them
,
and
in
that
condition
they
leave
them
till
next
day
,
when
they
come
and
carry
them
on
Board
in
Boats.
We
made
that
Isle
,
which
appears
at
a
great
distance
by
a
high
Hill
,
the
nineteenth
of
April
,
about
four
of
the
Clock
in
the
Afternoon
,
we
had
a
good
Wind
,
and
we
should
have
lost
time
if
we
had
put
into
the
Road
,
and
therefore
the
Ambassador
would
not
stop
there
.
We
past
the
Line
at
the
first
Meridian
,
We
past
the
Line
at
the
first
Meridia●
.
the
seven
and
twentieth
of
April
,
and
from
that
time
forward
,
till
the
last
of
May
,
we
had
very
easie
Winds
,
but
then
met
with
a
strong
contrary
Wind.
Next
day
towards
the
Evening
,
we
were
much
surprised
to
make
the
Isle
of
Corvo
on
head
of
us
,
which
is
the
most
Northern
Isle
of
the
Azores
.
Our
Pilots
thought
we
had
been
near
an
hundred
Leagues
beyond
those
Islands
.
I
have
read
in
many
Journals
,
and
learnt
from
several
able
Sea-men
,
that
Men
are
many
times
out
in
that
Course
,
and
that
they
never
sail
to
make
the
A●
res
,
when
they
think
they
have
past
them
.
That
is
a
sign
that
in
those
Places
the
Currents
set
Westward
with
great
Rapidity
.
So
that
Men
should
sail
with
much
Circumspection
upon
their
Return
from
Africa
,
that
they
may
not
fall
into
so
considerable
a
Mistake
,
which
may
prove
to
be
of
fatal
Consequence
.
June
the
eleventh
,
it
blew
so
fierce
a
Storm
,
that
we
were
forced
to
furl
all
our
Sails
,
and
to
lay
a-try
under
one
Course
.
That
Gust
lasted
not
long
,
and
we
stood
away
Eastward
.
One
day
,
as
we
were
sailing
with
all
Sails
drawing
,
and
were
in
hopes
soon
to
make
the
Land
of
Vshan
,
because
we
were
already
got
into
the
Soundings
,
a
Sea-man
upon
the
Watch
cried
out
,
that
we
were
about
to
run
upon
a
Rock
.
It
was
late
,
and
the
Darkness
of
the
Night
encreased
our
Fear
,
occasioned
by
so
present
a
Danger
;
but
it
was
over
in
a
trice
,
when
instead
of
that
pretended
Rock
,
we
found
a
great
Fisher
Boat
at
an
Anchor
.
Had
not
we
tackt
in
the
very
nick
of
time
,
we
had
been
foul
of
her
.
The
poor
Men
on
board
were
so
allarmed
,
that
they
still
kept
crying
with
all
their
force
,
that
we
would
take
pity
of
them
,
though
we
were
already
at
a
pretty
good
distance
from
them
.
Next
day
we
met
a
Boat
,
that
assured
us
we
were
but
eight
Leagues
from
Vshan
.
This
News
rejoyced
all
the
Ships
Company
,
which
was
encreased
next
day
by
the
sight
of
that
Island
.
When
we
made
it
,
we
clapt
on
all
the
Sail
we
could
,
that
we
might
stand
in
to
the
Iroise
,
but
it
being
again
Tide
,
and
the
Wind
failing
us
,
we
were
forced
to
come
to
an
Anchor
betwixt
the
black
Stones
and
the
main
Land
in
five
and
twenty
Fadom
Water
on
sandy
Ground
.
Next
day
,
the
eighteenth
of
June
,
we
came
to
an
Anchor
in
the
Road
of
Brest
.
There
we
sang
Te
Deum
,
to
thank
God
for
so
prosperous
a
Voyage
,
with
a
Noise
of
all
the
Guns
of
both
Ships
,
and
afterwards
we
went
ashoar
.
A
VOYAGE
TO
SIAM
.
The
Sixth
BOOK
.
The
Manners
and
Religion
of
the
Siamese
I
will
say
nothing
but
what
I
have
seen
my self
,
or
what
I
have
learned
from
the
Lord
Constance
and
some
other
very
intelligent
Persons
,
that
I
may
not
impose
upon
the
public
by
false
or
uncertain
Reports
.
This
wise
advice
I
had
from
that
Minister
all
the
while
I
had
the
honour
to
be
with
him
,
who
gave
me
to
understand
that
some
men
had
given
abroad
memoirs
of
a
great
many
things
that
are
not
much
to
be
trusted
.
So
I
shall
speak
nothing
of
Tunquin
and
Cochincine
,
because
of
three
persons
who
lived
there
many
years
,
and
whom
in
any
thing
else
I
should
readily
believe
,
with
much
ado
two
could
agree
together
about
a
great
many
questions
that
were
put
to
them
in
relation
to
those
places
.
For
as
to
the
Orientals
,
all
know
that
they
tell
things
not
really
as
they
are
,
but
as
they
fancy
you
could
wish
they
were
;
wherefore
they
little
care
to
contradict
one
another
,
as
to
matter
of
Fact
they
have
declared
,
provided
they
comply
with
the
inclinations
of
him
that
puts
the
question
to
them
;
so
that
if
they
be
taken
in
any
contradiction
,
it
does
not
at
all
trouble
them
to
be
told
of
it
.
What
pleased
you
yesterday
,
will
they
say
unconcernedly
,
displeases
you
to
day
,
and
that
makes
us
speak
to
day
in
another
manner
than
we
spake
yesterday
.
I
shall
not
so
much
enlarge
upon
the
Customs
and
Government
of
the
Siamese
as
upon
their
Religion
,
which
I
have
taken
great
care
to
be
informed
of
,
and
have
learnt
many
particulars
relating
thereunto
,
which
,
as
I
think
,
will
be
very
acceptable
to
the
curious
.
I
owe
almost
all
of
them
to
a
Siamese
Church-man
who
came
to
France
with
the
Ambassadors
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
The
Scituation
of
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
The
Kingdom
of
Siam
reaches
from
the
point
of
Malaca
to
the
Kingdoms
of
Pegu
and
Laos
which
bound
it
on
the
North
side
.
It
hath
the
Indian
Sea
to
the
West
,
and
the
Chinese
to
the
East
,
so
that
it
would
seem
to
make
only
a
Peninsula
.
The
Provinces
that
lie
up
in
the
Countrey
towards
the
North
are
but
little
known
,
and
our
Geographical
Maps
mark
not
their
Scituation
and
Limits
well
.
We
have
found
already
by
two
Observations
of
an
Ecclipse
of
the
Moon
,
that
the
Longitude
thereof
is
very
ill
determined
.
The
King
of
Siam
intimated
to
our
Fathers
that
he
wished
he
had
an
exact
Map
of
his
own
Dominions
and
the
Kingdoms
about
,
having
bid
the
Lord
Constance
tell
us
,
that
he
would
give
us
Letters
of
Recommendation
to
the
Princes
his
Neighbours
,
to
the
end
we
might
have
the
liberty
to
Travel
over
their
Countries
,
and
make
an
exact
Description
of
them
.
I
do
not
think
that
since
my
departure
our
Fathers
have
had
time
to
obey
the
Orders
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
because
they
were
in
haste
to
be
gone
for
China
,
waiting
only
for
the
opportunity
of
a
Passage
.
That
will
be
the
first
work
we
shall
undertake
so
soon
as
we
have
learnt
the
Language
.
This
Kingdom
is
divided
by
many
Rivers
,
A
description
of
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
and
watered
with
frequent
Rains
,
which
for
six
Months
of
the
year
and
more
,
overflow
all
the
Countrey
.
that
abounds
in
Rice
,
Fruits
and
Cattel
.
The
Houses
are
commonly
of
Wood
,
and
raised
upon
Pillars
because
of
the
Inundations
,
without
any
thing
of
the
Grandeur
or
Regularity
that
is
to
be
found
in
the
Houses
of
Europe
.
The
Chinese
and
Maures
have
built
several
pretty
neat
stone-houses
in
Siam
.
The
wealth
of
the
Countrey
appears
in
the
Temples
,
by
the
many
works
of
Gold
,
and
most
lovely
gildings
,
which
are
the
Ornaments
of
them
,
these
Pagods
being
,
besides
,
of
a
singular
structure
,
and
in
very
great
number
.
They
are
in
no
want
of
Timber
,
and
they
have
some
excellently
good
for
building
of
Ships
.
The
Capital
City
is
called
Siam
;
and
that
is
the
name
the
Portuguese
have
given
it
.
The
Siamese
call
it
Crung
si
ayu
that
ya
,
and
not
Juthia
or
Odia
.
Crung
si
,
signifies
excellent
Town
.
Their
Histories
call
it
also
Crung
theppa
ppra
ma
hà
nà
kon
.
The
meaning
of
that
is
,
Angelical
,
admirable
and
extraordinary
Town
;
and
they
call
it
Angelical
,
because
they
think
it
impregnable
to
Men.
Seeing
all
Nations
are
well
received
at
Siam
,
and
that
People
are
suffered
to
live
there
in
the
free
Exercise
of
their
Religion
,
there
are
some
of
almost
all
Nations
in
that
Country
.
The
Chinese
are
the
greatest
Traders
there
,
and
besides
the
Commodities
of
China
deal
also
in
those
of
Japan
.
The
King
of
Siam
sends
Ships
to
Trade
at
Surrat
,
Bengal
,
Moca
and
other
places
.
But
the
Siamese
being
no
better
at
Navigation
than
the
other
people
of
the
East
,
Europeans
have
the
Sailing
of
their
Vessels
.
He
hath
also
several
Jonkos
which
are
Chinese
Vessels
,
and
are
Manned
by
Chinesse
.
But
tho
that
Nation
brag
that
they
have
had
the
use
of
the
Compass
for
above
these
two
thousand
years
;
yet
they
come
very
far
short
of
the
Europeans
in
the
art
of
Navigation
.
They
have
no
other
Instruments
for
Sailing
but
the
Lead
or
Sound
.
They
keep
reckoning
as
we
do
,
and
run
some
time
upon
such
a
Point
of
Wind
,
the
Currents
,
Mountains
which
they
discover
on
Land
,
the
colour
,
fineness
and
mixture
of
the
Sand
,
with
other
experiences
are
the
Rules
they
go
by
.
The
Habits
of
the
Siamese
The
Siamese
are
not
magnificent
in
their
Apparel
.
The
inferiour
sort
of
People
Men
and
Women
are
Cloathed
much
alike
.
They
have
a
Longuis
which
is
a
piece
of
very
simple
stuff
about
two
ells
and
a
half
long
,
and
three
quarters
of
an
ell
broad
.
They
put
this
Longuis
about
their
Body
,
so
that
it
makes
as
it
were
,
a
kind
of
Coat
reaching
from
the
Girdle
below
the
knee
,
but
the
Womens
come
down
as
low
as
the
Ankle
.
The
Women
have
besides
that
a
piece
of
white
Betille
,
almost
three
ells
long
which
they
put
about
them
in
manner
of
a
Scarf
to
cover
the
rest
of
their
Body
,
for
that
purpose
the
Men
have
another
Longuis
,
which
they
never
use
but
when
it
is
cold
,
rains
,
or
when
the
Sun
shines
too
clear
.
The
habits
of
the
Mandarins
when
they
are
in
their
home
dress
,
differ
only
from
those
of
the
common
people
by
the
fineness
of
the
stuff
.
But
when
they
go
abroad
they
have
a
Longuis
of
silk
or
painted
cloath
six
or
seven
Ells
long
,
which
they
have
the
knacks
of
adjusting
so
well
about
their
body
,
that
it
reaches
no
lower
than
their
knee
.
The
Considerable
Mandarins
have
under
this
Longuis
a
narrow
pair
of
Drawers
;
the
extremities
whereof
are
Embrodred
with
Gold
and
Silver
.
They
have
also
Vests
with
Bodies
and
Sleeves
pretty
wide
.
They
have
Shoes
shaped
like
the
Shoes
of
the
Indians
.
On
the
days
of
Ceremony
when
they
are
to
appear
before
the
King
,
they
have
a
Cap
of
Betille
starched
,
which
tapers
into
a
point
like
a
Sugar-loaf
,
and
is
tied
with
a
string
under
the
Chin.
The
King
gives
to
some
Mandarins
according
to
their
quality
,
Crowns
of
Gold
or
Silver
,
made
much
after
the
shape
of
the
Coronets
of
our
Dukes
and
Marquesses
,
to
be
put
about
their
Cap
,
which
is
a
mark
of
great
distinction
.
The
Siamese
are
very
good
natured
and
civil
,
A
Character
of
the
Siamese
and
their
Manners
.
they
live
in
good
intelligence
one
with
another
,
and
they
are
not
wanting
in
compleasance
to
Strangers
.
The
good
Conduct
of
the
French
,
and
especially
the
wisdom
and
virtuous
exemples
of
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
,
gave
them
so
high
a
notion
of
France
,
that
Mandarins
of
the
best
quality
earnestly
sued
for
the
honour
of
going
thither
in
quality
of
the
Ambassadors
of
the
King
their
Master
,
or
in
the
retinue
of
those
whom
he
sent
.
So
to
speak
generally
,
there
is
a
great
union
in
Families
amonst
them
,
and
out
of
principle
of
tenderness
for
their
Parents
and
Relations
,
they
accuse
us
of
somewhat
of
hard
heartedness
,
because
we
leave
ours
,
and
go
live
far
from
them
in
remote
Countries
,
telling
us
that
they
may
stand
in
need
of
us
.
Justice
has
no
less
sway
among
them
than
friendship
and
peace
.
When
any
Ship
is
cast
away
upon
their
Coast
,
there
is
a
Law
that
obliges
those
who
have
taken
up
any
thing
of
the
Wreck
to
bring
it
to
the
chief
Town
,
to
be
afterwards
given
to
those
to
whom
the
effects
belonged
;
which
is
also
observed
in
relation
to
Strangers
.
The
perswasion
they
are
in
,
that
it
is
undecent
for
a
man
to
have
his
Teeth
white
like
Beasts
,
The
property
of
Betle
and
Areca
.
makes
them
take
a
great
deal
of
pains
to
blacken
them
.
For
that
end
they
make
use
of
a
Varnish
made
for
the
purpose
,
which
they
renew
from
time
to
time
when
it
begins
to
wear
off
.
That
they
may
give
the
colour
time
to
stick
on
,
they
eat
nothing
for
some
days
,
and
even
dispence
with
Betle
and
Areca
.
The
Betle
we
have
often
spoken
of
is
the
leaf
of
a
Tree
of
the
same
name
,
and
the
Areca
is
a
fruit
much
about
the
bigness
and
shape
of
our
Acorns
.
They
cut
that
fruit
into
four
parts
,
and
having
mingled
it
with
Lime
of
Shells
,
they
wrap
it
up
in
the
Betle
leaf
.
This
mixture
is
so
very
savory
to
them
,
either
because
they
are
accustomed
to
it
,
or
because
of
the
great
effects
they
feel
from
it
,
that
all
eat
of
it
of
what
quality
,
or
in
what
place
soever
they
be
.
They
pretend
that
it
is
a
Specifick
remedy
to
fortifie
the
Gums
,
help
digestion
,
and
above
all
to
make
the
Breath
sweet
.
It
is
a
civility
amongst
them
to
present
Betle
and
Tea
to
all
that
visit
them
.
The
property
of
Tea
.
Their
own
Country
supplies
them
with
Betle
and
Areca
,
but
they
have
their
Tea
from
China
and
Japan
.
All
the
Orientals
have
a
particular
esteem
for
it
,
because
of
the
great
virtues
they
find
to
be
in
it
.
Their
Physicians
say
that
it
is
a
Sovereign
Medicine
,
against
the
Stone
and
pains
of
the
Head
;
that
it
allays
vapours
;
that
it
chears
the
Mind
,
and
strengthens
the
Stomack
.
In
all
kinds
of
Feavers
they
take
it
stronger
than
commonly
,
when
they
begin
to
feel
the
heat
of
the
Fit
,
and
then
the
Patient
covers
himself
up
to
sweat
,
and
it
hath
been
very
often
found
that
this
sweat
wholly
drives
away
the
Feavor
.
In
the
East
they
prepare
the
Tea
in
this
manner
,
when
the
water
is
well
boiled
,
The
manner
of
preparing
Tea
.
they
pour
it
upon
the
Tea
which
they
have
put
into
an
Earthen
pot
,
proportionably
to
what
they
intend
to
take
(
the
ordinary
proportion
is
as
much
as
one
can
take
up
with
the
Finger
and
Thumb
,
for
a
pint
of
water
)
then
they
cover
the
Pot
until
the
Leaves
are
sunk
to
the
bottom
of
it
,
and
afterward
give
it
about
in
China-dishes
to
be
drank
as
hot
as
can
be
without
Sugar
,
or
else
with
a
little
Sugar-candy
in
the
mouth
;
and
upon
that
Tea
more
boiling
water
may
be
poured
and
so
it
may
be
made
to
serve
twice
.
These
people
drink
of
it
several
times
a
day
,
but
do
not
think
it
wholsom
to
take
it
fasting
.
Of
all
the
Plants
of
the
East
the
Ginseng
is
most
esteemed
.
There
are
several
kinds
of
it
;
What
Ginseng
is
and
its
vertues
.
but
the
best
is
that
which
grows
in
China
in
the
Province
of
Laotung
.
It
is
of
a
yellow
colour
,
the
flesh
or
pulp
of
it
smooth
,
having
little
threads
like
hair
.
They
find
of
these
Roots
some
that
are
shaped
like
a
Man
,
and
it
is
from
thence
they
have
their
name
for
Gin
in
the
Chinese
Language
,
signifies
a
Man
,
and
Seng
sometimes
to
kill
,
according
as
it
is
differently
pronounced
;
because
that
Root
being
taken
seasonably
or
out
of
season
,
produces
quite
contrary
effects
.
There
is
Ginseng
also
in
the
Kingdom
of
Goree
,
nay
and
in
Siam
too
,
as
some
say
;
but
it
is
not
so
good
as
that
which
grows
in
Laotung
.
The
Chinese
Herbal
says
that
this
Root
grows
in
the
shade
in
low
Valleys
,
and
that
it
must
be
gathered
at
the
end
of
Autumn
,
because
that
which
is
gathered
in
the
Spring
has
ten
times
less
virtue
.
The
Chinese
Physicians
who
make
most
use
of
it
,
affirm
that
it
is
a
sovereign
Remedy
for
cleansing
the
blood
,
and
recruiting
the
strength
that
has
been
weakened
by
long
sickness
;
that
he
who
has
that
Root
in
his
mouth
,
will
hold
out
at
labour
as
long
again
as
he
that
hath
it
not
;
that
corpulent
people
who
have
a
white
skin
may
take
more
of
it
than
dry
persons
who
have
a
swarthy
Complexion
,
and
whose
countenance
speaks
heat
;
that
it
is
never
to
be
taken
in
distempers
caused
by
an
internal
heat
,
nor
when
one
hath
a
Cough
or
spitteth
Blood
,
for
preparing
of
it
,
they
put
water
into
a
cup
,
and
having
made
it
boil
well
,
they
throw
into
it
Ginseng
cut
into
small
bits
;
The
way
of
preparing
Ginseng
.
they
cover
the
cup
very
close
,
that
the
Ginseng
may
be
infused
,
and
when
the
water
becomes
lukewarm
,
they
drink
it
alone
in
the
morning
fasting
.
They
keep
that
Ginseng
and
prepare
it
the
same
way
in
the
evening
as
they
did
in
the
morning
,
saving
that
they
put
but
half
the
quantity
of
water
,
and
drink
it
when
it
is
already
a
little
cold
.
Then
they
dry
the
Ginseng
that
hath
already
served
,
in
the
Sun
,
and
if
one
please
,
he
may
again
infuse
it
in
wine
and
use
it
.
The
quantity
of
the
Ginseng
is
proportioned
according
to
the
age
of
the
Person
who
is
to
take
it
.
From
ten
to
twenty
years
of
Age
they
take
a
little
more
than
half
the
weight
of
a
groat
of
it
;
from
twenty
to
thirty
,
about
the
weight
of
six
pence
;
from
thirty
to
threescore
and
ten
and
upwards
,
they
take
of
it
to
the
weight
of
about
a
shilling
,
and
never
more
.
We
saw
at
Siam
certain
Birds
Nests
which
these
People
find
to
be
rarely
good
for
Ragoes
,
Some
Particulars
concerning
certain
Birds
Nest
.
and
excellent
for
the
health
,
when
Ginseng
is
mingled
therewith
.
These
Nests
are
only
found
in
Cochinchine
upon
vast
steep
Rocks
.
Thus
they
make
use
of
them
.
They
take
a
Pullet
,
(
such
as
have
the
flesh
and
bones
black
are
the
best
,
)
they
gut
it
well
.
And
then
taking
the
Birds
Nests
,
which
have
been
steeped
in
water
till
they
are
soft
,
they
tear
them
into
small
shreds
,
and
having
mingled
them
with
Ginseng
cut
into
little
bits
,
they
put
all
together
into
the
body
of
the
Pullet
,
which
they
boil
in
a
Pot
closely
shut
until
it
be
enough
boiled
.
This
Pot
or
Pipkin
is
left
upon
the
coals
all
night
,
and
in
the
morning
they
eat
the
Pullet
,
the
Birds
Nests
and
the
Ginseng
without
any
other
Seasoning
.
After
they
have
taken
this
Remedy
sometimes
they
Sweat
,
and
if
they
can
they
'l
sleep
upon
it
.
Nobility
is
not
Hereditary
amongst
the
Siamese
,
Various
customs
of
the
Siamese
.
The
places
given
by
the
Prince
make
the
Nobles
,
and
the
distinction
of
quality
with
that
people
.
Though
their
Religion
allow
them
Polygamy
,
yet
few
of
them
have
above
one
or
two
Wives
.
As
for
the
Ladys
,
they
think
the
greatest
respect
that
can
be
shown
to
them
,
is
for
a
man
to
turn
his
back
and
not
to
look
upon
them
as
they
pass
.
The
multitude
and
magnificence
of
their
pagods
,
and
their
liberalities
to
the
Talapoins
,
are
Arguments
of
their
Piety
.
They
say
that
in
the
Kingdom
there
are
above
fourteen
thousand
Pagods
and
fifty
thousand
Talapoins
.
What
ever
is
within
those
Temples
is
looked
upon
as
Sacred
,
and
to
steal
any
thing
from
thence
is
death
;
about
five
years
agoe
five
Robbers
were
surprised
in
a
Pagod
,
and
they
were
Roasted
alive
by
a
gentle
fire
.
They
fastened
every
one
of
them
to
a
great
pole
,
and
then
having
kindled
a
fire
,
all
round
them
,
they
were
turned
there
till
they
expired
.
In
their
morning
prayers
which
they
never
miss
,
they
call
to
mind
three
things
.
God
and
the
Law
which
he
hath
left
them
to
observe
;
Their
Parents
and
the
benefits
which
they
have
received
from
them
;
Their
Priests
and
the
Reverence
they
owe
them
;
when
a
Missionary
would
speak
to
them
of
our
Religion
,
for
a
Present
he
may
have
free
access
to
them
,
and
that
also
will
dispose
them
to
hear
him
.
The
Curiosity
of
the
Siamese
to
know
things
future
.
Seing
they
live
upon
a
small
matter
,
and
that
their
countrey
supplies
them
with
all
that
is
necessary
for
life
without
much
Labour
and
Husbandry
,
they
spend
their
time
in
Idleness
.
They
improve
not
their
minds
by
any
Science
and
are
curious
about
nothing
but
future
contingences
.
To
know
such
they
not
only
consult
Astrologers
,
but
make
use
of
also
other
means
full
of
Superstitions
.
The
Lord
Constance
told
me
that
there
is
a
Cave
where
the
Siamese
go
and
offer
Sacrifices
to
the
Spirit
that
presides
in
it
,
when
they
have
a
mind
to
know
any
thing
that
they
are
in
pain
about
.
After
they
have
said
their
Prayers
there
they
come
out
and
take
the
first
word
they
hear
spoken
for
the
response
of
the
Oracle
which
they
have
consulted
.
It
sometimes
happens
that
to
punish
their
criminal
Curiosity
God
permits
that
the
event
confirms
what
they
have
learnt
by
this
way
.
Thus
some
of
the
Wives
of
the
first
Ambassadors
that
were
sent
to
France
or
board
the
Sun
of
the
East
,
being
anxious
to
know
the
Destiny
of
their
Husbands
,
whom
they
feared
they
should
never
see
again
,
made
their
Sacrifices
in
the
Cave
I
mentioned
;
and
being
afterwards
come
back
again
to
the
Town
,
in
the
Evening
they
heard
a
Woman
saying
to
her
Slaves
,
Shut
the
door
,
they
'le
return
no
more
.
They
took
these
words
as
a
presage
of
the
misfortune
that
happened
in
the
Sequel
,
and
from
that
time
bewailed
the
loss
of
their
Husbands
.
The
respect
they
have
for
the
King
goes
as
far
as
adoration
.
The
Reveren●e
the
Siame●e
have
for
their
King.
The
posture
wherein
they
are
to
be
in
his
presence
is
a
visible
mark
of
it
.
Nay
even
in
the
Council
which
sometimes
lasts
four
hours
,
the
Ministers
lye
all
the
while
prostrate
before
the
King
;
and
if
any
of
them
chance
to
faint
,
he
dares
not
rise
upon
his
knees
,
nor
sit
up
upon
the
ground
,
though
the
Prince
comm●nd
him
so
to
do
till
a
Curtain
he
drawn
before
●is
Throne
.
When
the
King
goes
abroad
,
all
must
withdraw
,
and
no
body
dares
to
be
in
his
way
but
they
who
have
express
orders
for
it
,
unless
it
be
when
he
had
a
mind
to
show
himself
to
his
people
on
certain
days
of
Ceremony
.
Strangers
also
have
Notice
given
them
to
keep
within
doors
when
the
King
is
to
go
abro●d
.
No
man
is
suffered
to
come
near
the
Palace
whil'st
he
is
there
.
One
day
as
I
was
returning
from
a
Pagod
with
a
Mandarin
who
had
carried
me
thither
in
his
Balon
,
our
Water-men
going
along
with
the
Stream
,
came
a
little
too
near
the
Walls
of
the
Palace
.
But
they
soon
stood
off
again
when
they
felt
a
shower
of
pease
flying
about
their
ears
,
which
the
S●uldiers
upon
the
guard
shot
at
them
with
Trunks
,
to
make
them
withdraw
.
The
King
holds
Council
several
times
a
day
.
The
King
holds
several
Councils
daily
,
and
that
's
his
greatest
exercise
.
None
of
his
Counsellers
dares
be
absent
,
and
if
any
of
them
chanced
to
have
extraordinary
business
,
or
to
fall
sick
,
he
ought
before
the
hour
of
Council
ask
leave
of
the
King
to
be
absent
.
Without
that
leave
no
hurry
of
business
nor
sickness
will
excuse
him
from
incurring
grievous
punishments
,
if
he
be
able
to
go
;
for
the
King
never
fails
to
send
to
know
the
reasons
of
his
absence
,
and
the
Officer
whom
the
King
sends
has
Orders
to
speak
to
the
person
himself
.
The
Kings
Daughter
hath
her
Court
and
Council
.
The
Princess
the
Kings
only
Daughter
,
hath
her
Court
and
Council
consisting
of
the
Wives
of
the
chief
Mandarins
.
She
is
witty
and
active
,
and
in
the
Government
of
the
Provinces
which
the
King
hath
given
her
,
shows
a
great
deal
of
wisdom
and
moderation
;
She
is
only
served
by
Women
,
and
no
Man
ever
saw
her
neither
publicly
nor
privately
.
When
she
goes
abroad
upon
an
Elephant
,
she
is
shut
up
in
a
kind
of
Chair
that
hinders
her
from
being
seen
.
The
Kingdom
of
Siam
descends
not
from
Father
to
Son.
In
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
the
Kings
Brothers
are
preferred
before
his
Children
in
the
Succession
to
the
Crown
,
but
it
returns
to
these
after
the
death
of
their
Uncles
.
The
present
King
has
two
Brothers
who
live
with
him
in
the
Palace
,
he
hath
also
,
according
to
the
custom
of
the
Orientals
,
an
adoptive
Son
who
accompanies
him
in
all
places
,
and
who
has
peculiar
honours
rendered
unto
him
.
The
Religion
of
the
Siamese
is
very
odd
,
and
cannot
be
perfectly
understood
but
by
the
Books
that
are
written
in
the
Balis
Language
,
which
is
the
Learned
Language
,
and
hardly
understood
by
any
,
except
some
of
their
Doctors
.
Nor
do
these
Books
neither
always
agree
amongst
themselves
.
This
following
account
of
their
Religion
is
the
most
exact
that
possibly
I
could
attain
to
.
The
Siamese
believe
a
God
,
but
they
have
not
the
same
notion
of
him
that
we
have
.
What
the
Siamese
believe
of
their
God.
By
that
word
they
understand
a
being
perfect
after
their
manner
,
consisting
of
Spirit
and
Body
,
whose
property
it
is
to
assist-men
.
That
assistance
consists
in
giving
them
a
Law
,
prescribing
them
the
ways
of
living
well
,
teaching
them
the
true
Religion
,
and
the
Sciences
that
are
necessary
unto
them
.
The
perfections
which
they
attribute
unto
him
are
all
the
moral
virtues
,
possessed
by
him
in
an
eminent
degree
acquired
by
many
acts
,
and
confirmed
by
a
continual
exercise
in
all
the
Bodies
he
hath
past
through
.
He
is
free
from
passions
,
and
feels
no
motion
that
can
alter
his
tranquillity
;
but
they
affirm
that
before
he
arrived
at
that
State
,
he
made
so
prodigious
a
change
in
his
Body
by
struggling
to
overcome
his
Passions
,
that
his
blood
is
become
white
.
He
hath
the
Power
to
appear
when
he
pleases
,
and
also
to
render
himself
invisible
to
the
eyes
of
men
;
and
he
hath
such
wonderful
agility
,
that
in
a
moment
he
can
be
in
any
place
of
the
world
he
pleases
.
The
knowledg
of
the
God
of
the
Siamese
.
He
knoweth
all
without
having
ever
learnt
any
thing
from
men
,
whose
Doctor
and
Master
he
himself
is
,
and
that
universal
knowledg
is
inherent
in
his
state
,
having
possessed
it
from
the
instant
that
he
was
born
God
;
it
consists
not
as
our
doe●
,
in
a
train
of
consequences
,
but
in
a
clear
,
simple
and
intuitive
vision
,
which
all
at
once
represents
to
him
the
Precepts
of
the
Law
,
Vices
,
Virtues
,
and
the
most
hidden
secrets
of
Nature
,
things
past
,
present
and
come
,
Heaven
,
Earth
,
Paradice
,
Hell
,
this
Universe
which
we
see
,
and
even
what
is
done
in
the
other
Worlds
which
we
know
not
.
He
distinctly
remembers
all
that
hath
ever
befallen
him
from
the
first
transmigration
of
his
Soul
,
even
to
the
last
.
His
body
is
infinitely
more
radiant
than
the
Sun
,
it
lights
that
which
is
most
hidden
,
and
by
the
help
of
the
light
that
it
diffuses
,
a
man
here
below
upon
Earth
,
might
,
that
I
may
make
use
of
their
expression
,
see
a
grain
of
Mustard
seed
placed
in
the
Highest
Heavens
.
Wherein
consists
his
happiness
.
The
happiness
of
that
God
is
not
compleat
,
but
when
he
dies
never
to
be
born
again
:
for
then
he
appears
no●
more
upon
the
Earth
,
nor
is
he
any
more
subject
to
Misery
.
They
compare
that
death
to
a
torch
extinct
,
or
to
a
sleep
that
renders
us
insensible
of
the
Evils
of
Life
,
with
this
difference
that
when
God
dies
,
he
is
exempted
from
them
for
ever
,
whereas
a
man
asleep
is
but
free
from
them
for
a
certain
time
.
This
reign
of
every
Deity
lasts
not
eternally
,
it
is
confined
to
a
certain
number
of
years
,
that
's
to
say
,
until
the
number
of
the
elect
who
are
to
be
sanctified
by
his
Merits
be
accomplished
;
after
which
he
appears
no
more
in
the
World
but
slides
into
on
Eternal
repose
,
which
was
thought
to
have
been
a
real
annihilation
,
because
they
were
not
rightly
understood
.
Then
another
God
succeeds
to
him
,
and
governs
the
Universe
in
his
place
,
which
is
nothing
else
but
to
teach
men
the
true
Religion
.
Men
may
become
Gods
,
Men
may
become
Gods.
but
not
till
after
a
very
considerable
time
;
for
they
must
needs
have
required
a
consummated
Virtue
;
Nor
is
it
enough
to
have
done
a
great
many
good
Works
in
their
Bodies
where
their
Souls
have
lodged
,
they
must
also
at
every
good
Action
they
do
,
have
an
intention
of
meriting
Divinity
,
they
m●●t
have
intimated
that
intention
,
by
invoking
and
taking
to
witness
the
Angels
who
preside
in
the
four
Parts
of
the
World
,
at
the
beginning
of
their
good
work
;
and
they
must
have
poured
out
water
,
imploring
the
Succours
of
the
She-tutelary
Angel
of
the
Earth
,
called
Naang
pprathoram
;
for
they
believe
,
as
we
shall
shew
hereafter
,
that
there
is
a
diversity
of
Sex
amongst
Angels
as
well
as
amongst
Men.
They
who
desire
to
be
Gods
carefully
observe
that
Practice
.
Besides
that
state
of
Divinity
to
which
the
most
perfect
aspire
,
there
is
another
not
so
high
,
The
Siames●
acknowledge
a
permanent
state
of
Sanctity
.
which
they
call
the
state
of
Sanctity
.
It
it
enough
for
being
a
Saint
,
that
having
past
through
several
Bodies
,
one
has
acquired
many
Virtues
,
aad
that
in
the
Acts
which
men
do
they
have
proposed
the
acquisition
of
Sanctity
.
The
Properties
of
Sanctity
are
the
same
with
those
of
Divinity
.
The
Saints
possess
them
,
as
well
as
God
does
,
but
in
a
far
more
imperfect
degree
;
besides
that
,
God
has
them
of
himself
,
without
receiving
them
from
another
,
whereas
the
Saints
derive
them
from
him
by
the
Instructions
he
gives
them
.
It
is
he
who
teaches
them
all
those
Secrets
whereof
he
hath
a
perfect
Knowledg
.
And
therefore
it
is
that
if
they
be
not
born
whilst
he
is
in
the
world
,
since
they
cannot
receive
his
Documents
,
they
are
not
sanctified
.
So
that
it
is
their
custom
in
doing
good
Works
,
to
desire
the
Grace
to
be
born
again
at
the
same
time
their
God
is
.
What
we
have
said
of
the
Deity
,
that
it
is
not
consummated
till
God
dying
upon
Earth
,
ascends
up
into
Heaven
,
that
he
may
no
more
appear
here
below
,
ought
in
like
manner
to
be
understood
of
Sanctity
;
for
it
is
not
perfect
till
the
Saints
die
,
not
to
be
born
again
,
and
till
their
Souls
be
carried
into
Paradice
,
there
to
enjoy
eternal
Felicity
.
The
Siamese
believe
a
Heaven
and
a
Hell.
These
and
the
like
are
the
Sentiments
of
these
People
touching
the
Deity
.
And
seeing
they
have
sense
enough
to
know
that
Vice
is
to
be
punished
,
and
Virtue
rewarded
,
they
believe
a
Paradice
,
where
the
Just
enjoy
the
pleasure
which
their
good
works
have
merited
,
and
a
Hell
,
where
the
wicked
receive
the
chastisement
due
unto
their
crimes
.
They
place
Paradice
in
the
highest
Heaven
,
and
Hell
in
the
Center
of
the
Earth
.
The
Pleasures
of
Paradice
and
the
Pains
of
Hell
are
not
eternal
;
they
shall
be
there
but
for
a
certain
time
,
which
is
longer
or
shorter
according
as
they
have
done
more
or
less
good
works
,
or
committed
more
or
fewer
sins
.
What
the
Siamese
believe
of
Hell.
They
say
,
that
in
Hell
there
are
Angels
who
administer
Justice
,
and
take
care
to
mark
exactly
all
the
bad
Actions
of
Men
,
examine
them
after
their
Death
,
and
with
extream
severity
punish
them
for
the
same
.
They
have
a
ridiculous
imagination
as
to
the
Judgment
that
then
passes
;
they
are
perswaded
that
the
first
of
these
Judges
,
whom
they
call
Prayomppaban
,
hath
a
Book
,
wherein
the
Life
of
every
particular
man
is
registred
,
that
he
continually
reads
it
over
,
and
that
when
he
comes
to
the
Page
which
contains
the
History
of
that
man
,
he
never
fails
to
sneeze
.
Therefore
it
is
,
say
they
,
that
we
sneeze
upon
Earth
,
and
thence
proceeds
the
Custom
they
have
of
wishing
a
happy
and
long
Life
to
all
that
sneeze
.
Hell
is
divided
into
eight
Habitations
,
which
are
,
as
it
were
,
eight
degrees
of
Pain
;
nay
,
they
believe
also
that
there
is
a
Fire
which
burns
the
damned
.
They
fancy
to
themselves
also
in
Heaven
eight
degrees
of
Beatitude
.
What
they
believe
of
Heaven
.
They
'l
have
the
same
things
to
happen
there
as
upon
Earth
;
and
affirm
that
there
are
Kings
,
Princes
and
People
there
;
that
there
they
wage
War
,
fight
Battels
,
and
obtain
Victories
;
that
Marriage
it self
is
not
banished
from
thence
;
that
in
the
first
,
second
and
third
Habitations
,
the
Saints
may
have
Children
;
that
in
the
fourth
in
fine
,
there
is
no
more
Concupiscence
nor
Marriage
;
and
so
Purity
daily
encreases
till
one
come
to
the
last
Heaven
,
which
is
properly
Paradice
,
called
in
their
Language
Niruppan
,
where
the
Souls
of
the
Saints
and
Gods
live
in
perfect
Purity
and
sovereign
Felicity
.
They
maintain
,
that
all
the
Good
or
Evil
that
happens
to
men
,
is
the
effect
of
their
good
or
bad
Works
,
and
that
one
is
never
unfortunate
and
innocent
at
the
same
time
.
Thus
Wealth
,
Honours
,
Sanctity
and
Divinity
are
the
Rewards
of
a
virtuous
Life
;
and
on
the
contrary
,
Infamy
,
Poverty
,
Diseases
,
Death
and
Hell
,
are
the
punishments
of
Sins
which
men
have
committed
.
And
whether
one
be
born
again
under
human
shape
,
or
under
the
figure
of
any
Animal
,
they
attribute
the
Advantages
wherewith
one
comes
into
the
world
,
as
Goodness
,
Gracefulness
,
Wit
,
or
Nobility
,
to
the
Merit
of
good
Works
and
natural
Deserts
;
as
Ugliness
,
Mutilation
of
Members
,
and
the
like
,
to
the
Debauches
of
this
or
the
other
Lives
which
went
before
it
.
All
these
things
,
say
they
,
are
so
many
certain
Marks
which
discover
to
us
what
Lives
men
have
led
before
they
were
born
in
this
state
,
and
this
is
the
Source
of
that
prodigious
diversity
which
appears
in
their
Conditions
,
their
Lives
and
their
Death
.
Being
prepossessed
with
these
Errors
,
they
slight
what
you
tell
them
of
Original
Sin
and
the
Effects
thereof
,
and
they
call
the
Disobedience
and
Punishment
of
our
first
Father
a
meer
Fiction
.
Upon
a
Religious
account
the
Siame
e
respect
those
who
are
any
ways
Eminent
by
the
advantages
of
body
,
mind
,
or
Fortune
.
The
Souls
of
men
that
are
born
again
in
the
World
,
come
from
three
different
Places
,
from
Heaven
,
from
Hell
,
or
out
of
the
Bodies
of
Animals
.
They
whose
Souls
come
from
Heaven
,
are
distinguished
by
some
advantageous
Signs
;
they
have
for
their
share
,
Virtue
,
Beauty
,
Health
,
Wealth
,
and
they
are
born
great
Men
and
handsom
Princes
.
Upon
this
Principle
these
People
shew
great
respect
for
men
of
Dignity
,
or
of
an
illustrious
Extraction
,
because
they
look
upon
them
as
those
who
are
shortly
to
be
deified
or
sanctified
,
s●eing
they
have
done
good
Works
enough
to
merit
that
high
Rank
of
Honour
to
which
they
are
raised
.
They
whose
Souls
come
out
of
the
Bodies
of
other
Animals
,
are
less
perfect
than
the
former
;
but
far
more
however
,
than
those
that
come
from
Hell.
They
look
upon
these
last
as
Rogues
,
whose
Crimes
make
them
deserve
all
kinds
of
Disasters
.
And
thence
proceeds
the
Horror
which
the
Siamese
have
for
the
Cross
of
Christ
.
For
,
in
short
,
do
they
answer
when
one
speaks
to
them
about
that
,
if
he
had
been
a
just
man
,
his
Justice
and
good
Works
would
have
saved
him
from
the
shameful
punishment
he
suffered
,
and
protected
him
from
the
fury
of
his
Enemies
.
They
distinguish
two
things
in
Sin
,
They
know
the
punishment
and
guilt
of
Sin.
the
guilt
and
the
punishment
reserved
in
Hell
for
the
Sinner
.
The
punishment
may
very
well
be
remitted
or
lessened
in
this
Life
by
good
works
and
good
resolutions
,
but
the
guilt
is
never
blotted
out
till
one
be
first
punished
by
Death
or
other
Miseries
.
In
the
punishing
of
Sins
,
the
Law
of
like
for
like
is
exactly
observed
;
for
if
you
have
killed
a
man
,
you
shall
die
a
violent
death
in
this
Life
or
in
another
.
If
you
have
killed
a
Serpent
,
a
Serpent
shall
sting
you
to
death
;
if
you
have
robbed
any
Birds
Nest
,
and
carried
away
her
young
,
you
shall
one
day
be
,
after
one
or
more
transmigrations
,
snatched
out
of
the
arms
of
your
Parents
in
your
tenderest
Infancy
,
and
forsaken
of
those
that
could
any
way
assist
you
.
Nay
,
their
God
himself
had
not
the
power
to
exempt
himself
from
that
rigorous
Law
;
for
at
the
age
of
fourscore
and
two
years
he
was
put
to
death
by
a
Monster
called
Man
,
whom
heretofore
he
had
killed
at
the
like
age
under
the
shape
of
a
Pig.
If
the
Fault
a
man
hath
committed
in
his
Life-time
be
but
slight
,
he
may
by
the
good
he
does
,
or
by
the
good
will
he
has
to
do
so
,
merit
that
the
punishment
which
he
ought
to
suffer
in
Hell
,
be
remitted
either
wholly
,
or
in
part
at
least
.
But
if
the
Sin
be
grievous
,
no
good
Works
can
expiate
it
;
he
must
blot
it
out
by
suffering
in
Hell
all
the
pains
that
it
deserves
.
And
this
hath
given
ground
to
a
Tradition
received
amongst
them
,
that
God
neither
could
,
nor
as
yet
can
deliver
his
Brother
from
the
pains
of
Hell
,
to
which
he
is
condemned
.
So
,
there
is
not
any
good
Action
but
what
is
rewarded
in
Heaven
,
nor
any
Crime
but
what
is
punished
in
Hell.
Hence
they
conclude
,
that
when
a
man
dies
upon
Earth
,
he
acquires
a
new
Life
in
Heaven
,
that
here
he
may
enjoy
the
happiness
that
is
due
to
his
good
Works
;
and
that
the
time
of
his
Reward
being
finished
,
he
dies
in
Heaven
that
he
may
be
born
again
in
Hell
;
if
he
lie
under
any
considerable
sin
;
that
if
it
be
only
a
slight
fault
he
is
guilty
of
,
he
enters
again
into
the
world
under
the
shape
of
some
Animal
,
and
having
in
that
state
satisfied
Justice
,
becomes
man
again
as
before
.
In
this
manner
they
explain
the
Metempsychosis
,
which
is
one
of
the
fundamental
Points
of
their
Religion
:
so
that
the
Life
of
Man
is
pent
in
continual
transmigrations
,
until
he
be
sanctified
,
or
hath
deserved
to
be
a
God.
They
allow
of
Spirits
;
but
these
Spirits
are
nothing
else
but
Souls
which
still
inform
some-body
until
they
attain
to
Sanctity
or
Divinity
.
They
believe
Angels
to
be
corporal
.
Angels
are
corporal
,
and
as
there
are
different
Sexes
amongst
them
,
so
they
may
beget
Sons
and
Daughters
.
These
Angels
are
never
sanctified
nor
deified
.
It
is
their
part
only
to
take
continual
care
of
the
Preservation
of
Men
,
and
of
the
Government
of
the
Universe
.
They
distribute
them
into
seven
Orders
or
Hierarchies
;
whereof
some
are
more
perfect
and
noble
than
o●hers
,
and
they
place
them
in
so
many
different
Heavens
.
Each
part
of
the
world
hath
one
of
these
Intelligences
,
that
presides
over
all
that
is
done
there
.
They
assign
them
also
to
Stars
,
the
Earth
,
Towns
,
Mountains
,
Forests
,
nay
even
to
the
Wind
and
Rain
.
And
because
they
are
perswaded
that
these
Angels
are
constantly
busied
in
examining
the
conduct
of
Men
,
and
that
they
are
witnesses
of
all
their
Actions
,
to
reward
such
as
are
laudable
,
by
virtue
of
the
Merits
of
their
God
;
it
is
to
these
Intelligences
,
and
not
to
their
God
,
that
they
are
wont
to
apply
themselves
in
their
Necessities
and
Miseries
;
and
they
thank
them
for
the
Favours
which
they
think
they
have
received
from
them
.
They
acknowledg
no
other
Devils
but
the
Souls
of
the
wicked
,
They
acknowledge
no
other
Devils
but
damned
Souls
.
which
coming
out
of
hell
where
they
were
detained
,
for
a
certain
time
roam
about
the
World
,
and
do
men
all
the
mischief
they
can
.
Among
those
wretched
Spirits
,
they
also
r●ckon
Children
still
born
,
Women
that
die
in
Child-Bed
,
those
that
are
killed
in
Duels
,
or
who
are
guilty
of
some
other
Crimes
of
that
nature
.
They
relate
strange
things
of
some
Anchorites
,
whom
they
call
Ppra
Rasi
,
They
tell
str●nge
stories
of
certain
Anchorites
.
who
retreating
into
dismal
Solitudes
and
thick
Woods
,
lead
a
most
hol●
and
most
austere
Life
.
These
Solitaries
,
according
to
their
Books
,
have
a
most
perfect
knowledg
of
the
most
hidden
Secrets
of
Nature
.
They
can
make
Gold
,
Silver
and
the
most
precious
Metals
.
The
most
astonishing
Miracle
is
not
above
their
power
.
They
take
all
the
shapes
they
please
,
fly
in
the
Air
,
and
in
an
instant
are
where
they
have
a
mind
to
be
.
But
though
these
extraordinary
men
might
render
themselves
immortal
,
because
they
know
the
means
of
prolonging
Life
,
yet
every
thousand
years
they
sacrifice
it
to
God
,
by
consuming
themselves
upon
a
Funeral
Pile
,
all
but
one
,
who
remains
to
raise
the
rest
by
virtue
of
his
Charms
.
It
is
no
less
dangerous
than
difficult
,
to
meet
with
these
miraculous
Men
;
for
nothing
less
than
Life
is
risked
by
the
Rencounter
.
Nevertheless
one
may
learn
in
the
Books
of
the
Talapoins
,
the
way
that
is
to
be
taken
,
and
the
means
which
are
to
be
made
use
of
for
attaining
to
the
places
where
they
are
.
Their
Belief
touchin●
the
Eternity
of
the
World.
They
reckon
the
Heaven
and
Earth
to
be
uncreated
and
eternal
,
and
cannot
conceive
how
the
World
could
ever
have
a
beginning
,
or
that
it
should
have
an
end
.
They
'l
have
every
Star
and
Planet
to
be
the
habitation
of
a
particular
Angel.
They
reckon
only
seven
Planets
,
and
the
Names
they
give
them
serve
also
for
the
seven
Days
of
the
Week
,
as
in
the
Latin
Tongue
.
After
all
,
the
Stars
are
fastened
to
no
Body
,
they
hang
in
the
Air
,
and
have
their
particular
Motions
.
The
Earth
in
the
opinion
of
the
Siamese
is
flat
and
square
.
The
Earth
,
in
their
Philosophy
,
is
not
round
,
it
is
only
a
flat
Surface
;
they
divide
it
into
four
square
parts
,
which
they
call
Thavip
.
The
Waters
,
by
which
those
four
parts
are
separated
,
not
being
navigable
,
because
of
their
extream
subtility
,
hinder
the
commerce
that
they
might
have
one
with
another
.
The
whole
Earth
is
encompassed
with
an
extreamly
strong
and
very
high
Wall.
On
this
Wall
all
the
Secrets
of
Nature
are
engraven
in
great
Characters
,
and
there
it
is
that
these
wonderful
Hermits
whom
I
mentioned
,
learn
all
the
admirable
things
they
know
;
for
they
easily
conveigh
themselves
thither
with
that
surprizing
agility
they
are
endowed
with
.
As
to
the
men
of
the
other
three
Parts
of
the
World
,
they
have
a
Countenance
much
different
from
ours
:
for
the
Inhabitants
of
the
first
have
a
square
Face
,
of
the
second
a
round
,
and
of
the
third
a
triangular
.
Whatsoever
diversity
of
Faces
there
may
be
amongst
the
Inhabitants
of
those
three
several
Parts
of
the
World
,
yet
in
every
particular
part
they
look
so
like
one
another
,
that
it
would
be
hard
to
tell
who
is
who
,
if
men
had
not
another
way
to
distinguish
those
with
whom
they
live
.
The
different
Inclinations
that
People
have
for
different
persons
,
is
the
Standard
of
discrimination
.
Thus
a
Father
distinguishes
his
Son
from
his
Wife
and
Friend
,
because
he
finds
the
Love
he
has
for
his
Son
to
be
quite
different
from
that
which
he
has
for
his
Wife
or
his
Friend
.
There
is
this
difference
besides
betwixt
the
three
other
Parts
and
ours
,
that
all
good
things
abound
in
those
without
any
mixture
of
evil
;
and
that
what
things
they
eat
takes
what
relish
one
pleases
by
virtue
of
a
certain
Tree
which
they
invoke
when
at
any
time
they
are
in
need
.
Hence
it
is
that
no
Charity
nor
Virtue
can
be
practised
there
.
And
because
there
is
no
occasion
of
meriting
there
,
men
cannot
acquire
Sanctity
,
nor
receive
any
punishment
;
which
makes
them
earnestly
desire
to
be
born
again
in
the
Part
which
we
inhabit
,
where
many
occasions
of
well-doing
are
to
be
found
.
They
obtain
that
favour
when
they
beg
it
by
the
Merits
of
God
,
who
hath
run
over
all
those
places
,
though
they
be
inaccessible
to
us
.
The
System
of
the
Siamese
.
In
the
middle
of
the
four
Parts
of
the
World
there
is
an
exceeding
high
Mountain
,
called
in
Siamese
Ppukhan
Pprasamen
.
It
rests
upon
three
precious
Stones
,
very
little
ones
,
its
true
,
but
strong
and
solid
enough
to
support
it
.
Round
this
Mountain
the
Sun
and
Moon
continually
turn
,
and
by
the
daily
revolution
of
those
two
Luminaries
,
Day
and
Night
are
made
.
This
great
Mountain
is
environed
by
three
Rows
of
lesser
Hills
,
of
which
,
there
is
one
all
of
Gold.
The
great
Mountain
is
inaccessible
,
because
the
Water
that
surrounds
it
is
not
navigable
.
As
for
the
Mountain
of
Gold
,
a
fearful
Gulf
renders
the
approach
to
it
most
difficult
.
It
is
true
,
a
rich
man
heretofore
got
to
it
,
but
it
was
with
extream
danger
of
being
lost
in
that
Abyss
,
whither
all
the
Waters
come
and
muster
,
and
from
whence
afterward
they
gush
out
to
make
the
Sea
and
Rivers
.
The
whole
Mass
of
Earth
hath
underneath
it
a
vast
extent
of
Waters
,
which
support
it
as
the
Sea
bears
up
a
Ship.
These
inferior
Waters
have
a
communication
with
those
that
are
upon
the
Earth
,
by
means
of
the
Gulf
I
have
been
speaking
of
.
An
impetuous
Wind
holds
the
Waters
under
the
Earth
suspended
,
and
this
Wind
,
which
exists
of
it self
,
and
has
no
cause
,
blowing
from
all
eternity
with
incredible
violence
,
drives
them
continually
back
,
and
hinders
them
falling
.
When
the
time
is
come
that
the
God
of
the
Siamese
hath
foretold
,
that
he
shall
cease
to
reign
,
then
the
Fire
of
Heaven
falling
upon
the
Earth
,
shall
reduce
into
Ashes
every
thing
that
comes
in
its
way
,
and
the
Earth
being
so
purified
,
shall
be
restored
again
to
its
former
state
.
But
you
must
know
what
is
to
go
before
this
universal
Renovation
.
They
say
,
that
heretofore
when
God
was
still
living
upon
Earth
,
men
had
the
stature
of
Giants
,
enjoyed
perfect
Health
during
several
Ages
,
were
ignorant
of
nothing
,
and
above
all
,
being
instructed
in
the
obligations
of
the
Law
,
led
a
pure
and
innocent
life
,
and
were
religious
Observers
of
their
Promises
.
In
process
of
time
they
lost
all
these
Advantages
,
and
at
long
run
they
'l
become
so
weak
and
little
,
that
hardly
will
they
be
a
foot
high
.
In
that
state
their
Life
will
be
very
short
,
and
nevertheless
they
'l
grow
up
in
wickedness
,
until
at
length
,
in
the
last
times
they
'l
give
themselves
over
to
the
most
ignominious
Crimes
.
Then
they
shall
have
no
more
Law
nor
Scriptures
;
but
being
buried
in
most
profound
Ignorance
,
shall
forget
the
very
Name
of
Virtue
.
And
that
makes
them
say
that
the
end
of
the
World
draws
nigh
,
because
there
is
nothing
now
but
corruption
in
it
,
and
so
little
Sincerity
and
Faithfulness
amongst
men
,
that
they
seem
to
be
arrived
at
the
highest
pitch
of
wickedness
.
Moreover
these
great
Changes
shall
be
observed
in
Beasts
as
well
as
men
,
and
they
shall
degenerate
by
little
and
little
.
Nay
,
they
have
already
lost
the
use
of
Speech
,
which
,
whilst
God
lived
upon
the
Earth
,
was
granted
them
through
his
Merits
.
Prodigies
which
the
Siamese
expect
before
the
birth
of
a
new
God.
They
gave
liberty
to
Beasts
,
thinking
them
capable
of
good
and
evil
,
and
worthy
of
punishment
and
reward
.
In
the
three
last
Ages
six
new
Suns
shall
successively
appear
,
and
every
one
of
them
shall
enlighten
the
World
for
the
space
of
fifty
years
.
These
six
new
Luminaries
shall
by
degrees
dry
up
the
Sea
,
kill
the
Trees
and
Animals
,
and
even
consume
Mankind
.
After
all
these
Prodigies
,
a
Fire
,
which
they
call
Phai
Balatran
,
descending
from
Heaven
,
shall
burn
the
Earth
;
the
Heights
thereof
shall
be
made
plain
by
it
,
and
no
more
Inequalities
will
remain
therein
.
Then
the
Earth
covered
over
with
dust
and
ashes
,
shall
be
purified
by
the
blast
of
a
boisterous
Wind
,
which
shall
carry
off
these
Remains
of
the
Worlds
Conflagration
;
and
after
that
,
it
shall
breath
out
so
sweat
a
Smell
as
shall
draw
a
Female
Angel
down
from
Heaven
,
that
will
eat
of
this
purified
Earth
.
She
is
to
pay
dear
for
that
Pleasure
;
for
to
expiate
it
,
she
shall
be
obliged
to
live
here
below
,
and
never
be
able
to
ascend
to
Heaven
again
.
This
Intelligence
shall
by
the
Piece
she
hath
eaten
,
conceive
twelve
Sons
and
as
many
Daughters
,
who
will
re-people
the
World.
The
Men
that
spring
from
them
shall
be
ignorant
,
blockish
,
not
knowing
one
another
at
first
;
and
after
they
shall
come
to
know
one
another
,
they
shall
be
ignorant
of
the
Law
,
and
not
come
to
the
knowledg
of
it
till
after
a
long
space
of
time
,
which
they
call
Cap.
To
explain
the
duration
of
that
time
,
they
suppose
a
deep
Well
twenty
fathom
square
;
if
there
be
a
grain
of
Mustard-se●d
yearly
thrown
into
this
well
,
the
time
that
is
required
to
fill
it
up
,
is
that
which
they
call
Cap.
This
space
of
Time
being
expired
,
a
God
shall
be
born
again
,
who
shall
scatter
the
darkness
of
the
Ignorance
wherein
they
were
,
by
teaching
them
the
true
Religion
,
discovering
to
them
the
Virtues
that
are
to
be
practised
,
and
the
Vices
to
be
shunned
,
and
instructing
them
in
all
Sciences
.
He
will
give
them
Scriptures
that
shall
explain
these
things
,
and
the
holy
Law
that
for
a
long
time
had
been
blotted
out
of
the
Minds
of
Men
,
shall
be
of
new
again
graven
in
them
by
the
Cares
and
Merits
of
that
Deity
.
This
is
the
only
Employment
which
they
think
suitable
to
the
Dignity
of
God
,
whilst
he
is
upon
Earth
;
for
they
reckon
it
below
him
to
mind
the
Government
of
the
World
,
to
take
care
of
Men
and
Beasts
,
and
to
produce
all
that
the
Universe
brings
forth
:
and
in
this
manner
it
is
that
the
World
shall
be
from
time
to
time
renewed
to
all
Eternity
.
I
thought
it
fit
to
premise
all
these
things
before
I
came
to
speak
of
Sommonokhodom
(
so
the
Siamese
call
the
God
whom
at
present
they
adore
)
because
they
are
necessary
to
the
understanding
of
his
History
.
That
History
,
after
all
,
Sommonokhodom
is
the
Last
God
of
the
Siamese
.
is
a
monstrous
mixture
of
Christianity
and
the
most
ridiculous
Fables
.
It
is
at
first
supposed
that
Sommonokhodom
was
born
God
by
his
own
virtue
;
and
that
immediately
after
his
Birth
,
without
the
help
of
any
Master
,
to
instruct
him
,
he
acquired
by
a
meer
glance
of
his
Mind
,
a
perfect
knowledg
of
all
things
relating
to
Heaven
,
the
Earth
,
Paradice
,
Hell
,
and
the
most
impenetrable
Secrets
of
Nature
;
that
at
the
same
time
he
remembred
all
that
ever
he
had
done
in
the
different
Lives
he
had
led
;
and
that
after
he
had
taught
the
People
those
great
Matters
,
he
left
them
wri●en
in
Books
,
that
Posterity
might
be
the
better
for
them
.
In
these
Books
he
reports
of
himself
,
Fables
which
the
●alapoins
relat●
of
their
God.
that
being
become
God
,
one
day
he
desired
to
manifest
his
Divinity
to
Men
by
some
extraordinary
Prodigy
,
He
then
sate
under
a
Tree
called
Ton
ppô
,
which
for
that
reason
the
Siamese
reverence
as
some
sacred
thing
,
and
look
upon
it
as
a
happy
Presage
for
the
places
where
it
grows
,
being
perswaded
that
it
would
be
a
great
sin
to
do
the
least
hurt
to
that
Tree
.
He
adds
,
that
presently
he
found
himself
carried
up
into
the
Air
in
a
Throne
all
shining
with
Gold
and
precious
Stones
,
which
came
out
of
the
Earth
in
the
place
where
he
was
;
and
that
at
the
same
instant
Angels
coming
down
from
Heaven
,
rendered
him
the
Honours
and
Adorations
that
were
due
unto
him
.
His
Brother
Thevathat
and
his
Followers
could
not
without
extream
Jealousie
behold
the
Glory
and
Majesty
that
environed
him
.
Thevathat
Sommonokhodoms
younger
brother
makes
war
against
him
.
They
conspired
his
Ruin
,
and
having
stirred
up
the
Beasts
against
him
,
engaged
with
him
in
a
War
.
Though
he
was
all
alone
,
he
was
not
terrified
by
that
multitude
of
Enemies
,
he
resisted
all
their
Attempts
without
being
shaken
,
and
by
virtue
of
his
good
works
which
defended
him
,
the
shafts
they
darted
at
him
,
were
changed
into
so
many
Flowers
,
which
far
from
hurting
him
,
served
only
to
encrease
his
Honour
.
In
the
mean
time
he
confesses
that
in
the
brunt
of
the
Battle
,
when
he
was
most
in
danger
,
it
was
but
in
vain
that
he
had
his
recourse
to
the
good
works
he
had
done
in
keeping
the
Nine
first
Commandments
of
the
Law
,
which
he
found
were
not
sufficient
to
defend
him
in
this
pressing
Necessity
.
But
being
armed
with
the
tenth
Command
,
which
he
had
inviolably
observed
,
and
which
enjoyns
the
practice
of
Charity
towards
Men
and
Beasts
,
he
easily
triumphed
over
his
Enemies
;
and
in
this
manner
he
obtained
that
Victory
.
The
Female
Guardian-Angel
of
the
Earth
(
for
we
have
already
distinguished
two
Sexes
amongst
the
Angels
)
coming
to
him
,
Sommonokhodom
assisted
by
the
Female
tutelary
.
Angel
of
the
Earth
triumphs
over
his
Enemies
.
at
first
adored
him
,
then
turning
towards
Thevathat
and
his
Adherents
,
she
made
known
to
them
that
Sommonokhodom
was
really
become
God.
She
told
them
,
that
she
had
been
a
Witness
of
his
good
Works
;
and
to
convince
them
of
that
shewed
them
her
own
Hair
still
dropping
with
the
Waters
that
he
poured
out
in
the
beginning
of
his
good
Actions
.
Hence
came
the
●uperstitious
Custom
of
the
Siamese
of
shedding
Water
in
the
beginning
of
their
good
works
,
whereof
we
have
spoken
several
times
already
,
and
which
the
Siamese
religiously
observe
since
that
time
.
In
fine
,
she
exhorted
them
to
render
him
the
Adorations
that
he
deserved
;
but
finding
them
to
be
hardned
and
obstinately
resolved
not
to
hearken
to
her
Remonstrances
,
she
squeezed
her
wet
hair
,
and
pressed
out
of
them
an
Ocean
of
Water
,
wherein
they
were
all
drowned
.
It
is
also
found
written
in
the
Books
of
Sommonokhodom
,
The
Poppery
which
the
Talapoins
tell
of
Sommonokhodom
.
that
from
the
time
he
aspired
to
be
God
,
he
had
returned
into
the
World
five
hundred
and
fifty
times
under
various
shapes
;
that
in
every
Regeneration
,
he
had
been
always
the
Chief
,
and
,
as
it
were
,
Prince
of
the
Animals
under
whose
shape
he
was
born
;
that
many
times
he
had
given
his
Life
for
his
Subjects
,
and
that
being
a
Monkey
,
he
had
delivered
a
Town
from
a
horrible
Monster
that
wasted
it
;
that
he
had
been
a
most
potent
King
,
and
that
seven
days
before
he
obtained
the
Sovereign
Dominion
of
the
Universe
,
he
had
retired
in
imitation
of
some
Anchorites
,
with
his
Wife
and
two
Children
into
remote
Solitudes
;
that
there
he
was
dead
to
the
World
and
his
Passions
in
such
a
degree
that
without
being
moved
he
suffered
a
Baramen
who
had
a
mind
to
try
his
Patience
and
carry
away
his
Son
and
Daughter
,
and
torment
them
before
his
face
.
Nay
his
mortification
went
a
great
deal
farther
,
for
he
even
gave
his
Wife
to
a
poor
Man
that
begged
an
Alms
,
and
having
put
out
his
own
eyes
he
sacrificed
himself
by
distributing
his
flesh
amongst
the
Beasts
,
to
stay
the
hunger
that
pressed
them
.
From
thence
they
take
occasion
again
to
find
fault
with
the
Christian
Religion
,
which
enjoyns
not
Men
to
comfort
and
assist
Beasts
in
their
necessities
.
These
are
the
rare
actions
which
the
Talapoins
in
their
Sermons
propose
to
the
people
for
imitation
,
and
the
examples
they
make
use
of
to
encline
them
to
virtue
.
Thevathat
killed
his
Brother
Sommonokhodom
when
they
were
Apes
.
What
is
Recorded
of
Thevathat
in
the
same
Books
is
no
less
extraordinary
nor
Fabulous
.
There
we
learn
that
he
was
always
born
again
with
his
Brother
Sommonokhodom
,
in
the
same
kind
as
he
was
:
but
still
inferiour
in
Dignity
,
because
Sommonokhodom
was
the
Prince
of
the
Animals
whose
shape
he
took
.
But
Thevathat
aspiring
also
to
Divinity
,
and
not
endeavouring
any
thing
above
himself
,
would
never
submit
to
his
Brother
.
On
the
contrary
,
he
endeavoured
by
continual
Revolts
to
disturb
his
Reign
,
and
omitted
nothing
that
he
might
deprive
him
of
the
Empire
,
wherein
,
at
length
he
succeeded
in
some
manner
;
for
he
killed
him
when
both
of
them
were
Apes
.
What
we
saw
during
our
abode
in
Siam
,
did
but
too
much
convince
us
,
how
far
the
People
are
infatuated
with
such
Fables
.
A
young
Church-man
maintaining
a
position
of
Divinity
in
presence
of
my
Lord
Ambassador
,
some
Talapoins
came
thither
out
of
curiosity
,
and
amongst
others
the
superiour
of
one
of
their
most
famous
Monasteries
.
This
Man
asked
what
they
were
disputing
about
with
so
much
heat
,
and
being
answered
that
they
were
speaking
of
God
,
and
of
matters
concerning
that
first
Being
:
Likely
enough
,
replied
the
Talapoin
,
the
stress
of
the
Disputation
rests
upon
the
great
labours
and
the
death
his
enemies
made
him
suffer
,
whilst
he
was
a
Monkey
.
Let
us
now
return
to
the
fabulous
Story
of
Thevathat
.
Being
a
person
of
much
wit
and
address
,
Thevathat
makes
a
Schism
and
declares
himself
against
his
Brother
.
he
found
the
way
to
make
a
new
Sect
,
wherein
he
engaged
several
Kings
and
much
People
,
who
embraced
his
Doctrine
and
imitated
his
examples
.
That
was
the
Original
of
a
Schism
which
divided
the
world
into
two
parts
,
and
gave
a
beginning
to
two
Religions
,
whereas
before
that
all
Mankind
had
but
one
.
Some
,
of
whom
they
reckon
us
for
the
Reasons
we
shall
presently
alledge
,
became
the
Disciples
of
Thevathat
,
and
the
rest
of
Sammonokhodom
.
Thevathat
tho
he
was
but
the
younger
,
finding
himself
supported
by
so
many
Princes
,
who
espoused
his
quarrel
,
employed
open
Force
and
Treason
to
Ruin
his
elder
Brother
.
He
invented
the
most
heinous
Calumnies
to
blacken
his
Reputation
;
but
these
Designs
succeeded
not
.
Nay
he
was
oftner
than
once
overcome
,
when
to
confirm
his
followers
in
the
Faith
which
he
had
taught
them
,
he
had
the
boldness
to
contend
with
his
Brother
who
should
work
the
greatest
Miracles
.
Thevathat
conspiring
to
to
be
God
,
is
with
his
Followers
deprived
of
many
knowledges
.
Ambition
made
him
desire
to
be
God
,
but
not
being
really
so
,
he
was
ignorant
of
a
great
many
things
,
which
his
Brother
perfectly
knew
,
and
because
his
haughtiness
would
not
suffer
him
to
listen
to
Sommonokhodom
,
he
did
not
learn
of
him
what
was
done
in
Hell
and
Paradise
,
nor
the
Doctrine
of
the
Transmigration
of
Souls
,
nor
yet
the
changes
that
had
been
and
were
to
be
in
all
ages
,
from
whence
they
conclude
that
it
is
not
to
be
wondred
at
,
if
we
who
are
his
Disciples
find
nothing
of
all
those
things
in
the
Books
he
hath
left
us
;
if
our
Scriptures
be
full
of
obscurities
and
doubts
,
and
that
if
being
wholly
ignorant
of
Divinity
,
we
have
so
great
a
mind
to
reason
and
dispute
with
them
.
For
since
Thevathat
our
Master
knew
nothing
of
that
himself
,
he
could
not
instruct
us
therein
.
Hence
is
it
also
that
we
are
ignorant
of
the
secret
of
curing
Men
,
of
preserving
them
from
all
evils
,
of
making
Gold
and
Silver
,
and
of
discovering
those
precious
Metals
in
the
places
where
they
are
hid
.
For
they
believe
that
there
are
vast
Treasures
in
certain
unknown
places
,
but
that
I
know
not
what
supernatural
Virtue
hinders
us
from
perceiving
them
;
or
if
we
do
see
them
,
it
makes
them
appear
to
us
under
a
shape
and
figure
which
imposes
upon
our
sight
.
They
also
object
to
us
that
we
cannot
work
many
prodigies
,
which
they
pretend
they
can
do
,
and
are
the
Essence
of
Magick
,
because
Thevathat
having
as
little
skill
that
way
as
in
all
the
rest
,
he
could
not
teach
us
.
But
tho
Thevathat
was
not
God
,
and
that
by
consequence
he
had
neither
the
agility
nor
subtilty
of
Body
,
nor
the
other
perfections
of
Divinity
,
yet
he
excelled
in
several
Sciences
,
especially
in
the
Mathematicks
and
Geometry
.
Now
as
it
is
of
him
,
if
we
'll
take
their
word
for
it
,
that
we
have
received
these
knowledges
,
it
is
no
wonder
if
we
be
good
Geometricians
,
and
be
perfectly
well
skilled
in
other
arts
.
In
the
new
Doctrine
which
he
published
he
foisted
in
a
great
many
things
,
The
Talapoins
perswade
the
Siamese
that
the
Christian
Religion
is
taken
out
of
the
Law
which
Sommonokhodom
taught
them
.
which
he
had
taken
out
of
his
Brothers
Religion
:
and
that
hath
rendred
both
Laws
so
like
one
another
in
several
points
.
They
differ
however
,
in
that
Thevathats
Law
is
far
less
severe
than
that
of
Sommonokhodom
;
for
it
allows
Men
a
great
liberty
of
killing
and
eating
Animals
,
tho'
the
use
of
them
be
unlawful
and
criminal
.
From
the
Doctrine
of
Thevathat
as
out
of
a
source
of
Schism
seven
other
Sects
are
sprung
which
have
a
great
deal
of
affinity
one
with
another
,
and
that
Tradition
they
apply
to
the
Heresies
of
the
Dutch
,
English
,
and
other
people
separated
from
the
Church
of
Rome
;
for
they
look
upon
them
as
so
many
shoots
sprung
from
our
Religion
,
and
that
confirms
them
the
more
in
their
Opinions
.
After
all
the
outrages
that
Thevathat
had
done
to
his
Brother
without
any
respect
to
Nature
or
even
to
Divinity
.
Thevathat
is
punished
in
Hell
for
having
persecuted
his
Brother
It
was
but
just
he
should
be
punished
.
And
so
the
Siamese
Scriptures
make
mention
of
his
punishment
,
and
Sommonokhodom
himself
relates
that
after
he
became
God
,
he
saw
that
wicked
Brother
of
his
in
the
deepest
place
of
Hell.
He
was
in
the
eight
Habitation
,
that
is
to
say
,
in
the
place
where
the
greatest
Offenders
are
tormented
,
and
there
by
a
terrible
punishment
,
he
expiated
,
all
the
sins
that
he
had
committed
,
and
especially
the
injuries
he
had
done
to
me
.
Explaining
afterwards
the
pains
which
Thevathat
was
made
to
suffer
,
he
says
that
he
was
fastened
to
a
Cross
with
great
nails
,
which
piercing
his
hands
and
feet
,
put
him
to
extreme
pain
,
that
on
his
head
he
had
a
Crown
of
Thorns
,
that
his
Body
was
full
of
wounds
,
and
to
compleat
his
Misery
,
the
Infernal
place
burnt
him
without
consuming
of
him
.
So
sad
a
spectacle
moved
him
to
compassion
;
he
forgot
all
the
wrongs
his
Brother
had
done
him
,
and
could
not
see
him
in
that
condition
without
taking
a
resolution
to
help
him
.
He
proposed
to
him
then
these
three
words
to
be
adored
,
Ppu
thang
,
Thamang
,
Sangkhang
;
sacred
and
mysterious
words
for
which
the
Siamese
have
a
profound
veneration
,
and
whereof
the
first
signifies
God
,
the
second
the
word
of
God
,
and
the
third
the
imitator
of
God
;
promising
him
,
that
if
he
would
accept
so
easie
and
reasonable
a
condition
,
to
deliver
him
from
all
the
pains
to
which
he
was
condemned
.
Thevathat
consented
to
adore
the
first
two
words
,
but
he
never
would
adore
the
third
,
because
it
signified
Priest
or
Imitator
of
God
,
protesting
that
Priests
were
sinful
Men
that
deserved
no
respect
.
To
punish
him
for
that
Pride
,
he
still
suffers
and
will
suffer
for
a
great
many
years
to
come
.
The
Talapoins
take
the
Siamese
off
from
turning
Christians
,
by
perswading
them
that
Jesus
Christ
is
Thevathat
the
Brother
of
their
God.
Tho
there
be
many
things
that
keep
the
Siamese
at
a
distance
from
the
Christian
Law
,
yet
one
may
say
,
nothing
makes
them
more
averse
from
it
than
this
thought
.
The
similitude
that
is
to
be
found
in
some
points
betwixt
their
Religion
and
ours
,
making
them
believe
that
Jesus
Christ
,
is
the
very
same
with
that
Thevathat
mentioned
in
their
Scriptures
,
they
are
perswaded
that
seeing
we
are
the
Disciples
of
the
one
,
we
are
also
the
followers
of
the
other
,
and
the
fear
they
have
of
falling
into
Hell
with
Thevathat
,
if
they
follow
his
Doctrine
,
suffers
them
not
to
hearken
to
the
propositions
that
are
made
to
them
of
embracing
Christianity
.
That
which
most
confirms
them
in
their
prejudice
,
is
that
we
adore
the
Image
of
our
Crucified
Saviour
,
which
plainly
represents
the
punishment
of
Thevathat
.
So
when
we
would
explain
to
them
the
Articles
of
our
Faith
;
they
take
us
always
up
short
,
saying
that
they
do
not
need
our
Instructions
,
and
that
they
know
already
better
than
we
do
,
what
we
have
a
mind
to
tell
them
.
But
it
is
time
to
return
to
Sommonokhodom
whose
Story
we
have
interrupted
;
he
had
run
over
the
World
,
declaring
to
Mankind
good
and
evil
,
and
teaching
them
the
true
Religion
,
which
he
himself
wrought
that
he
might
leave
it
to
Posterity
.
He
had
even
gained
several
Disciples
,
who
in
the
condition
of
Priests
were
to
make
a
particular
Profession
of
imitating
him
,
in
wearing
a
habit
like
to
his
,
and
in
observing
the
Rules
that
he
gave
them
,
when
,
at
length
,
he
attained
to
the
fourscore
and
second
year
of
his
age
,
which
was
also
the
Age
of
that
Monster
,
which
heretofore
he
killed
as
we
have
already
said
.
One
day
as
he
sate
in
the
middle
of
his
Disciples
teaching
them
,
he
saw
the
same
Monster
in
shape
of
a
Pig
,
running
with
incredible
Fury
,
and
he
made
no
doubt
but
that
it
had
a
design
to
be
revenged
.
Knowing
then
that
the
time
of
his
departure
out
of
the
World
drew
nigh
,
he
foretold
it
to
his
Disciples
,
and
shortly
after
having
eaten
a
piece
of
the
Pig
which
he
had
seen
,
he
was
taken
with
a
violent
Cholic
which
killed
him
.
His
Soul
ascended
to
the
eight
Heaven
,
Wherein
consists
the
Annihilation
of
the
Siamese
God.
which
is
properly
Paradise
called
Nyruppaam
,
it
is
no
more
subject
to
miseries
and
pain
,
but
there
enjoys
perfect
bliss
.
For
that
reason
it
will
never
be
born
again
,
and
that
is
the
thing
they
call
being
annihilated
.
For
by
that
term
they
understand
not
the
total
destruction
of
a
thing
reduced
to
nothing
;
but
their
meaning
is
,
that
one
appears
no
more
upon
Earth
,
tho
he
live
in
Heaven
.
His
body
was
burnt
;
and
his
bones
,
as
they
say
,
have
been
preserved
to
this
present
.
One
part
of
them
are
in
the
Kingdom
of
Pegu
,
and
the
other
in
Siam
.
They
attribute
a
wonderful
Virtue
to
these
bones
,
and
they
affirm
that
they
shine
with
a
Divine
splendor
.
Before
he
died
,
he
ordered
his
Picture
to
be
drawn
after
his
Death
,
for
fear
Men
might
by
little
and
little
suffer
his
Person
to
wear
out
of
their
remembrance
,
and
at
long
run
forget
him
for
good
and
all
.
He
would
have
the
same
honours
rendred
to
him
in
that
Image
which
were
due
to
his
Divinity
.
He
left
also
the
print
of
one
of
his
feet
in
three
different
places
,
in
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
,
the
Kingdom
of
Pegu
and
the
Isle
of
Ceilan
.
People
go
thither
in
Pilgrimage
from
all
parts
,
and
yearly
honour
these
prints
with
singular
Devotion
.
The
Siamese
with
great
reverence
preserve
the
hair
and
picture
of
their
God.
The
Siamese
pretend
also
that
they
have
part
of
Sommonokhodom's
hair
,
which
he
had
cut
off
after
he
became
God
:
The
other
part
was
by
Angels
carried
up
into
Heaven
.
It
is
their
custom
to
upbraid
us
that
we
have
not
respect
enough
for
holy
Images
,
for
Sacred
Books
,
and
for
the
Priests
.
The
Truth
is
,
no
People
can
have
greater
Veneration
for
those
things
than
they
have
.
By
a
precept
of
their
Law
they
are
commanded
to
honour
them
:
but
it
is
not
enough
for
them
to
respect
the
Priests
and
the
Divine
Scriptures
;
the
Vestments
of
the
one
,
and
the
Characters
of
the
other
wherein
their
Law
is
written
,
is
to
them
also
an
object
of
Religious
Worship
.
Nay
they
think
it
a
most
laudable
action
,
and
excellent
virtue
to
do
good
to
the
Talapoins
,
and
that
their
Cloaths
and
the
Beads
which
they
receive
from
them
have
the
power
to
cure
Diseases
.
They
imagine
also
that
in
their
Books
there
is
a
divine
virtue
,
and
that
if
one
understood
it
and
knew
how
to
use
the
words
of
them
,
he
might
work
great
wonders
.
And
therefore
of
the
three
ways
of
working
Miracles
;
the
first
is
to
understand
aright
how
to
make
use
of
the
word
of
God
;
the
second
,
to
be
instructed
in
the
Doctrine
of
the
Anchorites
;
and
the
third
is
the
assistance
of
Devils
.
This
last
,
however
,
they
condemn
,
but
they
mightily
approve
of
the
two
former
,
boasting
that
they
alone
know
these
admirable
secrets
.
For
the
proof
of
their
Religion
they
reckon
up
several
Fables
,
False
Oracles
whereby
the
Siamese
Authorise
their
Religion
.
which
pass
amongst
them
for
so
many
authentic
Miracles
.
And
these
are
some
of
the
chief
of
them
.
1.
In
the
Kingdom
of
Pegu
,
where
the
Relicks
of
Sommonokhodom
are
kept
,
his
bones
partly
changed
into
several
Metals
,
and
partly
in
their
natural
state
shines
with
an
extraordinary
brightness
.
2.
In
the
same
Kingdom
there
is
a
little
Isle
in
the
middle
of
a
River
,
wherein
there
is
a
Temple
of
their
God
,
this
little
Isle
,
let
the
waters
be
never
so
high
,
even
when
the
highest
places
are
overflowed
,
remains
dry
.
They
add
,
that
the
Presents
which
are
offered
to
God
by
casting
them
into
the
River
,
according
to
the
Custom
of
that
Countrey
,
run
along
with
the
Stream
,
until
arriving
at
the
Isle
,
they
stop
there
,
and
will
go
no
farther
.
3.
In
Storms
at
Sea
,
when
Seamen
are
in
danger
of
being
cast
away
,
they
throw
a
Ring
into
the
Sea
with
an
intention
to
offer
it
to
the
Temple
of
the
Isle
,
and
all
of
a
sudden
the
Sea
becomes
calm
,
and
the
Ship
is
out
of
danger
.
4.
Upon
the
Borders
of
the
Kingdom
of
Pegu
,
there
is
a
little
hill
,
where
they
have
a
Tradition
that
God
went
often
.
A
vast
multitude
of
People
go
thither
yearly
in
Pilgrimage
,
and
tho
the
top
of
it
be
very
narrow
,
yet
it
holds
all
that
come
upon
it
,
and
is
never
full
of
Pilgrims
.
5.
They
also
say
that
on
the
top
of
that
little
hill
,
there
is
a
great
Treasure
of
Gold
,
Silver
,
and
other
precious
things
,
which
these
Pilgrims
offer
to
God
,
when
they
come
there
.
They
tell
how
an
Army
of
Chinese
having
one
day
carried
away
that
Treasure
,
was
next
day
wholly
destroyed
,
and
the
Riches
carried
back
by
Angels
to
the
place
where
it
was
before
.
6.
Tho
the
top
of
the
little
hill
be
altogether
exposed
to
the
Weather
,
and
heat
of
the
Sun
,
yet
there
is
always
a
shade
upon
it
;
that
even
at
noon
,
guards
the
people
from
the
excessive
heats
which
they
would
suffer
there
without
that
.
7.
In
the
Town
of
Sokhotai
there
is
an
Idol
all
of
Gold
:
they
pretend
that
that
is
a
Mirculous
Statue
,
and
that
if
when
Rain
is
wanting
,
it
be
carried
into
the
Fields
,
as
usually
it
is
,
immediately
Rain
falls
in
great
abundance
.
8.
In
another
Town
which
is
called
Campeng
,
there
is
,
as
they
say
,
a
Lake
,
wherein
to
this
day
there
is
to
be
seen
a
living
Fish
,
which
hath
but
the
half
of
its
Body
,
and
the
manner
how
that
Prodigy
was
wrought
is
remarkable
.
Heretofore
a
Holy
Man
lived
in
that
Town
;
who
having
a
broiled
Fish
presented
before
him
,
he
ate
but
one
half
of
it
,
and
threw
the
other
into
the
Lake
desiring
that
it
might
live
.
His
wish
was
granted
him
,
in
consideration
of
his
great
merits
;
for
at
this
very
present
the
same
half
Fish
is
still
alive
in
the
Lake
.
It
would
be
too
tedious
here
to
relate
all
their
other
raveries
,
we
shall
only
take
notice
that
building
upon
an
infinite
number
of
Prodigies
of
this
Nature
,
in
disputing
with
us
,
they
challenge
us
to
show
some
Miracles
in
confirmation
of
the
Doctrine
we
Preach
.
They
brag
to
us
of
certain
Brass
and
Stone-statues
,
which
they
believe
were
heretofore
Men
,
and
by
a
divine
Virtue
rendered
inanimate
.
They
have
also
,
as
they
say
,
many
ancient
Works
,
made
by
the
hand
of
Angels
.
In
conclusion
all
the
Effects
which
we
attribute
to
Magic
,
they
take
to
be
so
many
amazing
wonders
,
and
they
are
proud
that
they
alone
have
the
art
to
do
them
.
There
are
certain
Talapoins
amongst
them
who
have
embraced
a
State
of
life
called
Vipisana
.
Nothing
can
be
more
Austere
,
they
observe
perpetual
silence
,
always
appli'd
to
the
Contemplation
of
Divine
things
,
and
they
have
the
Reputation
of
being
great
Saints
.
The
Siamese
believe
that
they
continually
converse
with
Angels
,
that
what
is
most
admirable
in
nature
,
is
always
present
to
their
mind
,
and
that
their
Eyes
pierce
even
into
the
most
hidden
Mines
,
where
they
clearly
see
,
Gold
,
Silver
,
all
Metals
,
and
all
sorts
of
Precious
Stones
.
As
to
manners
and
the
way
of
living
,
a
Christian
cannot
enjoyn
any
thing
more
perfect
than
what
their
Religion
prescribes
to
them
.
It
commands
them
to
do
good
,
and
not
only
prohibits
them
bad
actions
,
but
also
every
sinful
desire
,
thought
and
intention
.
And
that
makes
them
say
that
their
Law
is
impracticable
,
or
at
least
,
very
hard
to
be
kept
as
it
ought
to
be
,
and
,
indeed
they
think
that
they
shall
all
go
to
Hell.
The
Law
of
the
Siamese
contains
ten
very
severe
Precepts
.
Their
whole
Law
is
comprehended
in
ten
Commandments
as
ours
is
;
but
it
is
much
severer
,
for
besides
that
with
them
neither
necessity
nor
any
other
Circumstance
excuses
a
Man
that
sins
,
many
things
which
among
Christians
are
only
of
perfection
and
Council
,
pass
with
them
for
indispensable
Precepts
.
The
use
of
all
intoxicating
Liquors
are
forbidden
to
them
.
They
are
not
so
much
as
permitted
to
taste
Wine
whatsoever
need
they
may
be
in
,
or
whatsoever
occasion
may
press
them
,
and
they
are
extreamly
scandalized
when
they
see
Christian
Priests
drink
of
it
.
They
cannot
without
a
sin
kill
any
living
Creature
,
nay
it
is
a
Crime
to
go
a
Hunting
,
to
strike
a
Beast
,
and
to
do
it
hurt
any
manner
of
way
.
The
reason
they
give
for
that
is
that
Beasts
having
life
as
well
we
,
are
sensible
of
pain
as
well
as
we
,
and
since
we
are
not
willing
that
any
body
should
hurt
us
,
it
is
not
reasonable
that
we
should
hurt
them
.
Nay
they
accuse
us
of
ingratitude
,
because
we
put
to
death
innocent
Creatures
who
have
rendred
us
so
many
Services
.
For
that
reason
they
are
obliged
to
practise
Charity
not
only
towards
Men
,
but
towards
Beasts
also
,
and
to
assist
them
in
their
necessities
.
They
have
so
great
a
respect
to
their
Scriptures
,
that
they
dare
not
trust
them
in
our
hands
,
no
nor
explain
their
Law
to
us
,
lest
that
exposing
it
to
our
dirision
,
we
might
be
guilty
of
some
irreverence
,
and
the
sin
of
that
be
imputed
to
them
.
They
often
upbraid
us
with
the
way
we
carry
holy
Images
,
and
read
the
holy
Scriptures
,
as
being
not
respectful
enough
.
After
all
,
the
Talapoins
who
are
their
Priests
,
Monks
and
Doctors
are
looked
upon
as
the
true
followers
of
God.
They
have
little
Commerce
with
the
World
,
never
salute
a
Lay-man
no
not
the
King.
And
that
's
the
reason
why
it
offends
the
Siamese
to
see
the
European
Priests
use
familiarity
with
Seculars
.
The
Talapoins
go
every
Morning
a
begging
,
and
the
opinion
People
have
of
their
Virtue
makes
every
one
give
them
somewhat
.
And
indeed
the
most
essential
part
of
Morality
which
they
Preach
,
is
that
to
be
saved
,
men
must
erect
or
repair
Pagods
,
and
above
all
things
assist
the
Talapoins
.
The
Lay-men
have
eight
principal
Commandments
which
consist
,
1.
In
adoring
God
,
his
Word
,
and
those
who
imitate
his
Virtues
.
2.
Not
to
steal
.
3.
Not
to
drink
Wine
,
nor
any
Liquor
that
intoxicates
.
4.
Not
to
lye
nor
to
deceive
any
body
.
5.
Not
to
kill
Men
nor
Beasts
.
6.
Not
to
commit
Adultery
.
7.
To
fast
on
Holy-days
.
8.
Not
to
labour
on
those
days
.
These
are
the
Duties
which
the
Priests
explain
to
the
People
,
and
instruct
them
in
,
in
their
Sermons
.
The
Monasteries
of
the
Talapoins
are
so
many
Seminaries
where
Youth
are
bred
.
Thither
are
all
Children
of
Quality
sent
,
as
soon
as
they
are
capable
of
instruction
,
and
whilst
they
continue
there
,
they
are
made
to
lead
a
very
austere
life
.
They
are
called
Nén
;
and
have
their
particular
Rules
and
Precepts
,
which
consists
in
wearing
a
yellow
Garment
,
and
having
their
Head
and
Eye-brows
shaved
twice
a
Month
,
the
fourteenth
and
twenty
ninth
of
the
Moon
,
to
fast
those
two
days
,
and
also
three
other
Holy-days
,
which
happen
the
fifteenth
,
twenty
third
,
and
last
day
of
the
Moon
,
to
eat
only
twice
a
day
,
in
the
Morning
and
at
Noon
,
without
permission
to
take
a
bit
of
Food
more
till
next
day
,
to
have
no
Commerce
with
any
Woman
,
never
to
sing
a
Song
,
nor
to
hear
those
that
do
sing
,
not
to
play
upon
any
Instruments
,
to
avoid
public
Shows
and
Rejoycings
,
not
to
use
Perfumes
,
not
to
love
Money
,
which
they
are
not
so
much
as
to
touch
,
far
less
to
hoard
it
up
,
not
to
take
pleasure
in
the
taste
of
what
they
eat
,
and
to
divert
their
thought
from
that
;
which
is
the
reason
that
several
of
them
mingle
somewhat
with
what
is
given
them
,
to
render
it
less
agreable
;
In
fine
to
honour
their
Priests
,
to
give
them
the
hand
,
and
to
sit
always
below
them
.
The
Talapoins
lead
a
more
austere
life
;
for
besides
that
they
have
all
the
obligations
of
Lay-man
and
of
the
youth
whom
they
breed
,
they
have
over
and
above
more
than
sixscore
rules
proper
to
their
station
,
whereof
these
are
the
chief
.
To
go
twice
every
day
to
the
Temple
Morning
and
Evening
to
say
their
Prayers
,
to
be
wholy
covered
,
never
to
touch
Women
,
not
to
speak
to
them
hand
to
hand
,
nay
and
not
to
look
upon
them
when
they
meet
them
in
the
streets
,
to
walk
with
great
modesty
,
looking
downwards
and
not
turning
the
head
,
to
carry
always
a
Fan
and
to
cover
their
face
with
it
,
to
hinder
their
eyes
from
wandering
,
never
to
consent
to
any
ill
thought
,
not
to
dress
their
own
Victuals
,
but
to
take
such
food
as
is
given
them
,
to
live
on
Alms
which
they
beg
about
the
Town
,
but
not
to
enter
into
houses
,
neither
to
wait
at
doors
longer
than
an
Ox
is
a
drinking
,
to
teach
the
Law
to
their
Disciples
and
to
the
People
,
to
mortify
themselves
and
do
penance
a
whole
year
,
part
whereof
consists
in
staying
abroad
fifteen
days
in
the
Month
of
February
,
exposed
to
the
Dew
of
Heaven
in
the
middle
of
the
open
Fields
;
to
confess
their
Sins
one
to
another
,
to
fast
three
Months
in
the
year
,
July
,
August
,
and
September
,
to
eat
but
once
a
day
all
that
time
,
which
they
call
their
great
Fast
,
and
nevertheless
to
preach
every
day
,
to
say
over
a
kind
of
Chapelet
made
up
of
an
hundred
and
fourscore
Beads
,
and
divided
by
tens
,
not
to
salute
any
Layman
,
to
be
merciful
and
mild
towards
all
People
,
not
to
be
angry
,
and
never
to
strike
any
body
,
never
to
have
the
head
covered
especially
in
the
Temples
,
not
to
sit
but
upon
a
certain
Leathery
seat
which
they
carry
about
with
them
,
particularly
in
places
where
Women
sit
,
never
to
lye
abroad
out
of
the
Monastery
,
and
not
to
be
seen
out
of
it
alone
:
To
have
but
one
habit
,
not
to
play
at
any
Game
,
not
to
receive
the
money
that
is
given
them
,
but
by
the
hand
of
him
that
serves
them
for
a
Steward
,
and
to
employ
it
in
good
works
,
as
paying
the
Poors
debts
,
and
redeeming
Slaves
to
lodg
Pilgrims
,
and
to
do
them
all
the
good
they
can
:
to
be
sincere
and
true
,
and
when
they
must
affirm
or
deny
any
thing
,
to
say
only
it
is
so
or
it
is
not
so
.
In
fine
never
to
suffer
in
their
Mind
the
least
doubt
about
their
Religion
.
The
Talapoins
make
frequent
discourses
to
the
People
to
exhort
them
to
the
Practice
of
Virtue
,
and
particularly
of
Charity
towards
Men
and
Beasts
.
He
that
Preaches
,
sits
,
after
the
manner
of
the
Country
,
upon
a
little
Theatre
or
Stage
,
covered
with
Carpet
,
and
very
high
above
the
Auditory
.
When
the
People
are
gathered
together
,
he
begins
and
reads
a
sentence
of
Sommonockhodom
with
a
modest
and
grave
Countenance
;
looking
always
down
with
his
Eyes
,
and
using
no
gestures
,
then
he
unfolds
the
Fabulous
Mysteries
of
that
Book
,
and
draws
from
thence
some
Moral
doctrine
for
the
instruction
of
his
Auditory
,
making
use
of
Metaphors
,
Parables
,
and
above
all
of
comparisons
taken
from
natural
things
,
as
it
is
the
custom
of
the
Orientals
.
The
People
sit
hurkling
and
listen
with
much
reverence
and
attention
,
the
Men
being
on
the
one
side
,
and
the
Women
on
the
other
.
The
rest
of
the
Talapoins
are
at
the
Preachers
side
,
but
separated
from
the
People
,
and
sitting
on
a
half
pace
.
All
the
hearers
have
their
hands
joyned
,
and
as
soon
as
the
Preacher
hath
spoken
the
Text
,
they
cry
all
together
with
hands
lifted
up
to
heaven
,
and
bowing
down
the
head
,
The
word
of
God
,
most
pure
Truth
.
They
have
like
us
a
kind
of
Sunday
every
seventh
day
,
which
they
spend
in
Fasting
and
Prayer
,
besides
some
other
more
solemn
Holy
days
,
which
last
three
days
,
and
which
are
celebrated
sometimes
in
one
Pagod
,
and
sometimes
in
another
,
with
an
extraordinary
concourse
of
People
.
The
Women
are
the
most
solicitous
to
go
to
those
meetings
of
Piety
.
During
that
time
they
Preach
from
six
of
the
Clock
in
the
Morning
to
six
a
Clock
at
Night
,
fresh
Preachers
succeeding
one
another
,
and
Preaching
six
whole
hours
by
turns
.
These
long
discourses
are
not
tedious
to
the
Auditory
,
who
always
hearken
with
reverence
without
coughing
or
turning
the
head
.
And
thus
you
have
what
I
could
learn
of
the
Siamese
Religion
,
which
till
now
hath
been
so
unknown
in
Europe
.
But
if
one
do
but
in
the
least
examin
what
we
have
said
of
it
;
he
'l
find
so
many
things
that
have
some
resemblance
with
the
Christian
doctrin
,
that
it
may
be
easily
judged
the
Gospel
hath
been
heretofore
Preached
to
that
Nation
,
which
in
progress
of
time
hath
been
altered
and
corrupted
by
the
ignorance
of
their
Priests
.
I
can
say
nothing
in
particular
as
to
the
present
State
of
Christianity
in
Siam
.
It
is
strange
that
the
Gopsel
should
make
so
small
Progress
amongst
people
,
who
are
zealously
and
carefully
cultivated
,
who
daily
see
the
Majesty
of
our
Ceremonies
,
so
proper
for
giving
an
idea
of
our
Mysteries
,
who
besides
have
no
vice
that
may
make
them
dislike
our
Maxims
,
and
who
have
so
great
an
esteem
for
the
Talapoins
,
because
they
make
profession
of
an
austere
life
.
This
might
make
men
think
that
they
had
something
of
blockishness
and
rusticity
,
if
the
gentile
cariage
and
pleasant
Repartees
of
the
Ambassadors
that
were
in
France
,
m●●e
it
not
apparent
that
they
are
Witty
and
Polite
.
But
it
belongs
not
to
us
to
pry
into
the
secret
Judgments
of
God.
Let
us
only
make
fervent
Prayers
to
that
Father
of
mercies
,
that
he
would
illuminate
and
work
upon
a
Prince
who
is
already
half
a
Christian
,
in
the
favourable
dispositions
of
his
mind
and
heart
,
especially
since
our
great
Monarch
hath
now
made
him
wholy
French.
The
great
consequences
of
such
a
conquest
are
visible
enough
,
if
we
consider
that
the
King
of
Siam
hath
no
less
Authority
over
the
Princes
his
Neighbours
,
who
admire
him
for
his
Wisdom
and
Prudence
,
than
he
hath
over
his
own
Subjects
.
We
have
good
grounds
to
hope
the
best
,
and
the
rather
that
the
Lord
Constance
his
Minister
is
equally
able
and
pious
,
wanting
neither
good
intentions
to
forward
Designs
that
are
honourable
for
Religion
,
nor
interest
and
credit
to
make
them
successful
.
FINIS
.
THE
TABLE
,
The
First
Book
.
-
THis
Father
parted
from
Macao
,
December
.
5
1681
,
in
a
Dutch
Ship
,
and
arrived
in
Holland
in
October
1682.
2
-
The
King
orders
six
Jesuits
,
Mathematicians
,
to
be
sent
to
China
.
4
-
The
preparations
for
their
departure
.
5
-
They
are
admitted
into
the
Royal
Academy
of
Sciences
.
6
-
Divers
instructions
are
given
unto
them
for
the
improvement
of
Arts
and
Sciences
.
ibid.
-
The
various
Instruments
they
take
with
them
for
their
Observations
.
7
-
The
arrival
of
the
Chevalier
de
Chaumont
at
Brest
.
8
-
The
King
sends
the
Jesuits
Patents
of
Mathematicians
.
10
-
A
Frigat
is
joyned
to
the
first
Ship.
11
-
The
King
ordered
his
Ambassadors
at
Lisbonne
to
demand
Pass-ports
for
the
Jesuits
from
the
Kingdom
of
Portugal
.
12
-
The
Leter
of
Father
Le
Chaize
to
Father
Verbiest
at
Peguin
.
13
-
Monsieur
de
Vaudricourt
made
Captain
of
the
Ship.
17
-
The
Ambassador
goes
on
board
the
Oyseau
.
18
-
Departure
from
the
Road
of
Brest
.
ibid.
-
The
Gullet
is
a
very
strait
passage
from
the
Road
of
Brest
to
the
Sea
.
19
-
How
the
Church-men
and
Jesuits
spent
their
time
during
the
Voyage
.
20
-
Calms
under
the
Torrid
Zone
.
21
-
The
Devotion
of
the
whole
Ships
Company
towards
the
Holy
Virgin.
ibid.
-
In
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Madera
.
22
-
In
sight
of
the
Isle
of
Palmes
.
ibid.
-
The
Maps
of
the
South
part
of
the
Heavens
are
not
exact
.
23
-
Plenty
of
Fish
about
the
Equinoctial
Line
.
25
-
The
way
of
catching
Porposses
.
ibid.
-
The
blood
of
Porposses
is
hot
.
26
-
Porposses
devour
one
another
.
ibid.
-
A
description
of
the
Shark
.
27
-
Sucking-fish
called
by
the
Seamen
Pilot-fish
.
28
-
The
Bonitoe
pursues
the
Flying-fish
.
29
-
Gods
particular
Protection
of
all
that
were
in
the
Ship.
31
-
April
7.
passed
the
Equinoctial
Line
.
32
-
What
Trovadas
and
the
fire
of
S.
Helm
are
.
33
-
Several
Phenomenas
observed
during
the
Voyage
.
34
-
The
manner
how
Spouts
are
formed
.
ibid.
-
Which
are
dangerous
to
be
met
with
.
35
-
Spouts
of
another
kind
.
ibid.
-
Extraordinary
Rain-bows
to
be
seen
at
Sea
.
35
-
Phenomena
that
are
to
be
seen
in
the
water
of
the
Sea
.
36
-
Lights
that
come
out
of
the
Sea
in
the
night
time
.
ibid.
-
An
English
Ship
made
off
at
Sea
.
37
-
Marks
to
know
the
nearness
of
the
Cape
of
good
hope
.
39
-
Divers
Birds
to
be
seen
at
Sea
in
approaching
to
the
Cape
of
Good
Hope
.
ibid.
The
Second
Book
.
-
DAnger
of
being
forced
upon
a
Rock
as
the
Ship
was
coming
to
Anchor
.
44
-
Our
Ship
came
to
an
Anchor
amidst
four
Holland
Vessels
.
45
-
The
Dutch
send
to
know
from
whence
our
Ships
.
46
-
The
Ambassador
sent
to
complement
the
Governor
of
the
Cape
.
ibid.
-
The
Jesuits
visit
the
Governor
of
the
Cape
.
47
-
The
Climate
of
the
Cape
of
Good-hope
is
very
temperate
.
48
-
The
Jesuits
are
extreamly
well
received
by
the
Dutch
.
49
-
The
Civilities
of
Monsieur
Van
Rheed●n
.
50
-
The
Description
of
a
lovely
Garden
which
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
have
on
the
Cape
of
Good
hope
.
51
-
All
Dutch
Ships
are
ordered
to
touch
at
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
.
52
-
The
Ambassador
and
Commission
General
interchange
many
Civilities
.
53
-
We
began
to
make
our
Observations
.
ibid.
-
A
dubious
Observation
.
54
-
Several
Observations
concerning
the
Southern
Stars
.
55
-
An
Interview
betwixt
the
Ambassador
and
Commissary
General
.
57
-
The
Emersion
of
the
first
Satelles
of
Jupiter
observed
.
ib.
-
The
difference
of
Meridians
betwixt
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
and
Paris
.
58
-
Advantages
that
may
be
drawn
from
the
observations
made
at
the
Cape
.
59
-
The
Governour
sends
several
Presents
to
the
Jesuits
60
-
Curious
Fish
brought
from
Japan
.
ibid.
-
We
reimbarked
in
order
to
Sail.
61
-
What
care
was
taken
of
the
Catholics
at
the
Cape
.
ib.
-
The
Sentiments
of
the
Catholicks
on
the
Cape
upon
our
arrival
.
ib.
-
The
Jesuits
are
suspected
of
administring
the
Sacraments
.
62
-
The
Dutch
setling
on
the
Cape
.
63
-
The
different
Animals
that
are
to
be
found
on
the
Cape
.
64
-
A
prodigious
Elephant
.
65
-
A
property
of
the
Rhinoceros
.
ibid.
-
Several
sorts
of
Fish
at
the
Cape
.
66
-
Golden
Mines
on
the
Cape
.
67
-
A
Translation
of
a
Latin
relation
of
the
Places
about
the
Cape
.
ibid.
-
The
Manners
of
the
Inhabitants
of
the
Cape
68
-
Their
Arms.
69
-
Their
Food
.
ibid.
-
Their
blindness
as
to
matters
of
Religion
.
ibid.
-
Their
Opinion
as
to
their
own
way
of
living
,
and
that
of
Strangers
.
ibid.
-
The
Apparel
of
the
Men
and
Women
.
70
-
Their
Moral
Virtues
.
71
-
The
manner
how
they
punish
Crimes
.
ibid.
-
The
knowledges
they
have
of
the
Heavens
and
Natural
things
.
ibid.
-
They
are
so
accustomed
to
Liberty
,
that
they
cannot
live
under
the
least
constraint
.
ibid.
-
The
Hunters
live
in
the
Woods
,
and
the
Shepherds
in
Cottages
:
A
description
of
these
Cottages
.
72
-
The
Namaquas
lives
in
Villages
,
and
are
politer
than
the
rest
.
73
-
Their
Musick
and
Instruments
.
ibid.
-
Their
way
of
Dancing
.
ibid.
-
The
Strength
,
Courage
and
Manners
.
74
-
The
Ubiquas
are
given
to
Thieving
.
ibid.
-
The
different
Nations
discovered
by
the
Dutch
.
ibid.
-
The
Sea-cow
.
ibid
-
The
Governor
of
the
Cape
made
a
Progress
up
into
the
Country
.
75
-
The
danger
he
was
in
of
losing
his
life
.
ibid.
-
Their
Musick
,
Instruments
and
Dancing
.
76
-
Their
Apparel
.
77
-
The
Misfortunes
of
those
Idolatrous
People
,
and
the
small
hopes
there
is
of
converting
them
.
79
-
Our
departure
from
the
Cape
of
Good-Hope
.
80
-
Navigators
ought
to
be
always
on
their
Guard
about
the
thirty
sixth
Degree
South
Latitude
.
81
-
Necessary
Remarks
for
those
who
are
bound
to
the
Indies
from
the
Cape
.
82
-
Prayers
made
for
the
obtaining
of
fair
Weather
83
-
Sickness
amongst
the
Ships
Company
.
ibid.
-
The
Patience
and
Piety
of
the
Sea-men
.
84
-
God
grants
fair
Weather
at
the
Intercession
of
the
Blessed
Virgin.
85
-
A
Caution
not
to
be
neglected
in
that
course
.
ibid.
-
The
Trial
are
three
pretty
low
Islands
.
86
-
The
Wind
being
contrary
,
we
betook
our selves
to
Prayers
again
.
87
-
The
Sea-men
of
St.
Malo
show
a
particular
Devotion
.
ibid.
-
Gods
special
Protection
of
our
Ship.
88
-
The
Perplexity
we
were
in
before
we
came
to
the
Isle
of
Java
.
89
The
Third
Book
.
-
ARrival
at
the
Isle
of
Java
.
91
-
A
considerable
mistake
in
the
Hydrographical
and
Geographical
Charts
.
ibid.
-
Breezes
rise
on
Sumatra
at
certain
hours
of
the
day
.
94
-
The
danger
the
Ship
was
in
,
in
the
Streight
.
ib.
-
Extraordinary
Thunder
and
Lightning
at
Java
and
Sumatra
.
95
-
The
Javaners
came
on
Board
in
their
little
Boats.
ib.
-
The
Road
of
Bantam
.
97
-
A
Remedy
for
the
Land-Evil
.
98
-
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
is
sent
to
the
Governor
of
Bantam
.
ib.
-
He
found
the
Maligne
and
returned
on
Board
with
the
Lieutenant
of
the
Frigat
.
ib.
-
The
bad
reception
those
of
the
Maligne
met
before
our
Arrival
at
Bantam
.
99
-
Mutual
Presents
of
the
Governor
of
Bantam
and
the
Captain
of
the
Frigat
.
100
-
The
Governors
Suspition
of
the
French.
101
-
The
Javeners
are
mad
to
see
Sultan
Agoum
their
old
King
in
Prison
.
ibid.
-
The
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
is
sent
to
Bantam
.
102
-
We
weigh
from
the
Road
of
Bantam
,
and
stand
away
for
Batavia
.
103
-
Several
Revolutions
that
have
happened
in
the
Kingdom
of
Bantam
.
ibid.
-
The
King
of
Bantam
having
resigned
the
Crown
to
his
Son
,
attempts
to
resume
it
again
.
ibid.
-
The
young
Sultan
besieged
by
his
Father
,
begs
Assistance
from
the
Dutch
.
105
-
General
Spelman
sends
a
strong
Assistance
to
Sultan
Agui
besieged
.
ibid.
-
Sultan
Agui
guarded
by
the
Dutch
.
106
-
The
English
and
French
leave
the
Town
by
the
King
of
Bantams
Order
.
107
-
The
Civilities
of
the
General
of
Batavia
to
the
Ambassador
.
108
-
The
Jesuits
land
at
Batavia
to
make
Observations
.
109
-
The
good
Reception
they
had
from
the
Officers
of
the
Dutch
East-India
Company
.
ib.
-
A
Description
of
the
Garden
of
the
late
General
Spelman
.
110
-
The
French
Jesuits
go
to
see
Father
Dominic
Fucity
.
111
-
The
good
usage
that
the
Fathers
Missiononers
of
Tunquin
met
with
at
Batavia
.
ibid.
-
The
Character
of
Father
Fucity
and
his
Apostolic
Labours
in
several
Kingdoms
.
112
-
The
earnestness
of
the
Catholics
of
Batavia
to
receive
the
Sacraments
.
113
-
The
General
of
Batavia
receives
the
Jesuits
with
much
Civility
and
Goodness
.
115
-
The
Catholic
Religion
is
the
only
Religion
prohibited
at
Batavia
.
119
-
The
Description
of
Batavia
.
120
-
A
Dutch
Ship
that
ran
foul
of
us
.
132
-
The
Streight
of
Banka
difficult
to
be
passed
because
of
the
want
of
Water
.
131
-
The
Lord
Constance
receives
the
Jesuits
with
extraordinary
goodness
.
147
-
A
Description
of
the
Palace
where
the
Ambassador
lodged
at
Siam
.
148
-
The
Lord
Constance
causes
Appartments
to
be
built
for
lodging
the
Jesuits
at
Siam
.
ibid.
-
The
King
of
Siam
sends
a
stately
Balon
to
the
Ambassador
.
149
The
Fourth
Book
.
-
THe
Ambassadour
Embarks
in
the
Balon
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
151
-
A
description
of
the
Houses
built
on
the
Rivers
side
to
receive
him
.
152
-
How
the
King
of
Siam
receives
the
Ambassadors
of
Neighbouring
Princes
.
155
-
How
the
Ambassadors
of
Independant
Kings
are
received
at
Siam
.
157
-
The
King
of
Siam
orders
the
Lord
Constance
to
adjust
with
the
Ambassador
the
Ceremonies
of
his
Reception
.
158
-
The
several
Nations
at
Siam
come
and
complement
the
Ambassador
.
160
-
The
Lord
Constance
receives
the
Ambassador
at
the
River-side
.
163
-
The
Respect
shewn
to
the
Kings
Letter
.
164
-
The
Ambassador
is
carried
to
the
Palace
.
ibid.
-
A
Description
of
the
Palace
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
165
-
A
Description
of
the
Throne
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
167
-
The
Ambassador
enters
the
Hall
of
Audience
.
168
-
The
Harangue
of
the
French
Ambassador
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
169
-
In
what
manner
the
Ambassador
presented
the
Kings
Letter
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
171
-
The
Ambassador
presents
the
Abbot
of
Choisi
and
the
Gentlemen
of
his
Retinue
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
172
-
The
Ambassador
sees
the
white
Elephant
in
his
Apartment
.
ibid.
-
The
French
Kings
Letter
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
173
-
The
Ambassador
visits
the
Bishop
of
Metellopolis
.
174
-
The
King
of
Siam
sends
a
Present
to
the
Ambassador
.
175
-
The
Ambassador
ordered
Money
to
be
thrown
out
at
the
Windows
to
those
who
brought
him
the
Present
.
ib.
-
The
King
of
Siam
sends
his
Presents
to
the
Pagods
with
much
Pomp.
176
-
The
King
treats
the
Ambassador
in
his
Palace
magnificently
.
178
-
The
Ambassador
Visits
the
most
famous
Pagod
of
Siam
.
180
-
A
Pick
weighs
an
hundred
and
twenty
five
pounds
weight
.
181
-
A
description
of
one
of
the
fairest
Temples
of
Siam
.
ib.
-
Rejoycings
performed
at
Siam
for
the
Coronation
of
the
Kings
of
England
and
Portugal
.
185
-
The
King
of
Siam
goes
abroad
publickly
to
visit
a
Pagod
.
187
-
The
King's
Progress
from
Siam
to
Louvo
.
190
-
The
Funeral
of
a
great
Talapoin
.
191
-
The
description
of
a
Palace
of
the
King
of
Siam
,
built
after
the
European
manner
.
193
-
The
King
gives
the
Ambassador
an
Audience
at
Louvo
.
195
-
The
Elephants
have
five
Toes
in
each
Foot.
197
-
A
description
of
Louvo
.
198
-
The
King
of
Siam
gives
a
private
Audience
to
the
French
Jesuits
.
ibid.
-
The
Jesuits
Harangue
presented
to
the
King.
200
The
Fifth
Book
.
-
THe
Moors
make
a
Feast
to
celebrate
the
Memory
of
their
Prophet
.
215
-
The
way
of
taking
and
taming
Elephants
.
216
-
The
Harangue
of
the
Lord
Constance
to
the
King
of
Siam
.
216
-
The
King
of
Siam
answers
the
Lord
Constance
.
222
-
The
Motives
that
keep
the
King
of
Siam
firm
in
his
Religion
.
223
-
The
Lord
Constance
his
Reply
to
the
King
of
Siam's
Objections
about
changing
of
Religion
.
225
-
A
Character
of
the
King
of
Siam
.
227
-
We
began
to
make
observations
at
Louvo
.
230
-
Observation
about
the
variation
of
the
Needle
.
231
-
The
King
of
Siam
observes
with
the
Jesuits
an
Ecclipse
of
the
Moon
in
his
Palace
.
ibid.
-
The
King
of
Siam
invites
the
Ambassador
to
an
Elephant
hunting
.
232
-
A
description
of
that
hunting
.
233
-
The
King
of
Siam
demands
the
Chevalier
de
Fourbin
from
the
Ambassador
.
234
-
The
Jesuits
prepare
to
observe
in
the
Kings
Presence
at
Theepossonne
.
235
-
They
begin
the
Observation
of
the
Ecclipse
before
the
King.
236
-
The
King
puts
several
Questions
of
Astronomy
to
the
Jesuits
.
238
-
The
way
of
catching
Elephants
.
246
-
The
Ambassador
takes
his
Audience
of
Leave
of
his
Majesty
of
Siam
.
248
-
Departure
from
Siam
.
251
-
The
King
of
Siam's
Letter
is
carried
on
board
the
Oyseau
.
252
-
Departure
from
the
Bar
of
Siam
.
254
-
News
from
an
English
Ship
outward
bound
.
256
-
Putting
out
from
the
Bay
of
the
Cape
.
258
-
We
past
the
Line
at
the
first
Meridian
.
259
The
Sixth
Book
.
-
THe
Scituation
of
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
264
-
A
description
of
the
Kingdom
of
Siam
.
265
-
The
Habits
of
the
Siamese
.
266
-
A
Character
of
the
Siamese
and
their
Manners
.
267
-
The
property
of
Betle
and
Areca
.
268
-
The
property
of
Tea
.
269
-
The
manner
of
preparing
Tea
.
ibid.
-
What
Ginseng
is
and
its
virtues
.
ibid.
-
The
way
of
preparing
Ginseng
.
270
-
Some
particulars
concerning
certain
Birds
Nest
.
271
-
Various
customs
of
the
Siamese
.
ibid.
-
The
Curiosity
of
the
Siamese
to
know
things
future
.
272
-
The
Reverence
the
Siamese
have
for
their
King.
273
-
The
King
holds
Council
several
times
a
day
.
274
-
The
Kings
Daughter
hath
her
Court
and
Council
.
ibid.
-
The
Kingdom
of
Siam
descends
not
from
Father
to
Son.
ibid.
-
What
the
Siamese
believe
of
their
God.
275
-
The
knowledg
of
the
God
of
the
Siamese
.
276
-
Wherein
consists
his
happiness
.
ibid.
-
Men
may
become
Gods.
277
-
The
Siamese
acknowledge
a
permanent
state
of
Sanctity
.
ibid.
-
The
Siamese
believe
a
Heaven
and
a
Hell.
278
-
What
the
Siamese
believe
of
Hell.
ibid.
-
What
they
believe
of
Heaven
.
279
-
Vpon
a
Religious
account
the
Siamese
respect
those
who
are
any
ways
Eminent
by
the
advantages
of
body
,
mind
,
or
fortune
.
280
-
They
know
the
punishment
and
guilt
of
Sin.
281
-
They
believe
Angels
to
be
corporal
.
282
-
They
acknowlegdge
no
other
Devils
but
damned
Souls
.
283
-
They
Tell
strange
stories
of
certain
Anchorites
.
ibid.
-
Their
Belief
touching
the
Eternity
of
the
World.
284
-
The
Earth
in
the
opinion
of
the
Siamese
is
flat
and
square
.
ibid.
-
The
System
of
the
Siamese
.
286
-
Prodigies
which
the
Siamese
expect
before
the
birth
of
a
new
God.
287
-
Sommonokhodom
is
the
last
God
of
the
Siamese
.
289
-
Fables
which
the
Talapoins
relate
of
their
God.
ibid.
-
Thevathat
Sommonokhodoms
younger
Brother
makes
War
against
him
.
290
-
Sommonokhodom
assisted
by
the
Female
tutelary
Angel
of
the
Earth
triumphs
over
his
Enemies
.
291
-
The
Foppery
which
the
Talapoins
tell
of
Sommonokhodom
.
ibid.
-
Thevathat
killed
his
Brother
Sommonokhodom
when
they
were
Apes
.
292
-
Thevathat
makes
a
Schism
and
declares
himself
against
his
Brother
.
293
-
Thevathat
conspiring
to
be
God
is
with
his
Followers
deprived
of
many
knowledges
.
ibid.
-
The
Talapoins
perswade
the
Siamese
that
the
Christian
Religion
is
taken
out
of
the
Law
which
Sommonokhodom
taught
them
.
295
-
Thevathat
is
punished
in
Hell
for
having
persecuted
his
Brother
.
ibid.
-
The
Talapoins
take
the
Siamese
off
from
turning
Christians
,
by
perswading
them
that
Jesus
Christ
is
Thevathat
the
Brother
of
their
God.
296
-
Wherein
consists
the
Annihilation
of
the
Siamese
God
297
-
The
Siamese
with
great
reverence
preserve
the
hair
and
picture
of
their
God.
298
-
False
Oracles
whereby
the
Siamese
Authorise
their
Religion
.
299
-
The
Law
of
the
Siamese
contains
ten
very
severe
Precepts
.
302
FINIS
.
map
La
Baye
du
Cap
DE
BONNE
ESPERANCE
.
fort scene
Le
Fort
des
Hollandois
au
Cap
de
Bonne
Esperance
.
depiction of zebra
Zembras
ou
Anes
Sauvags
du
Cap.
map
Carte
des
Pays
en
des
P●uples
du
CAP
de
Bonne
Esperance
Nouvell●
〈…〉
.
portrait of "Hottentotts"
Hottentots
habitans
du
Cap
de
Bonne
Esperance
.
portrait of native people
Namaqua
Peuples
Nouvellem
decouverts
vers
le
Tropiq
.
du
Capricorne
.
depiction of rhinoceros
Rhinoceros
Cerf
du
Cap.
depiction of hippopotamus
●vache
Marine
.
depiction of snake
Cerafte
ou
Serpent
Corm●
depiction of chameleon
Cameleon
du
Cap
de
Bonne
Esperan●e
depiction of crocodile
Peti●
Lezard
〈◊〉
Cap
de
Bonne
Esperance
depiction of a grand lizard
GRAND
LEZARD
DU
CAP.
map
LA
RADE
DE
BANTAN
map of Jakarta (Batavia)
LE
PORT
DE
BATAVIA
street map of Jakarta (Batavia)
Batavia
.
Cabinet
de'
Feuillage
ou
les
Chinois
font
les
Festin
des
Morts
.
view of "Siam"
VEUE
DE
SIAM
depiction of boat
Balon
du
Roy
a
76.
Rameurs
.
depiction of boat
Ballon
du
Roy
á
〈◊〉
Rameurs
depiction of boat
Ballon
des
Gentils
.
Hommes
.
depiction of boat
Balon
de
Prince
Mr.
L
Ambassadeur
〈◊〉
A.
Constance
en
〈◊〉
Semblable
depiction of elephant
Elephan●
〈◊〉
avec
sa
Chaise
pour
la
Princesse
Reyne
.
depiction of elephant
Elephant
avec
sa
Chaise
pous
les
Etranger●
depiction of elephant
le
Roy
monte
sur
son
Elephant
.
depiction of palace
Palais
de
louvo
d'ou
le
Roy
de
Siam
Obserue
l'Eclypse
de
Surie
.
depiction of pagoda
PAGODE
DE
SIAM
.
depiction of a Mandarin
Mandarin
qui
parle
a
vn
de
ses
gens
.
depiction of edible plants and roots
Ginseng
Arequi
Betel
depiction of bald man
Talapoin
allant
-
par
la
Ville